EIA of 2x660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant

to be Constructed at Kalapara, Patuakhali

Volume-I
EIA of 2x660 MW Coal Based Thermal Power Plant to be
Constructed at Kalapara, Patuakhali

June, 2017
Dhaka

Submitted by
 Acknowledgement

The Consortium of Lahmeyer International (India) Private Limited (LII), Power-Energy

Management & Engineering Company (PEMEC) and Center for Environmental and
Geographic Information Services (CEGIS), is indebted to RURAL POWER COMPANY
LIMITED (RPCL) for awarding the consultancy services for “Site Selection, Detailed Feasibility
Study, Initial Environmental Examination (IEE), Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) and
Social Impact Assessment (SIA) of 2x660 MW coal fired thermal power plant at Patuakhali /
Barisal / Chittagong zone or any other suitable location in Bangladesh”.
The Consortium is thankful Major Gen. Moin Uddin, Chairman (RPCL), and Mr. Abdus Sabur,
Managing Director (RPCL) for their excellent direction and guidance. The Consortium greatly
acknowledges Mr. Md. Salim Bhuiyan, Executive Director (Engineering) and Project Director
of this project, for his valuable suggestion and cooperation. The Consortium is also grateful to
Mr. Md. Towfique Islam, Superintending Engineer (P&D) and Mr. Md. Ferdaws Rahman,
Executive Engineer for their leadership and cooperation.
The Consortium duly appreciates and acknowledges the concerns and perceptions of the
stakeholders of the project and the people who will be directly affected due to the project
implementation. The Consortium will put their best endeavor to consider the same with due
diligence and recommend required mitigation measures in their exercise to the practicable
extent.

i
 Table of Contents

Acknowledgement .......................................................................................................... i
Table of Contents .......................................................................................................... iii
List of Tables ................................................................................................................. xv
List of Figures .............................................................................................................. xix
List of Maps ................................................................................................................... xxi
List of Photographs ................................................................................................... xxii
Glossary ....................................................................................................................... xxiii
Abbreviations and Acronyms ................................................................................. xxv
Unit Conversion Table ............................................................................................ xxvii
Executive Summary ................................................................................................. xxix
1. Introduction ............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Project Background ............................................................................................. 1
1.2 Objective of the Study........................................................................................ 2
1.3 Need and Importance of the Project ................................................................ 2
1.4 Scope of the EIA Study ...................................................................................... 5
1.5 Limitations of the Study ..................................................................................... 5
1.6 EIA Study Team................................................................................................... 5
1.7 Reporting Structure ............................................................................................ 6
2. Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework .............................................. 9
2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Legislative Framework........................................................................................ 9
Overview of Approval Process ..................................................... 9
Administrative Letter ................................................................. 9
Key Legislative Approval .......................................................... 10
2.3 Relevant Bangladesh Legislation .................................................................... 10
Brief outlines of some relevant regulations ................................. 12
Administrative and land acquisition related relevant regulations .... 18
Relevant regulations related to Port and water ways .................... 18
Relevant regulations in relation to health, safety and labor ........... 21
2.4 Policy Guidance.................................................................................................. 23
National Environment Policy, 1992 ............................................ 23
National Environmental Management Action Plan 1995................. 24

iii
 Power System Master Plan, 2016............................................... 24
Power System Master Plan, 2010............................................... 25
The National Forest Policy (1994) .............................................. 25
The National Energy Policy (1995) ............................................. 25
The National Water Policy (1999) .............................................. 26
2.5 International Legal Obligation ......................................................................... 26
Rio Declaration ....................................................................... 26
Convention on Biological Diversity (1992) .................................. 27
Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, Ramsar (1971)
......................................................................................... 27
United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea, Montego Bay,
(1982) ......................................................................................... 27
UNESCO World Heritage Convention .......................................... 27
International Maritime Conventions, Protocols and Agreements ..... 28
2.6 Development Agency’s Health and Safety Guidelines ................................ 29
Social Safeguard policies of ADB ............................................... 29
Social safeguards policies of World Bank .................................... 30
Environmental and social guidelines for Equator principles ............ 31
2.7 Environmental Standards ................................................................................ 32
Emission and Ambient Pollution Standards.................................. 32
Ambient Air Quality Requirements ............................................. 33
Ambient Noise Level ................................................................ 35
Effluent Standard .................................................................... 35
3. Project Data Sheet............................................................................................... 39
3.1 Background and Justification .......................................................................... 39
3.2 Project Proponent .............................................................................................. 39
3.3 Project Loacation ............................................................................................... 39
3.4 Nature and Size of the Project ........................................................................ 42
3.5 Project components .......................................................................................... 42
3.6 Project Activities and Schedule ....................................................................... 42
3.7 Required Resource and utility demand .......................................................... 43
3.8 Source and Transportation of Construction Material................................... 43
3.9 Transportation of Equipment, Machinery, etc .............................................. 43
3.10 Requirement, Source and Composition of Fuel for Plant operation.......... 43

iv
 3.11 Transportation of Fuel for plant operation .................................................... 45
3.12 Ash Production ................................................................................................... 45
Ash utilization ......................................................................... 45
Ash Demand in Cement production ............................................ 46
3.13 Manpower and Tentative Organogram (RPCL) ............................................. 48
Rural Power Company Ltd. (RPCL) ............................................. 48
4. Process Description and Technology ............................................................ 53
4.1 Process of Site Development........................................................................... 53
4.2 Project Layout .................................................................................................... 53
4.3 Technology and Process Description of Individual Plant Components ..... 53
Power Generation .................................................................... 53
Turbine and its Auxiliaries ........................................................ 53
Steam Generator and Auxiliaries ............................................... 53
Fuel Oil Burning System/Firing system ....................................... 57
Soot Blowing System ............................................................... 57
Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP) .................................................. 57
Flue Gas Desulfurization System ............................................... 58
4.4 Project Overview ............................................................................................... 58
4.5 Land requirement and Acquisition .................................................................. 59
4.6 Stack height ....................................................................................................... 59
4.7 Ash handling ...................................................................................................... 59
4.8 Cooling system .................................................................................................. 59
4.9 Waste Management .......................................................................................... 60
4.10 Civil Structure and Urban Facilities ................................................................ 61
4.11 High Voltage Switchyard and power evacuation.......................................... 61
4.12 Central control and Monitoring ....................................................................... 61
4.13 Design and construction................................................................................... 61
4.14 Material Balance ................................................................................................ 62
4.15 Pollution Mitigation Measures .......................................................................... 62
Air pollution mitigation ............................................................. 62
Water pollution mitigation measures .......................................... 65
Noise Control .......................................................................... 66
Intent of Water Reuse .............................................................. 66
Afforestation and Greenbelt Development................................... 66

v
 4.16 Operation and Monitoring Program ................................................................ 67
5. Suitability Assessment ....................................................................................... 69
5.1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 69
5.2 The “No Action” Alternative ............................................................................. 69
5.3 Site Alternative .................................................................................................. 70
5.4 Fuel Alternatives ................................................................................................ 73
5.5 Alternative Technologies .................................................................................. 73
6. Description of Baseline Environment............................................................ 77
6.1 Introduction........................................................................................................ 77
6.2 Physical Environment ....................................................................................... 77
Land cover and Land use .......................................................... 77
Description of Satellite Image ................................................... 77
Process of Analysis .................................................................. 78
Physiography .......................................................................... 79
Topography ............................................................................ 79
Tectonic Setting ...................................................................... 79
Stratigraphy ........................................................................... 83
Seismicity .............................................................................. 87
6.3 Climate and Meteorology ................................................................................. 87
6.4 Ambient Air Quality ........................................................................................... 94
6.5 Acoustic Environment ....................................................................................... 97
6.6 Water Resources System ............................................................................... 100
Major Rivers ......................................................................... 100
Water Connectivity ................................................................ 100
Hydrological Setting............................................................... 102
Water Resources Issues and Functions ..................................... 107
Water Quality ....................................................................... 109
Water Use ............................................................................ 113
River morphology and dynamics .............................................. 113
Water Availability .................................................................. 117
6.7 Land Resources................................................................................................ 117
Agro-Ecological Zones (AEZs) ................................................. 118
Land Type ............................................................................ 118
Soil texture .......................................................................... 118

vi
 Soil Salinity .......................................................................... 121
Soil Quality ........................................................................... 124
Land Use .............................................................................. 125
6.8 Agricultural Resources .................................................................................... 127
Farming practices .................................................................. 127
Cropping pattern and cropping intensity ................................... 127
Area, yield and production ...................................................... 128
Agricultural input use ............................................................. 130
Irrigation .............................................................................. 131
Crop production constraints .................................................... 131
6.9 Livestock Resources........................................................................................ 132
Status of livestock and poultry ................................................ 132
Feed and fodder .................................................................... 132
Livestock and poultry diseases ................................................ 133
6.10 Fisheries Resources ........................................................................................ 133
Fish Habitat Characteristics .................................................... 133
Fish Habitat Assessment ........................................................ 134
Fish Production Assessment .................................................... 135
Fishermen Status and Effort ................................................... 135
Fishing Gears ........................................................................ 136
Collection of shrimp and prawn PL ........................................... 137
Fish Migration ....................................................................... 137
Fish spawning grounds and seasonality .................................... 138
Fish Diversity and Composition ............................................... 142
6.11 Ecological Resources....................................................................................... 143
Bio-ecological Region ............................................................. 144
Ecosystem and Biodiversity .................................................... 144
Status of Biodiversity ............................................................. 150
Existence of important habitat near the proposed site ................ 151
Existence of flyway in the study area ....................................... 152
6.12 Socio-economic Condition .............................................................................. 152
Area and Location ................................................................. 152
Demographic Profile............................................................... 153
Household size ...................................................................... 153

vii
 Age structure ........................................................................ 154
Education ............................................................................. 155
Public Health......................................................................... 155
Ownership and Utilization of Land ............................................ 156
Land Price ............................................................................ 157
Occupation and Livelihood ...................................................... 157
Standard of Living ............................................................. 159
Roads/ Railway/Waterway .................................................. 161
Poverty Situation ............................................................... 161
Safety nets ....................................................................... 161
Market/growth center......................................................... 162
Vulnerability to natural disaster ........................................... 162
Key Point Installation ......................................................... 162
Common Property Resources .............................................. 162
7. Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation ............................ 163
7.1 General.............................................................................................................. 163
7.2 Impact Assessment and Evaluation Methodology ..................................... 163
Impact Magnitude ................................................................. 163
Sensitivity of Receptor ........................................................... 164
Assigning Significance ............................................................ 165
7.3 Summary of Assessed Impacts..................................................................... 165
7.4 Environmental Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage ........................... 179
Water Resources ................................................................... 179
Impacts on Ecosystem ........................................................... 179
Impact on fisheries ................................................................ 180
Land Resources ..................................................................... 180
Agriculture Resources ............................................................ 181
Impacts on Socio-Economic issues........................................... 181
7.5 Environmental Impacts during construction phase ................................... 182
Impact on Ambient Air ........................................................... 182
Impact on Ambient Noise ....................................................... 182
Impact on Water Resources .................................................... 183
Impacts on Fisheries .............................................................. 184
Land Resources ..................................................................... 184

viii
 Agriculture Resources ............................................................ 184
Livestock Resources............................................................... 185
Impacts on Ecosystem ........................................................... 185
Impacts on Socio-Economic issues........................................... 185
Non-Hazardous Waste Generation ........................................... 185
7.6 Environmental Impacts during operation phase ........................................ 187
Impact on Air Quality ............................................................. 187
Air Quality Modelling .............................................................. 198
Cumulative Impacts on Air Quality ........................................... 205
GHG Emission ....................................................................... 208
Abatement Measures ............................................................. 208
Impact on Ambient Noise ....................................................... 209
Impact on Water Resources .................................................... 213
Impacts on Fisheries .............................................................. 214
Land Resources ..................................................................... 214
Agriculture Resources ............................................................ 215
Livestock Resources............................................................... 215
Impacts on Ecosystem ........................................................... 215
Impacts on Socio-Economic issues........................................... 216
Impact of Non Hazardous waste .............................................. 216
Impact of the Hazardous waste ............................................... 217
8. Mitigation of Impacts ....................................................................................... 219
8.1 Preamble ........................................................................................................... 219
8.2 Change in the project layout ......................................................................... 219
8.3 Engineering design .......................................................................................... 219
Alternative to use of Hydrazine in Feed Water ........................... 219
8.4 Mitigation measures for major impacts ....................................................... 219
Pre-Construction Stage .......................................................... 219
Construction Stage ................................................................ 221
Operation Stage .................................................................... 223
Coal Transportation ............................................................... 226
9. Hazard and Risk Assessment ......................................................................... 227
9.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 227
9.2 Hazard assessment process .......................................................................... 227

ix
 9.3 Potential Hazard and Risk during different stages .................................... 227
9.4 Potential Hazard and Risk during Operation ............................................... 229
9.5 Hazardous Chemicals ..................................................................................... 232
9.6 Storage Scenario developments ................................................................... 232
9.7 Frequency analysis .......................................................................................... 232
9.8 Consequence Analysis .................................................................................... 232
9.9 Consequence Modeling Tools ........................................................................ 233
Assumption and considering factors ......................................... 233
Results of HSD Tank failure .................................................... 235
Damage Criteria .................................................................... 236
9.10 Hazard Consequence &Frequency Scales.................................................... 237
9.11 Developing Risk Matrix ................................................................................... 239
9.12 Risk Estimation, Evaluation and Management Plan .................................. 240
9.13 Occupational Health and Safety Plan ........................................................... 245
OHS Policies in Bangladesh ..................................................... 245
Who is Accountable? .............................................................. 246
OHS Training ........................................................................ 246
Training Procedure ................................................................ 246
Frequency of training ............................................................. 247
9.14 Emergency Response Plan ............................................................................. 247
The Incident Response Team (IRT) .......................................... 251
The Emergency Response Group (ERG) .................................... 251
The Incident Management Team (IMT) ..................................... 251
Safety Training ..................................................................... 252
Documenting and Reporting.................................................... 252
Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Team .................. 252
10. Environmental Management Plan ................................................................ 253
10.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 253
10.2 Objectives of EMP ............................................................................................ 253
10.3 Various Categories of Mitigation Measures ................................................. 253
10.4 Development of Environmental and Social Management System .......... 254
10.5 Inclusion of EMP in Contract Documents .................................................... 254
10.6 Environmental Code of Practices .................................................................. 254
10.7 Environmental Management Plans during Pre-Construction.................... 254

x
 Land and resettlement action plan ........................................... 254
Stakeholder engagement plan ................................................. 255
Site Development Plan ........................................................... 256
Water Resources Management Plan ......................................... 256
Drinking Water Supply and Sanitation Plan ............................... 256
Soil and Agriculture Management Plan ..................................... 256
Site Preparation Plan ............................................................. 256
Fisheries Resources Management Plan ..................................... 256
Kitchen Waste Disposal Plan ................................................... 257
Labour recruitment plan ..................................................... 257
Employment generation plan ............................................... 257
Grievance Redress Plan ...................................................... 257
10.8 Environmental Management Plans during Construction ........................... 257
Air quality management plan .................................................. 257
Acoustic management plan ..................................................... 258
Construction waste management plan ...................................... 258
Kitchen Waste Management Plan ............................................. 258
Good Handling and Operation of Construction Equipment ........... 258
Fuel and Hazardous Substances Management Plan .................... 258
Communication Plan .............................................................. 259
Labour recruitment plan ......................................................... 260
Soil and Agriculture Resources Management Plan ...................... 260
Fisheries Resources Management Plan.................................. 260
Ecosystem management plan .............................................. 260
Green belt development program ........................................ 261
Community Liaison ............................................................ 261
Occupational health and safety ............................................ 261
Labour recruitment plan ..................................................... 261
10.9 EMP during operation phase .......................................................................... 261
Air pollution management plan ................................................ 262
Dust suppression system (DSS) .............................................. 262
Acoustic management plan ..................................................... 263
Sewerage Treatment Plan ....................................................... 263
Waste Water Management Plan ............................................... 263

xi
 Hazardous Sludge from Water Treatment Plant ......................... 263
Kitchen Waste Management Plan ............................................. 264
Solid Waste Management ....................................................... 264
Coal yard management .......................................................... 264
House Keeping .................................................................. 265
Occupational Health Safety and Environment ........................ 265
Community exposure to diseases......................................... 265
Grievance Redress Mechanism ............................................ 265
Soil and Agriculture Management Plan.................................. 266
Fisheries Resources Management Plan.................................. 266
Coal transportation and handling plan .................................. 267
Ash management plan........................................................ 268
Rural Electrification Plan ..................................................... 268
10.10Mitigation Plan ................................................................................................. 268
10.11Administrative Setup and Organogram ....................................................... 287
Project Implementation Unit (PIU) ....................................... 287
Human Resources Plan for EHS Cell ..................................... 289
Responsibility Matrix .......................................................... 291
10.12Record keeping and reporting ....................................................................... 296
10.13Coal Washery ................................................................................................... 296
10.14CDM Intent ....................................................................................................... 297
10.15Budget for EMP ................................................................................................ 297
11. Environmental Monitoring Plan .................................................................... 299
11.1 Monitoring Plan ................................................................................................ 299
Compliance Monitoring ........................................................... 299
Impacts Monitoring during Construction ................................... 299
Independent/External Monitoring ............................................ 299
11.2 Implementation of Environmental Monitoring Plan ................................... 310
Responsible Agency ............................................................... 310
11.3 Action during Emergent Operation ............................................................... 310
11.4 Performance Indicators .................................................................................. 310
11.5 Reporting and Feedback Mechanism............................................................ 311
12. Project Work Plan Schedule ........................................................................... 313
13. Benefit-Cost Analysis ....................................................................................... 315

xii
 13.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 315
13.2 Financial analysis ............................................................................................ 315
13.3 Environmental and social cost – benefit assessment ............................... 316
13.4 Assessment of the externalities .................................................................... 316
13.5 Categorize for valuation of the potentially affected resources ................ 317
13.6 Measures to control pollution and enhance the benefits .......................... 318
13.7 Cost of the environmental measures ........................................................... 318
13.8 Opportunity cost .............................................................................................. 319
13.9 Benefit of the projects .................................................................................... 319
National energy security ......................................................... 319
Socio-economic benefits ......................................................... 320
Environmental benefits .......................................................... 321
13.10Measures under corporate social and environmental responsibility
(CSER) ......................................................................................................................... 321
13.11Greenbelt Development ................................................................................. 322
14. Public Consultation and Disclosure ............................................................. 325
14.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 325
14.2 Approach ........................................................................................................... 325
14.3 Methodology ..................................................................................................... 325
Identification of stakeholders .................................................. 325
Primary stakeholders ............................................................. 325
Secondary stakeholders ......................................................... 326
14.4 Venue, date and time of consultation .......................................................... 326
Enlisting and Invitation .......................................................... 326
Consultation Instrument ......................................................... 326
Consultation Process .............................................................. 326
14.5 Objectives of the Consultation ...................................................................... 327
14.6 Locations of Stakeholder Consultation Meetings ....................................... 327
14.7 People’s perceptions on Project problems and suggested measures ..... 327
14.8 Feedbacks on consultations ........................................................................... 328
14.9 Summary of Consultation Output ................................................................. 330
14.10Disclosure of the EIA study ........................................................................... 331
Approaches of the Public Disclosure Meeting ......................... 331
Discussion of the meeting ................................................... 336

xiii
 Concluding Remarks .......................................................... 336
14.11Grievance Redress .......................................................................................... 337
Guideline to Redress Grievances .......................................... 337
Composition of Local GRC ................................................... 337
Grievance Resolution Process .............................................. 337
14.12Participant List ................................................................................................. 338
15. Conclusion and Recommendation ................................................................ 347
References ................................................................................................................... 351

xiv
 List of Tables

Table 1.1: Team composition for the EIA Study .................................................. 5

Table 2.1: Required Permission for Project under Bangladesh Legislation ............. 10
Table 2.2: Sector wise relevant Bangladesh Legislations/ Policies ........................ 11
Table 2.3: Standards for sound level at day and night ....................................... 13
Table 2.4: Relevant Conventions/Protocols agreed by GoB ................................. 29
Table 2.5: Gaseous discharge quality standard for industrial units (ECR, 1997 and
Draft ECR 2017) .......................................................................................... 32
Table 2.6: Emission standard guideline for coal fired boiler (IFC 2008) ................ 33
Table 2.7: Air quality Standard (ECR 2005) ..................................................... 33
Table 2.8: Ambient air quality standard........................................................... 34
Table 2.9: Noise level standard (ECR, 2006) .................................................... 35
Table 2.10: Noise level guideline (IFC, 2008) ................................................... 35
Table 2.11: Bangladesh Standards for Industrial Project Effluent (ECR, 1997) ...... 35
Table 2.12: Surface water quality Standard (Draft ECR 2017) ............................ 36
Table 2.13: Bangladesh Standards for Sewage Discharge (ECR, 1997) ................ 37
Table 2.14: Effluent guideline (IFC, 2008) ....................................................... 37
Table 2.15: Standard after treated sanitary sewage discharge (IFC, 2008) ........... 37
Table 3.1: Chemical composition of the imported coal ....................................... 44
Table 3.2: Coal Requirement for Plant ............................................................. 44
Table 3.3: Diesel oil requirement ................................................................... 44
Table 3.4: Present and forecasted cement production and ash demand ................ 46
Table 4.1: Comparison between the super and ultra super critical power plant ...... 60
Table 4.2: Material Balance of the power plant project ...................................... 62
Table 5.1: Load center demand for electricity by region ..................................... 70
Table 5.2: Selected indicators and criteria for alternative site analysis ................. 72
Table 5.3: Comparative statement of fuel use for power generation .................... 73
Table 5.4: Comparisons among the Key Performance of different boilers .............. 74
Table 5.5: Comparative Analysis of Alternative Cooling System .......................... 75
Table 6.1a: Details of satellite images used for land use mapping ....................... 77
Table 6.1b: Spectral bands and wavelengths ................................................... 78
Table 6.2a: Stratigraphic units of the Cenozoic and Quaternary sediments ........... 83
Table 6.2b: Pattern of sediment deposition within Bengal deltaic environments ..... 84
Table 6.3: List of Major Earthquakes in Last 450 Years ...................................... 87
Table 6.4: Ambient air at different locations around the project site .................... 95

xv
Table 6.5: Noise Level Standard..................................................................... 97
Table 6.6: Noise level at different locations around the project area .................... 99
Table 6.7: Ground Water Tables (GWT) shown at ten-year intervals .................. 104
Table 6.8a: Result of the Water quality in the study area (In-situ) .................... 111
Table 6.8b: Result from the Water quality in the study area ............................. 111
Table 6.8c: Result of the Water quality (Lab test) in the study area................... 112
Table 6.9: Summary of erosion accretion ...................................................... 116
Table 6.10: Tidal range of the Rabnabad Channel ........................................... 117
Table 6.11: Information of area coverage by AEZ ........................................... 118
Table 6.12: Detailed land type of project and study area ................................. 118
Table 6.13: Information on soil texture of the project and the Study area .......... 118
Table 6.14: Historical Information on soil salinity............................................ 121
Table 6.15: Information on soil salinity ......................................................... 121
Table 6.16: Information on soil quality .......................................................... 124
Table 6.17: Information on land use of the project and study area .................... 125
Table 6.18: Cropping pattern of both the Project and the study area ................. 128
Table 6.19: Crops area, yield and production ................................................. 129
Table 6.20: Seed and labor used in the study area and project area .................. 130
Table 6.21: Fertilizer and pesticides application in the study area ..................... 130
Table 6.22: Irrigated area by crop in both project and study area ..................... 131
Table 6.23: Present livestock and poultry in both project and study area ........... 132
Table 6.24: Significant fish habitat in the study area ....................................... 133
Table 6.25: Analysis of fish habitat in the study area ...................................... 134
Table 6.26: Fish productions from different habitats........................................ 135
Table 6.27: Indicative fish species diversity by habitats with IUCN status........... 143
Table 6.28: Floral species composition of the proposed site.............................. 146
Table 6.29: Existing trees of the project area. ................................................ 146
Table 6.30: Dominent benthos and planktons in dry season ............................. 149
Table 6.31: Dominent benthos and planktons in wet season............................. 149
Table 6.32: Indicative tree species in the settlement/homestead ...................... 150
Table 6.33: Unions and upazilas in the study area .......................................... 152
Table 6.34a: Demographic data of the study area........................................... 153
Table 6.34b: Demographic scenario of Project area......................................... 153
Table 6.35: Land tenure arrangement in the study area .................................. 157
Table 6.36: Distribution of income and expenditure ........................................ 161
Table 6.37: Households served by different social safety nets programs ............ 161

xvi
Table 7.1: Parameters for Determining Magnitude ......................................... 164
Table 7.2: Criteria for Determining Sensitivity ............................................... 164
Table 7.3: Significance of Impact Criteria ...................................................... 165
Table 7.4: Potential impacts and their significance .......................................... 166
Table 7.5: Amount of land to be acquired for Power plant ................................ 181
Table 7.6 Number of project affected Household............................................. 181
Table 7.7: Noise produced by construction equipment .................................... 182
Table 7.8: Estimation of Kitchen Waste during Land Development Period ........... 186
Table 7.9: CALPUFF Study Area Coordinates (UTM Zone: N 46) ........................ 190
Table 7.10: Emission Inventories or the Proposed Project ................................ 191
Table 7.11: Major Point Source Emissions in the Project Area ........................... 192
Table 7.12: Vehicle information (AADT) ........................................................ 192
Table 7.13: Major Line-area Sources in the Project Area (Highway Traffic) ......... 193
Table 7.14: Major Point Source Emissions in the Project Area ........................... 193
Table 7.15: Details of Sensitive Receptors ..................................................... 195
Table 7.16: Air Quality Modeling Data - SO2................................................... 199
Table 7.17: Air Quality Modeling Data –PM2.5 ................................................. 199
Table 7.18: Air Quality Modeling Data –PM10 .................................................. 200
Table 7.19: Air Quality Modeling Data – NOX .................................................. 200
Table 7.20: Major Point Source Emissions in the Project Area ........................... 205
Table 7.21: Maximum GLC of SO2, PM10 and PM2.5 for cumulative case .............. 208
Table 7.22: Emissions from Various Power Generation Technologies .................. 208
Table 7.23: GHG emissions in baseline and repowering conditions .................... 209
Table 7.24: Resultant noise assessment ........................................................ 213
Table 7.25: Flood frequency analysis ............................................................ 214
Table 7.26: Effluent Sources and discharge pathway ....................................... 216
Table 7.27: Estimation of Kitchen Waste ....................................................... 216
Table 9.1: Potential hazard and risk during construction, and erection ............... 228
Table 9.2: Potential hazard and risk Operation ............................................... 229
Table 9.3: Name of the hazardous chemicals ................................................. 232
Table 9.4: Incident considered for consequence analysis ................................. 232
Table 9.5: Damage due to incident radiation intensity .................................... 237
Table 9.6: Heat radiation and escape time ..................................................... 237
Table 9.7: Tolerable intensities for various objects .......................................... 237
Table 9.8: Hazard Consequence Scale........................................................... 237
Table 9.9: Criteria for Determining Frequency of the Potential Hazard ............... 239

xvii
Table 9.10: Risk Matrix of Potential Hazards/Impacts ...................................... 239
Table 9.11: Risk Evaluation for the proposed coal based power plant ................ 240
Table 9.12: Draft OHSE Training Plan ........................................................... 247
Table 9.13: Emergency Response Escalation Protocol ...................................... 249
Table 9.14: Training schedule that should be adopted for safety ....................... 252
Table 10.1: Communication Plan Adopted for the Project ................................. 259
Table 10.2: Mitigation Plan .......................................................................... 269
Table 10.3: Proposed positions for the Power Plant by EIA Consultant ............... 290
Table 10.4: Qualification and Responsibilities of the PIU Staffs ......................... 291
Table 10.5: Job descriptions and responsibility with qualifications ..................... 293
Table 10.6: Estimated cost of EMP................................................................ 297
Table 11.1: Environmental Compliance Monitoring up to construction stage ....... 300
Table 11.2: Environmental Compliance Monitoring Plan during Operation ........... 302
Table 11.3: Impact Monitoring Plan .............................................................. 306
Table 13.1: Summary of the tariff ................................................................ 316
Table 13.2: Impacts pathways of the electricity generation .............................. 317
Table 14.1: Different locations of consultation meetings ................................. 327
Table 14.2: Perceived outcomes of the Project ............................................... 328
Table 14.3: Impacts of land acquisition as perceived by the stakeholders........... 329
Table 14.4: Issues and concerns regarding compensation ................................ 329
Table 14.5: Summary findings from the consultation meeting/discussion ........... 330
Table 14.6: Participants list of the public consultation meetings and FGDs.......... 338
Table 14.7: Participants list of the public disclosure meeting ............................ 340

xviii
 List of Figures

Figure 1.1: Estimated Composite Daily Load Curve in the Summer in Bangladesh
(PSMP, 2016) ................................................................................................ 2
Figure 1.2: Daily load curve 2015-2041 (PSMP 2016) ......................................... 3
Figure 1.3: Annual Power Generation Trend from Fuel Sources (PSMP 2016) .......... 4
Figure 1.4: Power Generation Trend Coal Based Power Plant (PSMP 2016) ............. 4
Figure 1.5: Souces of coal for running the Power Plants (PSMP 2016) .................... 4
Figure 2.1: Process of Environmental Clearance Certificate obtaining ................... 10
Figure 3.1: Organogram of RPCL .................................................................... 51
Figure 4.1: Project Layout Plan ...................................................................... 55
Figure 4.2: Process flow diagram of the coal based thermal power plant .............. 57
Figure 4.3: Schematic Water Management Diagram .......................................... 60
Figure 5.1: Daily Load Curve 2015-2016 (PSMP 2016) ...................................... 69
Figure 6.1: Monthly maximum, minimum and average temperatures (1983-2013) 90
Figure 6.2: Trend of annual maximum and minimum temperatures (1983-2013) .. 90
Figure 6.3: Monthly maximum, minimum and average humidity (1983-2013)....... 91
Figure 6.4: Monthly maximum and minimum of average rainfall (1983-2013)....... 92
Figure 6.5: Trend of annual rainfall (1983-2013) .............................................. 92
Figure 6.6: Monthly maximum, minimum and average sunshine hour (1983-2013) 93
Figure 6.7: (a) Wind Rose and (b) Monthly prevailing wind for Kuakata ............... 94
Figure 6.8: Annual wind speed (1983-2013) .................................................... 94
Figure 6.9: Surface water level of Andarmanck River at Khepupara ................... 103
Figure 6.10: Average monthly variations of GWT ............................................ 103
Figure 6.11: Variation of GWT at PAT002 in March (1977-2013) ....................... 104
Figure 6.12: Variation of GWT at PAT002 in September (1977-2013) ................ 104
Figure 6.13: Hydro geological Cross Section from North to South across Bangladesh .
...................................................................................................... 105
Figure 6.14: Lithological Cross-section of the Coastal Aquifer ........................... 105
Figure 6.15: Erosion-accretion during 1973 to 2008 ........................................ 114
Figure 6.16: Erosion-accretion during 2008 to 2015 ........................................ 115
Figure 6.17: Erosion-accretion during 1973 to 2015 ........................................ 116
Figure 6.18: Percentage of fish habitat area in the study area .......................... 135
Figure 6.19: Life cycle of Hilsa fish ............................................................... 138
Figure 6.20: The household sizes of the study area ......................................... 154
Figure 6.21: Age structure of the studied population ....................................... 154

xix
Figure 6.22: Literacy rate of the study area ................................................... 155
Figure 6.23: Status of receiving treatment facilities by household ..................... 156
Figure 6.24: Households by land holdings...................................................... 157
Figure 6.25: Employment Status .................................................................. 158
Figure 6.26: Field of Activity (%) ................................................................. 158
Figure 6.27: Household structure of the study area......................................... 159
Figure 6.28: Percentage of sanitation facilities ............................................... 160
Figure 6.29: Sources of drinking water in the study area ................................. 160
Figure 7.1: Sound pressure level at different distance from the source .............. 183
Figure 7.2: Air despersion modelling boundary in 3D....................................... 191
Figure 7.3: Wind-rose diagram of last 3 years ................................................ 194
Figure 7.4: Frequency distribution of wind over the Project area ....................... 194
Figure 7.5: Distribution of SO2 both for project and baseline case..................... 201
Figure 7.6: Distribution of PM2.5 both for project and baseline case .................. 202
Figure 7.7: Distribution of PM10 both for project and baseline case ................... 203
Figure 7.8: Distribution of NOX both for project and baseline case ..................... 204
Figure 7.9: Cumulative Concentration of SO2, PM2.5, PM10 and NOx ................... 207
Figure 7.10: CO2 emission from coal based power plants ................................. 209
Figure 7.11a: Sources and Receiptors around the Power Plant .......................... 210
Figure 7.11b: Sensetive receiptors around the Power Plant Projects .................. 211
Figure 7.12: Propagation of noise from the sources (Day time) ......................... 212
Figure 7.13: Propagation of noise from the sources (Night Time) ...................... 212
Figure 9.1: Threat zone assessment ............................................................. 235
Figure 10.1a: 2D Layout of the resettlement village ........................................ 255
Figure 10.1b: 3D Layout of the resettlement village ........................................ 255
Figure 10.2: Proposed RPCL Organogram for PIU............................................ 287
Figure 10.3: EIA Study proposal for PIU ........................................................ 288
Figure 10.4: Organogram of the proposed Power Plant proposed by the consultant ...
...................................................................................................... 290
Figure 13.1: A typical greenbelt around the proposed Thermal Power Plant (TPP) 323

xx
 List of Maps

Map 3.1: Accessibility map of the project site................................................... 40

Map 3.2: Project Location and Distance Map of the proposed project ................... 41
Map 5.1: Potential sites for the proposed power project..................................... 72
Map 6.1: Physiographic Map showing the Kalapara project area .......................... 80
Map 6.2: Land Elevation of the Project area from DEM analysis .......................... 81
Map 6.3: Tectonic map of Bangladesh showing the Kalapara project area ............ 82
Map 6.4a: Earthquake zoning map of Bangladesh ............................................. 85
Map 6.4b: Earthquake location map of Bangladesh and surrounding area............. 86
Map 6.5: Climatic Sub-regions of Bangladesh................................................... 89
Map 6.6: Air sampling location map ................................................................ 96
Map 6.7: Noise sampling location map ............................................................ 98
Map 6.8: River system of the study area ....................................................... 101
Map 6.9: Potential groundwater development zones........................................ 106
Map 6.10: Baseline water quality monitoring location ...................................... 110
Map 6.11: Agro-ecological zones of the Project and the Study area ................... 119
Map 6.12: Land Type of the Project and the Study area ................................... 120
Map 6.13: Soil Texture of the Project and the Study area ................................ 122
Map 6.14: Soil salinity of the Project and the Study area ................................. 123
Map 6.15: Land use map of the Project and the Study area ............................. 126
Map 6.16: Hilsa Spawning Ground ................................................................ 139
Map 6.17: Jatka Abundance ........................................................................ 140
Map 6.18: Hilsa Sanctuary at Andharmanik River ........................................... 141
Map 6.19: Bio-ecological Zone of the study area ............................................ 145
Map 6.20: Habitat map of the study area ...................................................... 148

xxi
 List of Photographs

Photo 6.1: Sampling of Air quality around project site ....................................... 95

Photo 6.2: Monitoring of Noise level around project site .................................... 95
Photo 6.3: Rabnabad Channel at Char Nishanbaria ......................................... 102
Photo 6.4: Andharmanik River at Lalua Kheya Ghat ........................................ 102
Photo 6.5: Tiakhali River at Dhankhali Bridge................................................. 102
Photo 6.6: Main Drainage Channel of Polder 54 A& B at Londa Village ............... 102
Photo 6.7: One vent Pujakhola Regulator at Pujakhola village, Amtali Union ....... 107
Photo 6.8: 700 meter Erosion at Debur in Rabnabad Channel, Champapur Union 107
Photo 6.9: PujakholaKhal at Paschim ............................................................ 108
Photo 6.10: Pujakhola Khal at Sonauta ......................................................... 108
Photo 6.11: Navigation at Londa Kheya Ghat ................................................. 109
Photo 6.12: Navigation point at Debpur ........................................................ 109
Photo 6.13: Field preparation for cultivation by using tractor (Ghenda, Dhankhali,
Kalapara) ................................................................................................. 128
Photo 6.14: view of agricultural land in the study area, (Tiakhali, Dhankhali,
Kalapara) ................................................................................................. 128
Photo 6.15: View of cattle in the Project area (Ghenda, Dhankhali, Kalapara,
Patuakhali) ............................................................................................... 132
Photo 6.16: Capturefish habitat ................................................................... 134
Photo 6.17: Boat dwelling fishermen ............................................................ 136
Photo 6.18: Fishing Gears ........................................................................... 137
Photo 6.19: Prawn PL collected from Rabnanabad Channel............................... 137
Photo 6.20: Indicative riverine fish species of the study area ........................... 142
Photo 6.21: Educational institute in the project area ....................................... 155
Photo 14.1: Stakeholders Consultation Meeting .............................................. 339
Photo 14.2: Consultation Meeting at SourthDhansagor and Londa ..................... 339
Photo 14.3: Public Disclosure Meeting at Kalapara Upazila Parishad .................. 345

xxii
 Glossary

Aila: Major Cyclone, which hit Bangladesh coast on May 25, 2009
Aman: Group of rice varieties grown in the monsoon season and harvested in the
post-monsoon season. This is generally transplanted at the beginning of
monsoon from July-August and harvested in November-Dec. Mostly rain-
fed, supplemental irrigation needed in places during dry spell.
Aus: Group of rice varieties sown in the pre-monsoon season and harvested in
the monsoon season. These are broadcasted/transplanted during March-
April and harvested during June-July. Generally rain-fed, irrigation needed
for HYV T. Aus.
B: When preceding a crop means broadcast (B. Aus)
Bagda: Shrimp (Penaeus monodon), brackish/slightly saline water species.
Bazar: Market
Beel: A saucer-shaped natural depression, which generally retains water
throughout the year and in some cases seasonally connected to the river
system.
Boro: A group of rice varieties sown and transplanted in winter and harvested at
the end of the pre-monsoon season. These are mostly HYV and fully
irrigated, planted in December-January and harvested before the onset of
monsoon in April- May.
Golda Prawn (Macrobrachium rosenbergii), non-saline/fresh water species
Gher Farm lands converted into ponds with low dykes and used for cultivation of
shrimp/prawn/fish.
Haat: Market place where market exchanges are carried out either once, twice or
thrice a week, however not every day.
Jaal: Different types of fishing net to catch fish from the water bodies.
Kacha: A house made of locally available materials with earthen floor, commonly
used in the rural areas.
Khal: A drainage channel usually small, sometimes man-made. The channel
through which the water flows. These may or may not be perennial.
Kharif: Pre-monsoon and monsoon growing season. Cropping season linked to
monsoon between March-October, often divided into kharif-1 (March-June)
and kharif-2 (July-October).
Perennial Khal: Water available in the khal all the year round.
Pacca: Well-constructed building using modern masonry materials.
Rabi: Dry agricultural crop growing season; mainly used for the cool winter
season between November and February.
Seasonal Khal: Water not available in the khal all the year round.
Sidr: Major Cyclone, which hit Bangladesh coast on November 15, 2007.
T. Aman: When preceding a crop means transplanted (T. Aman).
Upazila: Upazila is an administrative subdivision of a District.

xxiii
 Abbreviations and Acronyms

AAEO Assistant Agriculture Extension Officer

B Boron
BADC Bangladesh Agricultural Development Corporation
BARC Bangladesh Agricultural Research Council
Ca Calcium
Cd Cadmium
Cu Copper
DAE Department of Agricultural Extension
DC Deputy Commissioner
DLS Department of Livestock
EC Electrical Conductivity
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EMP Environmental Management Plan
FAO Food and Agriculture Organization
Fe Ferrum (Iron)
IEE Initial Environmental Examination
IESCs Important Environmental and Social Components
ICM Integrated Pest Management
K Potassium
Mg Magnesium
MP Muriate of Potash
Mn Manganese
LLP Low Lift Pump
LOQ Limit of Quantitation
N Nitrogen
Na Sodium
NCA Net Cultivable Area
OM Organic Matter
P Phosphorus
Pb Lead
pH Soil reaction
SAAO Sub Assistant Agriculture Officer
S Sulphur
SRDI Soil Resource Development Institute
STWs Shallow Tube Well
SOLARIS Soil and Land Resources Information System
TSP Triple Super Phosphate
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
ToR Terms of References
UAO Upazila Agriculture Officer
ULO Upazila Livestock Officer
VFA Veterinary Field Assistant
Zn Zinc

xxv
 Unit Conversion Table

General Units Energy Units

1 meter = 3.28 ft 1 Cal = 4.19 J

1 kilometer = 0.621371192 mile 1 Btu = 1055.87J
1 nautical mile = 1.852 kilometer 1 Btu = 251.9958 cal
1 kilogram = 2.20 pound 1 joule = 0.239 cal
1 metric ton = 1000 kg 1 kWh = 3412 Btu.
1 barrel = 42 U.S. gallons = 159.0 liters 1MW=1000KW=106 W
1 liter = 0.264172052 gallon (US) 1 kWh = 3.6 x 106 J
1 square mile = 640 acres = 2.590 km2 1 kWh = 859.85 kcal
1 hectare = 10-2 km2 = 2.471 acres 1 horsepower = 746 W
1 Pascal = 1 N/m2= 0.01 millibar 1 GWyr = 8.76 x 109 kWh
1 liter = 0.001 cubic meter
10C = 274.15K=33.80F
1 mg/m3 = 1 μg /L
1 mg/L ≈ 1 g/m3 ≈ 1 ppm (w/w)
1 ≈ g/L ≈ 1 mg/ m3 ≈ 1 ppb (w/w)
1 knot = 0.514444 m/s
1μg/m3 = 1 ppb*(12.187)*(M) / (273.15 + °C)

xxvii
 Executive Summary

Background
The Power System Master Plan in 2010 hints to fuel diversification for electricity generation
because of faster depleting the natural gas. In the meantime, the Government of Bangladesh
has announced a new policy named ‘Vision 2041’ embarked on a mega plan to reach a supply
capacity of around 57238 MW of electricity by 2041 and 20% of which will be generated from
coal to reduce the dependency on natural gas and also to continue sustainable power supply
for the socio-economic development of Bangladesh.
However, various assumptions related to the expected sources for base load energy have
subsequently changed. Therefore, energy development is not on the same path as related to
its PSMP 2010 plan. As a result a new Power System Master Plan 2016 has been finalized
based on the future economic growth, fuel, demand and supply. This new plan aims at
assisting the Bangladesh in formulating an extensive energy and power development plan up
to the year 2041.To fulfil the target of PSMP 2016, Rural Power Company Limited (RPCL)
intends to construct a 2x660 MW Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant at Kalapara, Patuakhali,
Bangladesh.
The proposed Project falls under the ‘Red’ category of industry (Rule-7, Schedule-1).In
compliance with the existing environmental legislation of Bangladesh for red category
industries, the proponent has entrusted CEGIS with the responsibility of conducting IEE and
EIA studies under a contract signed on 30 /6/2015.
Accordingly, CEGIS has prepared a detailed methodology for conducting the IEE and the EIA
studies. For conducting this study, methodology has been prepared by the strong
multidisciplinary team having expertise in EIA study. This EIA report has been prepared after
a couple of field visits maintaining all statutory requirements.

Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

A set of Policy, Acts, Administrative Framework and guidelines is required for the
Environmental Assessment Study of a coal based thermal power plant. According to the ECR,
1997 this Power Plant Project falls under Red category where environmental
Clearance/Approval Certificate from DoE is obligatory.
This study has detailed out of the relevant national and international acts and rules in different
phases of the Power Plant Project. Chapter 2 of this report figures out the specific laws or
legislatives works related to Power Plant construction and operation process. National and
international acts have been identified for the coal-based Power Plant and for the
transportation, handling process. In addition, latest national and international environmental
standard limits have been specified which have to be strictly maintained at every phase of
project development. This document focuses on the issues addressing the specific impacts
which have been evaluated, mitigation measures suggested and monitoring plan prepared
following the standard practices especially IFC project Performance Standard (2012).

Project Brief
The proposed project is a 2x660MW sub-bituminous coal based ultra-super critical thermal
power Plant. Each 660 MW Plant will consist of one ultra-supercritical, balanced draft,

xxix
 Executive Summary

pulverized coal fired Boiler with built in Dry Low NOx burners suitable for outdoor installation
with a stack of 275 meter high and a tandem-compound, multi cylinder design condensing
type steam turbine directly coupled with hydrogen cooled generator suitable for indoor
installation.
The primary fuel will be sub-bituminous coal for continuous operation and liquid fuel (HFO,
LDO) for Boiler start-up, flame stabilization and low load operation.
Using Payra Bandar port authority’s Jetty the imported coal from source countries like
Australia or Indonesia will be unloaded and finally stored in plant stockyard using conveyer
belt. A detail discussion on fuel source, quality and requirement is made in article 5.8, under
the title “Coal requirement and management.
Close cooling cycle with cooling tower has been envisaged for the project. Surface water from
the RABNABAD CHANNEL shall be used for condenser cooling and all other purpose. In total
5117m3/h of surface water from “The Rabnabad Channel” will be withdraw for condenser and
other auxiliary components cooling make up and for all other purpose. About 2573 m3/h of
waste water after being treated will be used as sprinkling water, garden water/discharged in
the outfall. The project adopts Reverse Osmosis Process of surface water for cycle makeup,
HVAC makeup, etc.
The major project facilities comprises of water intake and discharge channels, Flue Gas
Desulphurization units (FGD), Low-NOx burners, Conveyer belts, Coal storing facilities (Coal
yard), ash pond for ash disposal, De-mineralization Plant, Water Treatment Plant, Effluent
Treatment Plant, internal roads and buildings etc.
The proposed project site is located at Mauza Nishanbaria, Dhankhali and Londa, Kalapara
Upazila, Patuakhali district and is on the western bank of River Rabnabad/Patuakhali, and
adjacent to the proposed RPCL Power Plant in the south and APSCL’s proposed Power Plant
in the north.The site is selected on the basis of comparison matrix of four preselected sites.
The total area of the project is around 916 acres of land.The proposed project site is accessible
through the metal road from Londa Mauza to Dhankhali Union and Dhankhali Union to
Patuakhali – Kuakata Highway. The project site can also be accessed through the river route
using the Rabnabad and Andharmanik Rivers.
The generated power at 24KV of the proposed power plant after being stepped up to 400KV
will be connected to the plant switch-yard and then to the PGCB’s proposed 400 kV GIS
substation at Kalapara Upazila. The power will then be evacuated through the national grid
of Gopalganj-Dhaka. PGCB has already given a consent letter to RPCL for the power
evacuation facilities on June-2019. RPCL will utilize this facility to evacuate their generated
electricity from the proposed power plant.
The Project once completed, would add 2X 612 MW net power to the national power grid.
Thereby improving the present power grid scenario significantly and triggering the national
economic development through industrialization. Moreover, it will create employment
opportunity for the local people and improve the transportation system in the Project area,
which will ultimately play an important role in poverty reduction and develop social safety net
condition. The Plant will be designed to meet the Best Available Control Technology (BACT)
emission

Suitability Assessment
The selection of the best alternative site has been made through multi criteria analysis based
on the criteria identified following the EIA Guideline of DoE (EIA Guideline for industries) and

xxx
 Executive Summary

IFC Environmental Assessment Guidance for Thermal Power Projects. This study evaluated
a number of criteria in order to select the best alternative site. Selection from No action
alternative, site alternatives, fuel alternatives, design alternatives etc have been considered to
find out the optimal solution of adverse environmental and social impacts. A number of
environmental, social, financial and technical criteria and indicators have been set up to
finalize the specification of the project. These criteria have been developed through
consultation and expert judgment by multidisciplinary team of EIA.

Description of Baseline Environment

The base situation of the study area in terms of physical resources, water resources, land and
agricultural resources, fisheries resources, ecological and socio-economic resources have
been identified for both project area and the study area as well.
The proposed 1320 MW Power Plant project is located at the Chittagong coastal area with an
elevation of 1-2 m from MSL and itencircled by the coastal polder from the Rabnabad Channel,
Andharmanik river, Tiakhali Khal etc. The seismic coefficient of the project area is 0.04g as it
falls under zone-I under the classification of GSB.The tropical climate prevail in the study area
with distinct monsoonal season which influences all other climatic parameters. Meteorological
data of nearby station (BMD Stationa ID: 12103) was analyzed for the last 30 years to get the
overall climatic conditions of the study area. The climate of study area experiences a hot, wet
and humid tropical climate. Nearly 80% rainfall takes places in monsoon in the study area
where annual average rainfall was recorded 2519 mm that particular areas. The monthly
average relative humidity near the project area varies seasonally from 76.21% to 90.61%.
Data for wind speed of Patuakhali BMD station and data for wind direction of Kuakata BMD
station have also been illustrated through tables and diagrams.
Three major rivers and enormous canals are flowing in the study area. The name of rivers is
Andharmanik, Rabnabad and Tiakhali. All the rivers and canals are tidal in nature. Specifically,
water level of Andharmanik river during high tide ranges from +0.75 mPWD to +1.69 mPWD,
whereas low tidal water level ranges from (-)1.12 mPWD to (-) 0.54 mPWD. Erosion was
dominating in the Rabnabad channel during 1973 to 2015, although recently the erosion and
accretion rates are about to be similar. During this period, a total of 844 ha of land have been
eroded and 616 ha of land have been accreted.
The peripheral flood control embankment (interior dyke and sea dyke) effectively offers
protection from the storm surge flooding in the area. Local people opined that there was no
major storm surge flooding in the Polder area during AILA (2009) and SIDR (2007). Tidal
flooding occurs inside the Amtali Union of the study area in almost every year and inundates
about 7 to 8 % of the total area of the Union due to lower drainage capacity of Pujakhola
regulator.
Present air quality, water quality and noise level have been investigated through standard
practices. Four locations for air quality sampling, 8 locations for surface water and 2 locations
for ground water quality, 20 location for noise level have been monitored depending on the
location sensitivity and future impact potentiality. All the pollutants in the ambient air and water
are within the limit of national and international standards. Present acoustic environment
varies generally 43-65 dBA at different places during day time in the study area.
This study includes of the potential impacts on agricultural resources due to the construction
of 2×660MW coal based power plant at Kalapara, Patuakhali. The acquired land for this project
are mostly agricultural land (779 acre). A significant part of this land are used for multiple
cropping system in different season. Besides this, 10km radius area is considered as study

xxxi
 Executive Summary

area of the project. This area faces potential risks if any accidental event takes place. The
study area contains 40,706 acre agricultural land, which is normally double or single cropped.
The entire study area occupied with different ecosystems chiefly terrestrial and aquatic; and
falls under two bio-ecological zones: a) Coastal Marine Water; and b) Ganges Floodplain. The
project area shows it falls under agriculture and partially homesteads area where a large
number of plant individuals have been recorded during the field investigation but no one was
identified as threatened species. Among plants Gum Tree (n=117) is dominant species and
followed by Hill Glory (n=112) where Lead Tree shows (n=32) a small number of individuals
throughout the project area. The species diversity has been estimated and shown plant
Species Diversity Index (SDI) 2.91. On the other hand, diversity and population of the fauna
occur in the project area has been assessed and considered as moderate but only a species
i.e. Bengal Fox has been categorized as vulnerable (VU) to the country by the IUCN
Bangladesh (2015).
The ecosystems of the study area possess two major categories in accordance with vegetation
patterns and landscapes- terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. Moreover, mangrove and
marine and coastal ecosystems also occur to the periphery of rivers and coast. The findings
of the field investigation described under three categories are homestead, crop-field and
roadside vegetation’s. Of the homesteads, West Indies Mahogany and Acacia were noted as
dominant in addition to common fruit bearing species. The crop-filed vegetation’s are Spiny
Amaranth, Mexican Tea, Glory bower, Burmuda Grass and Goose Grass. The road slopes
are occupied with fast growing and exotic species of different timber and non-timber species
like Acacia, Rosewood, Lead Tree, Date Palm, Neem, Palmyra Palm, Rain Tree and Gum
Tree. The wildlife widely discussed in this report is amphibian, reptile, avifauna and mammal.
The study area is a saline prone, so, the diversity and population of the amphibians has been
considered as moderate. The latter two groups (reptiles and birds) are dominant and
individuals like Common Garden Lizard, Little Skink, Asian Pied Starling, Black Drongo,
Brahminy Kite, Red-vented Bulbul, Common Tailorbird, etc. were observed frequently. Of the
mammals, small to medium-sized individuals found common i.e. Bandicoot Rat, Jungle Cat,
Indian Flying Fox and Bengal Fox within the study area. Two mammalian species- Bengal Fox
and Ganges River Dolphin categorized as threatened by the IUCN-Bangladesh (2015). The
habitats are sporadic and not healthy to enhance diversity as well as population due to human
disturbance.
Total fish habitat in the study area is about 28,548 acre, where the project area occupied by
522 acre. Among the fisheries habitats, riverine habitat shared by 22,866 acres in study area
and 45 acre in project area. The estimated total annual fish production from all habitats is
about 2,562MT in the study area and 49 MT in the project area. The project area is located
adjoining the Rabnabad channel which is most important breeding ground for deshi pangus,
black tiger shrimp and hilsa. This is also an important migration route for hilsa. Andharmanik
River is one of the significant hilsa sanctuary declared by the government for conserving Jatka
is also located in the study area.
The study area consists of 10 unions and 1 municipality either partially or fully having
population of about 117,967 with the average household size of 4.1. The number of male
(58,888) is slightly less than the number of female (59,080). The average population density
is 422 which is little fewer than the national density of 1,015 persons per sq. km. At present
around 121 numbers of households and around 560 number of people live inside the proposed
project boundary. The inhabitants belong to two main religious groups; i.e. the Muslim and the
Hindu. The distributions of employment of the area at reference period of census are as
follows: about 81% are engaged in agricultural activities, about 2% in industrial and about 17%

xxxii
 Executive Summary

in service sectors. Electricity facility is very poor (about 29.2%) in the area. The overall housing
condition (84% households are kutcha) is not satisfactory. About 80% of the households use
ground water as drinking water. According to the findings of RRA, there exists family
graveyards, one mosque and one Madrasah falls under the proposed project area.

Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

The potential environmental and socioeconomic impacts have been identified considering the
existing environmental and social aspects in the study area. Impacted components have been
identified according to different stages of the project construction and operation stages. The
impact extent of the impacts, duration and frequency of impacts, reversibility of the impacts
are identified for assessing the magnitude of the impacts on the sensitive receptors in the
study area. The receptor’s sensitivities are also identified for assessing the significant of the
impacts at different stages of eh project.
Major environmental impacts of the Project are registered under pre-construction, construction
and operation phases may include; susceptibility of environmental pollution and social
unconventional relations among different parties. Firstly, the landscape and scenic beauty
might be aggravated temporarily during construction periods but recovered at time of operation
of this project. The air quality will be deteriorated in the project area and its surrounds from
the beginning of the construction such as land filling, construction materials processing,
infrastructural development, vehicular transportation, machineries installation etc. It may
generate fugitive dust particles and insignificant emission of CO2, CO and NOx.
The proposed project will consume sub-bituminous type of coal at the rate of around 13,151
TPD corresponding to 4.8 million tons a year. The calculated byproducts like ash 62 Kg/hr,
CO – 34.5 g/s, SO2 – 122.8 g/s, NOx-313.1 g/s, PM10 – 28.5 g/s and PM2.5 – 2.4 g/s will release
at 275m height and 7.2m width stack after taking inbuilt abotment measures like FGD, Low-
NOx burner, ESP and provision for SCR etc by the power plant. To assess the dispersion of
pollutants advanced sophisticated model CALPUFF is used for calculating 1-hr, 24-hr and
annual maximum concentration in the study area. The model has been adopted by the USEPA
for assessing long range transport of pollutants and their impacts on sensitive areas and on a
case-by-case basis for certain near-field applications involving complex meteorological
conditions. Flue gas will emit from the same stacks through two bifurcated line (using multiflue
chimney). The measured pollutant concentration in four locations have been used for
validation of the model in the study area. Three scenario has been developed to assess the
pollution level of the criteria pollutants at different sensitive receptors. Around 120 numbers of
discrete receptors have been selected around 25km from the project sites depending on the
location or useable sensitivity or impact potentiality. Table –A shows the maximum ground
level concentration of criteria pollutants during baseline, project and cumulative scenarios. For
baseline modeling existing emission sources like vehicular emission, brick klins are
accounted; to model the project case scenario, the baseline emission sources has been added
with the emission of 1320 MW Power Plant of RPCL and for the cumulative case, the existing
baseline sources, emission of proposed 1320 MW coal based power plant and emission from
the other power plants been taken into account.

xxxiii
 Executive Summary

Table A: Maximum GLC of the criteria pollutants under different scenarios

Location at Ground Level Concentration

Standard Limit
Criteria Averaging (UTM: 46) (µg/m³)
Pollutants Time Maximum ECR
East(km) North (km) IFC 2008
Value 2005
Baseline Case-
217.436 2432.798 47.455E+001
SO2
Project Case - 24 Hr - 4.8104E+001
217.436 2432.798 365 125 (IT-1)
SO2 SO2
Cumulative 4.8104E+001
217.436 2432.798
Case - SO2
Baseline Case -
217.436 2432.798 6.5068E+000
SO2
Project Case- Annual -
217.436 2432.798 6.7193E+000 80 -
SO2 SO2
Cumulative
217.436 2432.798 7.3751E+000
Case - SO2
Baseline Case –
215.263 2439.294 1.1152E+001
NOx
Project Case-
Annual 215.263 2439.294 1.1357E+001 100
NOx
Cumulative
215.263 2439.294 1.2425E+001
Case - NOx
Baseline Case -
217.436 2432.798 1.4076E+001
PM2.5
Project Case -
24 Hr 217.436 2432.798 1.4397E+001 65 75 (IT-1)
PM2.5
Cumulative
217.436 2432.798 1.4397E+001
Case - PM2.5
Baseline Case -
217.436 2432.798 1.9329E+000
PM2.5
Project Case -
Annual 217.436 2432.798 2.0016E+000 15 35 (IT-1)
PM2.5
Cumulative
217.436 2432.798 2.0050E+000
Case - PM2.5
Baseline Case –
217.436 2432.798 4.2784E+001
PM10
Project Case – 24 Hr
217.436 2432.798 4.3782E+001 150 125 (IT-1)
PM10
Cumulative
217.436 2432.798 4.3782E+001
Case – PM10
Baseline Case –
217.436 2432.798 5.8897E+000
PM10
Project Case –
Annual 217.436 2432.798 6.0387E+000 50 70 (IT-1)
PM10
Cumulative
217.436 2432.798 6.0830E+000
Case – PM10
The ambient concentration of PM10 and PM2.5 is slightly higher than the national annual
standard values. However, the contribution of pollutants by this proposed power plant in
ambient environment is lesser. It maintains the national standard and interim target of IFC,
2008 well. This power plant will emit around 11.9 million Ton of GHG in every year for
producing 1320MWhr electricity to the grid.
A number of mechanical instruments, truck, bulldozers, compaction roller, pneumatic
hammers, gerators, mixers, unloaders will generate high noise that affect to the workers, their
colony and nearest communities especially within the range of 500 m. Produced noise from

xxxiv
 Executive Summary

the plant will be obstructed by acoustic hoods, green belt, and project boundary during the
operation time. A simulation of noise propagation has been prepared by Sound Plan essential
3.0 for noise model approved by European Environment agency. The predicted noise level at
different distances from the source has been identified through this model. Eventually, the
resultant noise level has been estimated summing the predicted noise level with the measured
noise level at certain distance for both day and night periods. The resultant noise level (i.e.
Leq) will be lower to than the national standard (ECR, 2006) and international standard (IFC,
2008) for the recreational zone.
During construction phase, different kind of construction solid waste may have the chance to
mingle with the surroundings environment. Coal dust, bottom ash, scraps materials,
hazardous materials and domestic waste generated from the operation of the plant affect the
neighboring environment without considering the mitigation measures. Since the project will
use cooling tower for condenser cooling, there will be no possibilities of the effect of thermal
plume discharge in any natural river system. During operation stage, the power plant will use
CETP including oil separator, physico-chemical treatment plant, and biological treatment plant
to clean the effluent. Moreover, as the project will be run through the concept of zero discharge
law, the impact on the surface and ground water would be low. During transportation of coal
wave action from the ships may affects the river bank, bilge and ballast water from the ships,
emission from the ships may affects the ambient environment.
The proposed area is basically a cultivable land along with homesteads will incur vegetation
loss due to site preparation, land development as well as construction activities. Similarly,
pipeline installation for land development process would damage terrestrial vegetation
including mangrove. The pipeline installation activities will do harm to shorebirds feeding
habitat through labor movement by impeding their normal activities. Spectacularly, labor
movement will disturb their normal activities and they can be migrated locally. Moreover, the
marine habitat would receive oil spills during transportation of construction machineries to the
project area. The construction activities will generate noise by high frequent sound
machineries, blocking wildlife passage by stockpiling of construction materials and
disturbance through vehicle and labor movements. During construction and operation the
benthic community would receive major negative impacts by dredging works and oil spills from
cargo/vessels. On the other way, the proposed greenbelt will provide positive impacts through
create important habitat to different wildlife including local birds, and others. Coal dropping
during transportation would lead deposit toxic elements in the bottom of waterways- ‘home to
benthos’s. The benthos is sensitive to pollutants and pollutants may destroy the benthic
community.
Ramnabad Channel is one the suitable spawning ground for Hilsa, Pangus and shrimp which
might be affected because of dredging activities. Water intake from the Channel would also
entrap fish, crustaceans and other aquatic organisms particularly the sluggish species. Fish
species specially Hilsa, Pangus and Shrimp PL etc would be affected due to disposal of waste
water like ballast and bilge water from the ship/cargo carrying machinery and ancillaries having
oil and grease contaminants. Predator-prey relationship might be affected due to spread of
invasive species through ballast water. Integrated impact to be caused for withdrawal of
3x1400 m3/hour of water, daily for three power plants located at the Rabnabad channel may
alter the fish diversity due to salinity intrusion.
As per the plan of GoB, a number of coal based power plants will be constructed at Patukhali
District beside the Rabnabad channel for getting the coal carrying facilities. The proposition
for this project is to reduce the settlement areas. Therefore, around 779 acres of agricultural

xxxv
 Executive Summary

land will be acquired for the power plant project in contrast of 9 acres of settlement areas.
Most of these lands are used for agriculture in different seasons.
During pre-construction stage, there would be loss of properties of the households and
landlords. An unrest situation among the local people may be raised if they are not
rehabilitated or compensated properly. The people may lose their existing employment
opportunities such as agriculture and livestock rearing. On the other hand, the employment
opportunities would be created significantly for the labour class people during the pre -
construction activities.
During construction stage labour in-migration may be increased. Contamination of water and
sanitation system. Handling of heavy construction machineries may create health injury in the
project sites. Unsafe and unhygienic labour shades may create a very hazardous health
problem.
During operation stage, new employment opportunities and ensure employment opportunities
will be created throughout the industrial development. Land price of the adjacent areas of the
project will increase significantly. The sale value of land will be increased due to immigration
of people as well as technical people in this area. On the other hand, environment especially
water and sanitation may be disturbed by the labours. Health injury may be occurred in power
plant for handling of heavy machineries.

Mitigation of the Impacts

The proposed 1320 MW coal base power plant has considered a number of environmentally
friendly measures, such as combined cycle technology, close cooling system, central effluent
treatment plant (CETP), etc. The mitigation measures for potential major impacts are
discussed in detail in Chapter-IX. The minor and some moderate impacts will be managed
and mitigated using environmental code of practices (presented in Appendix-VI) and
Contractors’ good practice. The mitigation for some of the potential major impacts may include
the following:
Pre-construction
Resettlement and compensation plan should be governed by the Resettlement Action Plan
(RAP) study and the construction activities should be initiated after completion of the total
compensation process. Local labor both for technical and non-technical should be trained and
engaged for the Project related activities thus they can be able to own the project. Moreover,
the land compensation process should be efficient to the farmers in association support
services.
The demarcation of project area and dykes must be created before going to land development
process. In this aspect, pipeline installation for land development through sands, the
implement agency should measure the damages and its proper management to minimize
damages. Using low sound emission machineries would reduce both disturbance to wildlife
and noise pollution. Dredging activities must be restricted during Hilsha (September - October)
and Pangus (June - July) spawning period and peak shrimp PL (February – March) collection
periods in the planning stage of this project.

Construction phase
Labor working condition must be guided with best practices maintaining the ECPs. The worker
colonies must follow good housekeeping and appropriate PPEs at work station. All arc welding
and cutting operations should be shielded by noncombustible or flameproof screens. Oils,
lubricants and other hazardous materials should be bounded and stored separately so as to

xxxvi
 Executive Summary

limit the spillage. The worker should be trained on safety precautions on identifying,
using/handling such hazardous materials.
A pragmatic grievance redress mechanisms for both the community in the study area and
labor in the project area must be regularized. Engaging the affected people in different Project
activities with highest priority. Health and safety trainings should be provided regularly. An on-
site medical team should be set up and emergency first-aid kit should be at hand in case of
any accidental injuries (burns, cuts, broken bones etc.). Workers hygiene and health status
should be ensured. Monthly health checkup should be conducted to monitor their health
condition and appropriate treatment should be provided for any ailments.
They should be casing the pipe during buried pipes crosses the road. Watering or sprinking
water over the area sources of dust generation. Dredging operation should be carried out in
the route having minimum aquatic habitats. Appropriate benthic survey must be carried out
prior to any dredging activities. The shipping company must ensure that the ship carrying
construction materials and other raw materials, obey the national and International Maritime
Laws. The vehicle speed should be limited to 15 kmph during the dry seasons and the truck
must be covered when it hauling material. Contractor will compact the back-filling material to
prevent any subsequent subsidence. Rubbles generated from the construction site should be
stored in appropriate bins/skips, should be well-covered and later should be buried in an
approved landfill site. All solid wastes, hazardous and non-hazardous, should be stored in
designated sites prior to final disposal.
Establishment of greenbelt will be an option to create new habitats to wildlife and
environmental protection to others. In this context, plantation of native species is suggested
to improve the status of the habitat. To avoid disturbance to shorebirds and other wildlife install
light downwardly and do not run construction works at night. The shippers should aware of
consequence of toxicity to benthic community. The proposed project site is very close to
feeding ground of wintering birds and it is suggested not to select winter season (October-
February) as project implement period. The dredging work designated to channels is
suggested to implement segment by segment to avoid total damage of the benthic
communities. Fish breeding and fish spawning seasons should be avoided for transporting
construction materials and machinery as well as ancillaries through waterways.

Operation phase
The dust particulates will be arrested from the sources through different equipment like ESP,
sprinkler, DSS etc for different point and fugitive sources. Built-in Low-NOx burner and use of
FGD will reduce the emission of SO2 and NOx from the 275m height stack. The ESP and FGD
will be in operation stage and continuously monitored the environmentally susceptible
pollutants to the stack.
The machines/equipment/vehicles should be turned off when not in use. Doors of the control
room, windows and other doors should be fitted with proper sealing; the equipment like
turbines, pumps, fans etc. should be covered with soundproof dampeners to limit the spread
of noise. Workers should use appropriate PPEs (soundproof earpiece, earmuffs, etc.) while
working close to the noise generating equipment. Local municipalities should have ordinances
that regulate loud and objectionable noise; the authority should warn the local people about it.
Moreover, regular maintenance the greenbelts should around the power Plant area will limit
the spread of noise to the nearby community.
Operation of CETP, STP and storm water drainage system separately will avoid the surface
water pollution to the ambient river system. Construction of a leak-proof sump should be made

xxxvii
 Executive Summary

to store sludge temporarily and to limit their spillage. They should then be transferred to sludge
treatment plant for treatment. Use of concrete lining at the bottom and side of the ash pond,
transformer, oil storage and treatment plant will protect ground water contamination in the
project premises. The sump should be monitored and maintained by on board chemist and
technicians and make sure everything (e.g. pollutant content, spill control etc.) goes smoothly.
Use of alternative oxygen scavenging chemical e.g. Helamin, Diethyl hydroxylamine, etc in
feed water for corrosion protection in boiler instead of hydrazine as this chemical is banned
worldwide. Introduction of Reverse Osmosis (RO) instead of using resin in demineralization
plant.
Scattered throwing and burning of waste should be prohibited. There should be a designated
site for kitchen waste disposal. A good practice of kitchen waste collection and disposal
system should be adopted. The aim should be reduction of the waste generation. Degradable
waste, glasses, recyclable and reusable waste, papers, plastic, etc should be collected by
nature of the materials and managed separately. Some temporary bins with different colors
indicating disposal of degradable and non-degradable wastes might be installed at labor shed
and work places to prevent scattered throwing of solid wastes.
The benthos are more sensitive to toxic elements especially the coal contamination. The
shippers should well aware about the consequence of coal and develop management system
to adhere properly. In this aspect, the loaded vessel should cover tightly to avoid coal
dropping. The water intake velocity will not be more than 0.5ft/s at the screen of the intake
channel. Ballast water and oil spillage must be controlled from the ships, vessels and
construction site. Foreign ships must be checked for protecting the migration of invasive
species.
Buried pipes and fittings should be protected against corrosion by means of external coating
and wrapping. So, holiday detector shall be used to detect any holiday and should be repaired.
Cathodic protection test points should be installed and connected to temporary cathodic
protection facilities in accordance with the specification as the final operation of lowering or
tie-in is in progress. Cleaning regime should include a combination of on-line cleaning and
semi-annual off-line washing. Welded joint sections of the pipeline should be separated and
tied into a continuous system in such a manner that no stress would be exerted into the pipe
as a consequence of the tie-in operation.
Need to establish planned housing area and ensure all facilities like water, sanitation,
electricity and road facilities for proper development of the area. Local resource based
industries should be given the highest priority. Industrial development should be made under
the guidance of regional development program. Facilitate to recruit local people according to
their skill. In that case, training programs should be provided for assisting easy adoption of
newly generated employment.

Environmental Management Plan

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) includes several plans for implementing
mitigation and enhancement measures, emergency response, occupational health and safety,
and Environmental Code of Practices. Generally, the impacts, which are minor or moderate,
are to be mitigated by adopting Environmental Code of Practices (ECP) and Contractor’s good
practices during project implementation. On the other hand, impacts and risks which are
critical or major will be mitigated or prevented by adopting mitigation measures. The contractor
would prepare and implement the mitigation measures, which will be supervised by the

xxxviii
 Executive Summary

proponent, PIU or a Health and Safety Officer as required. The total estimated cost of
implementing the EMP would be around USD 13 million.

Risk and Hazard Assessment

Potential hazard during construction stage might include leakage of flammable gas, leading to
explosion and fire hazards. Finally, during operation phase, potential hazard might also include
accident, compound leak, leading to fire hazards, explosion and human toxicity. Mitigation
measures include: use of personal protective equipment (PPE); fall protection devices; proper
training on health and safety and safety equipment; proper training on how to use machineries
and tools for construction; regular checkup of instruments and machineries; awareness on
personal hygiene and road traffic rules and regulation; monthly health inspection of workers
and staff etc. The contractor will also design an emergency response plan to better prepare in
an event of emergency and how to recover after an emergency situation.

Emergency Response Plan

An Emergency Response Plan (ERP) has been prepared to provide a systematic approach
for the protection of employees, assets and the environment from impact of serious incidents.
Although a solar power plant project will pose minimum threat to the people working in the
project site and its surrounding environment, the implementation of this plan will prevent any
minor incidents from becoming a disaster, save lives, prevent injuries and minimize damage
to property, workers and the surrounding environment. Possible emergency scenario includes,
fire related disasters; immediate medical emergency due to injuries; leakage of hazardous
materials; natural disasters (floods, cyclones etc.) and; civil disturbance/terrorist activities
(bomb threats, kidnapping etc.) details of such emergencies and its preparedness and
response plan is illustrated in Volume III as a separate report.

Environmental Monitoring Plan

Various monitoring programs have been proposed in the EIA, which include compliance
monitoring, impact monitoring, and external or independent monitoring. The objective of this
monitoring program is to ensure that the various tasks detailed in the environmental
management plan, particularly the mitigation measures are implemented in an effective
manner, and also to evaluate project’s impacts on the key environmental and social
parameters. The total estimated cost of monitoring would be around USD 1.8 million.
The proposed Project would be designed as environmentally sound procedure. Despite such
design, the Project might have sensitivity to environment and thus measures to go beyond
regulatory requirements would be introduced in the EIA and EMP. Aspects, such as corporate
social and environmental responsibility (which included development of various socio-cultural
facilities, toilets, hospitals and training of skilled/semi-skilled local youths for employment in
project). For reducing the ground water pressure it is recommended to divert the treated waste
water to use as irrigation water to the near crop field area.

Stakeholder Consultation
People are not disagreed to give their own land for this project in response to substantial
compensation should be given to them in efficient manner. They have already experienced
from the compensation process of the NWPGCL 1320 MW coal based power plant located at
Dhankhali Upazila. That is why they expressed a negative attitude against the implementation
of this project. They suggested to avoid this union for the implementation of this project. On
the other hand, they also showed their eagerness for this project as Implementation of this

xxxix
 Executive Summary

project would also enhance the region’s standard of living because of the increased generation
of electricity, contributing to further industrial set up (which further leading to more employment
opportunities), etc.

Conclusion
Under the Environment Conservation Act, 1995 the first set of rules promulgated is the
Environment Conservation Rules, 1997. The Rules have provided categorization of industries
where coal based thermal power plant falls into red category and Category –A as per IFC,
2008. The plant will use modern technologies with the sufficient environmental protection
measures for abetting and mitigating the negative impacts. Numbers of measures and
management plan have been distinctly instructed in this EIA study. However, the national
demand on electricity generation has enormous positive feedback which will compensate the
negative impacts after screening by the prescribed EMP. Although there will be some potential
negative impacts, this coal-based thermal power plant will try to fulfill the regional electricity
demand. The proposed project will create enormous potentiality of regional economic and
social development. It will offer large number of job opportunity, infrastructural revolution,
increasing social security, communication network development, cultural improvement and
livelihood security in the south -east region of Bangladesh. At the end, it can be justified that
the potential benefits may outweigh the negative impacts if the suggested EMP and
recommendations are strictly followed. .
Finally, the following recommendations are made on the basis of EIA study that should be
considered for achieving the goal of optimum minimum environmental impact and optimum
benefits:
 Proper Resettlement and Rehabilitation plan is necessary for proper compensation to
Project Affected People
 People (not owner) dependent on the land to be acquired should also be compensated
and created scope for alternative livelihoods
 Findings and suggestion of EIA study in project planning, design and operation should
be considered and implement with strong monitoring
 All activities (pre-construction, construction and post-construction stage) should be
implemented according to EMP
 Environmental Management Plan and, Hazard and Safety Management Plan should
be implement at every suggested steps of plant construction and operation
 Establishing Institutional arrangement with proper logistic and training for Environment,
Health and Safety in Project Management Unit during pre-construction, construction
and operation phases of the project
 Strong environmental compliance monitoring activities to be ensured during pre-
construction, construction and operation phases of the project
 The Plant should be operated ensuring all pollution abatement measures e.g. ESP,
FGD, De-NOx burner, Effluent Treatment Plant, Provision of SCR etc all are in order.
 The project will follow the ISO-14001 and OHAS-18001 standers
The plant should be operated ensuring all pollution abatement measures e.g. ESP, FGD, SCR
(if required), De-NOx burner, effluent treatment plant, etc are in order and regular monitoring
has to be done to evaluate

xl
 1. Introduction

1.1 Project Background

Power is the main driving force of current progress and also the foundation of the growth rate.
The vision of Bangladesh Government is to give access to moderate and reliable power to all
by the year 2021 and in accordance with this present government's goal is to guarantee
continuous and quality power supply for all by 2021 through change in generation,
transmission and distribution methods. The Government of Bangladesh has announced the
new policy, “Vision 2041” targeting Bangladesh to be a developed country by 2041. With the
consistency of economic development, a secure power system would be necessary.
The government has further expanded its vision focusing on the coming years up to 2041 and
arranged the Power System Master Plan 2016 (PSMP).This plan expresses that in 2020, 2030
and 2041, the power demand would be 12545MW, 27434 MW and 52034 MW where the
power supply would be 12949 MW, 30178 MW and 57238 MW. To promote the fuel
diversification for Power Generation and selecting coal as a primary option which will
contribute around 20% in future.
To fulfill the future demand, GoB has already initiated international cooperation for Power
Secotors. Based on the future economic growth, fuel, demand and supply, international
cooperation, a new Power System Master Plan 2016 has been finalized Power System Master
Plan (PSMP) 2016, aims at assisting the Bangladesh in formulating an extensive energy and
power development plan up to the year 2041, covering energy balance, power balance, and
tariff strategies. As per P S MP 2 0 1 6 , achieving middle to long term development issues and
risks and to formulate a comprehensive and result-oriented aid strategy for the energy sector
by examining effective approaches for each issue. The Rural Power Company Limited now
intends to construct a coal fired Thermal Power Plant in Bangladesh to fulfill the target of
PSMP.
RPCL is a Power Generation Company in Bangladesh under Power Division, Ministry of
Power, Energy and Mineral Resources is hereinafter referred as the “proponent” of this project.
The project proponent has taken the initiative to build up two coal based ultra-supercritical
thermal power plants with fuel NOx control technology on about 915.7 acres (371.5 Ha) of land
to be acquired from Londa, Nishanbaria and Dhankhali Mauzas, of the Dhankhali and Lalua
Unions, Kala Para Upazila in Patuakhali District.
As per the Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 (amended in 2005) of Bangladesh, this
project falls under the ‘Red Category’ project that requires approval from the Department of
Environment (DoE) before starting the construction. The approval process requires carrying
out Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) and Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA).
However, RPCL has obtained redemption of carrying out IEE from the DoE with a condition of
conducting a comprehensive EIA in line with a ToR approved by the DoE.
The Center for Environmental and Geographic Information Services (CEGIS), a Public Trust
under the Ministry of Water Resources of the Government of Bangladesh and a pioneer
scientific organization with vast experience in carrying out EIA studies of diversified fuel based
power plants in Bangladesh, has been entrusted by RPCL for carrying out the EIA of a coal
fired Thermal Power Plant in Patuakhali.

1
 Introduction

1.2 Objective of the Study

The ToR defines the objectives of this consultancy service to carry out the EIA study for the
proposed 2x660 MW coal based thermal power plant project to be constructed at Kalapara
Upazila in Patuakhali District (Appendix-I). The specific objectives are:
i. To identify environmental regulatory requirements for power plant designing,
construction and operation;
ii. To assess the existing environmental and socio-economic baseline condition;
iii. To identify and assess all the potential environmental and socio-economic impact of
the proposed plant during its construction and operation;
iv. To identify possible mitigation measures and propose an Environmental & Social
Management Plan for ensuring environmental and social safeguard;
v. To prepare an Environmental Monitoring Plan including Environmental Compliance
Monitoring during pre-construction, construction, and operation;
vi. To present the justification for the project, and to investigate alternatives to reduce
potential environmental impacts and increase potential benefits;
vii. Documentation how stakeholders have been engaged during the EIA Process, and
feedback incorporation in the EIA;
viii. To obtain an Environmental Clearance Certificate, issued by the DoE.

1.3 Need and Importance of the Project

At present aggregate introduced power generation limit is 11,532 MW, the present power
interest is 10,283 MW and the supply is 8,763 MW (during fiscal year 2014-2015).1 Around
60% of the number of population of the nation has the entrance to power while power demand
growth is 12% for every annum. However, around 71% of the total population have grid or off-
grid access to power according to BPDB (Energy and Power, April, 2017). To ensure the
reliable electricity to the consumer, a rational demand scenario has been developed by the
PSMP 2016 after a number of analysis. Figure-1.1 shows the daily load curve in 2014.

Figure 1.1: Estimated Composite Daily Load Curve in the Summer in Bangladesh
(PSMP, 2016)

1 Power Sector Emergency Information, System Planning Department, BPDB, February 16, 2015.

2
 Introduction

The performance records of the daily load curve in Bangladesh in 2015 are represented by a
curve having a power demand peak in the evening, as illustrated below. In the meantime, by
2041, the economic growth rate in Bangladesh is estimated to reach the daily load curve of
advanced countries, where the peak is found in the daytime and evening, if the growth of the
electrification rate is taken into account.
As per the PSMP 2016, the forecasted power demand in response to the desired economic
growth of the country, will reach around 14,000 MW in 2020 and around 26,000MW by 2030
(Figure 1.2).

Figure 1.2: Daily load curve 2015-2041 (PSMP 2016)

The power supply plan has been formulated by adding the capacity of the existing plants
retirement plan, existing capacity, the committed plant capacity constructed by 2025 etc.
Figure 1.3 shows the annual power generation trend from different fuel sources. The plan
includes different initiatives to generate additional electricity by diversifying fuel, rehabilitating
age-old power plants, and importing electricity from the neighboring countries. The proposed
2x660 MW coal based thermal power plant project is one of such steps for contributing to meet
the growing demand. Figure- 1.4 shows the amount of power generated from the coal based
power plant up to 2041 where Figure 1.5 shows the sources of coal will be used for those
power plant projects.

3
 Introduction

Figure 1.3: Annual Power Generation Trend from Fuel Sources (PSMP 2016)

Figure 1.4: Power Generation Trend Coal Based Power Plant (PSMP 2016)

Figure 1.5: Souces of coal for running the Power Plants (PSMP 2016)

4
 Introduction

1.4 Scope of the EIA Study

The scope of the study is to carry out the EIA of the proposed 2x660 MW coal based thermal
power plant project to be constructed at Kalapara Upazila in Patuakhali District, which would
fulfil the applicable environmental requirements, including the laws, by laws and rules of
Bangladesh and would also comply the World Bank (WB) Group’s operational policies and
guidelines including health and safety issues. The approved ToR from DoE has appended in
Annex-I
- Description of the proposed project
- Description of the baseline condition of the environment of the study area i.e.
- Physical Environment
- Biological Environment
- Socio-Cultural Environment
- Legislative and regulatory considerations
- Determination of the potential impacts of the proposed project
- Analysis of the alternatives of the proposed project
- Cumulative impact assessment
- Development of the EMP which would also include emergency response requirement
for accidental events and occupational safety followed by Monitoring Plan
- Consultation, disclosure and grievance redress.

1.5 Limitations of the Study

According to standard practice and instruction of DoE, all the seasonal viewpoints including a
complete hydrological cycle ought to be considered amid the conduction of EIA study.
However, due to time constraints, a complete hydrological cycle covering all the seasonal
aspects could not be covered in this study. Secondary data was used in this study to overcome
this issue.
As it was an extremely time-bound project, the chance of gathering water and air tests during
dry season was exceptionally limited, which should ideally be done to understand the worst-
case scenario. However, secondary information was utilized as a part of this respect to
appreciate the year-wise situation.

1.6 EIA Study Team

A multidisciplinary team has been formed for conducting the EIA study. The team members
with their positions are presented in Table 1.1 below:

Table 1.1: Team composition for the EIA Study

Sl.
Name of Professional Position Assigned
No.
1. Mr.A.T.M.ShamsulAlam EnvironmentalExpert
2. Engr.JalalAhmedChoudhury ElectricalEngineer
3. Mr.AshokeKumarDas Ecologist
4. Dr.DilrubaAhmed Socio-economist

5
 Introduction

Sl.
Name of Professional Position Assigned
No.
5. Mr.Mohammed Mukteruzzaman FisheriesSpecialist(Biologist)
6. Ms.TaslimaIslam EnvironmentalLawSpecialist
7. Dr. Anil Chandra Aich SoilandAgriculturalSpecialist
Additional Team Members
8. Dr. K. M. Noor Newaz Environmental Advisor
9 Md. Azizul Haque Water Resources and Power Management Advisor
10 Pronab Kumar Halder Environmental Expert
11 Md. Maqbul-E-Elahi Primary Energy Expert- Oil, Gas and Coal
12. Fatima Tuz Zohra Junior Environmentalist
13. Md. Mutasim Billah Junior Environmentalist
14. Deeba Farzana Moumita Junior Electrical Engineer
15. Redwan Hossain Jeshan Health and Safety Specialist
16. Farhad Ahmed Junior Environmentalist
17. Irin Afrin Lopa Junior Environmentalist

1.7 Reporting Structure

The EIA report has been prepared in three volume which are Voume –I: Main EIA Report,
Volume –II Appendix and Volume –III: Emergency Response Plan. This report (Volume-I)
contains 15 chapters. These are:
Chapter 1 describes the introduction containing background, purposes, and limitations of EIA
study, need and importance of the project and concludes by introducing the study
team.
Chapter 2 is on legislative and regulatory aspect describing the relevant policies and legal
frameworks for the EIA process of the power plant project.
Chapter 3 covers project data sheet of the proposed power plant comprising of project
proponent, project location and area, nature and size of the project, project
components, project activities and schedule, resources required and their quality,
and utilities demand, required manpower and tentative organogram, tentative
costing and funding etc.
Chapter 4 covers process description depicting project layout, technology selection and
process description, waste management system, green initiatives etc. of the
proposed power plant.
Chapter 5 presents an analysis of various alternatives options for project component such as
fuel type, technology selection, water treatment system etc.
Chapter 6 describes the environmental and social baseline condition with detail physical
environment, water resources, land use and land cover, land resources,
agricultural resources, livestock and poultry, fisheries, ecological resources,
transportation system, key point installations, socio-economic condition,
community health and safety etc.
Chapter 7 presents the potential impacts of project during pre-construction, construction and
post-construction/operation phases and evaluation of the impacts

6
 Introduction

Chapter 8 recommends mitigation measures for various identified impacts, enhancements,

and compensation to restore including pollution control systems, waste
treatment, engineering measures etc.
Chapter 9 outlines all possible hazards and risks associated with the decommissioning and
proposed combined cycle dual fuel power plant, and management of the hazard
and risks.
Chapter 10 describes the EMP with mitigation measures for minimizing the effect of the
negative impacts and enhancement measures for increasing the benefits of the
positive impacts during pre-construction, construction, and operation stages. The
tentative budget for EMP is described in this chapter.
Chapter 11 describes the environmental monitoring plan, implementation of monitoring plan,
performance indicators, and reporting and feedback mechanism.
Chapter 12 pointed out the project planning schedule as per the feasibility report
Chapter 13 Benefit –Cost Analysis describes the indirect project benefits and measure
beyond compliance from the proposed project.
Chapter 14 presents the results of public consultation and information disclosure including
consultation with expert and representatives of institutions and selected focus
group discussions.
Chapter 15 is the concluding chapter of the EIA report with conclusion and recommendations.

7
 2. Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

2.1 Introduction

This section of the EIA describes the key regulatory framework relevant to the proposed 2x650
MW Coal based Power Plant Project at Pyra Port, Patuakhali which includes national
regulations and also international treaties and conventions applicable for the Project.
Therefore, for the purposes of this report, only those regulatory requirements that is directly
relevant for the proposed project will be discussed.
This is to be noted that in Bangladesh, the environmental approval process is overseen by
Department of Environment (DoE) under the Ministry of Environment and Forest (MOEF) and
the key regulations which govern this process are: ECA, 1995 (including all amendments) and
ECR, 1997 (including all amendments).

2.2 Legislative Framework

Overview of Approval Process

According to the national environmental legislation of Bangladesh (ECA, 1995) all

development Projects are governed by some legal and institutional requirements. As such,
assessment of relevant legal provisions, policies, strategies and institutional issues are very
important for any Project proponent or developer before execution of a program or plan. The
proponent has to be well aware of these requirements and comply with the provisions as
applicable and necessary. Before initiating any development Project, it is hence required to
obtain Environmental Clearances or approval from the Department of Environment (DoE).
In accordance with the ECR, 1997, the proposed Coal Based Thermal Power Plant Project
falls under the Red category and as such requires for submission of IEE report to obtain Site
Clearance Certificate (SCC) and subsequently, the EIA report for Environmental Clearance
Certificate (ECC).
An SCC will be issued by DOE upon approval of the IEE study. The submission of IEE shall
include Project Authorization Letter, No Objection Certificate (NOC) from Local
Authority/Deputy Commissioner (DC), Feasibility Report and SCC application form and also
draft Terms of Reference (TOR) for EIA study. Environmental Clearance Certificate (ECC)
will be issued upon approval of EIA study (including associated Environmental Management
Plan). The whole process is shown as a flow chart in Figure 2.1.

Administrative Letter

The No Objection Certificate (NOC), which is a document of “proof of authorization”, is needed

for initiating any Project. This NOC has to be taken for this study from the Local Government,
the Civil Aviation Authority and the Department of Forest.

9
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Figure 2.1: Process of Environmental Clearance Certificate obtaining

Key Legislative Approval

Certain permits and clearances are required to be obtained by the Project proponent from
different Government and statutory agencies at various stages of development of the Project.
A preliminary list of the required legislative approval (in relation to environment, social and
safety issues) is provided in Table 2.1 below:

Table 2.1: Required Permission for Project under Bangladesh Legislation

Permission Permission
Legislation Purpose
Required Given by
 Environment Director General
Conservation Act, 1995 Site Clearance DoE will issue SCC to of DoE
and all amendments. Certificate (SCC) and allow for a detailed EIA as
 Environment Environmental per Section 12 (ECA),
Conservation Rules, Clearance Certificate Rule-7 and Form-3 of the
1997 and all (ECC) ECR, 1997
amendments
Chief Controller
 Explosives Act, 1884, Licenses for explosive- of Imports and
Licence for explosive
 Explosive Substances related Activities will be Exports.
import, transport and
Act, 1908, required, including import, Chief Inspector
possession
 Explosive Rules, 2003 transport and possession. of Department of
Explosives.
Acquisition and To acquire and Ministry of Land
Requisition of Immovable Approval Required compensate for any and local Deputy
Property Act, 1982 private land Commissioner
Ministry of
Bangladesh Electricity Act Permission/Licence Laying down or placement Energy Power
(2010) and Regulations required of electricity supply lines and Mineral
Resources

2.3 Relevant Bangladesh Legislation

The Bangladesh Legislations relevant to this proposed Project are categorized by sectors and
listed below in Table 2.2. In addition, some of the standards, under ECA, 1995 and ECR, 1997
are also outlined as a ready reference. This may be noted that where DOE standards are not

10
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

present at the current stage, WB standards will be applicable as required. Detail applicable
standards of GOB and IFC standards are shown in Annex-II.

Table 2.2: Sector wise relevant Bangladesh Legislations/ Policies

Sector Legislation
 Environment Conservation Act, 1995 and all amendments.
 Environment Conservation Rules, 1997 and all amendments.
 Environment Court Act, 2000
 Wildlife (Protection and Safety) Act, 2012
 Environmental Policy, 1992
 National Conservation Strategy, 1992NEMAP, 1995
Environment and  National Water Policy, 1999
 National Energy Policy (2008)
Natural Resources
 Bangladesh Water Act, 2013
 Noise Pollution Control Rules, 2006
 The Motor Vehicles Ordinance (1983)
 Fish Act, 1950
 The Protection and Conservation of Fish Act, 1950
 The Protection and Conservation of Fish Rules, 1985
 The Forest Act, 1927 and all amendments
 Labor Law, 2006 (and all subsequent amendments).
 Bangladesh Factory Rules, 1979
Industry
 National Industrial Policy, 1999
 Import and Export Control Act, 1950
 Power System Master Plan, 2010
 Electricity Act 1990 and Regulation
Energy and Utilities  Energy Regulatory Commission Act, 2003
 National Energy Policy, 1995
 Bangladesh Petroleum Act, 1974
 The Protection and Conservation of Fish Act, 1950
Fisheries
 The Protection and Conservation of Fish Rules, 1985
 The Acquisition and Requisition of Immovable Property Ordinance, 1982
 Non Agricultural Khas land Lease Rules (Circular no. VU. MO/ Sha-8/
Land use Kha.Jo.bo/46/84/121)
 Non Agricultural Khas land Lease Rules and Principles (VU.MO.Sha-8-
Kha.Jo.bo/46/84/125)
Administrative and  Seventh Five Year Plan, 2016-2020
Antiquities  The Antiquities Act (1968)
 The Territorial Waters and Maritime Zones Act, 1974
 The Territorial Waters and Maritime Rules, 1977
 Bangladesh Merchant Shipping Ordinance, 1983
Transportation  Prevention of the Interference with Aids to Navigable Water Ways
Ordinance, 1962
 Ports Act, 1908
 Chittagong Port Authority (CPA) Ordinance, 1976
 Fire Services Ordinance, 1959
 Fatal Accident Act, 1855
 Dangerous Cargoes Act, 1953
Safety and Security
 Dock Laborers Act, 1934
 Explosive Act, 1884
 The Penal Code, 1860

11
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Brief outlines of some relevant regulations

National laws, by-laws and rules relevant to coal based Thermal Power Plant installation,
operation and maintenance and associated activities have been identified under this study.
Under the national legal framework, the proposed intervention needs to comply with the
environmental legislations of the country and also fulfill the requirements to obtain required
permissions to implement these Activities.
The Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act of 1995

(All amendments) is the key legislation in relation to environment protection in Bangladesh.

This Act is promulgated for environment conservation, standards, development, pollution
control, and abatement. It has repealed the Environment Pollution Control Ordinance of 1977.
The Act has been amended in different sections/sub-sections in 2000, 2002, 2007 and 2010.
The main objectives of the Act are:
 Conservation and improvement of the environment; and
 Control and mitigation of pollution of the environment.
The main strategies of the Act can be summarized as:
 Declaration of ecologically critical areas and restriction on the operations and
processes, which can or cannot be carried/initiated in the ecologically critical areas;
 Regulations in respect of vehicles emitting smoke harmful for the environment;
 Environmental clearance;
 Regulation of the industries and other development Activities’ discharge permits;
 Promulgation of standards for quality of air, water, noise and soil for different areas for
different purposes;
 Promulgation of a standard limit for discharging and emitting waste; and
 Formulation and declaration of environmental guidelines.
Before any new Project/development interventions by the Government or by non-Government
agencies can go ahead, as stipulated under the Environment Conservation Rules 1997, the
Project promoter must obtain Environmental Clearance from the Director General of
Department of Environment (DoE). An appeal procedure does exist for those promoters who
fail to obtain clearance. Failure to comply with any part of this Act may result in punishment of
imprisonment or fine or both. The DoE executes the Act under the leadership of the Director
General.
The Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act (Amendment), 2000

Focuses on: (1) ascertaining responsibility for Compensation in cases of damage to

ecosystems, (2) increased provision of punitive measures both for fines and imprisonment and
(3) fixing authority on cognizance of offences.
The Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act (Amendment), 2002

Elaborates on: (1) restriction on polluting automobiles, (2) restriction on the sale and
production of environmentally harmful items like polythene bags, (3) assistance from law
enforcement agencies for environmental Actions, (4) break up of punitive measures and (5)
authority to try environmental cases.

12
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

The Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act (Amendment), 2010

Introduces new rules & restriction on: a) Ensure proper management of hazardous wastes to
prevent environmental pollution and Health Risk, b) No remarked water body can be filled
up/changed, in case of national interest; it can only be done after getting clearance from the
respective department; and c) Emitter of any Activities/incident will be bound to control
emission of environmental pollutants that exceeds the existing emission standards.
The Bangladesh Environment Conservation Rules, 1997(including all amendments)

The first set of rules, promulgated under the ECA 1995. The Environment Conservation Rules
of 1997 has provided categorization of industries and Projects and identified types of
environmental assessments needed against respective categories of industries or projects.
Among other things, these rules set (i) the National Environmental Quality Standards for
ambient air, various types of water, industrial effluent, emission, noise, vehicular exhaust etc.,
(ii) the requirement for and procedures to obtain environmental clearance, and (iii) the
requirement for IEE and EIA’s according to categories of industrial and other development
interventions.
The proposed Project, according to the DoE, is considered under the Red category of the
Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 (Item 6: Power Plant). The detail guidelines are
attached in Appendix II.
The Environment Court Act, 2000

It’s provides for the establishment of environment courts and matters incidental there to. This
Act also provides the jurisdictions of environment court, penalty for violating court’s order, trial
procedure in special magistrate’s court, power of entry and search, procedure for investigation,
procedure and power of environment court, authority of environment court to inspect, appeal
procedure and formation of environment appeal court.
Noise pollution (control) Rules (2006)

This amendment gives the authority to all the Union Councils, Paurasabhas, City
Corporations, City Development Authority (i.e. RAJUK, CDA, KDA, RDA etc.) to mark off the
areas under their jurisdiction as silent, residential, mixed, commercial or industrial. They
should also put signs to mark those areas. The Act also describes the approved standard limit
of sound in the added Schedule 1 and 2. In the Schedule 1, silent area means area up-to a
radius of 100 meters around hospitals or educational institutions or special institutions/
establishments identified/to be identified by the Government. In the silent area it is prohibited
to use any kind of horns of vehicles, audio signals and loudspeakers. According to this Act,
daytime is counted from 6 am to 9 pm whereas nighttime is counted from 9 pm to 6 am. The
details of the standards for sound in different types of areas are listed down in Table-2.3
according to the Schedule-1 of the Act. The standards for noise level are given in the following
Table 2.3.

Table 2.3: Standards for sound level at day and night

Standards (in dBA)
SL. No. Category of Areas
Day Night
1 Silent Zone 50 40
2 Residential Area 55 45
3 Mixed Area 60 50
4 Commercial Area 70 60
5 Industrial Area 75 70

13
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

According to noise pollution (control) amendment 2006, use of pneumatic horn/hydraulic

horn/multi-tuned horn in any kind of vehicle is banned. It is prohibited to use brick demolishing
machine within 500 meters of residential area. Moreover, use of any kind of noise generating
machine such as mixture machine is restricted to be used in residential area from 7 pm to 7
am.
During election period it is permissible to use loud speaker till 2 days before election from the
period of announcing the schedule. However, this permission is not applicable for silent areas.
Loud speaker can be used, only in residential and commercial areas.
This Act also requires the people exposed to high noise in industries to wear personal
protective equipment (PPE) to reduce the impacts of noise pollution
The Motor Vehicle Ordinance, 1983

It stated to impose a penalty of maximum two hundred taka for those vehicles that are emitting
smoke that poses health hazard in the public places. It also restricts the passenger from
smoking in public service vehicles and in any other vehicles with notice of not smoking. This
ordinance is enforced occasionally but a regular enforcement would be helpful to reduce air
pollution in big cities including Dhaka. However, it is to be noted that amount of the penalty is
very low which may be revised as well.
Bangladesh Sludge Management Plan 2015

To ensure human health and to protect the environment from any negative impacts, proper
management of sludge is mandatory as per the Bangladesh Environment Conservation Act,
1995 (Amendment 2010). In relation to that installation of Effluent Plant (ETP) has been
increasing and becoming advanced for environmentally sound operation and management. It
is mandatory to apply pre-treatment before sludge disposal in order to implement the “National
3R Strategy” (reduce, reuse and recycle) which means that these measures shall be executed
according to the state of technology and ecological feasibility before the waste has to be
disposed in an end-of-pipe facility. Different sludge management options are permissible
depending on the classification of the sludge (Category A, Category B and Category C).
Various method of sludge treatment and disposal like mechanical treatment, chemical
treatment, and biological treatment are available for sludge and industrial wastewater to
protect the environment from the adverse and profound impacts.
The Protection and Conservation of Fish Act, 1950

This Act covers all types of aquatic species including fish, prawn, shrimp, amphibians,
tortoises, turtles, crustaceans, mollusks, echinoderms and frogs at all stages in their life cycle
and all types of water bodies. The Act specifies a number of useful fisheries management
rules for sustainable fish culture and conservation in the country. These are: use of appropriate
fishing gear (net, cage, trap, explosives) and building water management structures (dams,
weirs, bunds and embankments). It also specifies the fishing and non-fishing seasons and the
size of fish below which any prohibited species cannot be killed or sold. This Act is revised
and included the banning of ‘jatka’ of hilsa and use of gill net (current jal) in 2011.
The Protection and Conservation of Fish Rules, 1985

Under the Rules, installation of fixed nets, cage, trap, etc. has been prohibited for controlling
harmful and unlawful fishing Activities. Section 6 of the Rules states:-“No person shall destroy
or make any attempt to destroy any fish by poisoning of water or the depletion of fisheries by
pollution, by trade effluents or otherwise in inland waters”. Moreover, construction of bund,
weir, embankment, etc. has been banned except for the purposes of irrigation, flood control

14
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

and drainage. Use of explosives, poison and small meshes is banned. Also, catching certain
fish during the breeding season from April 1 to August 31 has been banned. It has also been
made illegal to dredge and extract sand and gravel, and discharge waste or any other polluting
matter that disturb, alter or destroy natural habitats of fish in marine reserves. Therefore, the
proposed intervention needs to be carried in such a manner that the activities do not cause
damage to the inland waters or within coastal waters fisheries.
The Forest Act, 1927 (and all Amendments)
The Forest Act of 1927 provides for reserving forests over which the Government has an
acquired property right. This Act has made many types of unauthorized uses or destruction of
forest produce punishable. The Government may assign any village community its right to or
over any land, which has constituted a reserved forest.
According to the Act the Government may prohibit certain Activities in the declared reserved
forest area such as any intervention kindles, keeps or carries any fire arms; trespasses or
pastures cattle, or permits cattle to trespass; causes any damage by negligence in felling any
tree or cutting or dragging any timber etc.
Near the proposed location of the coal based Power Plant no mangrove forest exists at all.
Therefore, the proposed Project complies with this requirement of legislation. During the study
this law and rules and regulations under it has been reviewed to explore whether the proposed
Activities of the Project violates any provisions of the Forest Act.
The Supplementary Rules of 1959 empowered the concerned Governmental bodies to restrict
totally and for a specified period, the shooting, hunting or catching of various birds, animals
and reptiles in the controlled and vested forests. The Private Forest Ordinance of 1959
provides for the conservation of private forests and for the forestation, in certain cases, of
waste-land in Bangladesh.
Wildlife (Protection and Safety) Act 2012

The Wildlife (protection and safety) Act 2012, passed in Parliament on 8 th July, 2012. Under
this Act, the hunting, trapping, killing of wildlife are strictly prohibited. After the establishment
of this Act, a Board will be formed with the concerned members recommended by the
Government. There are certain provisions kept in this Act, e.g. entrance, management, rules
and regulation of the protected area etc. If any person without license performs any kind of
trade, he will be jailed for at least a year.
The Bangladesh Water Act 2013

The Bangladesh Water Act 2013 was passed by the Government on 6 November 2013 to
ensure “integrated development, management, abstraction, distribution, use, protection and
conservation of water resources”. By virtue of this Act, all rights over surface water, ground
water, sea water, rain water and water in the atmosphere is vested on the State.
Notwithtanding the above, “rights over the surface water on any private land shall remain with
the owners of such land”, and such right to use the water shall be subject to the provision of
the Act. Furthermore, under the provisions of this Act, “right to potable water, and to water for
hygiene and sanitation shall be treated as the highest priority right”.
The Act makes a provision for constituting a National Water Resources Council headed by the
Hon’ble Prime Minister. The Council is the highest decision making body and is empowered
to make policies, give instructions to develop National Water Resources Plan for integrated
development and safe abstraction of water and its proper use to ensure protection and
conservation of water resources. The Council is also mandated to approve the National Water

15
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Resources Plan and ensure its implementation, as well as give advice to the Government to
enter into agreement through signing memorandum of understanding and/or signing
conventions and treaty with any Government and international or regional organization to
undertake joint survey, exchange data/information with respect to common water resources
and it’s abstraction and development and undertaking joint measures to prevent pollution of
common water resources.
The Act also makes a provision for approving National Water Resources Plan prepared in
accordance with the Water Resources Planning Act, 1992 containing among others, the
following matters namely:
 Analysis of economic , natural, social, political, environmental, and ecological and
institutional elements, characteristics and impact of water resources;
 Integrated use of surface and ground water emphasizing the highest possible use of
rain water;
 Determination of water quality standard;
 Fixation of priority of water use.
The Act also makes further provision for:

 Declaration of water stress area and management thereof;

 Preferential use of water in the water stress area and exemption thereof;
 Fixing the lowest safe yield level of aquifer and restrictions on abstracting groundwater;
and
 Protection of flood control embankment which states “to ensure the sustainability of
the flood control embankment, no person shall, without the permission of the
appropriate authority, be allowed to construct any house, establishment or any other
structure on, or on the slope of such embankment.”
Finally, if anybody deliberately violates or ignores the responsibility or protection under this
Act, in that case, under the provisions of Sub-section (2), she/he will get maximum of 5 years
imprisonment or maximum Tk. 10,000 as financial punishment or both the punishments.
The Bangladesh Petroleum Act, 1974

The Bangladesh Petroleum Act is enabling legislation that allows the Government of
Bangladesh to enter into all aspects of petroleum exploration, development, exploitation,
production, processing, refining and marketing. In addition, the Government is authorized to
enter into Petroleum Agreement(s) with any person(s) for the purpose of petroleum operations.
The duties of such person(s) are:
 To ensure that petroleum operation is carried out in a proper and worker like manner
and in accordance with good oil field practice.
 To carry out petroleum operation in any area in a manner that does not interfere with
navigation, fishing and conservation of resources.
 To consider the factors connected with the ecology and environment.
Clause 6(2) of the Act sets out certain details related to environment and safety: “In particular,
and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing provision, a person engaged in any
petroleum operations shall, in carrying out such operations in any area:

16
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

 Control the flow and prevent the waste or escape’ in the area, of petroleum or water;
 Prevent the escape in that area of any mixture of water or drilling fluid with petroleum
or any other matter;
 Prevent damage to petroleum-bearing strata in any area, whether adjacent to that area
or not; and
 Keep separate any petroleum pool discovered in the area.”
Apart from the above, the law provides the following obligations:
a) Prescribing places where petroleum may be imported and prohibiting its import
elsewhere;
b) Regulating the import of petroleum;
c) Prescribing the periods within which licenses for the import of [Class i] petroleum shall
be applied for, and providing for the disposal, by confiscation or otherwise, of any
[Class i] petroleum in respect of which a license has not been applied for within the
prescribed period or has been refused and which has not been exported;
d) Regulating the transport of petroleum;
e) Specifying the nature and condition of all receptacles and pipe-lines in which petroleum
may be transported;
f) Regulating the places at which and prescribing the conditions subject to which,
petroleum may be stored;
g) Specifying the nature, situation and condition of all receptacles in which petroleum may
be stored;
h) Prescribing the form and conditions of licenses for the import of dangerous petroleum,
and for the transport or storage of any petroleum, the manner in which applications for
such licenses shall be made, the authorities which may grant such licenses and the
fees which may be charged for such licenses; (i) determining in any class of cases
whether a license for the transport of petroleum shall be obtained by the consignor.
Consignee or carrier;
i) Providing for the granting of combined licenses for the import, transport 18 [storage
and distribution] of petroleum, or for any two of such purposes;
i. Prescribing the proportion in which any specified poisonous substance may be
added to petroleum, and prohibiting the import, transport or storage of petroleum
in which the proportion of any specified poisonous substance exceeds the
prescribed proportion;
ii. Regulating the distribution of petroleum;
iii. Prescribing the conditions for the appointment of, and the granting of the licenses
to, agents, dealers and stockiest;
iv. Prescribing the form and conditions of agreement between and agent, dealer or
stockiest and an oil marketing company;
v. Providing for cancellation or restoration of licenses of an agent or a dealer and
of agreement between an oil marketing company and an agent, dealer or
stockiest; and

17
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

vi. Generally, providing for any matter which in its opinion, in expedient for proper
control over the import, transport, storage and distribution of petroleum.”

Administrative and land acquisition related relevant regulations

The Penal Code, 1860

The Penal Code of 1860 has some valid provisions related to pollution management,
environment protection and protection of health and safety. Some of these are: Section 277:
Falling Water or Public Spring or Reservoir; Section 278: Making Atmosphere Noxious to
Health; Section 284: Negligent Conduct with Respect to Poisonous Substance; Section 285:
Negligent Conduct with Respect to Fire or Combustible Matter; and Section 286: Negligent
Conduct with Respect to Explosive Substance. (Chapter XIV of offences affective Public
health, safety, convenience, decency and morals).
The Acquisition and Requisition of Immovable Property Ordinance, 1982

This Ordinance has replaced the Land Acquisition Act of 1894 and the East Bengal
(Emergency) Requisition of Property Act of 1948. The Ordinance governs acquisition and
requisition by the Government of immovable property for any public purpose or in the public
interest. It may be noted that contrary to the previous Acts (i.e. Act XIII of 1948), this Ordinance
deals only with immovable property.
The Ordinance has well-defined procedures regarding payment of compensation for an
acquired piece of land. If, for example, the land is used for growing rice, then an amount
equivalent to approximately 1.5 times the market value of a given variety of rice (e.g., paddy)
that is currently being (or could be) produced annually is fixed as a yearly lease value. In case
of outright purchase (carried out on a 99-year lease), the compensation-value of acquired land
varies widely according to the locality, soil fertility, and access to transportation and related
infrastructure factors. The current compensation and resettlement provisions are however
inadequate both in terms of timing of payments and quantum. The procedures involved are
cumbersome and time consuming and often causes hindrance to the smooth execution of the
Project. Legal provisions covering adequate compensation to the Project affected persons,
particularly disadvantaged groups such as women and squatters and such other vulnerable
groups are yet to be framed.
Import and Export Control Act, 1950

The Government may prohibit, restrict or otherwise control the import or export of goods of
any specified description, or regulate generally all practices (including trade practices) and
procedures connected with the import or export of such goods. No goods of the specified
description shall be imported or exported except in accordance with the condition of a license
to be issued by the Chief Controller.

Relevant regulations related to Port and water ways

The Territorial Waters and Maritime Zones Act, 1974

The Territorial Waters and Maritime Zones Act, 1974 was adopted to declare the territorial
waters, continental shelf and other maritime zones and to make rules related to these declared
zones.

18
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

The law says that the Government may, by notification in the official Gazette, declare the limits
of the sea beyond the land territory and internal waters of Bangladesh which shall be the
territorial waters of Bangladesh specifying in the notification the baseline:
a) From which such limits shall be measured; and
b) The waters on the landward side of which shall form part of the internal waters of
Bangladesh.
The law says that where a single island, rock or a composite group thereof constituting the
part of the territory of Bangladesh is situated seawards from the main coast or baseline,
territorial waters shall extend to the limits declared by notification under Section 3 sub-section
(1) measured from the low waterline along the coast of such island, rock or composite group.
The Sovereignty of the Republic extends to the territorial waters as well as to the air space
over and the bed and subsoil of, such waters. According to the law, no foreign ship shall,
unless it enjoys the right of the innocent passage, pass through the territorial waters. Foreign
ship having the right of innocent passage through the territorial waters shall, while exercising
such right, observe the laws and rules in force in Bangladesh. The Government may, by
notification in the official Gazette, suspend the innocent passage of any ship in the specified
areas of the territorial waters, if it is of opinion that such suspension is necessary for the
security of the Republic. No foreign warship shall pass through the territorial waters except
with the prior permission of the Government.
This law is very important for the proposed intervention of coal based power plant to be
constructed at Kalapara, Patuakhali as fuel (coal) for this would be imported from the source
country to the Project site through the Bay of Bengal. During the study, this Act has been
reviewed to explore whether there is any violation between the proposed Activities and the
rules of law.
The Territorial Waters and Maritime Zones Rules, 1977

These Rules (implement Act No. XXVI of 1974) are bearing the declaration of the territorial
waters and maritime zones. The 16 sections regulate the conduct of foreign ships in territorial
waters, Activities in the economic zone and on the continental shelf, the application of custom
and fiscal laws to the economic zone.
Hazardous Wastes and Ship Breaking Waste Management Rules, 2011

The main focus of this legislation describes, Premised on Basel; barred import if ships not
certified by authorized agents of exporting countries as not containing hazardous wastes;
provided regulations of safe disposal of hazardous waste; emergency response plan;
Implementation rests with a National Technical Committee under MoEF.
This regulation is applicable for this project as the project activities involve in carrying coal
from overseas and may encounter an accident which subsequently require ship braking within
the territory of coal imported country and in case of this project is Bangladesh.
Bangladesh Merchant Shipping Ordinance 1983

Under the Bangladesh Merchant Shipping Ordinance 1983, it is prohibited for any foreign ship
to load or unload cargo within the territorial waters of Bangladesh without written permission
from the Shipping Authority. This Ordinance sets standards for the construction of vessels. If
the vessel has not been surveyed within Bangladesh, the Ordinance will require the ship to
hold evidence of equivalent inspection such as a valid Safety Convention Certificate. A valid

19
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

International Load Line Certificate (or proof of exemption) is also required under Sections .297
and 339 for Port clearance and to avoid undue delay in loading and unloading.

Prevention of the Interference with Aids to Navigable Water Ways Ordinance, 1962

Under the Prevention of the Interference with Aids to Navigable Water Ways Ordinance, 1962;
whoever commits mischief by damaging, removing, tampering with or handling any of the aids
to navigation, or by doing any act which renders any of the aids to navigation less useful as
such, and whoever abets such mischief, shall be punished with imprisonment which may
extend to three years, or with fine, or with both.
Ports Act, 1908

The Ports Act 1908 was adopted to consolidate the enactments relating to Ports and Port
charges. The administering authority is the Ministry of Shipping. Subject to this Act, a
Conservator is appointed for every Port. The Conservator of Chittagong Port administers the
provisions of the Act for the Port.
Specific environmental management provisions of the Act are given under Section 21 (1)
which prohibits the discharge of ballast, rubbish and oil into any Port or adjacent areas. Under
Section 31 of the Act, the movement of vessels of 200 tons or more cannot enter, leave or be
moved within any Port without having a pilot on board. In addition, no vessel of more than 100
tones is to enter, leave or be moved within any Port without having a pilot, unless authority to
do so has been given in writing. The lawful use of infrastructure such as piers and moorings,
and ensuring navigable waters are not obstructed is detailed under Section10, whereas
Section 21 prohibits interference with buoys, beacons and moorings. Unless permission has
been granted by the Conservator, any action that causes or may cause injury to the bank or
shore is prohibited under Section 30 (1).
Chittagong Port Authority (CPA) Ordinance, 1976

It is mentioned in s.10 (1) Subject to the provisions of this Ordinance; the Authority may take
such measures and exercise such powers as may be necessary for carrying out the purposes
of this Ordinance. (2) Without prejudice to the generality of the powers conferred by sub-
section (1), the Authority shall, in particular, have power-
 To construct, maintain and operate docks, moorings, piers and bridges within the Port,
with all necessary and convenient drains, arches, culverts, roads, railways, fences and
approaches;
 To undertake any work of or in connection with the loading, unloading and storing of
goods in the port;
 To construct, maintain and operate ferry vessels to carry passengers, vehicles and
goods within the port;
 To construct, maintain and operate railways, warehouses, sheds, engines, cranes,
scales and other appliances for conveying, receiving, handling and storing goods to be
landed or shipped or otherwise dealt with by the Authority;
 To reclaim, excavate, enclose or raise any part of the bank or bed of the river;
 To construct, maintain and operate dredgers and appliances for clearing, deepening
and improving the bed of the river;

20
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

 To construct, maintain and operate all means and appliances for berthing, loading and
discharging vessels;
 To construct, maintain and operate vessels, saving life and property or recovering any
property lost, sunk or stranded;
 To supply fuel or water to vessels;
 To provide fire and security services within the port;
 To acquire, hire, procure, construct, erect, manufacture, provide, operate, maintain or
repair anything whatsoever required by the Authority for the purposes of this
Ordinance.
In s.42(1) in the –case of any damage or mischief is done to any dock, pier or work of the
Authority by any vessel, through the negligence of the master thereof or of any of the mariners
or persons employed therein, not being in the service of the Authority, any Magistrate of the
first class having jurisdiction in the port area may, on the application of the Authority and on
declaration by it that payment for such damage or mischief has been refused or has not been
made on demand, issue a summons to the master or owner of such vessel, requiring him to
attend on a day and at an hour named in the summons to answer touching such damage or
mischief.
Payra Port Act, 2013

Payra Sea Port is the 3rd sea port of Bangladesh located in the bank of Rabnabad Channel
under Kalapara, a sub district of Patuakali. In order to increase the economic activities in the
central zone and meet the future demand, Payra Sea Port Act 2013 was passed in National
Parliament on 10 November 2013. Government has taken Short, Mid & Long Term Plan to
develop a state of art modern sea port.
 As Short Term Plan, Payra Port Authority is set to operate the port activities by off
loading cargos from mother ships at outer/inner anchorage and transported to the
hinterlands through river routes.
 Under Mid Term Plan, by 2018 Govt is going to operate the port with at least one
multipurpose and one bull terminal where deep draught vessel with up to 12m can
berth safely.
 Under Long Term Plan, by 2023 the port would be fully operational with a 16 m channel
where minimum 10 km container & other terminals with all other associated facilities
like establishing EEZ, Air port, Port city, Dockyard/Shipyard, Echo Tourism etc
centering to the port.
 PPA’S objective focuses mainly on providing necessary services and facilities to the
port users efficiently and effectively at competitive price.

Relevant regulations in relation to health, safety and labor

The Fire Services Ordinance 1959

The Fire Services Ordinance 1959 states that the owner needs to obtain a license under the
Ordinance before using premises as a warehouse. In addition, under this Ordinance the
Government by Order no. HSLG/SVII/1R-1/60/295 dated 3rd June 1960 declared that any
stock of coal exceeding four tones shall be considered to be a fire risk.

21
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

The Fatal Accidents Act, 1855

An Act to provide compensation to families for loss occasioned by the death of a person
caused by actionable wrong. It is mentioned in Section.1, whenever the death of a person
shall be caused by wrongful act, neglect or default, and the act, neglect or default is such as
would (if death had not ensued) have entitled the party injured to maintain an action and
recover damages in respect thereof, the party who would have been liable if death had not
ensued shall be liable to an action or suit for damages, notwithstanding the death of the
person injured, and although the death shall have been caused under such circumstances as
amount in law to felony or other crime.
The Dangerous Cargoes Act, 1953
The Dangerous Cargoes Act, 1953 was enacted to provide provisions related to the safety of
ports in respect of the transit, working and storage of dangerous cargoes. Relevant provisions
include Section.3 (which deals with explosives and fires on vessels), Section 6 (safety of
vessels imports) and Section 9 (enforcement). The concerned authority is the Deputy
Conservator of the Port, Board of Trade or the Ministry of Communication and the Chief of
Naval Staff.
The Dock Laborers Act, 1934
An Act to give effect in Bangladesh to the Convention concerning the protection against
accidents of workers employed in loading and unloading ships. It is stated in Section 5(1), the
Government may make regulations providing for the safety of working places on shore and of
any regular approaches over a dock, wharf, quay or similar premises which workers have to
use for going to or from a working place at which the processes are carried on, and for the
lighting and fencing of such places and approaches, prescribing the measures to be taken in
order to prevent dangerous methods of working in the stacking, un-stacking, stowing and un-
stowing of cargo, or handling in connection therewith, prescribing the precautions to be
observed when the workers have to work where dangerous or noxious goods are, or have
bee, stowed or have to deal with or work in proximity to such goods.
It is mentioned in Section 9, any person who unless duly authorized, or in case of necessity,
removes any fencing, gangway, gear, ladder, life-saving means or appliance, light, mark,
stage or other thing required to be provided by or under the regulations made under this Act;
or having in case of necessity removed any such fencing, gangway, gear, ladder, life-saving
means or appliance, light, mark, stage or other thing, omits to restore it at the end of the period
for which its removal was necessary; shall be punishable with fine which may extend to five
hundred taka.
Labor Law- 2006 and 2013
The Act provided guidelines for health, safety and wellbeing of work force during project life
cycle. In addition, it also stipulated that children under 18 years are not allowed to be employed
during project life cycle and therefore, this law requires to be complied.
The Explosives Act, 1884
The Government may for any part of Bangladesh, make rules consistent with this Act to
regulate or prohibit, except under and in accordance with the conditions of a license granted
as provided by those rules, the manufacture, possession, use, sale, transport and importation
of explosives or any specified class of explosives.
Any person manufacturing, possessing, using, selling, transporting or importing an explosive
in contravention of a notification issued, shall be punishable with imprisonment for a term
which may extend to ten years and shall not be less than two years and also with a fine which

22
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

may extend to fifty thousand Taka, in default of which with a further imprisonment for a term
which may extend to one year, and in the case of importation by water or land, the owner and
master of the vessel or carriage in which the explosive is imported shall, in the absence of
reasonable excuse, each be punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to ten
years and shall not be less than two years and also with a fine with a further imprisonment for
a term which may extend to one year.
Boiler Act, 1923
The Act consolidates and amends the law relating to steam-boilers. The main objective of
Boiler Act 1923 is to ensure safe operation and maintenance of boiler. Key issues of the Act
are outlined below:
 Prohibition of use of unregistered or uncertificated boiler
 Renewal of boiler certificate upon the expiry, accidents, moved, structural alteration,
or any dangerous condition
 Regulating the inspection and examination of boilers and steam-pipes,
 Prescribing the duties of owner at examination, and production and transfer of
certificates
 Exclusion of any specified area from the boiler operation
 Impose local limits and power of authorized person to oversee the limit
 Prescribing the maximum pressure at which a boiler may be used and describing the
method of determining the maximum pressure.
 Revocation of certificate or provisional order if the certificate is fraudulently obtained
or boiler is not in good condition.
 Restriction on alterations and renewals of any registered boilers without written
sanction of such alteration, addition, or renewal
 Reporting of accidents to boilers or steam-pipe must be made by owner within twenty-
four hours of the accident in written form
 Registration number allotted to the boiler must be marked on the boiler otherwise
penalties apply. Any kind of invisibility of register number by remove, alter or deface is
also punishable.
 Prescribed penalties for illegal use of boiler or use the boiler at higher speed than the
allowed limit.

2.4 Policy Guidance

Under this study, a number of sectorial national policies have been reviewed to identify the
guiding principles which are relevant to the Coal based Thermal Power Plant installation,
operation and maintenance activities. The sectors’ policies include energy, environment,
water, forest, transport, import; fisheries, etc.

National Environment Policy, 1992

The National Environment Policy of 1992 sets out the basic framework for environmental
action, together with a set of broad sectorial action guidelines. The Policy provides the broader
framework of sustainable development in the country. It also stated all major undertakings,
which will have a bearing on the environment; (including setting up of an industrial
establishment) must undertake an IEE and EIA before they initiate the Project.
The Policy delineates DoE, as the approving agency for all such IEE and EIA’s to be
undertaken in the country. The policy guidelines of fifteen sectors are stated in the Policy.

23
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Under the ‘energy and fuel sector’ (Section 3.4), the use of environmentally sound and less
harmful fuel has been encouraged in Section 3.4.1. Section 3.4.5 provides, ‘Conservation of
country’s fossil fuel reserve and renewable sources of energy’. Section 3.4.6 provides that EIA
should be conducted before implementation of Projects for extraction of fuel and mineral
resources.
Under the Environmental Action Plan Section of the Policy and sub-section ‘Fuel and Energy’
provides that:
 Section 4.2 “In the rural areas, the use of gas, coal, kerosene and petrol as fuel will be
expanded, so that fuel wood, agricultural residues, and cow dung is conserved. This
will help the use of agricultural residues, and cow dung etc. as manure” and
 Section 4.7 “Appropriate measures will be taken to ensure that extraction, distribution
and use of natural resources such as oil, gas, coal, peat etc. do not adversely affect
air, water, land, the hydrological balance and the ecosystem”.
 Section 3: ‘Forest, wildlife and biodiversity’ directs the followings:
o Conserve wildlife and biodiversity, strengthen related research and help
dissemination and exchange of knowledge in these areas; and
o Conserve and develop wetlands and protection of migratory birds.

National Environmental Management Action Plan 1995

The National Environmental Management Action Plan (NEMAP) is a wide ranging and multi-
faceted plan, which builds on and extends the statements set out in the National Environment
Policy (NEP). NEMAP was developed to address issues and management requirements for a
period between 1995 and 2005 and set out the framework within which the recommendations
of the National Conservation Strategy (NCS) are to be implemented.
NEMAP has the following broad objectives:
 Identification of key environmental issues affecting Bangladesh;
 Identification of actions necessary to halt or reduce the rate of environmental
degradation;
 Improvement of the natural and built environment;
 Conservation of habitats and biodiversity;
 Promotion of sustainable development; and
 Improvement in the quality of life of the people.
One of the key issues in NEMAP regarding the energy sector is “energy conservation
awareness is generally low throughout the country”. NEMAP did not recognize mineral
resources as an important sector and there is no separate discussion on this.

Power System Master Plan, 2016

The Power System Master Plan (PSMP) 2016, aims at assisting the Bangladesh in formulating
an extensive energy and power development plan up to the year 2041, covering energy
balance, power balance, and tariff strategies.
PSMP 2016 addresses issues such as sustainable development harmonizing with economic
optimization, improvement of power quality for the forthcoming high-tech industries, and the
discipline of operation and maintenance (O&M) for power plants, energy subsidy etc.

24
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Additionally, the Government of Bangladesh has indicated in its new policy “Vision 2041” that
it targets to become one of the developed nations by 2041. To achieve VISION 2041, a road
map for PSMP 2016 had been prepared as Bangladesh’s long term strategic power and
energy development planning. The road map, classifying into three timeline; short, mid to long,
and super long, states specific targets to be achieved, and also showed by when, what items
that the government of the Bangladesh shall implement. The major contents of PSMP 2016
are economy, energy balance, power balance, energy cost and tariff balance which include
economic development, primary energy demand, domestic gas supply, LNG supply, coal
supply, oil supply, power development plan, hydropower, renewable energy, power import/
nuclear power, power transmission planning, distribution (rural electrification), improving
power quality, Thermal O & M and Energy tariff policy.

Power System Master Plan, 2010

The main objective of the Master Plan is to formulate a Master Plan for the attainment of stable
power supply in Bangladesh up to year 2030 in consideration of the diversification of fuel
resources, including an optimum power development plan, power system plan, and
identification of the potential power Plant sites based on the fuel diversification study.
Therefore, the study includes a comprehensive power development master plan where the
study of the fundamental conditions of the development (demand forecast, procurement of
primary energy resources, optimum power development plan, future optimum power supply
structure including the positioning of gas-fired power Plants, and so on) are added.
The power sector was heavily dependent on gas. Even two/three years back almost 90% of
the electricity used to be generated from domestic natural gas and rest by hydro-electricity
and coal. The Power System Master Plan 2010 has stressed on diversification of the fuel such
as natural gas, coal, furnace oil, diesel etc. as well as non-renewable energy sources.
In this Master Plan, the target composition of power supply resources as of 2030 is set at 50%
from domestic and imported coal, 25% from domestic and imported (in the form of LNG)
natural gas, and 25% for other sources such as oil, nuclear power and renewable energy.

The National Forest Policy (1994)

The National Forestry Policy of 1994 is the revised version of the National Forest Policy of
1977 in the light of the National Forestry Master Plan. The major targets of the Policy are to
conserve the existing forest areas; bring about 20% of the country’s land area under the
afforestation program, and increase the reserve forest land by 10% by the year 2015 through
coordinated efforts of GO-NGOs and active participation of the people.
The need of amendments of the existing forestry sector related laws and adopt new laws for
sectoral activities, have been recognized as important conditions for achieving the policy goals
and objectives. The Forest Policy also recognizes the importance of fulfilling the
responsibilities and commitments under international multilateral environmental agreements.

The National Energy Policy (1995)

The National Energy Policy provides for utilization of energy for sustainable economic growth,
supply to different zones of the country, development of the indigenous energy sources and
environmentally sound, sustainable energy development programs. The Policy highlights the
importance of protecting the environment by requiring an EIA for any new energy development
Project, introduction of economically viable and environment friendly technology.

25
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

One (Section 2.2) of the seven objectives addresses the environment and states, “(vi) to
ensure environmentally sound sustainable energy development programs causing minimum
damage to the environment”.
The seven specific policy recommendations are listed under Chapter 1.9. Of those, the
following three are relevant to the proposed Project:
 EIA should be made mandatory and should constitute an integral part of any new
energy development Project;
 Use of economically viable environment friendly technology is to be promoted; and
 Public awareness is to be promoted regarding environmental conservation.

The National Water Policy (1999)

The National Water Policy of 1999 was adopted to ensure efficient and equitable management
of water resources, proper harnessing and development of surface and ground water,
availability of water to all concerned and institutional capacity building for water resource
management. It has also addressed issues like river basin management, water rights and
allocation, public and private investment, water supply and sanitation, and water needs for
agriculture, industry, fisheries, wildlife, navigation, recreation, environment, preservation of
wetlands, etc. It has also addressed issues like river basin management, water rights and
allocation, public and private investment, water supply and sanitation, and water needs for
agriculture, industry, fisheries, wildlife, navigation, recreation, and environment and
preservation of wetlands.

2.5 International Legal Obligation

Bangladesh is signatory to a number of Multilateral Environmental Agreements (MEAs) and

also some bilateral instruments. Some of them are very important in context of environmental
protection. The legal obligations and provisions of MEAs related to the proposed Project
interventions has been reviewed; (Convention on Biological Diversity; Convention on
Wetlands of International Importance Especially as Waterfowl Habitat; United Nations
Convention on the Law of the Sea; Convention concerning the Protection of the World Cultural
and Natural Heritage)
Bangladesh has already had accessed to, ratified or signed a number of important MEAs
related to environment protection and conservation of natural resources which shall have to
be complied with during implementation of the Project. The pertinent ones of these are
highlighted below:

Rio Declaration

The 1992 United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED) adopted
the global action program for sustainable development called ‘Rio Declaration’ and ‘Agenda
21’.
Principle 4 of the Rio Declaration, 1992, to which Bangladesh is a signatory along with a total
of 178 countries, states, “In order to achieve sustainable development, environmental
protection should constitute an integral part of the development process and cannot be
considered in isolation from it”.

26
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Convention on Biological Diversity (1992)

The Convention on Biological Diversity, Rio de Janeiro, 1992 was adopted on 5 June, 1992
and entered into force on 29 December, 1993. Bangladesh ratified the Convention on 20
March, 1994.
The Contracting Parties of the Convention have committed to:
 Introducing appropriate procedures requiring environmental impact assessments of its
proposed Projects that are likely to have significant adverse effects on biodiversity,
with a view to avoiding or minimizing such effects, and where appropriate allow for
public participation in such procedures; and
 Introducing appropriate arrangements to ensure that environmental consequences of
its programs and policies, that are likely to have significant adverse impacts on
biodiversity, are duly taken into account.
Obligation has been placed on State parties to provide for environmental impact assessments
of Projects that are likely to have significant adverse effects on biological diversity (Art. 4).

Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, Ramsar (1971)

This convention is also known as the Ramsar Convention. It was adopted on 2 February, 1971
and entered into force on 21 December, 1975. Bangladesh has ratified the Convention 20
April, 2002. This provides a framework for national action and international cooperation for the
conservation and wise use of wetlands and their resources. There are 127 Parties with 1085
wetland sites designated as Wetlands of International Importance’.
This is an intergovernmental treaty, which provides the framework for international co-
operation for the conservation of wetlands habitats. Obligations for Contracting Parties include
the designation of wetlands to the “List of Wetlands of International Importance’, the provision
of wetland considerations within their national land use planning, and the creation of Natural
Reserves. Parts of the Sundarbans Reserved Forest (Southwest of Bangladesh) are one of
the Ramsar Sites.

United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea, Montego Bay, (1982)

This Convention was adopted on 10 December 1982 at Montego Bay, Jamaica. Bangladesh
has ratified this Convention.
Main objectives of the convention are:
 To set up a comprehensive new legal regime for the sea and oceans, as far as
environmental provisions are concerned, to establish material rules concerning
environmental standards as well as enforcement provisions dealing with pollution of
the marine environment; and
 To establish basic environmental protection principals and rules on global and regional
cooperation, technical assistance, monitoring, and environmental assessment, and
adoption and enforcement of international rules and standards and national legislation
with respect to alt sources of marine pollution.

UNESCO World Heritage Convention

Convention concerning the Protection of the World Cultural and Natural Heritage, Paris, 1972:
This convection has been ratified by 175 states. This defines and conserves the world’s

27
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

heritage by drawing up a list of natural and cultural sites whose outstanding values should be
preserved for all humanity. Of the 730 total sites, there are currently 144 natural, 23 mixed
and 563 cultural sites that have been inscribed on the World Heritage List (distributed in 125
State parties). These are the ‘Jewels in the Crown’ of conservation.
The proposed Project intervention should be carried out in such a manner that the above-
mentioned provisions of the multilateral environmental agreements are not violated and many
not cause adverse impact on the natural resources.
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora
(1973)

Entered into force on 1 July 1975, this frame work addresses the overharvesting and
exploitation patterns that threatened species of flora and fauna. Bangladesh ratified on 20
November-1981. Under this Convention, the governments agree to restrict or regulate trade
in species that are threatened by unsustainable patterns and to protect certain endangered
species from overexploitation by means of a system of import/export permits.
Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (Bonn 1979)

This convention sets the framework for agreements between countries that are important to
the migration of threatened species. This Convention came into force on 23 June 1979.
Bangladesh ratified on 1st December-2005.
Succeeding tranches will consult relevant Government authorities and/or experts to avoid
areas known to be habitat of migratory species of wild animals in selecting sites of Project
components.
Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer (1985)

A framework for efforts to protect the globe’s ozone layer by means of systematic
observations, research and information exchange on the effects of human activities on the
ozone layer and to adopt legislative or administrative measures against activities likely to have
adverse effects on the ozone layer. Bangladesh ratified on 2nd August-1990.
Project components will not use chemicals such as methyl chloroform, a solvent generally
used for industrial processes that can affect the ozone layer.
Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer (1989)

This international treaty came into force on 1 January 1989 and is designed to protect the
ozone layer by phasing out the production of numerous substances that are responsible for
ozone depletion. This treaty also requires controlling emissions of substances that deplete
ozone. Bangladesh ratified in 2nd August 1990.
Project components will not use chemicals that can cause harm to the ozone layer.

International Maritime Conventions, Protocols and Agreements

The International Maritime Organization (IMO) came into existence in 1958 but before that few
important conventions came into existence. Bangladesh is signatory to the International
Maritime Organization (IMO). Therefore, all activities relating to shipment of coal through the
Port for consumption of proposed coal based power plant shall have to be done strictly in
compliance with the standards set by the IMO. The Conventions/Protocols relevant for the
proposed project and agreed by GOB are highlighted in Table 2.4 below:

28
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Table 2.4: Relevant Conventions/Protocols agreed by GoB

Issues Conventions, protocols and agreements Remarks
International International Convention for the Safety of life at
Maritime Safety Sea (SOLAS), 1960 and 1974 (including all Applicable
amendments)
International convention on load lines, 1966 and all
Applicable
amendments
Convention on the International Regulations for
Preventing Collisions at Sea (COLREG), 1972 Applicable
(including all amendments)
Marine pollution International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution of the Sea by Oil (OILPOL), 1954 Applicable
(including all amendments)
Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution
by Dumping of Wastes and Other Matter (LDC), Applicable
1972 (including all amendments)
Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution
by Dumping of Wastes and Other Matter (LDC), Applicable
1972 (including all amendments)
International Convention for the Prevention of
Pollution from Ships (MARPOL), 1973 and all Applicable
amendments

2.6 Development Agency’s Health and Safety Guidelines

There are numbers of international financing agencies such as IFC, WB and ADB. All these
agencies have their own policies and guidelines for management of health and safety issues.
In addition, new financial agencies such as Equator Principles Financial Institutions (EPFIs)
also have developed their own policies, procedures and guidelines for management of
environmental and social issues for financing development projects. If the proposed project
has plan for receiving financial assistance from any of these financial institution, in that case,
the proposed project shall have to follow environmental and social safety guidelines of that
particular agency.
The Environmental and social guidelines of some of these financial agencies are described
below:

Social Safeguard policies of ADB

ADB has had environment assessment requirements for more than 20 years and follow own
safeguard policy framework, which is currently updated as Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS
2009). SPS 2009 comprises three key safeguard areas: i) environment; ii) involuntary
resettlement and iii) indigenous peoples. All three-safeguard policies involve a structured
process of impact assessment, planning and mitigation to address the adverse effects of
projects and programs throughout the project cycle.It aims to avoid adverse Project impacts
to both the environment and the affected people; minimize, mitigate and/or compensate for
adverse Project impacts; and help Borrowers to strengthen their safeguard systems and to
develop their capacity in managing the environmental and social risks.
ADB’s Policy states that all investments are subject to categorization to determinine
environmental assessment (EA) requirements. A project is therefore, categorized into one of
the three environmentalcategories (A, B or C) todetermine the level of environmental
assessment. As per ADB screening process, this proposed project is categorized (Coal

29
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

transportation project due to its possible impacts may impact ECA area) as Category “A” and
subsequently an EIA will be required.
Regarding the resettlement plan of a project ADB provides that ‘A satisfactory resettlement
plan must include all eleven essential elements’. The safeguard policies are at the front line of
ADB’s accountability mechanism and compliance review process, since these policies, if
properly implemented, help ensure that third parties do not incur material damages, either
directly or through environmental media, and thus have no basis for complaint.

Social safeguards policies of World Bank

In 1989, the World Bank adopted Operational Directive (OD) 4.00, “Appendix A: Environmental
Assessment”. EA became standard procedure for Bank financed investment Project. In 1991
the directive was as OD 4.01, which has subsequently been changed to operational policy OP
4.01 in January 1999 and the operational policy statement has been updated in March, 2007.
EA is designed to be a flexible process that part of Project preparation allows environmental
issues to be addressed in a timely and cost-effective way during Project preparation and
implementation.
In addition to efforts identified in the 2001 Strategy, the Bank has adopted a set of operational
policies and procedures that deal with the Bank’s core development objectives and goals, the
instruments for pursuing them, and specific requirements for Bank financed operations.
World Bank seeks to ensure that –supported infrastructure and other development projects
take into account the conservation of biodiversity, as well as the numerous environmental
services and products which natural habitats provide to human society. The policy strictly limits
the circumstances under which any Bank-supported project can damage natural habitats (land
and water areas where most of the native plant and animal species are still present).
Specifically, the policy prohibits Bank support for projects which would lead to the significant
loss or degradation of any Critical Natural Habitats, whose definition includes those natural
habitats which are either:
 legally protected,
 officially proposed for protection, or
 Unprotected but of known high conservation value.
In other (non-critical) natural habitats, Bank supported projects can cause significant loss or
degradation only when
i. there are no feasible alternatives to achieve the project’s substantial overall net
benefits; and
ii. Acceptable mitigation measures, such as compensatory protected areas, are
included within the project. (Operational Policy 4.04)

According to the procedure followed by the international financial organizations they are
apprised about the projects for environmental and social risks at an early stage. In the first
appraisal, the so-called screening, the risk of the project is categorized in accordance with
internal guidelines based upon the environmental and social screening criteria of the IFC.
Projects are classified, relating to social or environmental impacts, in Category A (significant
impacts), Category B (limited impacts), and Category C (minimal or no impacts). In regard to
these categorization, the proposed RPCL Coal based Thermal Power Plant Project at Pyra,
Patuakhali falls under Category –A. This is to be noted that, if the project planned to access
fund from WB, in that case all applicable operational policies will be adopted which include

30
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

OP-4.01 for environmental. In addition, OP-4.10 on Indigenous Peoples (ethnic minorities)

may be applied to the project because there are settlements of ethnic group within the project
study area and site-specific project activities will be implemented in areas where ethnic
minorities that meet the eligibility criteria of OP 4.10 are present.

Environmental and social guidelines for Equator principles

The Equator Principles (EPs) are a voluntary set of standards for determining, assessing, and
managing social and environmental risk in project finance, in which the lender looks primarily
to the revenues generated by a single project both as the source of repayment and as security
for the exposure. Project financiers may encounter social and environmental issues that are
both complex and challenging, particularly with respect to projects in the emerging markets.
Equator Principles Financial Institutions (EPFIs) will only provide loans to projects that conform
to the Equator Principles listed below:
Principle 1: Review and Categorization
The risk of the Project is categorized in accordance with internal guidelines based upon the
environmental and social screening criteria of the IFC. Projects are classified, relating to social
or environmental impacts, in Category A (significant impacts), Category B (limited impacts),
and Category C (minimal or no impacts).
Principle 2: Social and Environmental Assessment
For all medium- or high-risk Projects (Category A and B Projects), sponsors complete an
Environmental Assessment, the preparation of which must meet certain requirements and
satisfactorily address key environmental and social issues.
Principle 3: Applicable Social and Environmental Standards
The environmental assessment report addresses baseline environmental and social
conditions, requirements under host country laws and regulations, applicable international
treaties and agreements, sustainable development and use of renewable natural resources,
protection of human health, cultural properties, and biodiversity, including endangered species
and sensitive ecosystems, use of dangerous substances, major hazards, occupational health
and safety, fire prevention and life safety, socioeconomic impacts, land acquisition and land
use, involuntary resettlement, impacts on indigenous peoples and communities, cumulative
impacts of existing Projects, the proposed Project, and anticipated future Projects,
participation of affected parties in the design, review and implementation of the Project,
consideration of feasible environmentally and socially preferable alternatives, efficient
production, delivery and use of energy, pollution prevention and waste minimization, pollution
controls (liquid effluents and air emissions), and solid and chemical waste management.
Principle 4: Action Plan and Management System

Based on the Environmental Assessment, Equator Banks then make agreements with their
clients on how they mitigate, monitor and manage those risks through a “Social Environmental
Management Plan”.
Principle 5: Consultation and Disclosure
For risky Projects, the borrower consults with stakeholders such as NGOs and affected groups
and provides them with information on the risks of the Project. The borrower has to consult
the Project affected communities in a structured and culturally appropriate manner. The
process will ensure free, prior, and informed consultation for affected communities.

31
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Principle 6: Grievance Mechanism

The borrower will establish a grievance mechanism as part of the management system.
Principle 7: Independent Review
For all Projects, an independent social or environmental expert not directly associated with
the borrower, will review the Assessment, Action Plan and consultation process
documentation in order to assist EPFI’s due diligence, and assess Equator Principles
compliance.
Principle 8: Covenants
Incorporation of covenants linked to compliance. Compliance with the plan is required in the
covenant. If the borrower does not comply with the agreed terms, the Bank will take corrective
action, which if successful, could ultimately result in the Bank cancelling the loan and
demanding immediate repayment.
Principle 9: Independent Monitoring and Reporting
Over the life of the loan, in Category A and, if necessary in Category B, an independent expert
is consulted.
Principle 10: EPFI Reporting
Each EPFI adopting the Equator Principles commits to report publicly, at least annually, about
its Equator Principles implementation processes and experience, taking into account
appropriate confidentiality considerations.

2.7 Environmental Standards

The appropriate national environmental standards are applied under the Environmental
Conservation Rules 1997 and subsequent amendments made in 2005 and 2006. Moreover,
the World Bank has established standard for “Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines-
Thermal Power Plants” dated December, 2012. The relevant standard has been pointed out
bellow.

Emission and Ambient Pollution Standards

The environmental emission standards in Bangladesh are promulgated under the

Environment Conservation Rules of 1997 in Schedule-11. There are standards prescribed for
varying with sources of industries. The relevant Gaseous Discharge Quality Standards for
Industrial Units [vide Rule 13] of ECR 1997 are presented in Table- 2.5.

Table 2.5: Gaseous discharge quality standard for industrial units (ECR, 1997 and
Draft ECR 2017)
Sl Capacity of the Power Draft ECR, 2017
Parameters ECR, 1997
No. Plant
Power station of capacity of 50 mg/Nm3 for
1 Particulate Matters 150 mg/Nm3
200 MW or more Coal Power Plant
Lowest height of stack 500 MW and above 275 m for Coal
2 275 m
height Power Plant
500 MW and above 350 ppm for Coal
3 Oxides of nitrogen 50 ppm
Power Plant
4 Chlorine (Cl2) 150 mg/Nm3 15 mg/Nm3

32
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Sl Capacity of the Power Draft ECR, 2017

Parameters ECR, 1997
No. Plant
Hydrochloric acid vapor 35 mg/Nm3
5 350 mg/Nm3
and mist
6 Total fluoride (as F) 25 mg/Nm3 35 mg/Nm3
7 Sulfuric acid mist 50 mg/Nm3 25 mg/Nm3
8 Lead particulates (Pb) 10 mg/Nm3 5 mg/Nm3
Mercury particulates 0.2 mg/Nm3
9 0.2 mg/Nm3
(Hg)

The World Bank have also emission standard for different types of power plant. The emission
standard has the limit depending on the types of fuel use and process of fuel combustion. The
International Finance Corporation (IFC) emission guidelines are produced both for degraded
airshed (DA) and Non-degraded airshed (NDA). However, the IFC emission standard
guideline for thermal power plant are presented in Table-2.6.

Table 2.6: Emission standard guideline for coal fired boiler (IFC 2008)
Pollutants Non Degraded Airshed (NDA) Degraded Airshed (DA)
Unit mg/Nm3 mg/Nm3
SO2 200-850 200
NOx 510 200
PM 50 30

Ambient Air Quality Requirements

The emitted polluted air from different sources make load to the ambient environment. To
maintain the quality of ambient environment the Department of Environment, Bangladesh has
standardized the ambient air quality standard in ECR, 1997 in Schedue-2. The standard
values are precisely changed in the subsequent amendment of ECR in 2005. The air quality
standard is presented in Table- 2.7

Table 2.7: Air quality Standard (ECR 2005)

Concentration
Air Pollutants Concentration ECR, 2005 Average Time
Draft ECR, 2017
10 mg/m3 10 mg/m3 3 hr
CO
40 mg/m3 40 mg/m3 1 hr
Pb 0.5 µg/m3 0.15 µg/m3 Annual
100 µg/m3 100 µg/m3 Annual
NOx
200 µg/m3 24 hr
SPM 200 µg/m3 - 8 hr
50 µg/m3 50 µg/m3 Annual
PM10
150 µg/m3 150 µg/m3 24 hr
15 µg/m3 15 µg/m3 Annual
PM2.5
65 µg/m3 35 µg/m3 24 hr
235 µg/m3 235 µg/m3 1 hr
O3
157 µg/m3 157 µg/m3 8 hr
80 µg/m3 80 µg/m3 Annual
SO2
365 µg/m3 85 µg/m3 24 hr

The World Bank has established in their standard following emission values from the WHO
(World Health Organization), “WHO air quality guidelines for particulate matter, ozone,
nitrogen dioxide and sulfur dioxide, global updated 2005”. In the IFC EHS guideline for thermal

33
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

power plant in 2008 stated that emission from a single project should not contribute more than
25% of the applicable ambient air quality standard to allow additional, future sustainable
development in the same airshed. The approach, termed the Prevention of Significant
Deterioration (PSD) Increment approach is based on allowing a specific incremental release
(termed PSD increment) from each installation. The PSD increment can be viewed as the
maximum relative increase in concentration (as a percentage of the ambient air quality
standard) that is allowed to occur for each pollutant from each installation. The IFC standard
for ambient air quality and PSD value for national ambient quality are presented bellow Table-
2.8 for SO2 and NO2.

Table 2.8: Ambient air quality standard

IFC, 2008 PSD value for National Standard
Air Pollutant Average Period
(µg/m3) (25%) (µg/m3)
10 min 500
125 (IT-1)
SO2 24 hr 50 (IT-2) 91.25
20
Annual 20
1-hr 200
NO2
1-Year 40
NOx Annual 25
Note: IT-Interim Target

In order to determine compliance, the predicted ground level concentration (based on the full
cumulative analysis and existing background data) at each model receptor is compared to the
applicable ambient air quality limit value or PSD increment in the region of overlap between
the impact area of the proposed installation and the existing installation. If the predicted
pollutant concentration increase over the baseline concentration is below the applicable
increment (i.e. 25% of the AQS), and the predicted total ground level concentrations are below
the ambient air quality standards, then the applicant has successfully demonstrated
compliance IFC, 2007 standard for Particulate Matters (PM):

Particulate matter PM10 - 1 year averaging period: 70 µg/m3 interim target 1

50 µg/m3 interim target 2
30 µg/m3 interim target 3
20 µg/m3 guideline
Particulate matter PM10 - 24 hr averaging period: 150 µg/m3 interim target 1
100 µg/m3 interim target 2
75 µg/m3 interim target 3
50 µg/m3 guideline
Particulate matter PM2.5 - 1 year averaging period: 35 µg/m3 interim target 1
25 µg/m3 interim target 2
15 µg/m3 interim target 3
10 µg/m3 guideline
Particulate matter PM2.5 - 24 hr averaging period: 75 µg/m3 interim target 1
50 µg/m3 interim target 2
37.5 µg/m3 interim target 3
25 µg/m3 guideline
The WHO recommends the guideline values, but accepts that for countries where pollution is
already high the interim targets may be used.

34
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Ambient Noise Level

The ambient noise level standard has been modified in the amendment of ECR 2006. The
level of noise from multiple sources will be limited to the following (Table-2.9) standard
depending on the temporal and spatial sensitivity. The noise level standard of IFC guideline is
shown in Table-2.10.

Table 2.9: Noise level standard (ECR, 2006)

Sl. Zone Standard dB(A) Leq
No. Categorization Day (6:00 am – 9:00 pm) Night (9:00 pm – 6:00 am)
1 Silent Zone 50 40
2 Residential Zone 55 45
3 Mixed Zone 60 50
4 Commercial Zone 70 60
5 Industrial Zone 75 70

Table 2.10: Noise level guideline (IFC, 2008)

One Hour Leq (dBA)
Receptor
Daytime (7:00-22:00) Nighttime (22:00-7:00)
Residential, Institutional, Educational 55 45
Industrial, Commercial 70 70

Effluent Standard

Table-2.11 presents the standards for industrial project effluent and sewerage disposal quality
as per guideline of ECR 1997. Table – 2.12 shows water quality standard as per the Draft
ECR 2017. Table- 2.13 and Table – 2.14 shows the IFC standard guideline used for effluent
and sewerage disposal.

Table 2.11: Bangladesh Standards for Industrial Project Effluent (ECR, 1997)
Discharge To
Sl. Inland Public Sewer to
Parameter Unit Irrigable
No Surface Secondary Treatment
Land
Water Plant
1 Ammonicalnitrogen (aselementary N) mg/l 50 75 75
2 Ammonia(asfreeammonia) mg/l 5 5 15
3 Arsenic(asAs) mg/l 0.2 0.05 0.2
4 BOD5at 20oC mg/l 50 250 100
5 Boron mg/l 2 2 2
6 Cadmium(asCd) mg/l 0.05 0.5 0.5
7 Chloride mg/l 600 600 600
8 Chromium(astotalCr) mg/l 0.5 1.0 1.0
9 COD mg/l 200 400 400
10 Chromium(ashexavalentCr) mg/l 0.1 1.0 1.0
11 Copper(asCu) mg/l 0.5 3.0 3.0
12 Dissolved oxygen(DO) mg/l 4.5-8 4.5-8 4.5-8
13 Electro-conductivity(EC) µs/cm 1200 1200 1200
14 Total dissolvedsolids mg/l 2100 2100 2100
15 Flouride(asF) mg/l 2 15 10
16 Sulfide(asS) mg/l 1 2 2

35
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Discharge To
Sl. Inland Public Sewer to
Parameter Unit Irrigable
No Surface Secondary Treatment
Land
Water Plant
17 Iron(asFe) mg/l 2 2 2
18 Total kjeldahlnitrogen(asN) mg/l 100 100 100
19 Lead(asPb) mg/l 0.1 1 0.1
20 Manganese(asMn) mg/l 5 5 5
21 Mercury(asHg) mg/l 0.01 0.01 0.01
22 Nickel(asNi) mg/l 1.0 2.0 1.0
23 Nitrate(aselementaryN) mg/l 10.0 Notyet set 10
24 Oil andgrease mg/l 10 20 10
25 Phenoliccompounds(asC6H5OH) mg/l 1.0 5 1
26 Dissolvedphosphorus(asP) mg/l 8 8 15
27 Radioactivesubstance (to bespecifiedbyBangladeshAtomicEnergyCommission)
28 PH 6-9 6-9 6-9
29 Selenium(asSe) mg/l 0.05 0.05 0.05
30 Zinc(asZn) mg/l 5 10 10
31 Total dissolvedsolids mg/l 2100 2100 2100
oC
40 40 40
32 Temperature (summer)
oC (winter) 45 45 45
33 Suspendedsolids mg/l 150 500 200
34 Cyanide mg/l 0.1 2.0 0.2

Table 2.12: Surface water quality Standard (Draft ECR 2017)

Total Coliform
No/100 (mg/l)
PO4-P (mg/l)
BOD (mg/l)

COD (mg/l)
NO3- (mg/l)

TDS (mg/l)
DO (mg/l)

Hg (mg/l)
N (mg/l)

Pb (mg/l)
Cr (mg/l)
pH

Usage type
6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5

≤2000

1000

Source of drinking water for

10.0

0.02

0.03

0.03
1.5

0.5
≥5

≤2

25

supply only after disinfecting:

1000
≤500

Water usable for recreational

10.0

0.05
1.5

0.5

0.1

0.1
≥5

≤3

25

activity
Source of drinking water for
6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5

≤5000 ≤5000

1000
10.0

0.02

0.03

0.03
1.5

0.5
≥5

≤3

10

supply after conventional

treatment
1000
0.05
≤10

5.0

1.5

0.5

0.1

0.1
≥5

25

Water usable by fisheries

1000

Water usable by various

0.05
≤10

5.0

1.5

0.5

0.1

0.1
≥5

25
-

process and cooling industries

≤1000

1000
≤10

5.0

1.5

0.5

0.1

0.1

0.5
≥5

25

Water usable for irrigation*

Note:*Electrical conductivity for irrigation water – 2250 μs/cm (at a temperature of 25° Sodium less than 26% ;
boron less than 0.2%.

36
 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Table 2.13: Bangladesh Standards for Sewage Discharge (ECR, 1997)

Parameters Unit Values
BOD mg/l 40
Nitrate mg/l 250
Phosphate mg/l 35
SuspendedSolids(SS) mg/l 100
Temperature o 30
C
Coliforms number/100ml 1000

Table 2.14: Effluent guideline (IFC, 2008)

Parameter mg/L, (exceptpHandtemp)
pH 6–9
TSS 50
Oil and grease 10
Total residual chlorine 0.2
Chromium -Total (Cr) 0.5
Copper (Cu) 0.5
Iron(Fe) 1.0
Zinc (Zn) 1.0
Lead(Pb) 0.5
Cadmium(Cd) 0.1
Mercury (Hg) 0.005
Arsenic(As) 0.5
Temperatureincrease byElevated temperature areas duetodischarge ofonce-through coolingwater
thermal discharge (i.e. maximum 30C above ambientwatertemperature)shouldbe minimized in
fromcoolingsystem. mixing zone (i.e. 100m) by adjusting outfalldesignor bythe project specific
EA dependingonthesensitive aquatic ecosystems aroundthe discharge
point.

Table 2.15: Standard after treated sanitary sewage discharge (IFC, 2008)
Pollutants Units GuidelineValue
pH pH 6–9
BOD5 mg/l 30
COD mg/l
125
Totalnitrogen mg/l 10
Totalphosphorus mg/l 2
Oil andgrease mg/l
10
Totalsuspendedsolids mg/l 50
*
Totalcoliformbacteria MPN/ 100ml 400
Note: *Notapplicableto centralized, municipal, waste water treatment systems which are included in EHS Guidelines
for Water and Sanitation.

bMPN=MostProbableNumber

37
 3. Project Data Sheet

3.1 Background and Justification

Electricity is one of the most usable forms of energy and its sustainable availability is one of
themajor preconditions for socio economic development of a country. Bangladesh is one of
the countries where electricity demand is much more than its availability. This short fall
becomes acquit during irrigation period. Recent rapid industrialization and urbanization has
increased the power demand to many fold. Moreover, the government of Bangladesh has
targeted to provide electricity to all by 2021. The Government expects a power demand of
40,000 MW by 2030. Considering the present power scenario of the country the government
has prioritized the Power sector and has formulated Power System Master Plan (PSMP) 2010.
Based on the recommendations of the PSMP 2010 for coal as diversified fuel, “The Rural
Power Company Limited”, an enterprise under the Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral
Resources, has planned to enhance country’s power generation by constructing 2x660 MW
coal based power plant at- Mauza Nishanbari, Dhankhali and Londa, Kalapara Upazila,
Patuakhali district. The project once completed will add about 1320MW power to the national
grid.

3.2 Project Proponent

The Rural Power Company Limited (RPCL), an enterprise under the Power division of the
Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral Resources, is the proponent of this proposed 1320
(2x660) MW Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant project.

3.3 Project Loacation

The proposed power plant project will be located at Mauza Nishanbari, Dhankhali and Londa,
Kalapara Upazila, Patuakhali district.The site is located on the western bank of River
Rabnabad and adjacent to the proposed RPCL Power Plant in the south and APSCL’s
proposed Power Plant in the north. Considering a number of social and environmental criterion
including availability of uninhabited land, proximity to water and fuel source and evacuation of
power facility, the site has been selected from four preselected sites through a compression
matrix.
The proposed project site is accessible through the metal road from Londa Mauza to
Dhankhali Union and Dhankhali Union to Patuakhali – Kuakata Highway. The project site can
also be accessed through the river route using the Rabnabad and Andharmanik Rivers. The
access way to the project site is presented in Map 3.1 and the location of the project site is
shown in Map 3.2. Location of the other KPIs, adminstrative units, proposed airports have
been sketched in Map 3.2. At present, Atomoic Energy Commission of Bangladesh is
searching for the safe site of second Nuclear Power Plant Project in the Barishal Division.
They are initially selected two upazilas: a) Kalapara Upazila in Patuakhali District and b)
Motbaria Upazila in Pirojpur District for geological study. They are trying to select the initial
project area on the basis of a number of set criteria like gelogically stable, isolated area, less
vulnerable to disaster etc.

39
 Project Data Sheet

Map 3.1: Accessibility map of the project site

40
 Project Data Sheet

Map 3.2: Project Location and Distance Map of the proposed project

41
 Project Data Sheet

3.4 Nature and Size of the Project

The Size of the Project is1320 (2x660) MW andthe nature of the proposed project is a Ultra-
supercritical Bituminous or Sub-bituminous coal based thermal power Plant. Each 660 MW
Plant will consist of one ultra-supercritical balanced draft pulverized coal fired Boiler with built
in Dry Low NOx burners suitable for outdoor installation with a stack of 275 meter high and a
tandem-compound, multi cylinder design condensing type steam turbine directly coupled with
hydrogen cooled generator suitable for indoor installation.

3.5 Project components

The proposed project is a green field project which will require a total of about 915.7 acres of
land for construction/installation of Boiler structure, Turbine, Generator, Control room building,
Transformer yard, switch yard, coal stock yard for 60 days’ reserve, ash pond and ash dyke,
conveyor belt, greenbelts, roads, security post, FGD and ESP system, ETP and WTP, water
intake and out fall, compressor house, fire station, laboratories, workshops, security office,
Admin building, canteen, boundary wall, townships, School, Mosque, other community
facilities, etc.

3.6 Project Activities and Schedule

The project schedule received from the proponent are as below.

1. Expected date of starting construction 2. August-2017
3. Expected date of completion of construction 4. December-2021
5. Expected date of trial production 6. June-2021
Activities of the project are classified as Pre-construction, Construction and post construction
or operation phase activities and are detailed as below.
A) Pre-construction phase:
a) Selection of alternative sites (Done)
b) Selection of project site (Done)
c) Land acquisition & site establishment (In progress)
B) Construction phase
a) Civil construction and technological installation work
b) Post erection check & pre commissioning test
c) Monitoring of mitigation measures for Environmental impact of the plant
d) Commissioning test
e) Reliability test run
f) Commercial operation of the plant
g) Overall project management
h) Post construction
i) Commercial operation of the plant
j) Monitoring of EMP
k) Proper O & M of the plant for efficient running

42
 Project Data Sheet

3.7 Required Resource and utility demand

Resources required to develop the project include soil, construction material, manpower etc.
The site is a low lying agricultural land. The site needs earth filling considering the nearest
bench mark of survey of Bangladesh and historical maximum Cyclonic surge height. The filling
earth could be dragged spoil of nearest river (Rabnabad River, Andharmanik River) or could
be brought from other places. Construction materials like cement, MS rod, brick etc. should
be used from the local or regional market of Patuakhali or Barisal.
Electricity demand during pre-construction and construction phases shall be met up from the
nearest sub-station of BPDB if available. Otherwise, a sub-station is to be constructed at
project site and a transmission line with necessary ancillaries. The proponent/PGCB is to
draw the necessary power line with other ancillary components from the nearest sub-station
to the project site. Construction water can be fetched from the nearby “Rabnabad” River.
Drinking water can be drawn from the ground water sources using Deep Tube wells.
The project shall provide employment opportunity for unskilled, semi-skilled, and skilled
categories man power. Employment potential shall increase with the start of construction
activities. During operation phase there will also be employment opportunities, mainly in Plant
operation and maintenance.

3.8 Source and Transportation of Construction Material

Construction materials generally include land filling material (sand, earth), sand, cement, brick,
MS road, shuttering material etc. Most of these construction materials will be available in the
local markets of Patuakhal and Barisal and can be brought to the site by road or river transport.
Land filling material (Sand/Earth/ dredged spoil) is to be collected either by dredging the
nearby river as is the case of RPCL site or by importing soil from other areas. Construction
water can be fetched from the nearby “Rabnabad” River.

3.9 Transportation of Equipment, Machinery, etc

Heavy machineries and Equipment like Boiler structure, Turbo- GeneratorRotor, Transformer
, switch yard etc needs to be transported from abroad.Using Mongla port authority these
machineries and Equipments are to be tranported to the project site by Lighter vessel and
other machineries and equipments like Pump,Fans,firing equipments are to be transported
through road net work.

3.10 Requirement, Source and Composition of Fuel for Plant operation

The main fuel to be used in the proposed project will be sub-bituminous coal. Based on the
chemical configuration of the coal shown in the matrix below (Table 3.1) the feasibility
consultant has recommended for “Designed Blended Coal” of 4,644,692 Tons per annum for
generation of 1320 MW power by operating two units of 660 MW each, which is shown in
Table 3.2. Besides, light diesel fuel oil (LDO) and Heavy fuel oil (HFO) will also be used for
boiler start up, flame stabilization and low-load operation. Annual LDO and HFO consumption
is estimated to be 20,000 m3 (Table 3.3). Required amount of coal can be procured from the
coal yard of ‘Payra Bondor’ coal authority adjacent to the Power Plant and can be transported
to Plant coal stock yard by conveyer belts. From environmental consideration and hazard point
of view, the conveyer belt and the plant’s coal stock yard should be covered with coal gas
venting / flaring provision. (Ref. Feasiblity Report)

43
 Project Data Sheet

Table 3.1: Chemical composition of the imported coal

Blended Coal (Australian - A, Indonesian - I)

No Item Unit Super Best Design Worst
A:I A:I A:I A:I
Proximate Analysis 2:01 3:02 1:01 2:03
1 Total moisture(arb) % 18.33 20 22.5 25
2 Inner Moisture(adb) % 9.56 10.78 12.6 14.41
3 Ash(arb) % 13.76 12.77 11.29 9.8
4 Volatile Matter(arb) % 29.47 29.72 30.1 30.48
5 Volatile Matter(daf) % 26.33 23.7 19.75 15.8
6 Fix carbon(arb) % 38.47 37.52 36.1 34.68
7 FC/VM 1.31 1.26 1.2 1.14
Ultimate Analysis
1 Carbon(arb) % 53.73 52.78 51.35 49.92
2 Hydrogen(arb) % 3.69 3.66 3.61 3.56
3 Oxygen(arb) % 8.5 8.82 9.3 9.78
4 Nitrogen(arb) % 1.27 1.24 1.2 1.15
5 Sulphur(arb) % 0.52 0.48 0.43 0.38
6 Qgr(adb) kcal/kg 5,226.67 5,124.00 4,970.00 4,816.00
7 Qnet(arb) kcal/kg 4,950.00 4,840.00 4,675.00 4,510.00
8 HGI 55 55 55 55
Ash Analysis
1 SiO2 % 50.87 48.48 44.9 41.32
2 Al2O3 % 20.07 19.26 18.05 16.84
3 Fe2O3 % 9.73 10.36 11.3 12.24
4 CaO % 10.67 12.6 15.5 18.4
5 MgO % 2.6 2.94 3.45 3.96
6 TiO2 % 1 0.96 0.9 0.84
7 Na2O % 0.63 0.7 0.8 0.9
8 K2O % 1.13 1.06 0.95 0.84
9 P2O5 % 0.27 0.26 0.25 0.24
10 SO % 2.33 2.7 3.25 3.8

Table 3.2: Coal Requirement for Plant

Best Blended Coal (Super Design Worst

Unit
NotConsidered) Blended Coal Blended Coal
Tonnes per annum 4,505,098 4,644,692 4,793,214

Table 3.3: Diesel oil requirement

Capacity of each tank(in kl)
Type of Oil No of tanks
Super Critical Cycle Ultra Super Critical Cycle
HFO 2 2300 2000
LDO 2 500 450

44
 Project Data Sheet

3.11 Transportation of Fuel for plant operation

Required coal can be procured from the coal yard of ‘Payra Bondor’ coal authority adjacent to
the Power Plant and can be transported to Plant coal stock yard by covered conveyer belts.
The coal will then be transported to crusher and finally to miller for blowing into the furnace for
firing.

3.12 Ash Production

The imported coal will contain on an average 12.77% of ash. Based on the specified coal
quality, it is estimated that around 984.48ton of ash per day will be generated as bi-product
from the plant to generate 612MW electricity. A single plant will produce around 836.64ton of
fly ash (85%) and 147.84 ton of bottom ash (15%) every day. Project has developed 147 acres
of ash impondments to store the unsold/remainings ash through HCSD sytem.

Ash utilization

The dry ash is taken to buffer hoppers for its onward transportation in dry form to storage silo
near plant boundary for utilization. The residual ash can be used in Brick manufacturing,
clinker industries, cement industries, feelings the low lands, compaction purposes etc. There
will be also scope for ash export. At initial stage, the generated ash will be used in and for
development of the project area.
Many Cement plants exist in the vicinity, hence, 100% fly ash utilization might be considered.
Hundred percent bottom ash utilization might also been considered. Ash may be utilized for
the following purposes:
 Concrete production, as a substitute ingredient for Portland cement and sand
 Embankments and other structural fills (usually for road construction)
 Grout and Flowable fill production
 Waste stabilization and solidification
 Cement clinkers production - (as a substitute ingredient for clay)
 Mine reclamation
 Stabilization of soft soils
 Road sub-base construction
 As aggregate substitute material (e.g. for brick production)
 Mineral filler in asphaltic concrete
 Agricultural uses: soil amendment, fertilizer, cattle feeders, soil stabilization in stock
feed yards, and agricultural stakes
 Loose application on rivers to melt ice
 Loose application on roads and parking lots for ice control
 The following sections discuses potential sectors of ash utilization in case of
Banshkhali Thermal Power Plant.

45
 Project Data Sheet

Ash Demand in Cement production

Fly ash is used as a partial replacement for Portland cement. It can replace up to 30% by
mass of Portland cement, and can be added to the concrete’s final strength and increase its
chemical resistance and durability. Recently concrete mix design for partial cement
replacement with High Volume Fly Ash (50 % cement replacement) has been developed. For
Roller Compacted Concrete (RCC) [used in dam construction] replacement values of 70%
have been achieved with processed ash. Due to the spherical shape of fly ash particles, it can
also increase workability of cement while reducing water demand. The replacement of
Portland cement with fly ash is considered by its promoters to reduce the greenhouse gas
"footprint" of concrete, as the production of one ton of Portland cement produces
approximately one ton as compared to zero CO2 being produced using existing fly ash. New
fly ash production, i.e., the burning of coal, produces approximately twenty to thirty tons of
CO2 per ton of fly ash. Since the worldwide production of Portland cement is expected to reach
nearly 2 billion tons by 2010, replacement of any large portion of this cement by fly ash could
significantly reduce carbon emissions associated with construction. A scientific study on use
of fly ash in cement carried out by NTPC India, concludes that use of fly ash in cement have
the following advantages (NTPC, undated):
 Reduction in heat of hydration and thus reduction of thermal cracks
 Improves soundness of concrete mass.
 Improved workability / pump ability of concrete
 Converting released lime from hydration of OPC into additional binding
 Material – contributing additional strength to concrete mass.
 Pore refinement and grain refinement due to reaction between fly ash and liberated
lime improves impermeability.
 Improved impermeability of concrete mass increases resistance against ingress of
moisture and harmful gases resulting in increased durability
 Reduce requirement of cement for same strength and reducing cost of concrete.
 Environmental benefits:
 Reduce cement requirement
 Less emission of carbon
There is a huge demand of ash in Bangladesh. At present there are 81 cement industries.
Among these around 37 - 40 cement industries are always in production. Grossly, country’s
annual cement production is around 14 – 15 million ton. Table 3.4 gives present and
forecasted cement production as well as possible ash demands.

Table 3.4: Present and forecasted cement production and ash demand
Cement Production and future projection Required amount of Ash
Year
(million Ton) (million Ton)
2011 14 2.1
2015 18 2.7
2020 25 3.75
Source: Estimated from data of Bangladesh Cement Manufacturer Association (BCMA, 2011)

46
 Project Data Sheet

Moreover, one of the power company in Bangladesh named BIFPCL, for receiving the EOI from the local
local/nationa companies especially from the cement factories. EOI for 100% lifting of ash published in news paper
in May, 2015. The results shown optimistic that using the ash in future which is as follows.

- 7 parties have shown interest.

- In case of Fly Ash the requirements is approx. 4 times of annual production & in case
of Dry Bottom Ash it is almost double.

- 100% ash generated from the project can be utilized.

Embankment construction
Fly ash might be used in embankment construction of which properties are somewhat unique
as an engineering material. Unlike typical
soils used for embankment construction,
fly ash has a large uniformity coefficient
consisting of clay-sized particles.
Engineering properties that will affect fly
ash’s use in embankments include grain
size distribution, compaction
characteristics, shear strength,
compressibility, permeability, and
frost susceptibility. In coastal region,
BWDB constructs thousands of
kilometers of coastal embankment.
Bangladesh Water Development Board
might be an important client having scope
of using large volume of the generated
ash.
Pre-stressed Railway Concrete
Sleepers
Fly Ash might be used in manufacturing the pre-stressed Concrete Sleepers. Over the years
Bangladesh Railway Authority manufactures Concrete Sleepers. BPDB may negotiate with
Bangladesh Railway and demonstrate scope of ash utilization in concrete sleeper
manufacturing.
Utilization in agricultural field
Ash might be used as fertilizer in agricultural field; blending with organic matter and taking
some measures; the fly-ash might be used as safe and effective fertilizer (Swamy, T. N., et
al., 2012; Gupta, D. K. et. al., 2002). Ash acts as soil modifier and source of micro and macro
nutrients. There are different studies around the world especially in India shows that, use of
ash in agricultural field might result better crop yields (NTPC, undated). Another research
jointly carried out by World Bank and NTPC-India (World Bank-NTPC, 2007) finds Fly Ash
doses of 50 to 200 ton per Hectare in every five years helps to improve soil nutrient status,
textures, permeability etc. The following advantages of fly ash use in agricultural field are
scientifically accepted (Vitekari, H. N., et al., 2012 and Gupta, D. K. et al., 2002) and practically
established in field (World Bank-NTPC, 2007):
 Reduces bulk density of soil–Improves water holding capacity and porosity
 Improve Soil Texture

47
 Project Data Sheet

 Improve permeability status of soil

 Optimizes pH value
 Improves soil aeration
 Reduces crust formation
 Provides micro nutrients like Fe, Zn, Cu, Mo, B etc.
 Provides macro nutrients like K, P, and Ca etc.
 Works as a part substitute of gypsum for reclamation of saline alkali soil and lime for
reclamation of acidic soils
 Surface cover of bio reclaimed vegetated ash pond get stabilized and can be used as
recreational park
 Ash ponds provides suitable conditions and essential nutrients for plant growth, helps
improve the economic condition of local inhabitants
 Works as a liming agent
 Helps in early maturity of crop
 Improves the nutritional quality of food crop
 Reduces pest incidence
 Conserves plant nutrients / water
 Improves the yield by 10% to 40%
Brick manufacturing by using coal Ash
Most modern manufacturing processes use a greater proportion of fly ash, and a high pressure
manufacturing technique, which produce high strength brick with environmental benefits. They
are widely used for the inner skin of cavity walls. They are naturally more thermally insulating
than normal bricks made with other aggregates. Recently in Bangladesh private brick
manufacturing organizations are using these kinds of bricks products because it is more cost
effective and good quality of brick. This makes ash utilization in this sector more essential.
Road sub-base construction
In many ways the geo-technical and pozzolanic properties of ash enables its use in road
pavement construction. Compacted pond ash and bottom ash possess adequate bearing
strength and also meet gradation requirements and can be used as a granular sub-base
material. Fly ash can be utilized for construction of semi-rigid pavement using lime fly ash
concrete and lean cement fly ash concrete. These compositions possess more flexural
strength than flexible pavements and can be adopted for high traffic density roads. In the
concrete roads and runways, fly ash can be utilized as a partial replacement of ordinary
Portland cement (up to 35%) and sand (5-15%). This would result in lowering the cost of
concrete without affecting strength and which will also increase the durability.

3.13 Manpower and Tentative Organogram (RPCL)

Rural Power Company Ltd. (RPCL)

RPCL is a wholly owned subsidiary of the Bangladesh Power Development Board (BPDB) a
state-operated entity executing power generation in different districts of Bangladesh. The
company was established as a Pilot Project of Private Power Generation as per ECNEC

48
 Project Data Sheet

decision on 23rd November, 1994 to enhance the privatization in the Power sector of
Bangladesh. It started generating electricity from 2005, with a present generation capacity of
210 MW.
This company was created in order to meet the prevailing demand of electricity, to solve the
load shading problem in the rural section of the country and to commit to the generation of
reliable power for Rural Development as well as taking part in social & economical
development for rural people of the country. The organogram of the RPCL is presented in
Figure 3.1.

49
 Project Data Sheet

50
 Project Data Sheet

Board of Directors
Internal Audit
Manager (Audit) -01 Staff Officer to MD (SDE) -01
Deputy Manager (Audit) /
Managing Director Office Secretary -01
Assistant Manager (Audit) -01 Driver -01
Auditor -02 Office Attendant -01
Total - 04 Total -04
Legal Advisor
Medical Retainer

Office Secretary - 01
Office Secretary -01
Driver -01 Executive Director
Driver -01 Executive Director Office Attendant -01
Office Attendant -01
(Finance)
(Engineering) Total - 03
Total - 03

Office Assistant -01

Office Assistant -01 Driver -01 Office Assistant -01 General Manager
General Manager
Driver -01 Office Attendant - 01 Driver -01 (A&F)
Chief Engineer Chief Engineer (HR & Admin)
Office Attendant -01 Total - 03 Office Attendant -01
(Planning & Development) (Operation & Maintenance) Total - 03 Total - 03

Superintending Engineer Superintending Engineer (Operation & Deputy General Manager (HR & Admin) Deputy General Manager (A&F)
Company Secretary
(Planning & Development) Maintenance)

Manager/Deputy Manager (Company Secretariat)

XEN (Programme XEN (Design & XEN (Procurement & XEN (Operation & Manager (HR/Admin)-02
-01
Planning & EHS) Development)-01 Contract) -01 Maintenance) -01 Deputy Manager (HR/Admin)-02
Asstt. Manager (Company Secretariat) -01
-01 SDE -01 SDE -01 SDE -01 Assistant Manager (HR) / Manager (Accounts/Finance)/
Jr. Asstt Manager (Company Secretariat) -01
SDE -01 AE -01 AE -02 AE -01 Junior Assistant Manager (HR) -03 Deputy Manager (Accounts/Finance)
Office Attendant -01
AE -01 Total -03 Total -04 Total -03 Assistant Manager (Admin) / -02
Total - 04
Total -03 Junior Assistant Manager (Admin) -04 Assistant Manager/Jr. Assistant
Total- 03
Store Assistant -01 Manager (Accounts) -03
Receptionist cum Assistant Manager/Jr. Assistant
Telephone Operator -01 Manager (Finance) -02
Messenger/Work Assistant-02 Accountant/Assistant Accountant
Rest House Care Taker/ -02
Office Assistant -01
Assistant Rest House Care Taker-01 Office Attendant - 01
Driver -01 AE(Civil) -01 ICT Cell Electrician -01 Total - 10
Office Attendant-01 Total - 01 Manager (ICT) -01 Driver -02
Total - 03 Deputy Manager (ICT)/ Office Attendant -01
Assistant Manager (ICT) -02 Cook -01
Technician -01 Gardener -01
Total - 04 Cleaner -02
Total - 24

Office of the MD -09

Engineering Department -32 Training Cell
Finance Department -19 Manager - 01
Company Secretariat -05 Dy. Manager - 01
HR & Admin Department -34 Assistant Manager/
Junior Assistant Manager - 02
Total - 99
Office Attendant - 01
Total - 05

Figure 3.1: Organogram of RPCL

51
 4. Process Description and Technology

4.1 Process of Site Development

The area will require substantial amount of back filling to achieve the final grade level which
will be minimum 1.5 m higher than the highest flood level (Highest flood level 4.86m MSL) at
the proposed location. The topographical survey report and soil investigation report for this
project are available separately. Contractor is required to carry out the detail soil investigation
and topographic survey and work out the actual earthwork volume during detailed engineering
stage. Fine adjustment in the suggested plant grade levels may be done during that stage

4.2 Project Layout

Project layout plan received from the feasibility consultant is shown in the Figure 4.1. The
project layout include al of the major components like boiler, turbine hall, HCSD places, ETP,
FGD, residential buildings etc.

4.3 Technology and Process Description of Individual Plant Components

Power Generation

The proposed 1320 MW power plant will have a pulverized coal fired ultra-super critical boiler
with auxiliaries and ancillaries like feed water pump, FD Fans, coal crasher etc., a steam
turbines coupled with hydrogen cool generators suitable for indoor installation. There will be
400 KV GIS sub-station for power evacuation. In addition to coal, light diesel fuel oil will be
used to start-up as well as flame stabilization and during low-load operation. The main Plant
consists of three interconnected structures: (i) boiler structures, (ii) turbine building, and (iii)
an integrated control and electrical building as shown in the Figure 4.2.

Turbine and its Auxiliaries

The steam turbine-generator converts the heat energy of steam into electrical energy. The
steam after releasing most of its energy is discharged to the condenser to condense. The
steam turbine is a tandem-compound, condensing, multi cylinder design, directly coupled with
the generator suitable for indoor installation. It has its integral systems and auxiliaries like
HP/MP/LP parts, Hydrogen cooled Generator, lube oil system, control-fluid system,
condensers, condenser air evacuation system, HP&LP Bypass system, condensate polishing
system, condensate pumps along with their drives, automatic turbine run-up system,
instruments, turbine protection and interlock system, automatic turbine testing system and
turbine hall EOT cranes.

Steam Generator and Auxiliaries

The steam generators shall be a once through, water tube, direct pulverized coal fired, top
supported, balanced draft furnace, single reheat, dry bottom type, suitable for generation of
steam at ultra-supercritical pressure and temperature with built in dry low NOx burner for NOx
reduction. Boiler will be designed in such a way that oil firing for flame stabilization will not be
required beyond low load. For coal firing the entire operation of purging, insertion, air and fuel
sequencing, removal and blow off shall be automatic. The furnace should be suitable for out
door installation.

53
 Process Description and Technology

54
 Process Description and Technology

Figure 4.1: Project Layout Plan

55
 Process Description and Technology

56
 Process Description and Technology

Figure 4.2: Process flow diagram of the coal based thermal power plant

Fuel Oil Burning System/Firing system

Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO) would be used for start-up and low load operation and Light Diesel Oil
(LDO) will be used for light up and warm up of unit.
Boiler will be designed in such a way that oil firing for flame stabilization will not be required
beyond low load. For coal firing the entire operation of purging, insertion, air and fuel
sequencing, removal and blow off shall be automatic.

Soot Blowing System

Soot blowers are designed to clean soot and slag from the heat transfer surfaces of the boiler
and air pre-heater. A fully automatic, sequentially controlled, microprocessor based steam
soot blowing system, complete with provision for individual or pair operation with facility to
bypass any soot blower shall be provided. Steam will be supplied at a constant pressure from
the cold reheat system. The system shall have short retractable rotary wall blowers for the
furnace and long retractable rotary blowers for the super heater, re-heater and economizer.
The number and location of the soot blowers shall be determined by the boiler supplier.

Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP)

An electrostatic precipitator consists of a box with metal plates and hanging electrodes parallel
to flow. The electronic components set the power to high voltage and apply between the plates
and the electrodes, such that the electrodes charge the particles, then the particles are
attracted to the oppositely-charged plates.

57
 Process Description and Technology

A high efficient electrostatic precipitator (ESP) having efficiency to limit outlet particulate
emission will be installed. The ESP will collect fly ash and other air borne particulate matters
from flue gas. The electrostatic precipitator (ESP) will have a dust collection efficiency of not
less than 99.9% while firing coal. The ESP will be provided with gas tight dampers at inlets
and outlets so as to allow safe maintenance during operation. The ESP will be provided with
programmable wrapper control system and management system to ensure safe and optimum
operation of ESP. Periodically, the plates are wrapped with automatic hammer assemblies,
which causes the ash to fall into hoppers below the plates.

Flue Gas Desulfurization System

Lime operated Flue Gas Desulfurization (FGD) system will be installed in the flue gas path
before Chimney. This system should have the facility to operate as and when required based
on Sulfur content in the coal to meet the ground level SO 2 concentration within the standard
of MoEF.

4.4 Project Overview

The proposed project is a 2x660MW sub-bituminous coal based thermal power Plant. Each
660 MW Plant will consist of one ultra-supercritical balanced draft pulverized coal fired Boiler
with built in Dry Low NOx burners suitable for outdoor installation with a stack of 275-meter-
high and a tandem-compound, multi cylinder design condensing type steam turbine directly
coupled with hydrogen cooled generator suitable for indoor installation.
The primary fuel will be sub-bituminous coal for continuous operation and liquid fuel (HFO,
LDO) for Boiler start-up, flame stabilization and low load operation. A detail discussion on fuel
source, quality and requirement is made in article 3.9, under the title “Requirement, Source
and Composition of Fuel for Plant operation:
Close cooling cycle with cooling tower has been envisaged for the project. Surface water from
the Rabnabad channel shall be used for condenser cooling and all other purpose.
The generated power of the proposed power plant after being stepped up needs to be
connected to the plant switch-yard and then to the PGCB’s proposed 400 kV GIS substations
at in Kalapara Upazila. The power generated will then be evacuated through the national grid
of Gopalganj-Dhaka. PGCB has already given a consent letter to RPCL for the power
evacuation facilities on June-2019. RPCL will utilize this facility to evacuate their generated
electricity from the proposed power plant.
Generated power at 24 KV of the proposed power plant will be stepped up to 400KV and will
be connected to the plant switch-yard and then to the national grid through a 400KV
transmission line and the proposed Gopalgang sub-station. In this connection, it can be
mentioned that for evacuating the generated power of the identical adjacent coal based power
plant of RPCL, a 400 KV transmission line and a 400/230KV sub-station at Gopalganj are
under construction by PGCB. In this case RPCL may discuss the issue with RPCL to develop
a common transmission facility for evacuation of power of both plants. The same facility can
also be extended for power evacuation of the other upcoming power plant like “Ashuganj
Power Company” and others. This may reduce the project cost and environmental impacts.
Otherwise RPCL has to take up the issue with PGCB for construction of transmission line.
The plant will be designed to meet Best Available Control Technology (BACT) emission limits.

58
 Process Description and Technology

4.5 Land requirement and Acquisition

It has been estimated that the proposed 1320 MW Power Plant will require approximately an
area of 915.7 acres of land for construction of power plant and its other ancillaries and
auxiliaries. This land will be acquired from public under the provision of the Acquisition and
Requisition of Immovable Property Ordinance, 1982 (Ordinance II of 1982). RPCL is to submit
the land acquisition proposal/ request to the concerned Deputy Commissioner (DC) for further
necessary action.

4.6 Stack height

On the basis of DoE regulation (ECR, 1997), a coal based Power Plant of capacity 500MW or
above should have a stack of 275 meter high which is also retain in the Draft ECR 2017.

4.7 Ash handling

Ash is the solid wastes resulting from the combustion of coal in the boiler. It will be managed
through collecting, conveying and interim storing. Ash is of two types (i) Bottom ash and (ii)
Fly ash. The heavier one known as Bottom ash is collected from boiler furnace and the lighter
one called Fly ash is collected at ESP ash hoppers and Economizer hoppers. The total
handling process will employ pneumatic or mechanical conveyors. A cyclonic separator will
separate the bottom ash of each unit in dry form which ash will be collected by ash collection
hopper and will be transported by the pneumatic/mechanical ash conveying system to the ash
silo. The Fly ash will be separated by electrostatic precipitator (ESP) and transported through
the same pneumatic/mechanical conveying system. This dry ash will be collected and
transported in dry form to storage silo for utilization in land development, brick manufacturing,
clinker industries, cement industries, compaction purposes, etc. In case of non-utilization, this
dry ash will be converted to high concentration slurry and will be disposed off to ash disposal
pond.

4.8 Cooling system

Water will be required for steam generation, condensers and other equipment cooling, coal
and ash management, Boiler makeup and domestic purposes etc. Major part of water is
required for condenser cooling. Condenser cooling system of a thermal power plant is either
of closed cooling cycle using cooling tower technology or of once through open cooling cycle
system.
Feasibility consultant has proposed for close cooling system with water requirement as
presented in the table below. Water for cooling tower, Demineralization plant and all other
purpose can be withdrawn from the nearby Ramnabad channel. Sufficient screening including
drum screens to filter out larger aquatic organisms like fishes, frogs shall be adopted. A
schematic water management diagram is presented below in Figure 4.3.
Table 4.1 below shows the comparison in requirements between the super critical and ultra
super critical power plant.

59
 Process Description and Technology

Table 4.1: Comparison between the super and ultra super critical power plant

Sl. No. Item Description Super critical PP Ultra Super critical PP

1 Cooling water required 1,43,582 m3/h 1,27,270 m3/h
2 Auxiliary cooling water 8,615 m3/h 7,636 m3/h
3 Plant water requirement 5,617 m3/h 5,258 m3/h
4 DM water requirement 41 m3/h 40 m3/h
5 Cooling Tower Makeup 3,147 m3/h 2,795 m3/h

Figure 4.3: Schematic Water Management Diagram

4.9 Waste Management

In a power plant the wastes are of two types. Solid waste and liquid wastes. During
construction phase the solid wastes are mainly the construction wastes like concrete pieces,
small cut pieces of MS bars/rods, empty cement bags, empty cartons, garbage etc and waste
from worker’s colony, human wastes, kitchen wastes etc. Human wastes will be managed by
constructing sanitary latrines which will be finally demolished and refilled. Construction wastes
and kitchen wastes will be disposed off in covered Plastic containers kept at designated place
which will be periodically collected by local authority for final disposal. Metal pieces, empty
cartons and paper bags will be initially kept at some designated place and finally sold to the
re-cycling companies. In short all kind of solid wastes to be generated will be disposed off on
site maintaining DoE’s standard. The liquid waste generated in the same period is mainly
water from bore holes, non- consumptive construction water, and waste water from worker’s
colony. Construction site waste water will be collected in a pool and will be reused in
construction activities. Liquid waste from worker’s colony will be drained to a soak pond/ soak
pits.
During operation phase ash particle will be the major solid waste to be generated from the
power plant. The dry ash is taken to buffer hoppers for its onward transportation in dry form to

60
 Process Description and Technology

storage silo. The ash can be used in Brick manufacturing, clinker industries, cement industries,
compaction purposes, etc. There will be also scope for ash export.
A blanket of water over the ash pond and water spraying system will prevent dust emission
from ash pond, coal storage yard and belt conveyor facilities.
All liquid waste generated from boiler blow down, cooling tower blow down, water from leaks
and vents, oily water from turbine floor and transformer areas, waste water from workers’
colony and offices etc. will be drained to and treated as per DOE and other international
standard in sewage treatment plant and oil water separator. After treatment the liquid will be
mostly used as gardening water for green belt and other area.

4.10 Civil Structure and Urban Facilities

A good numbers of civil structures and facilities are to be constructed at site under this project
such as Boiler structure with stake of 275 m high, Turbine house with turbine hall and Control
room, Electrical control room, work shop and warehouse, Office building, Coal handling,
storage and transportation facilities, ash pond, Security fencing, internal roads, Plant Jetty,
Coal storage yard, Rest house, staffs quarter, Guard shed, community facilities like School,
Mosque, Playground etc, Water treatment plant, Central effluent monitoring basin etc.

4.11 High Voltage Switchyard and power evacuation

Based on the plant’s generation capacity, a 400 KV GIS switch yard shall be constructed over
13 acre of land within the project area with required number of circuit breakers, isolators,
incoming outgoing feeders etc. Other major components of the switch yard are the two
numbers of properly rated unit transformers, Current Transformer (CT), Potential Transformer
(PT), Lighting Arrestor (LA), Communication equipment, etc. The generated power of each
660 MW generator will be stepped up to evacuation voltage level through suitably rated
Generator Transformer and will be sent to the proposed Gopalganj 400KV/230KV/132KV sub-
station through 158 Km long proposed 400KV Patuakhali- Gopalganj transmission line. The
proposed sub-station and the proposed transmission line will be constructed by PGCB.

4.12 Central control and Monitoring

A central control room for controlling and monitoring of plant process using SCADA system at
operating floor will be installed. The boiler, turbine and generator along with their associated
auxiliaries would be controlled and monitored from the common control room. All effluents and
pollutants (SOx, NOx, O2, CO2, CO) generated from the plant will be monitored using on line
electronic monitors and will be controlled by the built in DCS controllers.

4.13 Design and construction

The project shall be designed in accordance with the international standards for pulverized
coal based ultra-supercritical steam Power Plant. The design of support facilities and
associated works shall be in accordance with appropriate national and international standards.
The Plant design will cope with local seismic conditions.
The design life of the Plant will be at least 30 years. Civil works, such as, structures and
foundations of Boiler, Turbine hall including central control room, administration building, and
other facilities will be designed for a life exceeding 45 years. For proper operation and
maintenance of the Plant, about 300 persons excluding contractor laborers will be required.

61
 Process Description and Technology

4.14 Material Balance

Coal is the major operating fuel of this proposed power plant. The coal will be imported from
sourced countries like South Africa, Indonesia, and Australia etc. Coal will be reserved to the
coal terminal and transferred to the plant site thought closed conveyer system. However, this
power plant will add 1320 MW electricity to the national grid and will generate ash and gases
as byproducts during operation period. The material balance of this power plant is expressed
in Table 4.2.

Table 4.2: Material Balance of the power plant project

Input Quantity Output Quantity

Coal after Pulverization 548 ton/hr Electricity Gross 2X660MW
(Average S-0.43 %) Ash (11.29%) 61.86 kg/hr
O2 (6%) CO2 1,029 kg/MWh
CO 34.5 gm/s
SO2 122.8 gm/s
Air
NOx 313.1gm/s
PM10 28.5 gm/s
PM2.5 2.1gm/s

4.15 Pollution Mitigation Measures

Air pollution mitigation

The major air pollutants which are released to atmosphere from a coal based power plant are
SOx (SO2), NOx, Particulate matter (PM), Mercurry, Hg etc.
Burning of low sulfur content coal as fuel, installation of high efficiency Electrostatic
Precipitators (ESPs) and Flue gas Desulphurization (FGD) units will reduce these unwanted
pollutants up to the standard limit. Moreover, to facilitate wider dispersion of remaining
particulates and gaseous pollutants (SPM, SO2, and NOx) a chimney of 275 m height with
online monitoring facilities shall be provided. To control emission of fugitive dust within and
around the coal handling Plant and coal stockyard, automatic sprinkler systems shall be
installed.
A. Particulate matter abatement measures

Airborne particulate matter (PM) emissions can be minimized by pollution prevention and
emission control measures. Measures such as improved process design, operation,
maintenance, housekeeping, and other management practices can reduce emissions. By
improving combustion efficiency, the amount of products of incomplete combustion (PICs) can
be significantly reduced. Proper fuel-firing practices and combustion zone configuration, along
with an adequate amount of excess air, can achieve lower PICs. Atmospheric particulate
emissions can be reduced by choosing cleaner fuels. Natural gas used as fuel emits negligible
amounts of particulate matter. Oil-based processes also emit significantly fewer particulates
than coal-fired combustion process. Lighter distillate oil–based combustion results in lower
levels of particulate emissions than heavier residual oils.

62
 Process Description and Technology

A variety of particulate removal technologies, with different physical and economic

characteristics, are available. For effective PM control in industrial application, the use of ESPs
or bag houses is recommended.
Electrostatic precipitators (ESPs) remove particles by using an electrostatic field to attract
the particles onto the electrodes. ESPs are especially efficient in collecting fine particulates
and can also capture trace emissions of some toxic metals with an efficiency of 99.9%.
Filters and dust collectors (bag houses) collect dust by passing flue gases through a fabric
that acts as a filter. The most commonly used is the bag filter, or bag house. Accumulated
particles are removed by mechanical shaking, reversal of the gas flow, or a stream of high-
pressure air. Fabric filters are efficient (99.92% removal) for both high and low concentrations
of particles.
Wet scrubbers rely on a liquid spray to remove dust particles from a gas stream. They are
primarily used to remove gaseous emissions. Wet-scrubbing technology is used where the
contaminant cannot be removed easily in a dry form, soluble gases and wet able particles are
present.
B. SO2 emissio abatement measures

Sulphur dioxide (SO2) is one of the highly reactive gases .SO2 is linked with a number of
adverse effects on the respiratory system and other environmental issues. It is an important
industrial emission gas which causes several difficulties in the environment like acid rain.
Several approaches have been adopted to reduce SO2 content in the environment. One of
the most difficult environmental problems is how to control SO2 emissions economically and
efficiently.
Limestone/gypsum system: Globally the most commonly used flue gas desulphurization
system is based on limestone/gypsum system. It involves mixing of crushed limestone/lime
with water to form a slurry and spraying it into the sulphur containing flue gases. The sorbent
reacts with SO2 and forms an aqueous slurry of calcium sulphite. About 90% SO2 removal
can be achieved. Limestone-gypsum wet flue gas desulphurization method is most widely
accepted due to its efficiency and reliability.
C. NOx emission abatement measures

I. Combustion Control
Combustion control methods are applied to reduce the formation of NOx. The combustion
control processes that reduce the formation of NOx are reduced oxygen concentration,
reduced combustion temperature, and reduced reaction time at oxygen rich, high-temperature
conditions. The principal NOx reduction combustion control methods for new equipment and
retrofit applications include low-NOx burners, air staging, fuel staging, and operational and
design modifications.
II. Low-NOx Burners:
Low-NOx burners are available for new and retrofit applications on boilers and combustion
turbines burning nearly any fuel. Low-NOx burner systems on PC boilers are readily divided
into wall-fired and corner-fired systems.
The basic NOx reduction principles for wall-mounted burners are to control and balance the
fuel and air flow to each burner, and to control the amount and position of secondary air in the
burner zone so that fuel devolatilization and high-temperature zones are not oxygen rich.

63
 Process Description and Technology

Corner-fired low NOx burner systems further divide into two types. The Low NOx Concentric
Firing system (LNCFS) is principally used on retrofit situations, while the Pollution Minimum
(PM) System is typically used on new construction. In field retrofit demonstrations, LNCFSR
has been shown to provide a proximately 20% to 50% NOx reduction compared to
conventional tangential firing systems.
III. Air Staging:
Air staging external to the burner consists of OFA ports. OFA may or may not be used in
conjunction with low-NOx burners, depending on the fuel and the NOx emission requirement.
The typical effect of OFA addition to a new or retrofit low-NOx burner system is a further 10%
to 20% reduction of NOx emissions. However, unburned carbon and combustible materials
may increase as a result of the addition of OFA.
IV. Fuel Staging.
Staging fuel introduction into the furnace is a method to control NOx formation. Reburning
technology is the most common form of fuel staging. The reburn process employs three
separate
combustion zones to reduce NOx emission, viz. i) Main Combustion Zone (with 70 to 80%
heat input), ii) Reburn Zone (with 20 to 30% heat input) and iii) Over-fire Air Port (Burnout)
Zone. The first zone burners are operated with 10% excess air. A second combustion zone
(the reburn zone) is created above the lower furnace by operating a row of conventional
burners at a stochiometric ratio much less than 1.0. The reburn zone stochiometric ratio
(mixing of reburn fuel and lower furnace combustion products) is between 0.8 to 0.95. This
reducing environment causes reduction of NO (produced in the lower zone) to molecular
Nitrogen and Oxygen, because more active carbon monoxide molecules produced from
incomplete combustion in this reburn zone strips off the oxygen to form carbon dioxide. Fuel
burnout is competed in the burnout zone by sufficient OFA introduction with an overall excess
air for the boiler of 15% to 20%.
Reburn technology has demonstrated NOx removal efficiencies of 40% to 65%. However,
successful retrofit of this technology requires space within boiler to allow adequate residence
time for both the additional burning zone and the associated OFA burnout zone. Hence, this
technology adoption does require a closer consultation with Boiler OEM on retrofit feasibility
of this technology for existing boilers.
V. Operational Modifications:
Operational modifications have been implemented on existing boilers to achieve NOx
reductions of 5% to 15%. Operational modifications typically have been applied in situations
where only marginal NOx reductions are required. Operational modifications are attractive
because capital investment is either minimal or not required, although operating costs may
increase. Operational modifications include flue gas recirculation, reduced air preheat, water
injection, reduced excess air, biased firing, burners out of service, and fuel switching or dual
fuel firing.
VI. Post-combustion Control—Selective Catalytic Reduction Systems
Selective catalytic reduction (SCR) is a post-combustion NOx emission reduction system. In
SCR systems, vaporized ammonia injected into the flue gas stream acts as a reducing agent
in the presence of a catalyst, achieving NOx emission reductions as high as 95%. The NOx
and ammonia (NH3) reagent react to form nitrogen and water. The reaction mechanisms are
very efficient, and with very low ammonia slip (un-reacted ammonia emissions).

64
 Process Description and Technology

Design ammonia slip values range from 2 to 10 ppm. With adequate design, SCR systems
can be installed on new plants or retrofitted onto PC, CFB, or combustion turbine units fueled
by coal, oil, or natural gas with very little effect on balance-of-plant equipment or unit
availability. The following describes the basic process reactions, alternative SCR systems
available, system configuration, catalyst considerations, and developmental status of SCR
systems.
Retrofit of either low- or high-dust SCR systems requires adequate space proximate to the
boiler area.
VII. Post-combustion Control—Selective Non-catalytic Reduction Systems
Selective non-catalytic reduction is another commercially available technology to control NOx
emissions from fossil fueled boilers. SNCR systems rely on an appropriate reagent injection
temperature, good reagent-gas mixing, and adequate reaction time rather than a catalyst to
achieve NOx reductions. SNCR systems can use either ammonia or urea as reagents.
Ammonia or urea is injected into areas of the steam generator where the flue gas temperature
ranges from 1,500 to 2,200°F (~815 to 1095°C). SNCR systems are capable of achieving
NOx reduction efficiencies as high as 70% to 80% in optimum situations (adequate reaction
time, temperature, and reagent-flue gas mixing) with ammonia slips of 10 to 50 ppm.
SNCR systems reduce NOx emissions based on a thermally based exothermic reaction
between reagent and NOx.
D. Mercury emission abatement measures

Coal contain heavy metals as trace elements (less than 100 micrograms per gram). Most of
these elements will be retained in the bottom Ash except mercury. During combustion, the
mercury (Hg) in coal is volatilized and converted to elemental mercury (Hg0) vapor in the high
temperature regions of coal-fired boilers. In general, the majority of gaseous mercury in
bituminous coal-fired boilers is Hg2+. On the other hand, the majority of gaseous mercury in
subbituminous- and lignite-fired boilers is Hg0 .As the flue gas is cooled, a series of complex
reactions begin to convert Hg0 to ionic mercury (Hg2+) compounds and/or Hg compounds (Hgp)
that are in a solid-phase.
Control of mercury emissions from coal-fired boilers is currently achieved via existing controls
uint which are used to remove particulate matter (PM), sulfur dioxide (SO2), and nitrogen
oxides (NOx). This includes capture of Hgp in PM control equipment and soluble Hg2+
compounds in wet flue gas desulfurization (FGD) systems. Available data also reflect that use
of selective catalytic reduction (SCR) NOx control enhances oxidation of Hg0 in flue gas and
results in increased mercury removal in wet FGD.

Water pollution mitigation measures

A. Thermal pollution control process

In a thermal power plant thermal plume (impact due to high temperature) can be caused from
two sources like heat from flue gas and heat from discharge of hot water. The proposed power
plant is a combined cycle power plant. Its flue gas temperature at the emission point of
chimney will be about 110-1150 C at full load. A closed cooling system with cooling towers
using surface water has been envisage for the project. So there is no scope of any hot “Cooling
water” discharge to the River. The capacity of both the cooling tower. The cooling water blow
down will be rejected to the saline water guard pond where the continuous monitoring devices

65
 Process Description and Technology

will be installed. Before, discharge the blow down water into the river the prime parameter like
Temperature, pH, EC, TDS will be monitored as per ECR, 1997 and IFC 2008 standard.
B. Effluent Treatment Process

The effluent from the water treatment plant and other systems, like the clarifier will be collected
in the neutralizing tank and the sludge gradually will settle at the bottom of the tank. After a
couple of years, the sludge will be collected and buried in the waste disposal pit. Effluent
Treatment Plant/system (over 5 acre in the project area) will be provided to maintain the
standards of Industrial Waste as mentioned in the ECR, 1997. As per the feasibility report,
around 34 m3 quantity of liquid waste will treated per hour from this power plant. The treated
water will maintain the ECR, 1997 and IFC 2008 for thermal power plant. After treatment from
the guard pond / effluent treatment plant, the treated water will be used for gardening or dust
suppression system.
C. Sewerage Treatment Process
The generated sludge will be treated and discharged into the underground pit with concrete
revetment or encircled with durable polythene sheet. For monitoring the effluent quality, a
continuous monitoring system has been considered in the design. A typical capacity of the
STP will be 2x8m3/hr. The following measures are included in the project design
 EPC Contractor will provide septic tank for a building or cluster of buildings or
connect to proposed septic tank depending upon the layout to be decided during
detailed engineering for the buildings. The maximum size of septic tank will be as
per local need.
 The sludge removal from the septic tanks is expected to be done once a year or
as per the requirement of local laws and regulations by the Project Proponent.

Noise Control

All rotating machineries are the major noise generating source like, turbo-generators,
compressors, pumps, fans, coal handling Plant and other rotating equipment from where noise
is continuously generated. Modern low noise producing equipment with silencer will be
selected to keep the noise level below 90 dB (A) within one meter distance. Moreover, all
noise producing machineries will be under noise proof hoods and the workers will be provided
with personal protective equipment (PPE) like ear plug, ear muffler etc. to use at work site.
The buffer area around the Plant, development of green belt, boundary wall etc. around the
project shall dampen the noise level so that nearby community do not feel any noise.

Intent of Water Reuse

The entire water consumption and management system shall be designed with provision of
water re-use facilities. A Close cycle with cooling tower with surface water is planned for
condenser and other auxiliary equipment cooling and FGD operation of the Plant and reverse
osmosis plant with demineralization Plant is proposed for, power cycle and other makeup,
ash disposal and handling system.

Afforestation and Greenbelt Development

At the end of the construction a large scale green belt development has been planned over
306 acre all around the main Plant area and within the colony except the switch yard side.
The treated effluent will be used for watering the green belt.

66
 Process Description and Technology

4.16 Operation and Monitoring Program

A daily monitoring of pollutants in different environmental disciplines like air, stack emission,
waste water, etc. shall be conducted and the data shall be recorded in a proper resister and
the same should be submitted to DoE on quarterly or monthly basis. The proponent shall
finalize the monitoring locations in consultation with the monitoring consultant and DoE if
required. Power Station management shall have all necessary equipment and manpower for
ensuring effective monitoring. The management shall submit a quarterly and yearly monitoring
reports to the DoE for renewing the Environmental Clearance Certificate. Some monitoring
instruments of the gas emissions and particulate matter dispersion etc. are mentioned below.
Electronic Transmitter from internationally famous manufacturer like SIEMENS, GE, ABB,
Durag etc. can be installed for on line continuous measuring and recording of CO, CO 2, SO2,
NO2, pH, Conductivity meter, Turbid meter etc.

67
 5. Suitability Assessment

5.1 Introduction

Alternative evaluation is the process of comparing and contrasting different solutions in order
to select the optimal alternative which is important for maximizing the output and profit,
minimizing the environmental and social consequences and assuring the project security.
Therefore, high investment based industrial development projects should consider a number
of alternatives on the basis of technical suitability, financial viability and environmental friendly
for making the investment a sustainable one with sustainable return.
IFC 2012 guidelines of WB state that “The environmental assessment process may
recommend alternative (higher or lower) levels or measures, which, if acceptable to IFC,
become Project- or site-specific requirements.” In pursuance of that, the alternative scenarios
have been contemplated to review the status of the concepts for the proposed project.

5.2 The “No Action” Alternative

This indicates that the proposed Project will not be executed. The ‘no action’ alternative is
required to ensure the consideration of the original environment without any development.
This negates the need to meet the electricity demand in future of Bangladesh. The Power
System Master Plan (PSMP, 2016) forecast the daily load curve in future as shown in Figure
5.1.

Figure 5.1: Daily Load Curve 2015-2016 (PSMP 2016)

This demand has been forecasted depending on the GDP growth rate of the country between
6%-7%. In order to meet up this demand, electricity will have to be produced in the public
sectors, private sectors and imported from neighboring countries respectively including
considering the possible impact of demand-side management (DSM) programs. DSM

69
 Suitability Assessment

programs involve use of energy-saving equipment and machinery, holiday staggering

programs in the industrial segment, and avoiding wastage of electricity.
The peak demand (9,268 MW for 2014) of electricity could not be fulfilled as the highest
capacity has been recorded as 7418 MW in FY 2013-2014. The installed generation capacity
(December' 2015: http://www.bpdb.gov.bd/bpdb/) has increased to 12,071 MW. Moreover, the
demand of electricity is not equal throughout the country. For power system development
analysis, Bangladesh is divided into five geographical regions: the Central, Northern,
Southern, Western and greater Dhaka regions where the load distribution factor for a region
is it’s percentage of total national demand. Table 5.1presents estimated electricity demand for
each area for the Base Case of the Power Sector Master Plan 2006.

Table 5.1: Load center demand for electricity by region

Regional Peak Load Central Northern Southern Western Dhaka

Year (MW) (MW) (MW) (MW) (MW)
2005 369 519 880 516 2,024
2006 402 566 958 562 2,204
2007 438 616 1,044 612 2,401
2008 478 671 1,137 667 2,616
2009 520 731 1,239 726 2,849
2010 567 797 1,349 791 3,104
2011 613 862 1,460 856 3,357
2012 663 932 1,579 926 3,632
2013 717 1,009 1,708 1,001 3,929
2014 776 1,091 1,847 1,083 4,250
2015 839 1,180 1,998 1,172 4,597
2016 902 1,268 2,147 1,259 4,938
2017 968 1,362 2,306 1,352 5,304
2018 1,040 1,462 2,477 1,452 5,697
2019 1,117 1,571 2,660 1,560 6,119
2020 1,200 1,687 2,857 1,675 6,573
Source: Power System Master Plan 2006

The proposed coal based power plant by RPCL is located in the Southern region of the country
which is conceptualized as one of the emerging electricity demanding area of the country in
near future. The plant will play a crucial role in supplementing the future power demand of this
part of the country. Moreover, development of transmission facilities from the Kala Para,
Patuakhali to Barisal – Gopalganj 400 KV national grid line will highly strengthen the decision
of constructing the project.
It will facilitate the local and regional development by supplying electricity. It will coherence
with the national goal through assisting electricity to residence of southern zone, increasing
job opportunity, enhancing industrial and port facilities, sustaining irrigation system etc.
However, the facilities of this added amount of electricity would not be acquired if the “No
Action” alternative is chosen.

5.3 Site Alternative

Lots of factor comes into play during selecting a proper site for a Thermal Power Plant Project.
A suitable position highly depends on the technically feasible, socially acceptable and

70
 Suitability Assessment

environmentally friendly. However, an optimum criterion has been set to figure out the best
location among the alternate sites proposed by the proponent.The following key factors were
considered and evaluated before proposing the potential area at those given locations:
- Availability of land for the ultimate capacity
- Connectivity to coal sources for the ultimate capacity
- Coal Transportation Logistics and constraints thereof
- Power evacuation facilities and its proximity
- Accessibility by Road and Waterways
- Availability of Water for the ultimate capacity
- Availability of material, power and water for construction purposes
- Environmental and Social scenarios and sensitivities
- Existence of forest or prime agricultural land
- Distance from the outer peripheries of major rehabilitation and cities
- Distance from the flood plain of the riverine system
- Distance from national park, wildlife sanctuaries, ecological sensitive area, tropical
forest etc.
- Distance from place of archaeological, historical, religious or tourist importance
- Proximity to the approach funnel of the runway of the nearest airport
This EIA study has emphasized on the comprehensive comparison of all major potential
impacts associated with social and environmental issues for selecting the site of the power
plant. The proposed Power Plant will consume huge quantities of coal depending on the load
factor of the Plant and coal quality including large quantities of fuel. By product from the plant
will be needed to store for reasonable period and generated power to be transmitted from
project site. In addition to that, a number of machineries, systems, greenbelt, townships and
roads will occupy the project area. Boiler and Transformer yard, switchyard, transmission bay,
coal stockyard, FGD and ESP system, ETP and WTP, ash silo and ash dyke, townships, green
belts are the necessary components which have to be considered during the project site area
allocation. Moreover, a number of miscellaneous station facilities like compressor house, fire
station, laboratories, auxiliary boiler building, workshops, security officer’s room, canteen etc.
must be included commonly in the Power Plant complex. However, efficient use of land will
ensure to reduce the land requirement for the proposed Project site. The Project client has
selected four sites for the proposed Power Project Map 5.1 shows the potential sites for
selecting the proposed power plant.
Site- 1: In Banskhali Upazila, District - Chittagong
Site- 2: In Magnama, Upazila –Pekua, District – Cox’s Bazar
Site- 3: In Upazila Zajira, District - Shariatpur
Site- 4: In Kalapara Upazila, District - Patuakhali
A number of social and environmental criterions have been considered based on the DoE and
World Bank accepted guideline to examine the alternative sites for the proposed Power Plant.
During the process of evaluation for each site, the different criteria considered and their
respective indicators are given in the Table 5.2.

71
 Suitability Assessment

Table 5.2: Selected indicators and criteria for alternative site analysis

Factors Indicators
Administrative Location and Relative GPS Mouza, Union, Upozilla and District,North and
Position East Coordinates
Land status Availability, Elevation, Availability & Use of Khas
land
Land Classification Cropped area, Fisheries and Salt Production area
Number households to be rehabilitated, Population
Settlement Area
density of the union
Waterways, Roadways, Railways, Average Draft
Accessibility & Logistics
in waterways
Vulnerability to Natural Hazards Flood, Cyclone and Storm surge
Draw down ratio of Water, Possibility of Once
Water Resources
through Cooling System
Air pollution Coverage Local and Regional Air-shed covering
Sensitive Ecosystem, Tourism Places,
Environmental Sensitivity & Ecosystem
Archeological & Cultural Heritage Sites
Ethnic community or Minority Groups etc. Presence of Ethnic Communities

To select the best place for generating such a high quantity of electricity form from coal, a
separate study was conducted which is appended in Appendix- III. A number of social and
environmental indicators are justified and checked for each of the places and finally one place
has been selected for this power plant.

Map 5.1: Potential sites for the proposed power project

From the above comparative study, site – 4, i.e. Kala Para Upazila has been selected for the
proposed Power plant depending on lower settlement area, stable soil and transportation and
evacuation facilities, availability of land, presences of sensitive receptors etc. 915.7 acres of
land will be acquired for the entire Power Plant where the plant area will be 890.7 acres. The
remaining 25 acres will be acquired for development of resettlement villages for the resettles.
However, the Project will consume maximum 0.7 acre of land to produce 1MW electricity. In

72
 Suitability Assessment

India, about 1.0 acre/MW land is required to produce electricity from imported coal in the
coastal areas with inclusion of cooling tower and MGR whereas only 0.4 acre/MW is required
without cooling tower and MGR (MOP 2007). Therefore, the land that has planned to be
acquired (915.7 acres) for the proposed project is found rational based on the calculation from
secondary sources shown above.

5.4 Fuel Alternatives

At present, Bangladesh highly depends on natural gas for energy production whereas the
PSMP 2010 certainly suggested for reducing the dependency on gas. Under the given
scenario of gradual price hike of LNG in the Asian market and no significant discovery of new
natural gas reserve; coal is likely to dominate the fuel-mix of power generation of Bangladesh.
The draft coal policy of Bangladesh states that coal will be used for power generation instead
of gas which is an alternative fuel to maintain national energy stability. Three alternatives are
considered from the view point of environmental and socio-economic consideration and with
respect to different fuel use namely, gas, oil and coal. Comparative analysis of the proposed
alternatives is presented in Table 5.3.

Table 5.3: Comparative statement of fuel use for power generation

Sl. No. Subject Coal Gas Oil

1 Reserve in world respect H L L
2 Global Electricity Generation H M L
3 Supply chain H M M
4 Fuel Price in international market L M H
5 Air Pollution in air shed M L M
6 Noise Pollution L M H
7 Water Use H L M
8 Impact on aquatic life M L L
9 Impact on terrestrial bio-diversity M L M
10 Investment for power generation H M M
11 Pollution abatement measures H L M
Note: L-Low, M-Moderate, H-High

From the above comparative statement, it can be concluded that coal, as a fuel has relatively
higher environmental impacts than gas. Again, the availability of coal is significantly higher
whereas the price is considerably lower than gas. Moreover, at present the best available
technologies i.e. state of art stand highly effective to control the pollution produced by coal
fired power plant.

5.5 Alternative Technologies

Based on pressure and temperature of operating fluid (Steam), coal based power Pants are
classified as Subcritical, Super Critical (SC), Current Ultra Super Critical (USC) technologies
and Advanced Ultra Supercritical Technologies (A-USC) available in the world for producing
electricity from coal. A-USC is in developing stages of the developed world particularly in USA.
However, the boiler technology will be selected for the proposed RPCL coal based power plant
on the basis of improved efficiency and reduced rate of emission of CO 2 and other pollutant
gases from per MW electricity generation.

73
 Suitability Assessment

a) Selection of Boiler Type

The technologies are changing over the years. The efficiency of the boiler is improving and
which ultimately reducing the cost of electricity production. A detail comparison has been
conducted by Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) in 2011 (Table-5.4). For constant
electricity production, the coal consumption decreases by over 15% between the sub-critical
to A-USC. In the same away, the rate of CO2 will be reduced on a kg/MWh basis. It should
also be noted that the amount of flue gas to be processed by the air quality control equipment
also decreases as the thermal efficiency increases. However, this allows for capital cost
savings in the emission control equipment.

Table 5.4: Comparisons among the Key Performance of different boilers

Indicators Sub-critical Supercritical Current USC A-USC

Thermal efficiency, %(HHV) 36.2 38.5 39.2 42.7
Net heat rate, Btu/kWh (HHV) 9,430 8,860 8,700 7,990
Net heat rate, kCal/kWh (HHV) 2376.3 2232.7 2192.4 2013.4
Coal feed rate, kg/hr 384,000 361,000 355,000 326,000
Flue gas mass flow, kg/hr 3,420,000 3,151,000 3,098,000 2,827,000
Volume at boiler outlet, actual
66,700 61,400 60,400 55,100
m3/min
NOX and SO2, kg/MWh 0.127 0.121 0.118 0.109
PM10, kg//MWh 0.0422 0.0399 0.0395 0.0363
PM2.5, kg/MWh 0.0535 0.0508 0.0499 0.0458
CO2, kg/MWh 900 851 836 763
Capital cost, $/kW 1780 1800 1840 1990
Coal cost, $/GJ (Constant) 1.71 1.71 1.71 1.71
Cost of Electricity Assume Without any penalty for CO2 emission
Capital, $/MWh 28.9 29.3 29.9 32.3
O&M, $/MWh 8.1 8.1 8.2 8.6
Fuel, $/MWh 17.0 15.9 15.7 14.4
Total, $/MWh 54.0 53.3 53.7 55.3
Dispatch cost, $/MWh* 18.6 17.4 17.1 15.7
Note: *Fuel cost plus variable O&M Source: Philips J. N. & Wheldon, 2011, EPRI

After the comparison, Ultra Super Critical power plants is being suggested to adopt for the
project in order to meet up other design criteria, geotechnical supports and other facilities. It
is also operated at a higher pressure and temperature than the critical point of water. However,
it is more efficient than the Super Critical option. The efficiency of this technological option is
considered to be 42.7%. Though the unit construction cost and operation and maintenance
cost of this option 1495 USD/kW are slightly higher than the super critical option, the fuel cost
for generation is 4.82 USC/kWh, which is 0.19 USC/kWh lower than the previous option. The
emission rate of CO2 (743 g/kWh) is also considerably lower in this option. However, after
detail feasibility and EIA study, this key boiler technologies will be finalized which will be cost-
effective as well as environmentally sustainable.
b) Selection of Cooling System
Water will be required for steam generation, condensers and other equipment cooling, coal
and ash management, Boiler makeup and domestic purposes etc. Major part of water is
required for condenser cooling. Condenser cooling system of a thermal power plant is either

74
 Suitability Assessment

of closed cycle cooling technology or once through cooling system. In case of once-through
cooling – Water is withdrawn directly from the river and then diverted through condenser
tubes to absorbs heat from the turbine exhaust and eventually discharged back to the river at
an elevated temperatures. The construction, operation and maintenance cost of once through
cooling system is low. However, it is not environment friendly due to the direct discharge of
thermal plume into the riverine ecosystem.
On the other hand, closed cycle cooling system with cooling tower, the hot Cooling water from
the condenser end is pumped to cooling tower where the cooling water dissipates heat through
evaporation and convection. Water from the tower basin is re-circulated through the
condensers tubes continuously to dissipate heat. Compared to once-through cooling systems,
re-circulating cooling system drastically reduces water withdrawal from water body. The
system is more environment friendly, but its construction, operation and maintenance cost is
higher than the other systems.
In this project once-through cooling system is not recommendable due to high sediments
present in the neighboring water body (Table 5.5). These sediments will get stuck and finally
will damage the condenser tubes. It has therefore been proposed to have two raw water
reservoirs from where cleaner water will be taken to the cooling system.

Table 5.5: Comparative Analysis of Alternative Cooling System

Sl. No Issue Open Cycle Closed Cycle
01 Water Requirement High Minimum
02 Discharge of Heated water High Minimum
03 Intake velocity at strainer High Low
04 Discharge Velocity High Low
05 Environmental Protection Low High
06 Capital and Operation Cost High Low

Considering the above-mentioned advantages Closed cooling system with natural draft
cooling tower has been envisaged for the project.

75
 6. Description of Baseline Environment

6.1 Introduction

Baseline situation study refers the proper documentation before implementation of any project.
Records of environmental and social existing situation greatly support the EIA study. This
chapter represents the existing situation of environment and social context before
implementation of the 2x660 MW coal based thermal power projects at Kalapara in Patuakhali
District. In broad sense environmental and social condition for baseline study comprises
outlining the physical environment (e.g. including meteorological, hydrological, geological
components and processes), biological environment (e.g. including flora, fauna, and
ecosystems), land use pattern, agricultural practices, cultural activities, socio-economic
status, livelihoods and hazard of the study area. Primary and secondary data have been used
to document the baseline condition of this study.

6.2 Physical Environment

This chapter on environmental and social baseline has been prepared using both primary and
secondary data collected for the proposed Project site and defined study area. The baseline
condition has been defined in respect of physical environment (e.g., including meteorological,
hydrological, geological components and processes), biological environment (e.g., including
flora, fauna, and ecosystems), land use pattern, agriculture practices, cultural activities,
economic status, and hazards of the study area.

Land cover and Land use

The total study area has been considered as 10 km radius from the stack point. Land use of
the study area has been identified using satellite image and classified as agriculture land, sand
bar/char land, forest, industrial area, road, settlement with homestead vegetation, power plant,
and urban built-up area and water bodies. The maps are shown in the relavent sections of this
baseline study.

Description of Satellite Image

Basic information
RapidEye satellite image was used for the land use mapping. Images that have been used in
land use classification were acquired on 22 February 2015 and 21 March 2015. Spatial
resolution and color composition of the images are presented as follows in Table 6.1a.

Table 6.1a: Details of satellite images used for land use mapping
Spatial
Area Spectral Resolution Acquisition Dates
Resolution
Kala Para Power 5 meter 5 Bands 22 February 2015 and
Plant Study Area (B, G, R, RE and NIR) 32 March, 2015
The spectral bands of RapidEye Satellite images has a multi-spectral color composition for
various wave lengths. The following Table 6.1b shows the band names of the respective
wavelengths.

77
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.1b: Spectral bands and wavelengths

Band ID Band Name Wave length (nm)

1 Blue (B) 440-510
2 Green (G) 520-590
3 Red (R) 630-685
4 Red Edge (RE) 690-730
5 Near Infra-Red (NIR) 760-850
The above basic elements are required for analyzing the satellite images and obtaining the
land uses for EIA.

Process of Analysis

Land use analysis was carried out using ERADAS IMAGINE and ArcGIS 10.1 software. A
multi-step task has been followed in analyzing the images. A series of tasks were followed for
analyzing after receiving the images from image provider, each of the images was processed
using ERADAS IMAGINE software. Geo-referencing was done to make corrections of
geometric distortions. CEGIS has a national archive of Ground Control Point (GCP)
coordinates, which were collected by Differential Global Positioning System (DGPS) survey.
These GCPs were used as reference coordinates for rectifying the images.
On screen digitization techniques were used to extract required land use and land cover data
from the satellite images. Using this technique, major classes such as agriculture land, sand
bar/char land, forestland, water bodies (baor, beel, rivers, canal, pond, ditch), rural settlement
with homestead vegetation, urban built-up area, industrial area, road etc. were derived from
the images.
Settlement with homestead vegetation
Settlement area contains homesteads, house structures and yards and sometimes attached
small farmlands surrounded by different types of homestead vegetations.
Agricultural Land
Agricultural land is flat/plain lands comprising of many continuous plots, which may have crop
or fallow. They were identified by their finer texture and specific shape (mostly rectangular
form) from the satellite images.
The seasonal Boro rice area were prepared from latest available Landsat 5 and Landsat 8
satellite images and the monsoon seasonal Aman rice area were prepared from available
Radarsat satellite images. Available published statistical data of seasonal Boro and Aman rice
area were compared with the seasonal Boro and Aman rice area derived from the satellite
images in order to be confident about the accuracy of the output.
Road
Road class includes all types of metal and non-metal roads of the study area those are visible
in the satellite images. This class was identified from satellite images by its linear nature and
connectivity with one another, sometimes exposed and in some places covered with trees.
However, assistance from existing available road network was also used during identification,
interpretation and digitization of the roads from satellite images.
Brick field
This class was interpreted from images by using bright tone, regular shape pattern of piles of
bricks, at least one vertical chimney and its shadow.
Sand Bar/Char Land
This class includes dry sands near or besides rivers. It was identified in the false colour
composite of the images by bright white to light cyan colour, finer texture, without vegetation.

78
 Description of Baseline Environment

Urban built-up area

An urban area is characterized by higher population density and vast human features in
comparison to the areas surrounding it. Urban areas may be cities, towns or conurbations, but
the term is not commonly extended to rural settlements such as villages and hamlets. Urban
areas are created and further developed by the process of urbanization.
River & Canal
River is considered as a land use section if the actual riverbed is linear and wide, naturally
flowing water bodies and never without water during any period of the year. Branches of the
rivers are considered as canal.
This class includes rivers, canals and other linear water bodies those are visible in the satellite
images.
Pond and ditch
Ponds are artificial storage of water. Basically ponds have rectangular or square shape.
Ditches are the water bodies like ponds that are situated beside the river side or road side.
They do not have any regular shape like pond.

Physiography

Physiographical the Kalapara coal fired thermal power plant project area is within the Ganges
Tidal Flood Plain Physiographic unit of Bangladesh (Map 6.1).The boundary between this unit
and the Ganges river floodplain is traditional. Soils in the area have some localized variation,
areally but consist primarily of fine sands, silts, silty sands, sand silts and clayey silts. To the
south, it is very close to the Bay of Bengal. The ground elevation of the area compared to sea
level is very low; about two (02) meters only.

Topography

The proposed RPCL 1320 MW kalapara power plant project is located near the Kuakata
coastal area where the land is gently sloped towards the sea. This site is about 30 km
northward from the Kuakata coast, around 7 km eastward distance from the Patuakhali –
Kuakata highway and near to the Rabnabad Channel. From digital elevation model (DEM)
analysis it is found that the study area of the proposed power plant has an elevation of 1 m ~
2 m above MSL and the project area is located over a land which is only 1 m ~ 1 m above the
MSL (Map 6.2).In some places inside the project boundary, the elevation level of the land is
found less than 1m from the MSL. The proposed project area is occupied by crop cultivable
land and fish culture in the lower khal areas.

Tectonic Setting

Bangladesh consists of six tectonic (Map 6.3) elements. These are as follows:
 Himalayan Fore Deep
 Bogra Shelf
 Faridpur-Sylhet Trough (Separated by Tripura- Madhupur thrash hold)
 Barisal –Chandpur Gravity High
 Hatia Trough

79
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.1: Physiographic Map showing the Kalapara project area

80
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.2: Land Elevation of the Project area from DEM analysis

81
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.3: Tectonic map of Bangladesh showing the Kalapara project area

82
 Description of Baseline Environment

The Proposed Kalapara Coal Fired Thermal Power Project lies in the South western part of
the Barisal- Chandpur Gravity high. It is also situated in the close proximity (North-west) of
Hatia Trough/Patuakhali depression. Thickness of the sediments is estimated to be about
15km and this thickness correspond the Carboniferous to Recent geological age. This is
geologically one of the least explored areas in Bangladesh.

Stratigraphy

Due to unavailability of bore log data in the project and neighboring area details stratigraphy
study on the project area could be carried out. It is expected that before preparation of design
of the structure of the project at least couples of bore holes to be drilled up to a depth of about
150m to collect the Geological, Hydrological and engineering data of the area.
From the literature review it reveals the thickness of the Holocene sediment of the area ranges
from. 30-70 m. It also revealed the Sedimentary thickness of the area from cretaceous to
recent is about 15,000m. A generalized stratigraphic section of the area is given below (Table
6.2a and Table 6.2b).

Table 6.2a: Stratigraphic units of the Cenozoic and Quaternary sediments

Stage Group Formation Lithology

Holocene Alluvium Silt, sand, gravel and clay

Pleistocenw/Pl Madhupur Hihing Yellow to yellowish grey, massive, fine to
iocene(upto Formation/ medium sandstone and clay stone/sticky clay
6375 m) Madhupur
Clay
Dupi Tila Yellow to ochre, pink, light brown, light grey to
Formation greyish-white sandstone, siltstone and
conglomerate. Several oxidized, iron-rich,
clayeypalaeosols. Petrified woodGrey to
greenish grey, red mottled, silty shale, shale and
claystone
Pleistocene/N TipamGroupGi Girujan Clay Grey to greenish grey, red mottled, silty shale,
eogene rujan Clay shale and claystone
(U. Jamalganj
in NW
Neogene Tipam Light yellow to yellowish grey, grey, brownish
Sandstone grey and orange fineto medium grained pebbly
sandstone, siltstone and shale
Surma Group Boka Bil Greenish to bluish grey and yellowish grey
(L. Jamalganj formation marine pyritic shale, silt-stone and very fine to
in NW) medium grained sandstone, marine fossils
Miocene(3100 Bhuban Grey to bluish grey fine to medium sandstone,
m) Formation siltstone, claystone
Oligocene Barail Brown, yellow-brown, pink and grey sandstone,
(800-1000 m) Formation siltstone and car-bonaceous shale
Bogra
Formation in
the NW
Late Eocene Jaintia Group Kopili Grey, greenish grey to black silty claystone,
(Eocene 600- Formation fossiliferous shale, thinbeds of glauconitic
800 m) Middle sandstone and limestone
to Early
Eocene
Sylhet Grey to greyish brown massive nummulitic
Limestone limestone

83
 Description of Baseline Environment

Stage Group Formation Lithology

Eocene and Tura Grey, brown, pink and greyish-white ferruginous
Paleocene Formation sandstone, coal and shale
Late-Middle Upper Sibganj Coarse yellow brown sandstone; white clay;
Cretaceous Gondwana Trapwash volcanic ash
Early Rajmahal Amygdaloidal basalt; serpentinised andesite;
Cretaceous - Traps shale; agglomerate
Jurassic
Late Permian Lower Paharpur Sandstone; feldspathic greywacke; coal, shale;
Gondwana Formation coarse sandstone
Early Permian Lower Kuchma Coarse grained sandstone, shale; thick coal
Gondwana Formation seams
Precambrian Basement Gneiss and schist
Complex
Source: Alam et.al. 1990
As the civil construction works would be limited to Holocene deposits, generalized description
of the area is described below:

Table 6.2b: Pattern of sediment deposition within Bengal deltaic environments

Period/event Major channels Minor channels

 Slow inland erosion along  Slow inland erosion of
128–28 ka BP
major channels high stand deposits
Steady decline in sea  Planation of highstand along dendritic drainage
level indelta plain to – deposits  Slumping of valley sides
40 to –65 m.  Slumping of valley sides
 Rapid headward and  Incision of dendritic
28–21 ka BP
downward valley incision drainage
Rapid fall in base  Erosion and retreat of valley
level sides
 Delta deposition of  Stream captures
21–18 ka
BPLowstand sea level
coarsening-upward  Valley deepening
sequences along incised
hiatus at
channels
glacial maximum  Headword erosion and valley
side retreat
 Deposition of fining upward,  Laminated fine
18–5 ka BP
braided coarse sediments sediments deposited
Rapid base level rise aggrading as delta lobes during cyclones
back-stepping up valley from  Main channels in filled to
delta front former high stand level
 Filling of main valley to former  Medium to fine sands
high stand level deposited by meandering
 Deposition of medium sands distributaries
in meandering channels;  Minor crevasse-splay
deposition of fine sands, silts sands deposited during
and peats in inter channel floods
areas  Laminated fine
 Crevasse-splay sands during sediments deposited
flood events during cyclones
 Laminated fine sediments
deposited during cyclones

84
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.4a: Earthquake zoning map of Bangladesh

85
 Description of Baseline Environment

Project Site

Map 6.4b: Earthquake location map of Bangladesh and surrounding area

86
 Description of Baseline Environment

Seismicity

Bangladesh Geological Survey has published an Earthquake Zoning Map of Bangladesh

based on Seismic intensity. They have divided the country into three depending on the seismic
intensity namely Zone-I, Zone- II and Zone III (Map 6.4a).
The proposed Kalapara coal fired thermal power plant area is located within Zone -I of the
earthquake zoning map of Bangladesh (GSB, 1979). The seismic coefficient of this zone is
0.04 g. The project has least venerability in terms of earth quake compared to the other part
of Bangladesh. However during designing of the civil structure for the proposed power plant,
Bangladesh building code should be strictly followed.
Details of seismic intensity and the historical records of earthquake in and around Bangladesh
that occurred during last about 450 years are presented in the in Table 6.3 and Map 6.4b.

Table 6.3: List of Major Earthquakes in Last 450 Years

Magnitude Depth
SL Year Source Area
(Richter Scale) (Km)
1 1548 Sylhet - -
2 1664 Shillong-Plateau - -
3 1762 Chittagong-Arakan - -
4 1858 Sandway, Myanmar 6.5 -
5 1869 Cachar, India 7.5 48
6 1885 Sirajganj, Bangladesh 7 72
7 1897 Assam, India 8.1 60
8 1906 Calcutta, India 5.5 -
9 1912 Mandalay, Myanmar 7.9 25
10 1918 Srimangal, Bangladesh 7.6 14
11 1930 Dhubri, India 7.1 60
12 1934 Bihar, India-Nepal 8.3 33
13 1938 Mawlaik, Myanmar 7.2 60
14 1950 Assam, Himalaya 8.6 25
15 1954 Manipur, India 7.4 180
16 1975 Assam, India 6.7 112
17 1984 Cachar, India 5.7 4
18 1988 Bihar, India-Nepal 6.6 65
19 1997 Sylhet, Bangladesh 5.6 35
20 1997 Bangladesh-Myanmar 5.3 56
21 1999 Maheshkhali, Bangladesh 4.2 10
22 2003 Rangamati, Bangladesh 5.6 -
23 2011 Sikim, India 6.9 -

6.3 Climate and Meteorology

In order to investigate the climatic condition of the study area different meteorological
parameters have been collected from multiple secondary sources. The proposed power plant
area falls under tropical climate. Basically this region has a distinct monsoonal season which
influences all other climatic parameters. Map 6.5 shows the location of the study area in the

87
 Description of Baseline Environment

climatic sub-regions of Bangladesh. The study area falls in the South-eastern climatic zone of
Bangladesh.
The ambient mean temperature of the study area is found as 20°C in winter and 28°C-29°C
in summer. On the other hand, the annual average rainfall in this region varies from 2500mm
– 3000mm, which is relatively higher than the western areas of the county. Southwest
monsoon occurs in this region from June till September; during this period heavy rainfall takes
place for which the project area experiences tidal and coastal flooding.
Besides, tropical storms i.e. Kalbaishakhi and cyclones occur during summer i.e. April to June
and then from September to December. Cyclones occur almost every year in the Patuakhali
coastal areas with varied intensity and magnitude. Meteorological data for the last 30 years
was collected from the nearest BMD stations in Patuakhali (BMD Station ID: 12103) which is
analyzed to get the overall micro-climatic conditions of the study area. Summary of the
analysis of climatic parameters are given in the following sections:

88
 Description of Baseline Environment

Proposed
Power Plant
Site

Source: ASB, 2006

Map 6.5: Climatic Sub-regions of Bangladesh

89
 Description of Baseline Environment

Temperature
Temperature of Patuakhali Station does not show remarkable fluctuation (Figure 6.1). Data
of last 30 years (1983-2013) shows that monthly maximum temperature varies from 30.8°C to
39°C, and May is the warmest month in pre-monsoon period. The monthly minimum
temperature varies within a range of 8.4°C to 23.0°C, and January is the coldest month. The
highest recorded maximum temperature during the last 30 years is 39°C occurred in May,
1990 and the lowest ever recorded minimum temperature is 8.4°C first occurred in January,
2013. The monthly maximum, minimum and average temperature of the last 30 years (1983-
2013) are given in Figure 6.1. Figure 6.2 shows the trend of annual maximum and minimum
temperature of Patuakhali, which reveals that the winter season is getting colder and the
summer, in contrast, is becoming hotter over time.

Temperature of Patuakhali (1983- 2013)

45
40
35
Temperature (0C)

30
25
20
15
10
5
0
Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb
Post-
Pre-Monsoon Monsoon Winter
Monsoon
Maximum 37.6 38.2 39 36.5 35.4 35 36.2 35.3 33.5 30.8 31 36.2
Minimum 14.2 17.4 20 20.5 21 19.8 23 13.3 14 9.6 8.4 10.4
Max of Avg 28.13 30.17 29.97 30.26 28.98 29.23 29.01 28.44 26 21.49 20.84 24.13
Min of Avg 24.06 25.79 28.2 27.51 27.47 27.66 27.6 25.83 22.95 18.27 17.04 20.46

Figure 6.1: Monthly maximum, minimum and average temperatures (1983-2013)

Annual Temperature Trend, Patuakhali

(1983-2013)
45
40
35
y = 0.0633x + 36.185
Temperature °C

30
25
20
15
10
5 y = -0.0665x + 10.893
0

Maximum Minimum
Linear (Maximum) Linear (Minimum )

Figure 6.2: Trend of annual maximum and minimum temperatures (1983-2013)

90
 Description of Baseline Environment

Humidity
Humidity is directly related with temperature fluctuation of a region. The atmosphere of coastal
zone is always enriched with humidity because of high evaporation over the sea surface.
Patuakhali BMD Station (station ID: 12103) has been selected in order to delineate the
situation of humidity of the study area. The monthly average relative humidity near the project
area varies seasonally from 76.21% to 90.61%. Monsoon (June to September) is the most
humid period, whereas from late post-monsoon to the winter season i.e. November to
February, the weather remains relatively dry. Figure 6.3 shows the data for monthly maximum,
minimum and average humidity of the last thirty (30) years (1983 to 2013) for Patuakhali
station.

Relative Humidity (1983- 2013)

120
Relative Humidity (%)

100
80
60
40
20
0
Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb
Post-
Pre-Monsoon Monsoon Winter
Monsoon
Maximum 84.67 89.28 87.76 93.4 94.94 94.5 93.4 93.4 91.55 89.34 98.5 83.9
Minimum 63.97 72.78 79.32 84.91 87.13 86.27 84.77 84.77 73.99 68.23 66.41 59.52
Average 76.87 81.39 84.04 88.84 90.61 89.79 89.42 89.42 83.41 81.46 80.16 76.21

Figure 6.3: Monthly maximum, minimum and average humidity (1983-2013)

Rainfall
The last 30 years data of Patuakhali BMD station shows that the annual average rainfall is
recorded as 2519 mm/yr. According to the analysis of this data (Figure 6.4), monthly average
maximum rainfall occurred in June (1084 mm/month) and monthly average minimum rainfall
recorded during winter season. This indicates that the rainy season is very prominent in this
region. The ever maximum annual rainfall was recorded as 4320 mm in the year of 1983, as
found in the BMD data for this station. It is also observed that, the annual rainfall in this area
is gradually decreasing at a rate of 17.6 mm/year. Average monthly rainfall of thirty (30) years
is presented by graphs in Figure 6.4 and Figure 6.5, both showing that the Monsoon period
(June to September) having the maximum rainfall record of a year. On the contrary, December
to February shows negligible amount of rainfall. For this analysis, time series rainfall data of
Patuakhali station (BMD station ID: 12103) has been used.

91
 Description of Baseline Environment

Monthly
1200
Rainfall, Patuakhali (1983-2013)
1000
Rainfall (mm/month)
800
600
400
200
0
Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb
Post-
Pre-Monsoon Monsoon Winter
Monsoon
Max of Avrg 161 308 927 1084 982 705 827 577 487 133 63 116
Min of Avrg 0 7 79 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Average 38.13 93.45 246.4 467.2 547.2 444.8 349.3 229.3 63.87 8.00 7.94 23.03

Figure 6.4: Monthly maximum and minimum of average rainfall (1983-2013)

Annual Rainfall Trend (1983-2013)

5000
4500
4000
3500
Rainfall (mm/year)

3000
2500
2000
y = -17.6x + 2800.6
1500
1000
500
0
1993

2013
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992

1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012

Annual Rainfall Linear (Annual Rainfall)

Figure 6.5: Trend of annual rainfall (1983-2013)

Sunshine Hours
Sunshine hour is a climatological indicator, measuring the duration of sunshine for a given
location and period which indicates the total energy delivered by sunlight. In order to
investigate the sunshine hour over the study area, sunshine hour records (1983-2013) of
Patuakhali BMD station has been analyzed. The monthly average sun-shine hour in
Patuakhali varies from 2:88 to 7:65 hour/day in a year. The monthly highest sunshine hour
occurred in November i.e. 9:22 hour/day. Length of the sunshine hour reduces during
monsoon season. Figure 6.6 shows the daily sunshine hour condition of the study area in
different months.

92
 Description of Baseline Environment

Sunshine hour, Patuakhali (1983- 2013)

10
9
8
Sunshine (hr) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb
Post-
Pre-Monsoon Monsoon Winter
Monsoon
Max of Avg 8.55 9.13 8.37 6.47 4.78 5.28 5.72 7.71 9.22 7.97 8.22 9.2
Min of Avg 6.57 4.84 3.81 1.18 1.27 1.87 2.82 1.99 3.5 4.67 5.33 5.73
Average 7.65 7.33 6.04 3.20 2.88 3.71 4.03 5.79 6.67 6.78 6.89 7.51

Figure 6.6: Monthly maximum, minimum and average sunshine hour (1983-2013)

Wind speed and direction

Since tropic of cancer passes through the central part of Bangladesh therefore, the south-
eastern zone of Bangladesh lies in the tropical atmosphere. The climate of Bangladesh is
administered by monsoon wind which possesses reverse direction in specific seasons.
The study area is prejudiced by the interaction of sea breeze; it has low topography similar to
the sea level. Wind flow and direction are very important for the oceanic tides, waves, currents
and atmospheric status.
Figure 6.7 and Figure 6.8showthe wind speed and direction of wind blowing in Kuakata which
is 20 km away from the study area. Figure 6.7 is collected from the study conducted by Alam
and Azad (2014) on wind energy analysis for three coastal sites of Bangladesh. The wind rose
diagram in Figure 6.7 (a) shows that in Kuakata, most of the time of year wind comes from
the direction between South-West and North-West with a significant amount from direction
East and Eastern-North-East. This is well-expected outcome since this particular region is
influenced by the wind blowing from south-west and north-east. The long converging south–
west coastal line of Bangladesh has its influence which changes the general direction slightly.
Figure 6.7 (b) shows the prevailing wind direction of each month throughout the year and also
indicates that the characteristic of country’s climate reversal wind circulation is present. The
reversal wind starts blowing in February and remains till September with a general trend for
stabilizing one wind direction. This is true for the months of October to January. (Alam & Azad,
2014).

93
 Description of Baseline Environment

(a) (b)
(Source: Alam & Azad, 2014)

Figure 6.7: (a) Wind Rose and (b) Monthly prevailing wind for Kuakata

It is observed that the proposed project site is highly windy. Wind data of PatuakhaliBMD
station has been sorted out to represent the maximum and average wind speed of wind flow
over this area (Figure 6.8). Overall, it is observed that the average wind speed over this area
is slightly decreasing.

Wind Speed, Patuakhali (1983-2013)

35.00

30.00

25.00
Wind speed, m/s

20.00

15.00

10.00

5.00

0.00

Max, m/s Avrg, m/s

Figure 6.8: Annual wind speed (1983-2013)

6.4 Ambient Air Quality

The air quality of the study area are investigated through standard sampling process and
laboratory analysis. Some of the brickfields were found in the Itabaria Villages. RPCL is
developing the land through dredged spoil from the Andharmanik River. Emission from the
brickfields, small automobiles, engine van, heavy vehicles on the Barisal- Kuakata highway,
vessels in the Rabnabad, Andharmanik River and RPCL power plant development activities
are the major sources of pollution of the air in the study area. Moreover, frequent rainfall clears
the air regularly. Four sites within the study area have been selected (Map 6.6) in order to

94
 Description of Baseline Environment

investigate the ambient air quality. The location has been selected depending on the wind
direction, location, and sensitivity and pollution potentiality for future monitoring. All the
samples were collected for 8 hrs. Table 6.4 shows the ambient air quality like SOx, NOx,
PM2.5, PM10, CO, O3 and CO2 etc. at the selected points of the study area. The sampling
locations are shown in Map 6.6. The day on which the samples were collected, it was a clear
sunny day and the wind direction was relatively calm.

Table 6.4: Ambient air at different locations around the project site
Concentration present of different parameter in ambient air
Sample (µg/m3)
SI Coordinates
Location PM2.5 PM10 SO2 NOx CO O3 CO2
(µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (ppm) (ppm)
21°58’36.9” N; Dry 62 182 23 18 54 0.004 683
1 Itbaria village
90°15’49.4”E Wet 5 10 10 6 51 0 554
Londakheyagha 22°00’43.7” N; Dry 48 149 24 20 63 0.004 648
2
t, Dhankhali 90°16’41.3”E Wet 11 23 8 9 49 0 612
Islampur, 22°02’39.3” N; Dry 65 172 27 24 61 0 685
3
Pujakhola 90°16’26.3”E Wet 6 25 7 6 55 0 633
Dhankhali 22°01’54.8” N; Dry 48 106 24.5 22 70 0.001 664
4
Ashraf Academy 90°19’5.9”E Wet 7 17 9 9 54 0.002 607
West- Jacob & CO O3 CO2
Method of Analysis Gravimetric Gravimetric
Gaeke Hochheiser Meter Meter Meter
Test Duration (minutes) 480 480 480 480 480 480 480
DoE Standard for ambient Air 365 100 10,000 157 (8
65 (24hr) 150 (24hr) NF
quality (24hr) (Annual) (8 hrs) hrs)
125 40 160 (8
IFC/WB Standard 75 (24hr) 150 (24hr) NF NF
(24hr) (Annual) hrs)
Source: CEGIS, 2015

Source: CEGIS, 2015

Photo 6.1: Sampling of Air quality around Photo 6.2: Monitoring of Noise level around
project site project site

95
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.6: Air sampling location map

96
 Description of Baseline Environment

6.5 Acoustic Environment

The proposed project area is located in rural settings at present. It is situated on the northern
side of the RPCL 1320 MW coal based power plant. Around 250 m is the lowest distance
between RPCL power plant and RPCL proposed power project. Therefore, this area is
transforming from rural settings to semi-urban settings as the major infrastructure in
association with other development activities are progressing. As per DoE and World Bank
guideline, the standard level of noise are shown in Table 6.5.

Table 6.5: Noise Level Standard

ECR, 2006 (Leq, dBA)
Guideline Location/ Receptors Day Night
6:00 Hr-21:00 Hr 21:0 Hr – 6:00 Hr
Silent Area 50 40
Residential Area 55 45
ECR, 2006 Mixed Area 60 50
Commercial Area 70 60
Industrial Area 75 70
Day Night
7:00 Hr-22:00 Hr 22:00 Hr – 7:00 Hr

Residential, Institutional, Educational 55 45

IFC, 2008
Industrial, Commercial 70 70

At present, the land development activities of RPCL is progressing along with the bank
protective works. Numbers of dredgers have been installed sequentially on the Andharmanik
River and Tiakhali Khal for withdrawal of filling materials. Therefore, the villagers especially
near the river bank are found to be annoyed for the noise generating from the dredger. The
dredgers start operation early in the morning and continues up to 8:00 pm. Moreover, frequent
movement of diesel engine operated vehicles e.g. engine vans produce high noise near the
road side residence. River side residence and the fishers are also susceptible to high noise
from the vessels (e.g. engine boat, cargo, launch etc.) moving through the Tiakhali Khal,
Andharmanik River, and Rabnabad River.
The proposed project area is presently occupied with agricultural crops and settlements. The
acoustic environment in the project area are normal. Numbers of diesel machines and Power
tillers are operated for field preparation purposes. However, noise of birds cheering, local loud
speakers and sea shore sound are creating localized noise in the study area. Map 6.7 shows
the susceptible places which can be potentially affected for noise generation during
construction and operation of the power plant project. The noise level, measured in fifteen
locations during daytime around the project area is represented in Table 6.6.

97
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.7: Noise sampling location map

98
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.6: Noise level at different locations around the project area

Sl. Noise Level (dB)

Measuring Location Coordinates
No. Day Night
21°59'26.34"N
1 Payra Port Administrative office 63 42
90°16'38.13"E
21°59'13.70"N
2 Lalua 52 35
90°17'30.43"E
22° 0'24.16"N
3 Londaghat 60 45
90°16'27.18"E
22° 0'38.93"N
4 Londa Bazar 63 46
90°16'45.20"E
22° 0'18.84"N
5 Londa (East of RPCL) 58 48
90°17'5.67"E
21°59'47.66"N
6 Madhu Para (S-W of RPCL Project) 57 41
90°17'16.82"E
21°59'40.63"N
7 Madhu Para (South of RPCL Project) 61 40
90°17'37.06"E
21°59'32.60"N
8 Madhu Para (South of RPCL Project) 54 44
90°18'4.37"E
21°59'4.41"N
9 Char Nishanbaria 65 50
90°18'23.11"E
21°59'26.05"N
10 Char Nishanbaria (S-E of RPCL Project) 51 46
90°18'34.43"E
21°59'53.86"N
11 Char Nishanbaria (E of RPCL Project) 43 35
90°18'43.75"E
22° 0'17.36"N
12 Gondamari 54 45
90°18'36.16"E
22° 0'43.74"N
13 Gondamari (Proposed Approach Jetty Road) 49 38
90°18'33.65"E
22° 1'18.76"N
14 Debpur (E-of the Proposed power plant) 47 35
90°18'53.24"E
22° 0'53.21"N
15 Dhankhali (South of the proposed Project) 45 40
90°18'5.61"E
22° 0'49.51"N
16 Londa (Proposed resettlement village) 43 35
90°17'40.93"E
22° 1'24.98"N
17 Londa (East side community near the Tiakhali Khal) 48 42
90°16'30.21"E
22° 2'8.96"N
18 Londa (Opposite site of Pujakhola) 50 33
90°16'57.00"E
22° 2'3.18"N
19 Dhankhali (East side of the proposed project) 46 30
90°18'28.13"E
22° 2'6.52"N
20 Dhankhali Bazar 56 50
90°19'15.69"E
Source: CEGIS Field survey, February, 2016

99
 Description of Baseline Environment

6.6 Water Resources System

The existing water resources system of the study area is plays indispensable role in
attenuating and regulating drainage in controlled way, recharging the aquifer, and maintaining
the environment for aquatic habitats.

Major Rivers

Three major rivers and enormous canals are flowing in the study area. The names of rivers
are Andharmanik, Rabnabad and Tiakhali. All the rivers and canals are tidal in nature. The
Project area is bounded by Andharmanik River (Photo 6.4) to the south, Rabnabad River
(Photo 6.3) to the East, and Tiakhali River (Photo 6.5) to the West.
The Andharmanik River has originated from the Rabnabad Channel at Char Nishabaria in
Dhankhali Union of Kalapara Upazila and discharges into the Bay of Bengal at Amtali Upazila.
The length of the Andharmanik River is about 40 km having maximum width of 1,363 m,
minimum 250 m and average 500 m. It is a tidal dominated river as such water is available
throughout the year. During monsoon, flow from the upstream is dominating but in the dry
period tidal water flow is also dominating. The average variation of water level is 3.0 m
between high tide and low tide. The width of the river is wider in the downstream than the
upstream portion. (Bangladesh Rivers, August 2011, BWDB)
The Tetulia River is named as Rabnabad River at Chalitabunia Union of Galachipa Upazila.
The length of the river Rabnabad is approximately 20.0 km, having maximum width of 4,408m,
minimum 1,190 m and average 1,840m (Bangladesh Rivers, August 2011, BWDB). It is tidal
river and flow is available throughout the year. The river falls into the Bay of Bengal. The river
system of the area is shown in Map 6.8.

Water Connectivity

The water resources system of the study area is mainly governed by the AndharmanikRiver
and Rabnabad River which are fedby water from the upstream and downstream (during high
tide). There are numerous khals in the polder namely Nanda Khal, Mach Khali River,
Modhupara Khal, and other branch khals which facilitate the flow circulation inside the
proposed Project area. The area of the khals in the project area is 18.62 ha (46 acre). The
outfalls of all these internal khals are connected with Tiakhali River which controls the main
drainage system of the Project area. These khals have tidal effects and the flow direction is
from east to west. During high tide the flow direction of the khals is from Tiakhali River to the
inner side.
During rainy season, these khals drain the surplus water out of the polder 54 A through Hafez
Podder sluice (Photo 6.6). However, in recent years, most of the khals have been silted up
due to increased siltation. This also hampers the flow circulation inside the polder area.

100
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.8: River system of the study area

101
 Description of Baseline Environment

Photo 6.3: Rabnabad Channel at Char Photo 6.4: Andharmanik River at Lalua
Nishanbaria Kheya Ghat

Photo 6.5: Tiakhali River at Dhankhali Photo 6.6: Main Drainage Channel of
Bridge Polder 54 A& B at Londa Village

Hydrological Setting

Water Levels

The water level is an important issue of water resources. The available water level data of at
Khepupara (BIWTAtidal water level Station ID-610: Andarmanik River,) was collected for the
period of 1977 to 2007.Figure 6.9 shows that water level during high tide ranges from +3.65
mPWD to +4.95 mPWD, whereas low tidal water level ranges from (-)0.03 mPWD to (+)
0.69mPWD.

102
 Description of Baseline Environment

Surface Water Level of Andarmanik River at Khepupara (1977-2007)

6

5
Tidal Water Level (mPWD)

High Tide Low Tide

2

-1

Month

Figure 6.9: Surface water level of Andarmanck River at Khepupara

Groundwater Table
The study area like other parts of the country, receives sufficient amount of rainfall and
groundwater is available there which are used by hand pumps for drinking and domestic
purposes. Monthly variation in ground water level from the year 1977 to 2013 has been
analyzed from the nearest BWDB ground water observation well PAT002 (Well ID: 17857001)
at Amtali Upazila. The variation pattern for PAT002 station shows that the GWT values are
fairly low, with lowest and highest values in September and March respectively. The monthly
variation of average ground water level at Amtali Upazila is shown in Figure 6.10.

Average Monthly Ground water table at Amtali (1977-2013)

0.00

0.30
Depth of GWT (m)

0.60

0.90

1.20

1.50

1.80

2.10
Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar
Month

Figure 6.10: Average monthly variations of GWT

The Ground Water Table (GWT) measured in the aforementioned location at ten year intervals
are shown in Table 6.7. Values are analyzed for the months of March (Considered as dry

103
 Description of Baseline Environment

period) and September (considered as wet period). In dry season, increased dependency of
the local people on ground water lowers the GWT. During monsoon, the higher availability of
surface water leads to higher recharge of ground water sources.

Table 6.7: Ground Water Tables (GWT) shown at ten-year intervals

1980 1990 2000 2010

New ID Location Mar Sep Mar Sep Mar Sep Mar Sep
Depth in Meter
PAT002 Amtali 2.51 1.48 2.00 1.36 1.41 0.98 1.61 1.54
Source: NWRD, 2010

Analyses have also been made to understand the long-term annual variations of GWT from
1977 to 2013 at PAT002 station, for the month of March (driest period) and September (wettest
period). The values are presented in Figures 6.11 and 6.12. A mild increasing trend of annual
GWT variation is observed in both cases. Figure 6.11 and 6.12 shows that the ground water
table is gradually increasing both in the month of March and September

Source: BWDB, 2014

Figure 6.11: Variation of GWT at PAT002 Figure 6.12: Variation of GWT at PAT002
in March (1977-2013) in September (1977-2013)

Aquifer System
The aquifer system in Bangladesh is categorized mainly in three groups which are; a) the
upper aquifer or composite aquifer, b) the main aquifer and c) deeper aquifer. However, the
study area has fallen under coastal area, which belongs to the deeper aquifer of the country.
The brief characteristic of this aquifer system is described below:
The deeper aquifer: The deeper unit is separated from the overlying main aquifer by one or
more clay layers of varied thickness and extent. Deep aquifers are generally based on depth
and in some areas the aquifers water have no flow either vertically upward or downward but
flows very slowly along the dips and slopes of the aquifers (Figure 6.13). This water bearing
zone comprises of medium to coarse sand in places inter bedded with fine sand, silt and clay.
At present, water of coastal zone are being exploited in limited quantity from the water bearing
formations deeper than 150-200 m. Large scale extraction is not encouraged in the coastal
areas due to the every possibility of sea-water intrusion or leakage from the upper aquifer
(Sattar, M.A. 1993). The characteristics of the main aquifers of the country including the
coastal zone where the study area is situated are presented in Table -1 of Appendix –XII.
From the Table, it has been observed that the lithology of the coastal aquifer is grey medium
to coarse sands with mostly confined to semi-confined in nature with transmissivity rate of
1,000-3,000 m2/day (EIA Report of Polder 48, CEIP).

104
 Description of Baseline Environment

Figure 6.13: Hydro geological Cross Section from North to South across Bangladesh

The lithology of coastal aquifer is presented in Figure 6.14 below.

Figure 6.14: Lithological Cross-section of the Coastal Aquifer

Furthermore, based on the lithology and other characteristics of the aquifer the entire country
has been divided into 15 potential groundwater development zones (Map 6.9). The study area
has fallen under zone N (Annex, Table -II) which has been characterized as Floodplains of
GBM with brackish and saline water problems.

105
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.9: Potential groundwater development zones

106
 Description of Baseline Environment

Water Resources Issues and Functions

Tidal and Storm Surge Flooding

Tidal flooding is very common in the coastal area. The main reasons for flooding are heavy
rainfall, tidal water intrusion throughsluice gates and sea water level rising etc. At present, no
tidal flooding is observed in the study area except in the Amtali Union. Tidal flooding occurs
inside the Amtali Union in almost every year and inundates about 7 to 8 % of total area of the
Union due to lower drainage capacity of Pujakhola regulator (Photo 6.7).
The peripheral flood control embankment effectively offers protection to the area from the
storm surge flooding. The existing crest level of embankment is 4.40-5.80 mPWD (Source:
CEIP report). Local people opined that there was no major storm surge flooding in the Polder
area during AILA, 2009 and SIDR, 2007. However, this problem will aggravate in future
particularly at Debpur in the south-eastern part of the polder area (GPS: 0224062, 2439360)
as is under threat for severe bank erosion (Photo 6.8) from the tidal wave action and storm
surge of the Bay of Bengal.

Photo 6.7: One vent Pujakhola Regulator Photo 6.8: 700 meter Erosion at Debur in
at Pujakhola village, Amtali Union Rabnabad Channel, Champapur Union

Drainage Congestion and Water Logging

Drainage congestion has been identified as a common problem inside the Amtali Union and
its intensity varies from place to place. PujakholaKhal (Photo 6.9 and 6.10) suffers from
moderate drainage congestion problems. The drainage direction of this khal is from north to
south and interconnected by a channel naming Tiakhali River. A total of about 84% (2,354
mm) of total annual rainfall occurs during monsoon and post-monsoon periods. As a result,
the internal khals and Pujakholakhal cannot cope with the increased rainfall occurrences due
to high siltation through rotten leavesand leading to moderate congestion. Local people
reported that, about 10% of the Amtali Union of the study area suffers from moderate drainage
congestions during the field investigation from 4th to 9th February 2016.

107
 Description of Baseline Environment

Photo 6.9: PujakholaKhal at Paschim Photo 6.10: Pujakhola Khal at Sonauta

Such drainage congestions, mostly affect the agriculture and its production. Due to reduced
drainage capacity of the khals, rainwater inundates agricultural fields for a period of 10 to 15
days, and delays the plantation of Aman crops. The main reason for drainage congestion is of
two-fold; decreasing of the conveyance capacity of the internal and lateral khals due to
sedimentation and occurrence of heavy rainfall during monsoon. Local people opined that, no
prolonged water logging situation exists inside the study area, however, rain fed inundation
exists in some areas as already discussed above.
Salinity
Salinity intrusion is one of the major problems in the study area. During monsoon moderate
salinity is found inside the study area. It increases during dry season (November to May).
Tidal water intrudes during high tide through the unprotected area and deteriorates water
control structures to some extent. However, the surface water as well as the groundwater are
recorded to be saline (Table 6.9) causing crisis of fresh water in the study area for short period
of time.
Navigation
Waterway is the most important means of communication of this area, which is cheaper
compared to the road transportations. The peripheral Andharmanik River and Tiakhali River
are used as waterway communication. Local people use small and medium trawlers for
carrying passengers and goods from one place to other throughout the study area.
The important inland navigation facilities are Kalapara Ferry Ghat and Londa Kheya Ghat. The
latter is the most prominent kheyaghat for Dhankhali and Champaur Union through which a
large number of passengers (about 300-500 passengers/hr), small and medium trawlers (50-
60 nos/day), fishing boat (100-120 nos/day) move round the year. One small ferry, with
carrying capacity of 3-4 buses was found at Baliatoli Ferry Ghatduring field visit. But, at
present, this Ferry Ghat is inactive due to mechanical problem of the Ferry. People of Baliatoli
and Lalua Unions (500-600) moves through the Andharmanik River by mechanized boats.

108
 Description of Baseline Environment

Photo 6.11: Navigation at Londa Kheya Photo 6.12: Navigation point at Debpur
Ghat

Water Quality

Water quality test has been performed in and around the project area for both surface and
ground water. The locations of sampling have been selected such a way that it would
represent entire study area (Map-6.10). In-situ tests have been conducted maintaining the
standard practice during field visit in June, 2016.The measured values (pH, DO, EC, TDS and
Salinity) are presented in Table 6.8a where the lab analysis report.

109
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.10: Baseline water quality monitoring location

110
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.8a: Result of the Water quality in the study area (In-situ)

Sample Location of DO EC TDS BOD5 Salinity

Season pH
Source Sampling ppm ppm ppm (ppm) (ppt)
Near to the Outlet of Dry 7.77 1.4 1140 570 - 0
GW-1 Majher Khal (from 80
feet depth) Wet 6.91 0.9 0.05 87 - 0
Near the to the
Dry 8.17 2.7 1110 550 - 0
mosque outside the
GW-2
project area (from
Wet 7.3 0.8 0.05 88 - 0
110 feet depth)
Dry 7.75 6.3 - - 2.5 2.2
SW-1 Payra Port Authority
Wet 7.58 7.1 0.28 165 1.4 0
Dry 7.9 5.6 - - 2.0 0.5
SW-2 Tiakhali Khal
Wet 7.24 5.5 0.38 276 2.1 0
Dry 7.9 5.4 - - 2.2 2.0
SW-3 Tiakhali Khal
Wet 7.74 6.2 0.23 173 2.0 0
Dry 7.74 1.4 300 140 2.4 0
SW-4 Shonirvar Khal
Wet 7.60 9.3 0.15 111 2.5 1.0
Dry 7.11 5.3 - 1860 1.5 2.1
Rabnabad Channel
SW-5
(Intake Upstream) Wet 7.75 7.3 0.12 94 1.7 2.0

Dry 7.8 4.2 1750 870 1.8 2.3

Rabnabad Channel
SW-6
(Intake Point)
Wet 7.67 6.9 0.12 94 1.7 2.0

Rabnabad Channel Dry 8.27 5.8 - - 1.9 2.4

SW-7
(Intake Downstream)
Wet 7.75 7.9 0.12 94 1.5 2.0
Dry 8.01 5.6 - 1910 2.9 0
Majher Khal (Inside
SW-8
the project) Wet 7.69 6.0 0.08 62 2.0 1.0
Source: CEGIS, January and June 2016 (primary water quality in-Situ test results)

Table 6.8b: Result from the Water quality in the study area
Water Quality SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
S.L Season
Parameters (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l)
Dry 108 107 108 80 115 90 143 128
1 Alkanity
Wet 88 80 78 73 63 65 68 45
Arsenic Dry 0.002 0.001 0.003 0.003 0.002 0.002 0.001 0.002
2
(As) Wet 0.002 0.003 0.003 0.001 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.001
Calcium Dry 77 79 75 18 61 59 45 60
3
(Ca) Wet 28 15 19 20 10 17 18 10
Dry 40 32 40 36 28 16 32 24
4 COD
Wet 28 4 8 8 4 4 12 8
Dry 1588 2280 3276 40 1240 1142 560 1710
5 Chloride
Wet 20 24 17 13 12 11 12 25
6 EC Dry 4980 7010 10540 229 4090 3800 1854 5700
Wet 369 383 274 154 148 141 144 443
7 Hardness Dry 735 980 1470 325 755 745 510 905

111
 Description of Baseline Environment

Water Quality SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
S.L Season
Parameters (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l) (mg/l)
Wet 188 160 155 138 140 123 142 160
Dry 3.21 0.78 1.17 1.97 1.16 1.15 1.82 3.2
8 Iron(Fe)
Wet 7.48 4.88 6.31 2.37 7.83 6.13 5.92 2.42
Dry 0.026 0.052 0.182 <LOQ 0.02 0.047 0.015 0.042
9 Lead(Pb)
Wet 0.007 0.005 0.010 0.001 0.006 0.006 0.005 0.001
Magnesium Dry 61 63 64 19 53 55 38 48
10
(Mg) Wet 13 11 11 5 8 4 4 7
Mercury Dry <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ
11
(Hg) Wet <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ <LOQ
Nitrogen Dry 0.5 1 0.4 0.7 0.3 0.9 0.4 0.8
12
(NO3) Wet 7.31 9.81 11.07 10.33 13.16 17.10 18.01 20.36
Dry 1.39 0.32 1.52 1.54 0.27 0.99 0.55 0.85
13 Phospate
Wet 4.47 2.89 6.68 3.15 3.41 7.02 6.72 2.09
Dry 21 21 23 6 61 15 9 10
14 Potassium(K)
Wet 6 5 5 3 4 4 3 3
Sodium Dry 839 1235 2072 43 605 680 280 1191
15
(Na) Wet 58 71 48 41 36 21 24 72
Dry 300 390 630 <LOQ 320 280 120 410
16 Sulphate
Wet 22 7 12 5 7 8 10 14
Total Dry 2610 3740 5547 109 2125 2010 972 2987
Dissolved
17
Solid Wet 177 184 132 74 71 68 69 213
(TDS)
Dry 54 15 21 5 10 15 14 1
18 Turbidity
Wet 197 86 215 77 200 170 181 26
Total Organic Dry 7.62 6.05 5.56 6.12 4.4 4.31 4.21 4.75
19
Carbon Wet 3.21 1.72 1.31
Dry
20 Silica
Wet 121 78 116 72 122 98 110 29
Source: CEGIS January, June 2016 (primary water quality in-Situ test results)

Table 6.8c: Result of the Water quality (Lab test) in the study area
Hardness

Phospate
Chloride
Season

Silica
COD

NO3

SO4
Ca

Hg
Pb
Fe
As

Sample
K

Dry 0.001 12 4 46 - 270 0.87 0.062 3.8 7.29 <LOQ 5.0

GW1
(mg/l) <LO <LO
Wet 0.001 7 4 264 9.2 103 2.1 0.001 10.56 4.63 -
Q Q
Dry 0.001 15 4 40 230 0.74 0.057 2.3 7.65 - <LOQ 3.0
GW2
(mg/l) <LO <LO
Wet 0.007 7 4 277 12 113 1.03 0.002 27.82 3.95 -
Q Q
Source: CEGIS January, June 2016 (primary water quality in-Situ test results)

112
 Description of Baseline Environment

Water Use

The standard value of average daily demand of water for domestic and drinking purposes in
rural areas is considered as 50 lpc (Ahmed and Rahman, 2010). However, the actual status
of drinking water in some of the coastal polders is very poor. During field survey in the study
area, it was found that the average daily domestic use of water was around 40 lpc.The study
found that around 27,200 m3 of water is consumed daily by a total number of 680 people living
in the Project area.Local people opined that they prefer Deep Tube Wells (DTWs) for drinking
water source to meet up their daily requirements. For other domestic uses, Shallow Tube well
and surface water sources are used. Overall, water availability in the study area is not a major
concern as local people claimed that they have sufficient surface and groundwater sources to
meet up their daily need for drinking and domestic purposes. In the study area, use of pond
during dry season is very essential due to increasing surface water salinity. About 3.64 ha (9
acre) of pond area is being used as fishing and kitchen water purpose.

River morphology and dynamics

Three rivers have been found within the study area, the Rabnabad, the Tiakhali and the
Andermanik. The latter two are the linking channels of the Rabnabad and the Bay of Bengal.
In the Tiakhali, there is one north-south flowing dead-end portion, which is also names as
Tiakhali. Tide is very strong in these rivers due to proximity to the sea.
There is no along shore sediment transport along the southern coast of Bangladesh, as many
estuaries have interrupted the transport along with fluvial input from the river. Hence, during
tides from the sea, it erodes huge land mass and carry the sediment to the upstream and on
its way back it deposited them in the rivers and estuaries.
This phenomenon, of course, is related with the stage of delta building process, along with
changes of fluvial/tidal flow and sediment, tidal amplification/dampening and many more. For
morphological analysis of the study area, satellite images of 1973, 2008 and 2015 have been
used. GIS and RS tools and technologies have been used for this assignment. Backlines of
those three years have been delineated following the CEGIS defined methodologies. Then
the bank lines have been used for analyzing the erosion accretion pattern of the study area.
a. Erosion-accretion during 1973 to 2008
Huge erosion has occurred during this period, especially in the Rabnabad Channel, in
comparison to the accretion. At the downstream part of the island, namely Bibir Haola (polder
49), adjacent to the Tetulia Channel, big land mass was found to be eroded. About 824 ha
land has been eroded in the Rabnabad channel within the study area (circle), as shown in
Figure 6.15; whereas 566 ha land was accreted. Erosion is observed along both banks of the
channel. In the downstream the erosion rate was more than that of the upstream. Accretion is
mainly observed in the western side of the ChatalbuniaIsland.
On the other hand, there was some erosion (104 ha) in the Tiakhali main channel that connects
with the Andermanik Channel, but complete accretion (303 ha) was observed in the dead-end
part of Tiakhali, that following north-southward from the Tiakhali main channel (Figure 6.16).
Negligible erosion accretion was found in the Andermanik Channel in comparison with those
of the Rabnabad and Tiakhali channels.
The overall erosion rate in the Rabnabad channel with the study boundary area was 24 ha/yr,
whereas the accretion rate was 16 ha/yr. As a result, net erosion was observed during this
period. On the other hand, the erosion rate in the Tiakhali was 3 ha/yr and the accretion rate
were three times more than the erosion rate. Hence, net accretion was prevailing in the

113
 Description of Baseline Environment

Tiakhali channel. The rate of erosion and accretion in the Andermanik was negligible within
the study reach.

Figure 6.15: Erosion-accretion during 1973 to 2008

b. Erosion-accretion during 2008 to 2015

The erosion- accretion was different during 2008 to 2015 in comparison to that of 1973 to 2008
(Figure 7). The erosion rate in the Rabnabad has reduced to 15 ha/yr from 24 ha/yr of 1973-
2008. Accretion rate in this channel within the study reach remained same, i.e. 16 ha/yr. In the
Tiakhali channel, the erosion rate has reduced to 2 ha/yr from 3 ha/yr comparing those took
place earlier.Again, the accretion rate has increased to 17 ha/yr, which is almost double from
that of 1973-2008. Even, substantial accretion rate in the Andarmanik Channel has been
observed found. In every channel, accretion was prevailing in the process during 2008-2015.

114
 Description of Baseline Environment

Figure 6.16: Erosion-accretion during 2008 to 2015

c. Overall erosion-accretion during 1973 to 2015

Erosion was the dominating process in the Rabnabad channel during 1973 to 2015 (Figure
6.17), although recently the erosion and accretion rates are nearly similar. During this period,
a total of 844 ha of land has been eroded and 616 ha of land has been accreted. In the Tiakhali
River, the north-south section, that has a dead-end, is dying and has been accreted. A total of
101 ha of land has been eroded, whereas 386 ha of land has been accreted. Few lands in the
connecting channel of Rabnabad and Andermanik are eroding, especially in the outer bank of
the channel. A summary of erosion and accretion is given in Table 6.9.

115
 Description of Baseline Environment

Figure 6.17: Erosion-accretion during 1973 to 2015

Table 6.9: Summary of erosion accretion

Duration River Rabnabad Tiakhali Andarmanik

Erosion (ha) 824 104 6

Accretion (ha) 566 303 15
1973-2008 Net accretion (ha) (258) 199 9
erosion (ha/yr) 24 3 0
accretion (ha/yr) 16 9 0
Erosion (ha) 104 17 2
Accretion (ha) 115 119 20
2008-2015 Net accretion (ha) 11 102 18
erosion (ha/yr) 15 2 0
accretion (ha/yr) 16 17 3

116
 Description of Baseline Environment

Duration River Rabnabad Tiakhali Andarmanik

Erosion (ha) 844 101 6

Accretion (ha) 616 386 32
1973-2015 Net accretion (ha) (228) 285 26
erosion (ha/yr) 20 2 0
accretion (ha/yr) 15 9 1

Water Availability

Waters are the essential living elements in any industrial development. The present power
plant is located in the coastal region of Bangladesh. This area is a tidal dominating area, where
sea water enters into the coastal zone twice daily in an interval of 12.43 hours. In the plant
site, the available water source is the Rabnabad channel.
The tidal extent (521 sq. km) of two channels named Rabnabad and Golachipa have been
considered for calculation of the tidal prism. Tidal range near the plant area varies from 3.66
m to 4.75 m round the year (Table 6.10). Minimum tidal range has been considered during
estimation of tidal prism.

Table 6.10: Tidal range of the Rabnabad Channel

Average High Tide Average Low Tide
Month Tidal Range (m)
(mPWD) (mPWD)
April 4.31 0.16 4.15
May 4.94 0.22 4.72
June 4.55 0.69 3.86
July 4.82 0.41 4.41
August 4.95 0.61 4.34
September 4.81 0.3 4.51
October 4.72 -0.03 4.75
November 4.89 0.22 4.67
December 4.19 0.07 4.12
January 3.89 0.16 3.73
February 3.65 -0.01 3.66
March 4.04 0.07 3.97
Source: BIWTA; 1977-2007 (Station ID: 610 , Khepupara)

The estimated tidal prism of the channel adjacent to plant site is 595 Million m 3per cycle. The
present water requirement of the power plant is 5,117 m3/hr while the net requirement is 2,544
m3/hr. So, 0.031623 million m3 water per cycle is required during the operation period of the
plant. The required amount of water is very negligible compare to the water available in the
Rabnabad channel.

6.7 Land Resources

Baseline report of land resource is prepared on the basis of primary and secondary
information. Primary data was collected through field visit by a multidisciplinary team. Soil
samples were collected in the primary stage. Secondary sources of data were from BARC,
SRDI publication, local DAE and DL

117
 Description of Baseline Environment

Agro-Ecological Zones (AEZs)

The study area is under two different AEZs, while the project area is under one AEZ which are
situated in Barisal Division of Patuakhali district. The entire project area is under Ganges Tidal
Floodplain.. Details of AEZs are presented in Table 6.11 and Map 6.10.

Table 6.11: Information of area coverage by AEZ

Project area % of gross Study area % of gross

Name of AEZ
(acre) area (acre) area
Ganges Tidal Floodplain 915.65 100 69,061 89
Young Meghna Estuarine Floodplain 0 0 8,536 11
Total 915.65 100 77,597 100
Sources: SOLARIS-SRDI-2006.

Land Type

Land type classifications are based on depth of inundation during monsoon season due to
normal flooding on agriculture land. According to MPO, there are five land type classes: F0,
F1, F2, F3 and F4 of which there are one land type in the project area and two land types in the
study areas. Details are presented in Table 6.12 and Map 6.11.

Table 6.12: Detailed land type of project and study area

Project area Study area

Land
Flooding depth and characteristics Area % of Area % of
Type
(Acre) NCA (Acre) NCA
Land which is normally flooded between 30- 90 cm
F1 deep continuously more than two weeks to few 779.18 100 38,671 95
months during the flood season.
Land which is normally flooded between 180 and 360
F3 cm deep of inundation continuously for few months in 0 0 2,035 5
flood season
Total: 779.18 100 40,706 100
Source: Master Plan Organization, Technical Report No-1, 1987 and field observation June, 2016

Soil texture

Soil texture is the relative proportions of sand, silt and clay. Soil texture is an important soil
characteristic that guides crop selection, crop production and also field management.
According toSOLARIS-SRDI-2006, there are four major textural classes: .a) sands b) silts c)
loams and d) clays. Soil texture of the project area is clay loam. While in study area, three
types of soil texture were found. Soil texture of both the study and project area is presented in
Table 6.13 and Map 6.11.

Table 6.13: Information on soil texture of the project and the Study area

Project area Study area

Sl. No Soil Texture
Area (Acre) % of NCA Area (Acre) % of NCA
1 Clay - - 4,592 11
2 Clay Loam 779.18 100 28,871 71
3 Loam - - 7,243 18
Total 779.18 100 40706 100
Sources: SOLARIS-SRDI-2006.

118
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.11: Agro-ecological zones of the Project and the Study area

119
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.12: Land Type of the Project and the Study area

120
 Description of Baseline Environment

Soil Salinity

Salinity data of the study area was collected from the report of SRDI, SFSDP program. Soil
salinity of the entire project area is slightly saline with some moderate ones. Almost half of the
NCA in the study area has fallen under slightly saline with some moderately saline (S3) zone.
From Mr. Musiur Rahman, Upazila Agriculture Officer (UAO) of DAE (Department of
Agricultural Extension) and local farmers it is learnt that the soil and water salinity gradually
increases with dryness from January and reach the maximum level in the month of March and
April and then decreases due to onset of monsoon rainfall. Detailed soil salinity of both the
project and the study area is presented in Table 6.14 and Map 6.14.

Table 6.14: Historical Information on soil salinity

Project area Study area
Sl.
Soil Salinity Characteristics Soil salinity class Area % of Area % of
No
(Acre) NCA (Acre) NCA
1 Slightly saline with some
S3 (8.1-12.0 dSm-1) 779.18 100 19,946 49
moderately saline
2 Moderately saline with some
S4 (12.1-16 dSm-1) - - 12,212 30
strongly saline
3 Strongly saline with some very
S5 (>16 dSm-1) - - 8,548 21
strongly saline
Total 779.18 100 40,706 100
Source: SRDI; 2012

CEGIS team has collected three soil samples. One from project area (Gondabari) and the
other two from study area. (Uttor Nishanbaria and Londa). These soil samples were analyzed
by SRDI (Soil Resources Development Institute), Dhaka.
The analyzed data for soil salinaty has been shown as S1 for project area and S2 and S3 for
study area in the table 6.15 belowIt might be due to the impact of poldarization of the area.
Polders protect soil from regular inundation of tidal effect during dry seasons, when water
salinity is very high. Details soil analysis data is presented in Table 6.16.

Table 6.15: Information on soil salinity

Depth of Analyzed data
Area Location Standard
soil (cm) result (ds/m)
S1(2.0-4.0): -Non-Saline with some very
Gondabari 0-15 2.46
slightly Saline
Project S1(2.0-4.0):- Non Saline with some very
Gondabari 15-30 0.70
area slightly Saline
S1(2.0-4.0): -Non-Saline with some very
Gondabari 30-45 1.27
slightly Saline
Uttor S3(8.1-12.0): -Slightly saline with some
0-15 8.60
Nishanbaria moderately saline
Uttor S2(-8.0): - Very Slightly Saline with some
15-30 7.25
Nishanbaria slightly Saline
Uttor S2(4.1-8.0): - Very Slightly Saline with some
Study 30-45 6.26
Nishanbaria slightly Saline
area
S2(4.1-8.0): - Very Slightly Saline with some
Londa 0-15 5.37
slightly Saline
S1(2.0-4.0): -Non-Saline with some very
Londa 15-30 2.68
slightly Saline
S3(8.1-12.0): -Slightly saline with some
Londa 30-45 10.05
moderately saline

121
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.13: Soil Texture of the Project and the Study area

122
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.14: Soil salinity of the Project and the Study area

123
 Description of Baseline Environment

Soil Quality

Soil sample were collected from three locations in three depths (0-15 cm, 15-30 cm and 30-45 cm) inside the project and the study
areas on 7th February, 2016. Collected soil samples were analyzed by Soil Resource Development Institute (SRDI), Dhaka. It has
been found that top soil organic matter concentration is high. This condition is good for supporting plant growth. Macro and micro
nutrient concentration of the soils are also sufficient, while heavy metal concentration is within the permissible limit for plant growth.
Detail soil analysis result is presented in Table 6.16.

Table 6.16: Information on soil quality

Depth OM N K Ca Mg Na P S B Fe Mn Zn Pb Cd
Area Location of soil pH
% Meq/100g µg/g
(cm)
Gondabari 0-15 8.6 1.33 0.07 0.35 22.72 4.44 2.38 17.19 55.20 16.1 26.10 29.35 0.60 0.005 0.001
Project
area

Gondabari 15-30 7.4 1.24 0.07 0.34 10.50 6.08 0.29 11.32 16.20 2.50 104.06 26.74 0.51 0.003 0.000
Gondabari 30-45 7.9 0.97 0.05 0.40 12.01 7.87 1.11 7.95 29.28 1.89 17.75 21.86 0.50 0.007 0.001
Uttor
0-15 8.5 3.10 0.18 1.09 25.84 12.19 11.26 20.95 377.20 2.18 179.72 49.98 2.27 0.004 0.004
Nishanbaria
Uttor
15-30 8.2 0.92 0.05 0.68 9.83 9.75 7.21 8.66 143.10 2.00 20.44 14.55 0.67 8.72 0.001
Study area

Nishanbaria
Uttor
30-45 8.2 0.69 0.04 0.55 7.72 8.03 6.58 11.57 77.64 1.64 9.31 6.65 0.39 0.002 0.000
Nishanbaria
Londa 0-15 5.2 2.28 0.13 0.33 12.11 8.42 3.97 1.01 295.60 1.97 162.18 24.32 1.22 0.004 0.002
Londa 15-30 7.6 1.69 0.09 0.32 12.84 7.56 2.76 11.51 80.00 2.40 52.12 23.23 0.50 0.003 0.001
Londa 30-45 7.8 1.60 0.09 0.50 16.56 11.29 8.83 10.26 335.60 2.12 41.57 19.84 1.17 0.003 0.002

124
 Description of Baseline Environment

Land Use

The gross area of the project is 915.65 acres, where 779.18 acres is under cultivation, which
is 85.10% of the gross area. In the study area of 77,597 acres, around 40,706 acres is under
cultivation, which is 52.5% of gross area. Detailed land use of the study and project area is
presented in Table 6.17 and Map 6.15.

Table 6.17: Information on land use of the project and study area
Project Area Study area
% of
Land Use Area
Area (Acre) Gross % of Gross area
(Acre)
area
Agricultural Land 779.18 85.10 40,706 52.5
Brick-field 0 0 53 0.1
Chatal 0 0 33 0.0
Ditch 0.69 0.08 73 0.1
Inter-Tidal Zone 0 0 807 1.0
Mangrove (River bankside forest) 0 0 814 1.0
Pond 8.94 0.98 1,131 1.5
River/ Canal 45.03 4.92 22,866 29.5
Settlement with Homestead Vegetation 81.82 8.94 11,114 14.3
Total 915.65 100.0 77,597 100.0
Source: CEGIS 2015 (Rapid eye image analysis in March; 2015) and field visit at June, 2016.

125
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.15: Land use map of the Project and the Study area

126
 Description of Baseline Environment

6.8 Agricultural Resources

Baseline of agriculture resources was prepared based on primary and secondary information.
The secondary data were collected from DAE office in consultation with DAE personnel’s.
During field visit, four (4) questionnaires were filled up in four locations namely Itbaria,
Chakamaya Nishanbaria, Ghenda and Dhankhali under Dhankhali, Lalua and Chakamaiya
Upazilas of Patuakhali district for the interest of the study.

Farming practices

Farming practices largely depend on the cropping seasons. In Bangladesh, mainly three
cropping seasons prevails in a year. They are Kharif-I, Kharif-II and Rabi seasons. The Kharif-
I season, start from March and ends in June. This season is characterized by the uncertainty
of weather of alternating dry and wet spells. The Kharif-II season comprises of wet and cloudy
environment and heavy rainfall but uneven distribution, low solar radiation, high temperature
and humidity. The Kharif–II season starts from July and ends in October. The Rabi season
starts from November and ends in February. During this season, crops are favored with high
solar radiation, low humidity and temperature, but lack of adequate soil moisture depresses
the crop yield.
In the Project area, HYV Aus dominates over Jute in Kharif-I. HYV Aman is the major crop in
kharif-II, while watermelon dominates in the Rabi season. Moreover, HYV Boro, Sunflower,
Chilli and pulses are also grown under irrigated condition. The soils of Dhankhali (project area)
are fertile and salinity level is also under tolerable limit for crop production. As a result, most
of this land is cultivated throughout the cropping season.
In the study area, HYV Aus and HYV Aman dominate in Kharif-I and Kharif-II respectively,
while water melon is the major crop in Rabi season.

Cropping pattern and cropping intensity

The dominant cropping pattern in the project area is Fallow-HYV Aman-Watermelon which
occupies about 28% of the NCA. In the Kharif-I season, Local Ausand HYV Aus are grown in
about 3% and 15% of the NCA and the rest of NCA remains fallow. In the Kharif-II season,
HYV Aman occupies about 82% of the NCA, while the rest is covered by Lt. Aman. About 31%,
25%, 6%, 10%, 15% and 5% of the NCA is covered with Watermelon, Pulses, Chilli, Boro,
vegetable and Sun flower respectively in Rabi season.
Fallow-HYV Aman-Fallow dominates (55% of NCA) the cropping pattern of the study area.
Only 30% of land goes under cultivation in Kharif-I (HYV Aus-18% and Lt. Aus-12%). But in
Kharif-II, almost all the area goes under cultivation, where HYV Aman (85% of NCA) is the
major crop. In Rabi season, only 45% land of the NCA is being covered under cultivation and
rest remains fallow due to non-availability of fresh water (Photo 6.13 and Photo 6.14).
The cropping intensity of the Project area is 210%, where double and triple cropped areas are
70% and 26% respectively. Cropping intensity in the study area is 175%, where single, double
and triple cropped areas are 55%, 15% and 30% of NCA respectively. A detailed cropping
pattern of the project and the study and areas is presented in Table 6.18.

127
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.18: Cropping pattern of both the Project and the study area

Project Area
Rabi
Kharif-I Kharif-II
(November- Area(acre) % of NCA
(March-June) (July-October)
February)
Fallow HYV Aman Water Melon 218 28
HYV Aus HYV Aman Vegetables 117 15
Lt. AUS HYV Aman Water Melon 23 3
Fallow HYV Aman Pulses 195 25
Fallow HYV Aman Chilli 47 6
Fallow Lt Aman HYV Boro 78 10
Fallow HYV Aman Sunflower 39 5
Fallow Lt Aman Fallow 62 8
Total 779.18 100
Study Area
Rabi
Kharif-I Kharif-II
(November- Area(acre) % of NCA
(March-June) (July-October)
February)
HYV Aus HYV Aman Water Melon 7327 18
Lt. Aus HYV Aman Pulses 4885 12
Fallow Lt Aman Chilli 4071 10
Fallow Lt Aman Boro 2035 5
Fallow HYV Aman Fallow 22388 55
Total 40706 100
Source: CEGIS field visit; June, 2016

Photo 6.13: Field preparation for cultivation Photo 6.14: view of agricultural land in the
by using tractor (Ghenda, Dhankhali, study area, (Tiakhali, Dhankhali, Kalapara)
Kalapara)

Area, yield and production

The crop area, yield and production of both the project and study area were estimated by
using primary and secondary data of Kalapara Upazila under Patuakhali district. The
secondary data were collected from DAE office in consultation with DAE personnel’s and

128
 Description of Baseline Environment

primary data were collected through questionnaire survey in June, 2016. Total cropped area
in the proposed project is 1636 acres, of which area of rice is 997acre (61% of cropped area)
acres and non-rice crop area is 639 acre (39% of cropped area). Total cropped area in the
study is about 71,236 acres of which 54,953 acres (77% of cropped area) are covered with
rice while the rest 16,282 acres (23% of cropped area) are occupied by non-rice.
In project area, the production contribution of HYV Aus, Lt Aus, HYV Aman, Lt Aman and HYV
Boro are about 12%, 2%, 14%, 64% and 8% respectively over total rice production, while
vegetables, pulse, water melon, sunflower, chilli 18%, 30%, 38%, 6% and 7% of non-rice
production respectively. Total annual crop production in study area is about 229,419 tons of
which rice production is about 63,257 tons (28% of total production) and non-rice crops is
about 166,162 tons (72% of total production). The contribution of HYV Aus, Lt Aus, HYV Aman,
Lt Aman and HYV Boro are about 15%, 8%, 7%, 66% and 5% respectively over total rice
production, while production of pulse, watermelon and chilli production are 1%, 86% and 13%
of non-rice production.
Detailed cropped area and crop production is presented in Table 6.19.

Table 6.19: Crops area, yield and production

Project Area
Production
Crop name Crop Area (Acre) Yield (ton/Acre) Production (ton)
Contribution (%)
HYV Aus 117 1.3 152 13
Lt Aus 23 0.6 14 1
Lt. Aman 140 0.7 98 9
HYV Aman 639 1.2 767 67
HYV Boro 78 1.5 117 10
Total Rice 997 1148 100
Vegetables 117 0.9 105 2
Pulses 195 0.5 97 2
Water Melon 242 19.4 4686 90
Sunflower 39 2 78 1
Chilli 47 5.3 248 5
Total Non-Rice 639 5214 100
G.T. 1636 6362 122
Study Area
Production
Crop name Crop Area (Acre) Yield (ton/Acre) Production (ton)
Contribution (%)
HYV Aus 7,327 1.3* 9,525 15
Lt. Aus 4,885 1* 4,885 8
Lt. Aman 6,106 0.7* 4,274 7
HYV Aman 34,600 1.2* 41,520 66
HYV Boro 2,035 1.5* 3,053 5
Total Rice 54,953 63,257 100
Pulses 4,885 0.5 2,442 1
Water Melon 7,327 19.4 142,145 86
Chilli 4,071 5.3 21,574 13
Total Non-Rice 16,282 166,162 100
G.T. 71,236 229,419
Source: CEGIS field visit and DAE; June, 2016 *Indicates cleaned rice

129
 Description of Baseline Environment

Agricultural input use

Seed, labor, fertilizer and pesticides are the major inputs for crop production.
a. Seeds and labor

The role of seed is very important for growing crops. Selection of seeds should be considered
on the basis of more than 85% germination rate, free from disease infestation, good in shape
and size and high yield potential need to be considered. Farmers are using more seeds than
the recommended dose. Almost 50% of the cultural practice for crop production is being done
manually. Agricultural labor is considered as one of the essential inputs for crop production.
The labor requirement is not uniform throughout the year. The number of labor requirement
varies from crop to crop. The rate of labor wages varies from male and female. Average
number of labor used per hectare and the seeds/ha used by farmers is shown in Table 6.21.

Table 6.20: Seed and labor used in the study area and project area

Crop Name Use of seeds by the Farmers Labor( no/Acre)

(Kg/Acre)
HYV Aus 18-20 70-75
Lt. Aus 22-25 60-65
HYV Aman 18-20 60-65
Lt. Aman 22-25 65-70
Boro 25-30 80-85
Vegetable 3-4 50-65
Water melon 0.75-1 50-55
Chilli 0.75-1 55-60
Pulses 20-25 55-60
Sunflower 4-5 55-60
Source: CEGIS field visit; June, 2016

b. Fertilizer and Pesticides

The rate of fertilizers used per hectare varies considerably from farmer to farmer depending
on soil fertility, cropping pattern and financial ability. The major fertilizers used in this area are
Urea, TSP and MP. Most of the farmers apply fertilizers in an unbalanced way compared to
recommended doses of fertilizers.
The use of pesticides depends on the degree of pest infestation. The major insects as reported
by the farmers are Stem borer, Green leaf hopper, Ear cutting caterpillar, Brown plant hopper,
Cut worm and Aphid of mustard. Local farmer reported that they are using different types of
pesticides such as Virtako, Basudin and Ripcord etc. to prevent pest infestation both in rice
and non-rice cultivation. The fertilizer and pesticides using in the field are presented in Table
6.21.

Table 6.21: Fertilizer and pesticides application in the study area

Farmers use fertilizer (Kg/acre) Farmers use pesticides

Crop Name No of Liq. Gran.
Urea TSP MP Gypsum
Application (ml/acre) (Kg/acre)
HYV Aus 45 32 20 0 1-2 283 3
Lt. Aus 32 0 0 0 0 0 0

130
 Description of Baseline Environment

Farmers use fertilizer (Kg/acre) Farmers use pesticides

Crop Name No of Liq. Gran.
Urea TSP MP Gypsum
Application (ml/acre) (Kg/acre)
HYV Aman 45 32 20 0 1-2 283 3
Lt. Aman 36 28 16 0 1-2 202 0
HYV Boro 85 65 32 6 2-3 364 3
Pulses 32 - - 0 0 0 0
Vegetable 126 69 69 0 3-4 600 3
Water melon 113 227 38 - 4-5 364 3
Chili 89 49 36 49 1 - 0
Sunflower 55 45 45 - 2-3 360 2
Source: CEGIS field visit; June, 2016

Irrigation

Irrigation coverage of project area is 73% and in the study area is 33% of total NCA during the
Rabi/dry season. At present BADC initiated DTW project in Dhankhali and surrounding
Upazillas. Moreover, farmers used to irrigate their field from Tiakhali, Andarmanik,
Ramnabaad channel and their tributaries and khals. Irrigation is provided by using Shallow
Tube wells (STWs) and Deep tube wells (DTWs) in some places. HYV Boro, Chilli,
Watermelon and Sunflower are irrigated with these pumps. Details are presented in Table
6.22.

Table 6.22: Irrigated area by crop in both project and study area

Irrigation
Surface water (LLP) Ground water (DTW)
Crop name
Area % of Charge Area % of Charge
(acre) NCA (Tk./Acre) (acre) NCA (Tk./Acre)
Project Area
HYV Boro 23 3 2500-2800 55 7 4000-4500
Water melon 86 11 2500-2800 156 20 4000-4500
Chili 23 3 2500-2800 23 3 4000-4500
Vegetables 62 8 55 7
Sunflower 23 3 2500-2800 16 2 4000-4500
Study Area
HYV Boro 611 2 2500-2800 1424 3 4000-4500
Water melon 2931 7 2500-2800 4396 11 4000-4500
Chili 3257 8 2500-2800 814 2 4000-4500
Source: CEGIS field visit; June, 2016

Crop production constraints

According to local farmers the constraints of crop production are:

 Salinity in khals and soils during Rabi/dry seasons.
 Scarcity of irrigation water in Rabi/dry seasons.
 Siltation of the rivers and khals (February-March).
 Water logging in rainy season (March-June; Kharif-I).

131
 Description of Baseline Environment

6.9 Livestock Resources

Baseline of livestock resources is prepared based on primary and secondary information. The
secondary data were collected from DLS office in consultation with DLS personnel’s. During
field visit, four (4) questionnaires were filled up in four locations namely Itbaria, Chakamaya
Nishanbaria, Ghenda and Dhankhali under Dhankhali, Lalua and Chakamaiya upazilas of
Patuakhali district for the interest of the study.

Status of livestock and poultry

Livestock and poultry is an essential element of integrated farming system. This plays an
important role in the economy of both project and study area (Photo 6.15). Most of the
households have poultry and livestock, which significantly reduce poverty through generating
income. Detail information on livestock and poultry is presented in Table 6.24.

Table 6.23: Present livestock and poultry in both project and study area
Average number Number of Number of
Name of % of H/H having of Livestock and Livestock and Livestock and
livestock/poultry livestock/poultry Poultry in each Poultry of the Poultry of the
household Project Area Study Area
Cow/Bullock 30 3-Jan 108.9 25,559
Buffalo 5 2 12.1 2,840
Goat 40 4 193.6 45,438
Sheep 5 3 18.15 4,260
Duck 50 5 302.5 70,998
Chicken 70 6 508.2 119,276
Source: CEGIS field visit; June, 2016

Photo 6.15: View of cattle in the Project area (Ghenda, Dhankhali, Kalapara,
Patuakhali)

Feed and fodder

The owners of the livestock population in the study area face problems in respect of non-
availability of fodder and feeds during the months of July to November due to grazing land.
Rice straw is used as the main source of fodder, because grazing land is decreasing day by

132
 Description of Baseline Environment

day. Besides, oil cakes, rice husks are also used as fodder. The poultry population at family
level survives by scavenging and generally no feed supplements are provided. However,
sometimes kitchen waste becomes poultry feed.

Livestock and poultry diseases

Production of livestock and poultry of the study area are mainly constrained due to diseases
and death of the population. Outbreak of diseases causes considerable economic loss in
livestock farming. Every year, livestock population is affected by different diseases like Foot
and Mouth Disease (FMD), Anthrax (Torka), Black leg (Badla), Gola fula (Hemorrhagic
Septicemia), Pet fula (Enterotoxaemia), Diarrhea, Mastitis (Olan fula), Peste Des Petits
Ruminants (PPR) etc. The goat cyst in head is a common disease of goat. Major poultry
diseases are New Castle (Ranikhet), Fowl pox, Duck plague, Chronic Respiratory Disease
(CRD) and Dysentery, etc.

6.10 Fisheries Resources

Fish is the second most valuable agricultural crop in Bangladesh and its production contributes
to the livelihoods and employment of millions of people. Fish is one of the main sources of
animal protein in our country that meets 60% of our daily animal protein. Fisheries sector
contributes 3.69 percent of national GDP (Gross Domestic Product), which is almost one-
fourth (22.60 %) of country’s agricultural GDP, 2014. Annual production of Hilsa fish is about
3.85 lakh metric ton which contributes 11% of total fish production and its market value is
about 17,000 crore tk and only Hilsa contributes 1% of national GDP (National Fish Week,
2015). Bangladesh presently stands fourth in producing freshwater fish production (FAO,
2014-15). So now becoming self-reliant through fish cultivation is no longer a dream. In 2013-
2014, total fish production was about 3.55 million metric ton (FRSS, 2013 - 14).

Fish Habitat Characteristics

Fish habitats of the study area are classified into two broad categories such as capture
fisheries and culture fisheries. The capture fisheries comprises the following habitats such as
the Andharmanik and the Tiakhali River, the Rabnabad channel and khal etcwith have tidal
influence and serve as breeding and feeding grounds for brackish and some fresh water
fishes. These habitats also act as important migration route like Ilish, Koral, Poa, Deshi
Pangus, Bagda Chingri, Golda Chingri etc in the study area. The fresh water aquaculture is
practiced in larger and homestead pond by semi intensive and extensive cultured method.
Most of the homestead ponds are smaller in size and single cycle of fish culture is practiced
during wet season. The larger ponds are practiced with two cycle of fish culture as the ponds
contain water round the year. The Andharmanik and the Rabnabad channel are nationally
important for the following reasons are shown in Table 6.24.

Table 6.24: Significant fish habitat in the study area

Capture Habitat Significant reasons
A. Whole 40km stretch of the Andharmanik River at Kalapara Upazila has
Andharmanik
been declared as Hilsa sanctuary because of abundance of Jatka and more
River
than 10% of the Hilsa sanctuary has been fall inside the study area.
B. Rich in Deshi Pangus fry, Prawn and Shrimp PL
Rabnabad
C. Important migration route and suitable spawning ground for Hilsa fish.
Channel
D. Important source of brackish water fishes.

133
 Description of Baseline Environment

Ramnabad Channel Andharmanik River

Photo 6.16: Capturefish habitat

Fish Habitat Assessment

The estimated total fish habitat of the study area is about 28,548 acre, where the sharing of
the project area is about 522 acre. Fish habitat distribution is shown in Table 6.25.

Table 6.25: Analysis of fish habitat in the study area

Sl. Fisheries Study Area Project Area

Habitat Types
No. Habitat (acre) (acre)
1 Capture River/Channel/Estuary/Khal 22,866 45
2 **Trapped water shed habitat 2857 467
3 Inter tidal area 807 -
4 Mangrove 814 -
Sub-Total= 27,344 512
5 Culture Extensive cultured pond 73 1
6 Semi -intensive cultured pond 1,131 9
Sub-Total= 1,203 10
Grand Total= 28,548 522
Source: CEGIS estimation using field data, land use data prepared using RapidEye image, February 2016

**Trapped water shed habitat is not a conventional fish habitat. Rain water are trapped for one
or two month for cultivating of transplanted Amoninside the polder which serves as temporary
grazing and feeding ground for some fresh water fishes during rainy season.
Amongst the fish habitats, the capture fisheries contribute the most (about 96%) and the rest
is shared by culture fisheries. River/channel/Khal contributes about 80% followed by tapped
water shed habitats, intertidal zone, mangrove, extensive and semi intensive cultured pond as
shown in Figure 6.18.

134
 Description of Baseline Environment

Extensive
cultured pond Semi -intensive
Mangrove 3%
0.3% cultured pond
Inter-Tidal Zone 4%
10%

Trapped water
shed habitat 3%

River & Khal

80%

Source: Land use data extracted from RapidEye image in February 2016 and also validated at field level

Figure 6.18: Percentage of fish habitat area in the study area

Fish Production Assessment

The estimated total fish production of the study and project area is about 2,483 MT and 49 MT
respectively. In case of study area, capture fisheries contributes bulk of the total production
which accounts for about 2,086 MT and the rest is contributed by the culture
fisheries.Aquaculture in the larger ponds are done applying semi-intensive culture technology
with different species compositions such as poly- and mix culture with Indian major carps (Rui,
Catla, Mrigel), Chinese carps (Grass carp, Silver carp, Bighead carp) and mono culture with
mono sex tilapia culture etc. Aquaculture in the smaller ponds is generally done by applying
the extensive technology. Fish productivity has been collected from the FRSS, 2015 for district
level fish habitats. Fish productions from different habitats are shown in Table 6.26.

Table 6.26: Fish productions from different habitats

Sl. Fisheries Fish Production ( MT)
Habitat Types
No. Habitat Study Area Project Area
1 River/Channel/Estuary/Khal 1815 4
2 *Traped water shed habitat 204 42
Capture
3 Inter tidal area 34
4 Mangrove 34
Sub-Total= 2086 46
5 Extensive cultured pond 386 0.1
Culture
Semi -intensive cultured pond 10 2.9
Sub-Total= 396 3
Grand Total= 2483 49

Fishermen Status and Effort

Mainly two types of fishermen i.e. professional and part-time carry their life and livelihoods by
catching fish from different habitats of the study area. Among the fisher households of Londa
village, about 40% and 60% are involved in commercial and part time fishing respectively. The

135
 Description of Baseline Environment

professional fishermen mostly have own boat catching fish in the remote & peripheral channel,
river, Khal and part time fishermen catch fish in nearby rivers, Khals etc. Around 40 boat
dwelling fishermen family are dwelled in the study area and their livelihood fully depends on
catching fish and most of them migrated from Barishal district. The woman of these family
helps to catch fish and sometimes they catch fish herself. The professional and part-time
fishermen spend time in fishing activities for 6-10 hrs/day and 4-6 hrs/day respectively. Boat
dwelling fishermen are shown in Photo 6.17.

Photo 6.17: Boat dwelling fishermen

Fishing Gears

The study area has the characteristics of a mixture of estuary and inland fishing. Fishing in
such habitats is carried out using diversified gears and appliances for catching different fish
species. Gears used in this area and gear specific fish species are: (i) Current jal, used to
catch Ilish, (ii) Tonajal, used to catch Bata, Koral, Khalla etc., (iii) Poajal, used to catch Bata,
Poa, Ramsoch etc., (iv) Behundijal, used to catch Ilish., (vi) Thelajal, used to catch chingri.,
(vi) Net jal, used to catch PL of shrimp, (vi) Jhakijal used to catch fresh water fish,(vii) Borjal,
used to catch all types of brackish water fish etc.

Current Jal Poa Jal

136
 Description of Baseline Environment

Non Mechanized Craft (Dinghi Boat) Mechanized Craft (Trawler)

Photo 6.18: Fishing Gears

Collection of shrimp and prawn PL

Rabnabad channel is one of the important sources of prawn and shrimp PL. Shrimp PL are
collected from mid February to mid May (Falgun - Boishak) when water salinity is relatively
high and prawn PL are collected from mid May to mid August (Joistho - Srabon) when water
salinity is very low.There are around two thousands prawn and shrimp PL collectors in the
study area and their average income BDT 40,000-50,000 per year.

Photo 6.19: Prawn PL collected from Rabnanabad Channel

Fish Migration

The Rabnabad Channel, the Andharmanik and the Tiakhali River serve as a major corridor for
Hilsa migration of the study area. These rivers play an important role in fish migration from
sea shore to inland water bodies. Both anadromous and catadromous fishes migrate through
these rivers for meeting different biological requirements throughout the year at each stage of
their lifecycle. Hilsa uses the Rabnabad Channel and the Tiakhali River as diadromous
migration route both from sea to upstream river migration and vice versa.Besides, the major
migratory fish species of the study area are Koral, Pangus, Poa, Bata, Bagda etc. The life
cycle of Hilsa is shown in Figure 6.19.

137
 Description of Baseline Environment

Figure 6.19: Life cycle of Hilsa fish

Fish spawning grounds and seasonality

Hilsa spawns throughout the year but the peak season is September and October. Rabnaabd
channel is moderate suitable spawning ground for Hilsa but suitable for other brackish water
fishes. The spawning ground of Hilsa fish is shown in Map 6.16.
From January to March, the abundance of Jatka in the Andharmanik River and Rabnabad
channel are very high and these habitats are used as nursery grounds for Hilsa. After that,
adult Hilsa are migrated to the Bay of Bengal and again comes to the estuarine river for
spawning. The abundance of Jtaka is shown in Map 6.17. Due to the high abundance of Jatka
in the Andharmanik River, Government has declared it Hilsa sanctuary and shown in Map
6.18.

138
 Description of Baseline Environment

Source: DoF

Map 6.16: Hilsa Spawning Ground

139
 Description of Baseline Environment

Source: Dof

Map 6.17: Jatka Abundance

140
 Description of Baseline Environment

Source: DoF

Map 6.18: Hilsa Sanctuary at Andharmanik River

141
 Description of Baseline Environment

Fish Diversity and Composition

During consultation at Londa Kheya Ghat, local fishers and elderly people reported that the
fish biodiversity is declining over the years. It is reported that the Andermanik River and the
Ramnabad Channel once were available with large fish species like Ilish, Koral, Boal, Pangus,
etc but the catch is now rather meager. Major factors responsible fordeclining fish diversity
and fish abundance are: (i) fishing by destructive gear; (ii) increasing fishing pressure; (iii)
collection of shrimp PL which cause the mortality of other fish fauna, (iv) obstruction in fish
migration routes; (v) over harvesting of the natural resources (vi) shrinkage of spawning and
feeding ground, etc.
The study area comprises both brackish, marine water and fresh water fish species as shown
in Photo 6.20. The indicative fish species from different habitats of the study area are
presented in Table 6.28.

Assemblage of Horina Chingri

Assemblage of Hilsha (Tenualosa ilisha)
(Metapenaeus ensis)

Assemblage of Phasa (Setipinna phasa) Assemblage of Poa (Otolithoides pama)

Photo 6.20: Indicative riverine fish species of the study area

Checklist of the fishes of different habitats reported by local fishers is analyzed to draw a
tentative scenario of the local fish diversity of the study area.

142
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.27: Indicative fish species diversity by habitats with IUCN status
Habitat Type
IUCN Capture Culture
Scientific Name Local Name
Status River/Channel/
Khal Fish Pond
Estuary
Brackish water fish species
Tenualosa ilisha Ilish LC P A A
Otolithoides pama Poa LC P A A
Lates calcarifer Koral - P A A
Setipinna phasa Phasa LC P A A
Rita rita Rita EN P P A
Sperata aor Aor VU P P A
Wallago Attu Boal VU P P A
Pangasius pangasius Pangus EN P P A
Rhinomugil corsula Khalla LC P P A
Polynemus paradiseus Ramsoch LC P P A
Plotosuscanius Gang Magur NT P A A
Harpadon nehereus Loitya - P A A
Apocryptes bato Chiring - P P A
Penaeus monodon Bagda
LC P A A
Chingri
Metapenaeus ensis Horina
DD P P A
Chingri
Metapenaeus Horina
LC P P A
monoceros Chingri
Macrobrachium Golda
LC P P A
rosenbergii Chingri
Channa punctatus Taki LC P P A
Heteropneustes fossilis Shing LC P P A
Clarias batrachus Magur LC P P A
Anabas testudineus Koi LC P P A
Puntius spp Puti - P P A
Labeo rohita Rui LC A P P
Catla catla Katol LC A A P
Cirrhinus cirrhosus Mrigel LC A A P
Exotic species
Oreochromis niloticus Nilotica - A A P
Hypophthalmichthyes Silver carp
- A A P
molitrix
Pangasius sutchi Thai pangus - A A P
Note: Habitat preference (A= Absent and P=Present). Threatened category (CR – Critically endangered, EN –
Endangered, VU – Vulnerable, NT - Near threatened, LC – Least Concern, DD - Data deficient)

6.11 Ecological Resources

The proposed study area (10 km radius from zero point of the project site) covers various
landscapes and ecosystems. Primarily, terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems can be considered
as major to the designated study area. The dominant ecosystem within the terrestrial is
homestead. The other group called mangrove ecosystem exhibits amphibian characteristics
is also dominant to shorelines of channels, rivers, canals and ditches. In addition, marine and
coastal ecosystem has been considered to be described under ecological resources of the
study area.

143
 Description of Baseline Environment

Bio-ecological Region

The International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN), Bangladesh has divided the whole
country into 25 Bio-ecological Zones in context of biological diversity. The study area (77,629
acre include project area) passestwo Bio-ecological Zones: a) Coastal Marine Water; and b)
Ganges Floodplain. The project site, direct impact area, possesses only terrestrial ecosystem.
Map 6.19 shows the bio-ecological zones of the study area (IUCN 2002).

Ecosystem and Biodiversity

A. Proposed Area
The proposed site (915.7 acre) is mostly an agricultural land include settlements which
belongs to different terrestrial ecosystems i.e. homestead, cropland, etc. The dominant plant
species in this area has been noted as Coconut (47), Betel-nut (12), Indian Plum (32), Lead
Tree (24), Date Palm (74), Palmyra Palm (10), Gum Tree (117), Tamarind (12), Acacia (72),
Mango (114), Guava (50) and Hill Glory (112). A wide variety of plant species provides support
to wildlife e.g. small to medium sized mammals, different birds, reptiles, amphibians and
numerous invertebrates. Some locally dominant species have noticed during the field
investigation and they are Bengal Fox, Common Mongoose, Jungle Cat, Asiatic Pied Starling,
House Sparrow, Common Tailorbird, Purple Sunbird, Indian Rufous Treepie, Oriental Magpie
Robin, Checkered Keelback, Bengal Lizard, Indian Bullfrog, and Common Toad. A detail list
on both flora and fauna along with their conservation status is given in the Appendix –VII.
Status of Biodiversity
A total of 25 species of plants from different families have been recorded from the proposed
site. Of them Albizia, Coconut, Gagan Shirish and West Indies Mahogany are major species.
Floral composition and species diversity of the project site has been given in the Table 6.29.

144
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.19: Bio-ecological Zone of the study area

145
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.28: Floral species composition of the proposed site

Species
Sl. Common
Scientific Tame Diversity Density Frequency Abundance
No. Name
Index (SDI)
1 Albizia Albizia lebbeck 6.25 66.67 417
2 Bamboo Bambusa tulda 2.33 50.00 117
3 Barmuda Dactylon cynodon
15.25 66.67 1,017
grass
4 Banana Musa paradisiaca 24.25 66.67 1,617
5 Betel-nut Areca catechu 0.25 83.33 17
6 Blackberry Sygizium cumuni 0.33 50.00 17
7 Chhatim 0.50 33.33 17
8 Coconut Cocos nucifera 2.19 3.67 66.67 183
9 Date Palm Phoenix sylvestris 2.50 33.33 83
10 Dewa 1.00 33.33 17
11 Fig Ficus hispida 3.00 16.67 50
12 Gagan Albizia
8.50 50.00 283
Shirish richardiana
13 Guab 0.50 33.33 17
14 Guava Psidium guajava 7.00 16.67 117
15 Indian Plum Zizyphus
1.50 33.33 50
mauritiana
16 Ipil-ipil Laucenea
7.00 16.67 117
leucephala
17 Jackfruit Artocarpus
2.00 16.67 33
heterophyllus
18 Mango Mangifera indica 1.00 16.67 17
19 Mehedi Lawsonia inermis 1.00 16.67 17
20 Neem Azadirachta indica 1.00 16.67 17
21 Palmyra Borassus flabilifer
1.00 16.67 17
Palm
22 Papaya Carica papaya 1.00 33.33 33
23 Pink Morning Ipomoea carnea
5.00 50.00 83
Glory
24 Pitali Trewia nudiflora 2.00 33.33 17
25 West Indies Swietenia
18.00 50.00 600
Mahogany mahogani
Source: CEGIS Field Survey, June 2016

The proposed project site falls partially on settlemement and it possess different fruit and
timber trees of different size and ages. A total of 55 individuals including saplings were
measured during the field visit. The following Table 6.29 represents the actual scenerio of
exisitng trees of the proposed site.

Table 6.29: Existing trees of the project area.

Sl. Species DBH (inch) Average Height (feet) Sample Size

1 Albizia 10 20 10
2 West Indies Mahogany 8 20 5
3 Date Palm 12 7 10
4 Palmyra Palm 16 22 5

146
 Description of Baseline Environment

Sl. Species DBH (inch) Average Height (feet) Sample Size

5 Acacia 10 20 10
6 Mango 12 16 10
7 Coconut 14 20 5
Total 55
Source: CEGIS Field Survey, June 2016

B. Study Area
The status of biodiversity of this investigated area varies slightly by locations because the
landscape patterns throughout the study area more or less are same. A small island called
Chalitabunia across the Rabnabad Channel supports asmall stand of trees important for birds
because of its isolation from the terrestrial predators.
The study area supportsmany habitats with different species of flora and fauna. Ecosystems
of the study area can be divided into two major categories in accordance with their vegetation
patterns and landscapes: i) Terrestrial ecosystem, and ii) Aquatic ecosystem. Other two
ecosystems namely mangrove as well as marine and coastal ecosystems also exist in this
study area.A habitat map is presented in the Map 6.20.
Terrestrial Ecosystems
The terrestrial ecosystem is the composition of flora and fauna of any given area. This
ecosystem is vast and most dominant compared to others. The diversity of species both flora
and fauna in terrestrial ecosystem is high compared to other ecosystems in any location of the
country. The following vegetations were noticed in this study area.
 Homestead vegetation: This type of vegetation occurs within the home territory and/yard
having diversity of trees including fruits, timbers, fuel and medicinal plants as Mango (Aam),
Coconut (Narikel), Banana (Kola), Acacia (Akashmoni), West Indies Mahogany (Mehogani),
Neem (Nim Gachh), etc.
 Crop-field vegetation: This vegetation type of vegetation occurs within the crop varieties,
peripheries and isles of the cropland people widely called weeds. The crop field vegetation
in this study area is less diversified in comparison with crop varieties. The noticeable species
are SpinyAmaranth (Katanotey), Mexican Tea (Chapali Ghash), Glorybower (Bhat),
Burmuda Grass (Durba Ghash), and Goose Grass (Chapra Ghash).
 Roadside vegetation: This type of vegetation is very dominant in this study area but less
diversified throughout the study area include project area. The road slopes are usually
planted with fast growing and exotic species. Few species also observed throughout the
study, those are not dominant but have great contribution to ecosystem functions on the way
of survive. The roadside vegetation recorded as Acacia (Akashmoni), Rosewood (Sisu),
Lead Tree (Ipil-ipil), Date Palm (Khejur), Fig (Dumur), etc.
Aquatic Ecosystem
 Aquatic ecosystem belongs to many rivers and their tributaries, channels, khals, homestead
ponds, floodplains and ditches. The main water ways connected to the proposed project
area including Tiakhali, Agunmukho and Andaman rivers, and Morichbunia as well as
Madhupara khals. Moreover, the Rabnabad channel of the Bay of Bengal is very close
(<1km) to project area. It has valuable biological resources include the benthic community
and planktons. Information on benthos and planktons on Tiakhali River system and
Rabnabad channelboth dry and wet seasons are presented in the Table 6.30-6.31

147
 Description of Baseline Environment

Map 6.20: Habitat map of the study area

148
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.30: Dominent benthos and planktons in dry season

Plankton
Water Total
Benthos (Unit/M) Phytoplankton
system Zooplankton (unit/L) (no/L)
(unit/L)
Arcelia vulgaris 861 3032
Tiakhali Nauplius and Metanauplius
0 Diatom 453
River 2102
Cyclops 68
Arcelia vulgaris 60 216
Keratella cochlearis 6
Rabnabad
- Diatom 48 Nauplius and
Channel
metanauplius132
Cyclops18
Policheat (Annedia) 1 08
Gondabaria Lucifer (Crustacea) 6
- -
intake Unidentified mites
(Arachnida) 1
Total 08 501 3247 3256

Table 6.31: Dominent benthos and planktons in wet season

Plankton
Water
Benthos (unit/M) Phytoplankton Zooplankton Total (no/L)
system
(unit/L) (unit/L)
Arcella- 1
Tiakhali River Polychaetes,Annelid -1 Cyclops-3
0 1200
(Sample 1) Daphnia- 3
Moina – 2
Tiakhali River Gastropods-Mollusca- 7
0 0 0
(Sample 2) Polychaetes- Annelida- 4
Rabnabad Polychate-Brachiura-1 Diatom
Crustacean
Channel Small Mollusca- Gastrpods (Stephanodiscus) 213
Nauplius- 1
(Sample 1) -3 -1
Rabnabad Polychaetes,Annelid -2 Diaptomus- 1 440
Channel Gastropods-Planorbis - 3 Spirogyra- 2
Anuraea
(Sample 2) (Rotifera)-1
Note: Samples of dry (February 2016) and wet seasons (June 2016) were analyzed in the laboratory of Zoology, University
of Dhaka

Aquatic Flora
The existence of aquatic flora relies upon the nature of wetlands i.e. free flowing or stagnant
water, water quality, etc. The entire water ways are tidal influenced except the homestead
ponds and ditches. The latter two stagnant water bodies keep different free-floating species.
In a few locations, small numbers of Water Lily were sighted very occasionally. The mangrove
and marine ecosystem has been described separately in the following sections.
Mangrove Ecosystem
This is an ecosystem of incredible biological diversity of hundreds of aquatic life-forms like
algae, numerous invertebrates and vertebrates. The trees intricate network of roots provides
a shelter to many oceanic species. The mangrove forest provides nourishes to many more
organisms while certain species spend their entire lifespan in this ecosystem. As a
consequence, the mangroves’ well being is central to health of many ecosystems. The
proposed study area is the delta of the Bay of Bengal which belongs to mangrove ecosystems

149
 Description of Baseline Environment

in some certain locations. The biodiversity of this ecosystem has been considered as
moderate on the basis of major field investigation.
Marine and Coastal Ecosystem
The coastal area within the study area offers different marine habitats like sandy and muddy
intertidal zone and mangroves for a variety of resident and migratory birds. The birds use
these habitats as their active feeding ground especially during low tide. A large numbers of
migratory species pass this area and a small population of them in the form of juveniles and
non-breeding adults take shelter in coastal areas. The intertidal area also supports significant
populations of migratory shorebirds, gulls and terns together with large feeding flocks.
Marine turtles are commonly represented by Loggerhead Turtle and followed by Olive Ridley
and Hawksbill. However, marine turtles have not been sighted at coasts during the major field
investigation. Information on marine turtle’s was received from locals through people
interviews. The marine mammals are represented by Ganges River Dolphin and Porpoise in
the coastal waters. As per consultation with the experts, the down stream of Rabnabad
channel especially at the estuary reagion are suitable for Irrawady Dolphins. However,
Gangetic dolphins are presented at the Rabnabad and Andharmanik river according to the
consultation with the fisher but not sited during the field investigation. Actually, Dolphins
communities are relativelely lower than the rivers of Sundarbans area.

Status of Biodiversity

A. Floral Abundance
The settlement and homestead pattern of the area is almost identical to each other. The study
mostly considers the settlement and homestead ecosystem of the villages closer to the site
for biodiversity analysis. The villagesvisited during the major field investigation are Char
Nishanbaria, Morichbunia, Gondabaria, Lunda and Dhankhali. The ecosystem possesses 15
tree species which are dominated by Acacia, West Indies Mahogany, Banana and Guava. A
list of tree species of the homestead is presented in Table 6.32.
Table 6.32: Indicative tree species in the settlement/homestead
Common Name Species Name Density/Acre Using Parts Usage
Jackfruit Artocarpus
7 Fruit and trunk Food, Timber
heterophylla
Mango Mangifera indica 20 Fruit and trunk Food, Timber
Bansh Bambusa Spp. 25 Trunk Thatch
Acacia Acacia Whole plant
120 Timber, Fuel
auriculiformis
Charcoal Trema orientalis 2 Whole plant Fuel
Banana Musa Spp. 85 Fruit Food
West Indies Swietenia Trunk and fruit Timber and
64
Mahogany mahagoni medicine
Neem Azadirachta Trunk and fruit Timber and
4
indica medicine
Guava Psidium guajava 20 Fruit Food
Betel-nut Areca catechu 5 Fruit and trunk Food and Thatch
Wood Apple Aegle marmelos Fruit Food and
1
medicine
Litchi Litchi chinensis 1 Fruit Food
Lemon Citrus indica 1 Fruit Food
Mehedi Lawsonia inermis 1 Leaf Aesthetic
Coconut Cocos nucifera 15 Fruit, leaf and trunk Food and thatch
Source: CEGIS Field visit, June 2016

150
 Description of Baseline Environment

B. Fauna
In this study only the higher vertebrate group has been considered to conduct. Of the higher
vertebrates, the wildlife species are described below in accordance with their hierarchy.
The amphibians possess diversified life. At an early stage they pass life in an aquatic
environment and later in lands in accordance with their instinct characteristics. Some species
remain in the water throughout the lifespan are called aquatic amphibians. The amphibians
considered very sensitive to environmental changes. The study area is a saline prone area,
so, the diversity and population of the amphibians is moderate. Dominant amphibians
recorded as Common Toad (Kuno Beng), Indian Bullfrog (Sona Beng), Cricket Frog (Jhi-Jhi
Beng), Common Tree Frog (Pati Gecho Beng) and Ornate Microhyla (Choto Laubichi Beng)
within the study area boundary.
The reptiles are more or less diversified in comparison with amphibians. The reptiles in this
study area were found in different habitats i.e. homestead, cropland, roads and embankments
and settlement vicinity. Of the reptiles, turtles and tortoise are quite occasional and there is
no recent record of their existence. The lizards, skinks and snakes are frequent species like
Common Garden Lizard (Girigiti), Northern House Gecko (Tiktiki), Little Skink (Anjan),
Brahminy Skink (Anjan), Bengal Lizard (Gui Shap), Banded Krait (Shankhini Shap),
Monocellate Cobra (Gokhra Shap), and Vine Snake (Laudoga Shap).
The availability of birds depends on the source of food and nesting facilities. Homestead and
roadside habitat support most of the avifauna survival and parental care to their offspring.
Besides, the corn fields offer insectivores to get nourishes through taking insects from corn
fields. During the major field investigation avifauna were recorded through direct observation
and dominant species noted as Asian Pied Starling (Pakra Shalik), Common Myna (Bhat
Shalik), Jungle Myna (Jhunti Shalik), Black Drongo (Kalo Fingey), Oriental Magpie Robin
(Doel), House Crow (Pati Kak), Brahminy Kite (Shankho Cheel), Blue-eared Kingfisher (
Dholachokh Machhranga), Red-vented Bulbul (Bangla Bulbuli), Blue-tailed Beeeater
(Suichora), Baya Weaver (Charui), Indian Rufous Treepie (Harichacha), and Common
Tailorbird (Suta Tuntuni) within the study area. Those are recored at the river bank, mangrove
vegetation, and homestead trees.
The mammals are very magnificent animals but they are now in peril due to habitat destruction,
scanty of food resources and human induced pressures. Diversity and density of vegetation
in the coast is not dominant in comparison with tropical areas. Thus, habitat structures and
their quality are not suitable for such magnificent animals. Out of the mangrove forest, the
village’ groves are only habitats for mammals and enhance their population but existing
habitats are insufficient to support viability of population. No large mammals have seen during
the major field study. Currently, small to medium-sized mammals found in various ecosystems
like homestead, agricultural land, fallow land, roads, etc. Jungle Cat (Bonbiral), Common
Mongoose(Boro Beji), Northern Palm Squirrel(Dora Katbirali), Bandicoot Rat(Metho Indur),
Indian Flying Fox (Kola Badur), Indian Hare(Khorghosh), Greater Short-nosed Fruit
Bat(Bocha-nak Kola Badur) and Bengal Fox (Khek Shial) were noted as available through
peoples’ interviews. A list of wildlife species is provided in the Appendix-VII.

Existence of important habitat near the proposed site

The project site is very close to Rabnabad channel having connectivity to the Bay of Bengal
is home to many aquatic mammals and waders as well. Specifically, no important bird area
(IBA) declared by the Birdlife. But marsh, ditches, and wetlands are very important to waders
including the wintering birds as their feeding ground and stopovers exist with a limited

151
 Description of Baseline Environment

numbers. The mangrove ecosystem occurs within the study area can be mentioned as
Rabnabad Channel and Payra River system. The PayraRiver systemis aplace for roaming,
surfing, and diving of Ganges River Dolphin. It has been classified as vulnerable (VU)
speciesby the IUCN-Bangladesh (2015).

Existence of flyway in the study area

Two international wintering birds’ flyways namely the East Asian and Australasian
crisscrossed the country for searching their destination as feeding ground during the winter
season. The study area does not possess many stopovers due to its insufficient safe wetlands.
Two major wetlands in this study area namely the Payra and Tiakhali River systems have
been considered as disturbed to waders due to human pressure.

6.12 Socio-economic Condition

The data on the socio-economic condition of the inhabitants of the study area were collected
from both primary and secondary sources. The primary data were collected using a range of
Rapid Rural Appraisal (RRA) tools and techniques including Key Informant’s Interviews (KIIs),
Focus Group Discussions (FGDs), observation and informal public consultations. On the
contrary, relevant secondary information was compiled from the community series of the
Population Census, 2011 published by Bangladesh Bureau of Statistics (BBS)

Area and Location

Administratively, the study area consists of 10 unions and 1 municipality either partially or fully.
The municipality falls in the KalaparaUpazila while unions are dispersed as follows: Six (6)
unions in Kalapara upazila, two (2) unions in Galachipa upazila, and two unions in Amtali
Upazilaunder Barguna district. Percentages of unions in the study area are shown in the
following Table 6.33

Table 6.33: Unions and upazilas in the study area

Name of Name of Percentage of union

Name of unions
district upazila within study area
Amtali Amtali 62.98
Barguna
Amtali Haldia 43.62
Galachipa Bara Baisdia 18.21
Galachipa Chalitabunia 68.08
Kala Para Chakamaiya 49.40
Kala Para Lalua 68.32
Patuakhali Kala Para Dhankhali 88.90
Kala Para Mithaganj 9.99
Kala Para Nilganj 5.72
Kala Para Tiakhali 100.00
Kala Para Kalapara Paurashava 96.48
Source: Spatial GIS Analysis, CEGIS, 2016

The land of the project area are also classified as per the Govt. Land Classification process
surveyed by the govt. land department on the time span of 1970-1980. The Mouza wise detail
land classification are shown in Appendix XIV. Types of land like Jangale, Kati, Nal, Doba,
Pukur, Khal Bari, Bhiti etc as per DC office and their acquisition part are detailing in the

152
 Description of Baseline Environment

Appendix XIV with Map. Moreover, the non acquisitional properties i.e. (mosque or
jalabhume) as per law of the land are pointed in that section.

Demographic Profile

According to the BBS 2011, the area has 28,399 number of households, having a total
population of 117,967 of which 58,888 (49.9%) are male marginally dominant over female
59,080 (50.1%). The present population (year 2016) of the study area is 126,272 2 . The
average male-female sex ratio3 is 100, which is slightly lower than the national figure of 100.3
(HIES) 2010]. The average population density is 422 in compared to the national density of
1,015 persons per sq. km. (excluding the population density of kalaparapaurashava). The
inhabitants belong to two main religious groups; i.e. the Muslim and the Hindu. Indigenous
people have not been found in the project area. Near about 150-200 of Rakhainhouseholds
are residing in the Modhupara, char Nishanbaria and Boratpur village under Dhankhali union.
The demographic data of the study and project area are presented in Table 6.34a and Table
6.34b.

Table 6.34a: Demographic data of the study area

Population Population
Households Sex ratio
Total Male Female density
117,967 58,888 59,080
28,399 100 422
100 (%) 49.9 (%) 50.1 (%)
Source: Population Census 2011, BBS

Table 6.34b: Demographic scenario of Project area

Number
Name of Mauza Key Features Description
s
Number of population 560 Male, Female, Children
Number of Households 121 No indigenous and Minority community
Dhankhali, Londa
Number of Houses 230 Semi pucka and kutcha
and Nishanbaria
School 2 A girls school and a primary school
Graveyard 8/10 Family graveyard
Source: CEGIS field visit June (FGD and KII), 2016

Household size

The average household (HH) size of the study area is 4.1 while it is 4.48 nationally. The size
of highest percentage (about 26%) of HHs is 4 and the lowest percentage (about 3.2%) of
HHs is 1 as shown in the following Figure 6.20.

2This
estimation is based on BBS, 2011 Census data and 1.37 linear national growth rate; Pop Future =Pop Present (1+r)n
[Where: Pop Future = Future Population, Pop Present = Present Population, r = Growth Rate and n = Number of
Years]
3Number of males per 100 females in a population, using the formula: Sex Ratio SR = M x 100 / F

153
 Description of Baseline Environment

Household with member (%)

30
26
25
20.7
20 19.1

15 13.3

9.4
10

4.4 4
5 3.2

0
1 person 2 persons 3 persons 4 persons 5 persons 6 persons 7 persons 8+ persons

Source: Housing and Population Census, BBS, 2011

Figure 6.20: The household sizes of the study area

Age structure

In the study area, the highest number of population (about 24.9%) belongs to age group of 30
to 49 years while the lowest number (about 3.1%) belongs to 60 to 64 years age group as
shown in Figure 6.21. Age groups of 0-14 years is defined as children, 15-24 years as early
working age, 25-59 years as prime working age, above 60 and over as elderly people. This
classification is important as the size of young population (under age 15) would need more
investment in education, while size of older populations (ages 65 and over) would need for
more invest in health sector.

Population (%) by age

30.0

24.9
25.0

20.0

15.0 13.4
11.6
10.6
9.6
10.0 7.9
6.6 6.5 5.7
5.0 3.1

0.0
0-4 Yers 5-9 Yers 10-14 15-19 20-24 25-29 30-49 50-59 60-64 65+
Yers Yers Yers Yers Yers Yers Yers Years

Source: Housing and Population Census, BBS, 2011

Figure 6.21: Age structure of the studied population

154
 Description of Baseline Environment

Education

Literacy rate of the area is 49.4% (nationally 52.7%), where for male it accounts to 51%
(nationally 54.6%) and female 48.9% (nationally 50.8%). Field survey showed that there are
Field survey showed that there is a school in the project area named DhankhaliGazi A Mannan
Girls High school and a primary school namely DhankhaliGaziShofiur Rahman primary school.

Photo 6.21: Educational institute in the project area

Literacy rate (%)

50.8
Bangladesh 54.6
52.7

55.9
Barisal division 57.6
56.8

52
Patuakhali 56.2
54.1

48.9
Study area 51
49.9

44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60

Female Male Both

Figure 6.22: Literacy rate of the study area

Public Health

According to local inhabitants, the existing services are almost inaccessible to rural poor
people. Therefore, local people have been receiving services from local chemist, paramedic
or village trained physicians. Only a few number of local people (16%) receives treatment from
the trained physician. Figure 6.23shows the status of receiving treatment facilities by
households

155
 Description of Baseline Environment

Treatment facility (%)

7%
16%

Trained physician

Paramedic physician
35%
Quack doctor/informal
treatment
No treatment

42%

Source: Field Survey, 2016

Figure 6.23: Status of receiving treatment facilities by household

Community health condition and common diseases

The Population Census, 2011 identified almost six types of disabilities and their proportionate
distribution in the respective area. It is found that the study area comprises 1.5% of all types
of disabilities and 0.7% people reported that they are physically challenged. 0.1% mentioned
speech and 0.2% mental disorder. Local people claimed that diseases like dysentery, skin
diseases, diabetes and common fevers are commonly found in the area.

Ownership and Utilization of Land

Out of total land holdings, about 74.02% are farm-holdings and the remainders are non-farm
holdings. Land holding patterns of the area are as follows: about 46.0% households are in
small farm holdings category, about 23.1% households belongs to medium land holdings
category and other land holdings are shown in the Figure 6.24 and land tenure arrangement
of the area are presented in Table 6.35.

156
 Description of Baseline Environment

Land holding category (%)

60.0
51.4
48.8
50.0

40.0 36.6 37.8

30.0 26.9
24.5
22.0
20.2
20.0 16.2

10.0 5.4 5.5

4.6

0.0
Nishanbaria Dhankhali Londa

Non farm holdings Farm holdings Small Farm holdings Medium Farm holdings Large

Source: The Census of Agriculture, 2008, BBS

Figure 6.24: Households by land holdings

Table 6.35: Land tenure arrangement in the study area

Farmers by holding category (%)

Tenancy type
Marginal Small Medium Large
Owner 31.8 34.4 26.5 7.3
Owner-cum-tenant 3.2 34.6 47.4 14.8
Tenant 50.0 28.6 18.9 2.6
Source: The Census of Agriculture, 2008, BBS

Land Price

Price of the land of this area has been raised after the establishment of Payra port and other
development activities. The communication and transportation facilities have also developed
in this area. The current market price of the project area is 12000 tk. per decimal for agricultural
land and 20000 tk. per decimal for homestead land.

Occupation and Livelihood

According to the BBS 2011, about 40.16% (male- 37.74% & female- 2.43%) of local people
are employed, about 42.69% (male- 1.26 %, female- 41.43 %) are occupied in the household
activities and about 16.47% (male- 7.05% & female- 9.42%) people do not work in the study
area (Figure 6.25). Here, household work particularly for women participation is accounted in
terms of household activities as well as alternative income generation such as livestock
rearing, poultry farming, small cottage industry, local cigarette (biri), etc.

157
 Description of Baseline Environment

Employment status (%)

Female 9.4
Do not
work

Male 7.1
Looking for Household

Female 41.4
work

Male 1.3

Female 0.2
work

Male 0.4
Employed

Female 2.4

Male 37.7

0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0

Figure 6.25: Employment Status

The distributions of employment of the area at reference period of census are as follows: about
81% are engaged in agricultural activities, about 2% in industrial and about 17% in service
sectors. Agricultural activities includes broadly crop farming, fishery and livestock and poultry
farming, business (fishery business, rice and dal business, tree business etc). Presently,
industrial activities are seen in the study area as the entire area is being developed as
business and industrial area.

Field of activity (%)

FEMALE 3.2
SERVICE

MALE 13.8
INDUSTRY

FEMALE 0.3

MALE 1.6
AGRICULTUR

FEMALE 2.5
E

MALE 78.6

0.0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0 70.0 80.0

Figure 6.26: Field of Activity (%)

The present wage rate varies between BDT 300 to BDT 400 per day for male agriculture
laborer.
During field visit, people stated that out-migration of laborers is commonly found around 25%
while in-migration is 12%. The out-migrants usually go to Chittagong, Dhaka, Barisal and

158
 Description of Baseline Environment

Khulna for diversified jobs predominantly in the garments and business sectors. Besides, a
remarkable number of out migrants are engaged in the existing other Power Plants. Moreover,
there are trivial international out-migrants (about 2%) who tend to go to Middle East for
searching of better livelihood options.

Standard of Living

Standard of living indicates the level of wealth, comfort; material goods and necessities
available to the study are population.
Electricity facility is very poor (about 29.2%) in the area. BBS data shows that Kalapara
Paurashava comprises the highest (87.1%) electricity coverage whereas Haldia union has the
lowest (14.4%) coverage. The people of the char areas are yet not receiving electricity
connection.
The overall housing conditions is not satisfactory. The housing pattern of the area is as follows:
Kutcha houses (about 84%) followed by Semi-pucca houses about 4%, Pucca houses about
1% and Jhupri houses about 11%.

Type of household structure (%)

Pucka 1%
Jhupri 11%
Semi-pucka 4%

Kutcha 84%

Pucka Semi-pucka Kutcha Jhupri

Figure 6.27: Household structure of the study area

Sanitation4 facilities of the area are is non-sanitary latrine households about 26%.Non-water
sealed sanitary latrine households about 41%, water sealed sanitary latrine households about
27% and the rests have no latrine households.

4BBS defined four types sanitation in Bangladesh such as (i) Sanitary (water-sealed): A water sealed latrine is
simply a pit latrine that has a water barrier to prevent odors. These latrines are simply pits dug in the ground in
which human waste is deposited. (ii) Sanitary (not water-sealed/ring slab), latrine with a slab or other secure cover
over the drop hole, or a polyethylene flap preventing in-sects from flying into or coming out of the pit; and (iii) Non-
sanitary (Kucha): latrine is a frame or platform extending over earth or water; an “open pit latrine” does not have a
squat platform or slab on the pit and (iv) No facilities: Defecation in bushes or fields or other outdoor locations.

159
 Description of Baseline Environment

Sanitation facility (%)

None 6

Non-sanitary 26

Sanitary (non water-sealed) 41

Sanitary (water-sealed) 27

0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

Figure 6.28: Percentage of sanitation facilities

Drinking water source of the area is ground water and is generally abstracted using tube-well.
About 80% of the households use ground water as drinking water through tube-well. 18% of
households collect drinking water from tap. And 2% of households collect drinking water from
other (pond, river, etc) sources.

Sources of drinking water (%)

2%

18%

80%

Tap Tube-Well Other

Figure 6.29: Sources of drinking water in the study area

Household income and expenditure is an important indicator to assess the socio-economic

condition of the people. The following Table 6.36 describes the income and expenditure level
of the people of the area.

160
 Description of Baseline Environment

Table 6.36: Distribution of income and expenditure

Percentage of Households
Range (Tk./month)
Income Expenditure
< 1,000 - -
1,000 - 2,000 - -
2,000 – 5,000 10 13
5,000 - 9,000 40 65
9,000 - 20,000 42 20
> 20,000 8 2
Source: RRA, 2016

Roads/ Railway/Waterway

It is found that the main mode of communication in this area is roadway and waterway. The
main roadway of the project area is from Khuriarkheyaghat to Londakheyaghat road.
Tentatively the length of this road is 15 km. On the other hand, the waterway communication
is mainly maintained by the river Andharmanik and Rabnabad channel in this area. This area
is very much supportive for the business and industrial sector due to having a sound waterway
network facility.

Poverty Situation

Poverty profile has been prepared by the participants of the RRA themselves through a self-
assessment exercise. The assessment is based on the year-round income along with the food
consumption of the inhabitants within three different categories. It is observed that about 45%
percent of the households in average are in the ‘balance’ category followed by deficit category
(about 40%) and surplus category (about 15%).

Safety nets

The major social safety nets and poverty reduction programs initiated in the area include the
Vulnerable Group Development (VGD), Food/Taka for Work (F/TFW), Food for
Education/Cash for Education, Rural Maintenance Program (RMP), Old Age Allowance,
Freedom Fighter Allowance and Integrated Poverty Reduction Program. According to local
people, these programs have created food security as well as social safety nets among the
targeted poor households and vulnerable communities to some extent. Table 6.37 shows the
current social services and facilities for alleviating poverty in the study area.

Table 6.37: Households served by different social safety nets programs

Social Safety Net Programs Households/Communities Served (%)

Vulnerable Group Development (VGD) 6
Food/Taka For Work (F/TFW) of PIO 4
Food for Education/Cash for Education 10
Rural Maintenance Program (RMP) 6
Old Age Allowance 5
Freedom Fighter Allowance 3
Integrated Poverty Reduction Program of BRDB 6
Source: CEGIS Fieldwork, 2015

161
 Description of Baseline Environment

A number of local, national and international NGOs are working in the study area. The main
activities of these NGOs are operating micro credit programs among the rural poor and
landless women/men.

Market/growth center

Three markets have been found which are very adjacent to the project area. These are
Shombaria bazar, Gilatola bazar, Dhankhali bazar, Lalua bazar etc.

Vulnerability to natural disaster

Geographically Patuakhali is situated in the natural disaster prone area. Local people opined
that, flood is the main natural disaster of the study area. It occurs almost every year in this
area. But historically the flood of 1998 was destructive and long lasting. The cyclone, SIdr,
Aila, Mohasen, Roanu has created destructions in this area. Moreover, riverbank erosion,
storm, tidal surge are the other notable natural disasters occuring in the area.

Key Point Installation

Key Point Installation (KPI) is a sensitive establishment of Government guarded on the spot
by one security guard and one security supervisor/security head guard in each eight-hour shift,
for three shifts a day. The KPIs in the adjacent areas of the RPCL and the Payra port.

Common Property Resources

The common property resources and/or community facilities in the area are different social
amenities e.g. mosques, graveyards, temples, cremation grounds, playgrounds, open water
bodies and Eidgahs (place for offering Eid prayers). These are used by the local people for
the purposes of religious, social and cultural gathering. There is no mosque, temple, cremation
ground and Eidgah in the project area. But graveyards has been found in the project area. It
is family graveyard.

162
 7. Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

7.1 General

At present, a 1320MW coal based thermal power plant is being constructed by RPCL adjacent
to the Power Posed Power Plant. Another two coal based power plant will come in this area
in future. Therefore, this plant will use the natural resources like water, air, and ambient
amenities in association with other power plants. Hence, the power plant projects will create
significant impact to the same airshed, watershed etc. Land acquisition is one of the important
issues implementing this project. Initially, the success of the projects depends how well the
project affected people are resettled and rehabilitated.
The proposed major activities will involve construction of labor camp, site preparation,
transportation of machinery and ancillaries, storage of equipment and materials for
construction, erection of all equipment and machineries, construction of temporary jetty. These
activities will have diversified impacts on the environment and the socio-economic conditions
of the local people with various natures and magnitudes. Among the impacts from the
proposed activities, some are temporary in nature and limited to pre-construction and
construction period, and others are permanent in nature during the operation period. Based
on the experience of other similar power generation projects, many of the environmental
issues are mainstreamed in the project design. Clearing of bushes and felling of trees during
site preparation and labor camp induced sanitation and social stress are the most significant
impacts of the construction works. Emission of pollutants from flue gas, thermal plume, coal
transportation and accidental events are the key concerning issues during operation of the
Power Plant. The overall positive impacts of the project are as follow: - the enhancement of
the generation capacity of the electricity and improving the socio-economic conditions and
lifestyle of the local as well as of country people.

7.2 Impact Assessment and Evaluation Methodology

Potential environmental and social impacts were identified on the basis of the review of
Feasibility Report, field visits, and stakeholder consultations. The significance of potential
impacts was assessed using the criteria and methodology given step by step.

Impact Magnitude

The potential impacts of the project have been categorized as major, moderate, minor or
nominal based on consideration of the parameters such as: i) duration of the impact; ii) spatial
extent of the impact; iii) reversibility; iv) likelihood; and v) legal standards and established
professional criteria.
The magnitude of potential impacts of the Project has generally been identified according to
the categories outlined in Table 7.1.

163
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Table 7.1: Parameters for Determining Magnitude

Parameter Major Moderate Minor Minimal

Duration of Long term Medium Term Limited to Temporary with
potential (more than 15 Lifespan of the construction no detectable
impacts years) project period potential impact
(5 to 15 years)
Spatial extent of Widespread far Beyond immediate Within project Specific location
the potential beyond project project components, boundary within project
impacts boundaries site boundaries or component or site
local area boundaries with
no detectable
potential impact
Reversibility of Potential impact Potential impact Baseline returns Baseline remains
potential is effectively requires a year or so naturally or with almost constant
impacts permanent, for recovering with limited
requiring some interventions intervention
considerable to return to baseline within a few
intervention to months
return to
baseline
Legal standards Breaches Complies with limits Meets minimum Not applicable
and established national given in national national
professional standards standards but standard limits
criteria and/or breaches or international
international international lender guidelines
guidelines/ guidelines in one or
obligations more parameters
Likelihood of Occurs under Occurs under worst Occurs under Unlikely to occur
potential typical operating case (negative abnormal,
impacts or construction impact) or best case exceptional or
occurring conditions (positive impact) emergency
(Certain) operating conditions conditions
(Likely) (Occasional)

Sensitivity of Receptor

The sensitivity of a receptor has been determined based on review of the population (including
proximity / numbers / vulnerability) and presence of the features on the site or the surrounding
area. Each detailed assessment has defined sensitivity in relation to the topic. Criteria for
determining receptor sensitivity of the Project’s potential impacts are outlined in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2: Criteria for Determining Sensitivity

Sensitivity
Definition
Determination
Vulnerable receptor with little or no capacity to absorb proposed changes
Very High
or minimal opportunities for mitigation.
Vulnerable receptor with little or no capacity to absorb proposed changes
High
or limited opportunities for mitigation.

164
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Sensitivity
Definition
Determination
Vulnerable receptor with some capacity to absorb proposed changes or
Medium
moderate opportunities for mitigation
Vulnerable receptor with good capacity to absorb proposed changes
Low
and/or good opportunities for mitigation

Assigning Significance

Following the assessment of magnitude, the quality and sensitivity of the receiving
environment or potential receptor has been determined and the significance of each potential
impact established using the impact significance matrix shown in Table 7.3.

Table 7.3: Significance of Impact Criteria

Sensitivity of Receptors
Magnitude of Impact
Very High High Medium Low
Major Critical Major Moderate Minimal

Moderate Major Major Moderate Minimal

Minor Moderate Moderate Minor Minimal

Minimal Minimal Minimal Minimal Minimal

7.3 Summary of Assessed Impacts

The project’s potential impacts and their significance have been assessed using the
methodology described above. A summary of these impacts and their significance is
presented in Table 8.4.

165
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Table 7.4: Potential impacts and their significance

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
Environmental impacts during pre-construction stage
A. Ambient Air
Land filling activities will generate local dust to the
Medium Minor Minor adverse ECP 10
ambient environment
A1 Dust Emission
Nuisance and health hazard for local people and
Medium Minor Minor adverse ECP 10
workers reduce visual quality of sites.
B. Ambient Noise
Little increase in the ambient noise level during
Minimal Noise Pollution Control Act,
construction of labor shed, felling timber trees and Low Minor
adverse 2006 of Bangladesh
leveling up the land.
B1. Noise pollution
Increases of associated heavy traffic affect residential
Minimal Noise Pollution Control Act,
and commercial area and unacceptable disturbance Low Minor
adverse 2006 of Bangladesh
at the site.
C. Water Resources
Direct disposal of debris or waste materials from the
ECR 1997, Performance
vegetation clearance site, kitchen waste or sanitation Minimal
C1. Surface Water Quality Low Moderate Standards on Environmental
waste from labor shed may cause water Quality adverse
and Social Sustainability
deterioration.
About 6.5 km natural drainage system exists in the
project area, which system is maintained the surface
water irrigation and wet season drainage system of
ECP 3 and Performance
the Londa and Dhankhali Unions. Drainage system Moderate
C2. Drainage System High Moderate Standards on Environmental
inside the project area may be affected due to illegal adverse
and Social Sustainability
encroachment, falling of construction materials and
sand dumping materials and lack of management of
the drainage system;

166
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
Bank protective measures and dredging activities in
Rabnabad Channel will impact on the hydro-
morphological system of the river; silt dredging
impairs water quality and damage productive bottom ECR 1997, Performance
C3. Erosion and
habitat. The site is easily moved by tides and currents; Medium Standards on Environmental
Accretion Moderate Moderate
clogged channels may require frequent dredging, and and Social Sustainability
erosion from surface runoff would increase siltation
and sedimentation and pollution of the water
resource.
D. Land Resources
Natural land form and land type of the proposed
Project site and adjoining site is agricultural land. This
land would be affected due to excavation of trenches,
construction of buildings and sheds, movement of High Moderate Major adverse ECP 8 and additional
D1. Land Type
traffic, widening and improvement of existing muddy Measures needed
road, etc. The platform of the Power plant would be
raised up to a level higher than the maximum flood
level.
During site preparation, earthworks would degrade Minimal
D2. Impact on soil quality the top soils that are enriched with nutrients required High Minimal ECP 7
adverse
for afforested and naturally grown plant growth.
E. Agricultural Resource
During site preparation, earthworks such as leveling
and compaction of soil would be done for construction
E1. Impact on crop of power plant. This would destroy the crops in the Moderate
Medium Moderate
production project and adjoining area. Erosion and adverse
sedimentation would damage vegetation and nearby
cropland.
F. Livestock Resources

167
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
Acquiring the project area will lead to obstruct the
F1. Loss of grazing lad Moderate
grazing land and fodder for the livestock of the local Moderate Medium
and loss of fodder Adverse
farmers/households
G. Fisheries Resources
Increased temporary and localized turbidity and
destroying of benthos community of river bed during
dredging period inhibit the normal growth of the Dredging is a ‘Red’ category
G1. Fish habitat condition Moderate activity as per the ECR, 1997.
primary producers and retard the fish growth as well. High Medium
and quantity Adverse So it may need to be
Ramnabad Channel is one the suitable spawning
ground for Hilsa, Pangus and shrimp which might be considered separately.
affected because of dredging activities.
With the consequence of aforesaid reasons,
estimated net loss to fish production would be 45MT Moderate ECP 15 and other
G2. Fish production and 170MT per year from the project area and study High Medium
adverse compensation activities
area respectively.
H. Ecology
Removal of terrestrial vegetation to initiate land
development process. It would impacts on existing
terrestrial vegetation negatively. In addition, labor
H1. Terrestrial vegetation shed development and brings construction heavy High Moderate Low ECP 12
machineries to project site would impacts also
negative to terrestrial vegetation in the roadsides
and/close to project location.
Pipeline installation for land development process
needs labor involvement especially project site to
H2. Shorebirds and other shoreline. The latter area is the feeding ground to Medium Moderate
Moderate
ECP 13
wildlife habitat waders will face disturbance. The movement of Adverse
labors will impede their normal activities and they can
be displaced. The land development activities would

168
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
impacts negative to other wildlife, too at the periphery
of project area.
The existing marine habitat will slightly be impacted
H3. Marine habitat negatively due to plying of ship for carrying Low Minor Low ECP 12-13
construction machineries to the project site.
I. Socio-economic Condition
A certain amount (around 121 ) of households will be Land acquisition law, 1982 and
I1. Land acquisition evacuated from the proposed project site for acquiring Very High Major Critical applicable IFC guideline and
the land RAP guideline
Mobilization of laborers to the site would create extra
I2. Extra burden on
pressure on the existing accommodation facilities Medium Minor Minor adverse Labor Law, 2006
accommodation
along with the social amenities including sanitation.
Migrant workers may come from different parts of the
I3. Cultural conflicts country thus a cultural conflict may be created Medium Minor Minor adverse
between the migrant workers and the communities.
Employment generation of the local people based on
I4. Employment of local Minor
their skill will bring positive notion of the local Medium Minor
people beneficial
inhabitants towards the Project.
Susceptibility of unconventional relations between the
WHO Guidelines and ILO
migrant laborers and local vulnerable women may Moderate
I5. Labor Migration High Minor convention
lead to the risk of gender oriented/sexually adverse
ECP 16, ECP 18
transmitted diseases like HIV/ AIDS and STI.
J. Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
ECR 1997, IFC’s Performance
Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in management of
Moderate Standards on Environmental
J1. Solid Waste waste generated from vegetation clearance, land Moderate Medium
adverse and Social Sustainability,
development and domestic activities
ESMS

169
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
ECR 1997, IFC’s Performance
Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in management of
J2. Kitchen Waste High Moderate Major adverse Standards on Environmental
kitchen waste
and Social Sustainability
ECR 1997, IFC’s Performance
J3. Liquid Waste and Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in management of Minimal
Low Minor Standards on Environmental
Sewerage waste adverse
and Social Sustainability
Environmental Impact during Construction Stage
(Civil Works, Jetty Construction, Mechanical Structure, Power Evacuation System)
K. Ambient Air
Emissions of dust and gases will be generated from
K1. Dust and gases from ECR 2005
excavation of trenches, operation of construction Moderate
construction equipment Medium Moderate WBG General EHS Guidelines,
equipment and vehicles, and material transport, adverse
and vehicles 2007
which is injurious to human health.
L. Ambient Noise
Noise would be generated from the moving and idling
vehicles and heavy machineries, which may cause
Noise Pollution Control Act,
L1. Noise pollution disturbance, increased stress level, increased blood High Medium Major adverse
2006 of Bangladesh
pressure etc. on the people who are susceptible to the
generated noise.
M. Water Resources
After land development of the total project area,
construction of drainage system is one of the major Good Practices of the EPC
M1. Drainage System is
challenge. Otherwise, the project boundary, Low Moderate Minor Adverse contractor
side the project boundary
temporary roads or other structure might be damaged
due heavy runoff of rainfall
Transportation of equipment and materials may
cause water pollution to the adjacent rivers and khals. Moderate ECP 1, ECP 2, ECP 15, GIIP
M2 Water Quality High Minor
Moreover, falling of chemicals, oil and polluted water Adverse etc
from the project site may contaminate both surface

170
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
and ground water in the project areas and adjacent
areas.
M3. Groundwater Little local impact; no regional impact. Aquifer Medium Minor Low Bangladesh Water Act, 2013
Availability seasonally fully recharged by Jamuna River.
N. Land Resources
During construction phase, the existing agricultural Moderate
N1. Land Use land use might be affected due to construction of Moderate Medium
adverse
Power plant.
During site preparation, earthworks, transportation,
N2. Soil Quality will impact the fertility of top soils of the surrounding Medium Minimum Minimum ECP 7, ESMS
areas
O. Agricultural Resources
During site preparation, earthworks such as leveling
O1. Impact on crop Moderate Minor Minor adverse
the land, transportation and construction works would ECP 7 and ECP 15
production
destroy the crops in the project and adjoining areas
At present, BADC have some irrigation facilities in the Moderate
O2. Impact on irrigation project area. During the construction stage these High Minor
adverse
DTWs will be out of operation.
P. Livestock Resources
Transportation of the vehicles, movement of the
P1. Effect on the livestock Minimal Best Practices of the EPC
labors may impact on the livestock movement in the Low Moderate
movement Adverse contractor
study area
Q. Fisheries Resources
Rabnabad channel is rich in Hilsa, Pangus and
Shrimp PL which would be affected due to disposal of
Moderate
Q1. Fish habitat quality waste water like ballast and bilge water from the High Minor ECP 15, ESMS
ship/cargo carrying machinery and ancillaries having adverse
oil and grease contaminants.

171
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
Impact on fish habitats due to spillage of oil, grease,
Q2. Fish species diversity
bilge and ballast water from the increased traffic load Minimum
and composition Minor Minimum ECP 15, ESMS
in the channel. This may result a declining in fish Adverse
species diversity
R. Ecology
The movement of labors will disturb shorebirds
normal activities and they can be displaced. The land
R1. Shorebirds and other filling activities would impacts negative to other Moderate
wildlife habitat wildlife at the project vicinity. In addition, jetty Medium Moderate ECP 13
Adverse
construction for coal transportation will impact
negative to other wildlife, too.
Dredging in order to access ship/cargos to the main
river channel will change the existing condition of the
benthic community by demolishing them. The aquatic
R2 Benthic community
habitat quality will deteriorate through disposal of High Low Low ECA, 2000
waste water like ballast and bilge water from the ship
having oil and grease contaminants during
transportation of machinery and ancillaries.
S. Socio-Economic Condition
Approximately 100 to 125 laborers and technicians
will be engaged in different activities during
construction phase by the EPC contractor. Out of
which around 50-60% of laborers is expected to be
hired and engaged on day basis form the local
S1. Extra burden on Moderate Good House keeping, ECP 16
community. This would alleviate the problems related Medium Moderate
accommodation adverse and ECP 18
to accommodation and other social amenities
including sanitation. Accommodating the remaining
laborers and technicians in the labor camp
established on the leased land of BBA would create
extra pressure on the local community on different

172
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
issues, such as social amenities including sanitation,
potable water, market price, prevailing socio-cultural
situation, etc.
Migrant workers may come from different parts of the
S3. Cultural conflicts country thus a cultural conflict may be created Medium Minor Minor adverse ECP 17 and ESMS
between the migrant workers and the communities.
Employment generation of the local people based on
S4. Employment of local Moderate
their skill will bring positive notion of the local Medium Moderate
people beneficial
inhabitants towards the Project.
T. Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in management of
Moderate ECR 1997, ECP 1, ESMS ,
T1. Solid Waste waste generated from construction activities and Medium Moderate
adverse ESMS
labor sheds
ECR 1997, ECP 16, IFC’s
Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in management of Performance Standards on
T2. Kitchen Waste Medium Minor Minor Adverse
kitchen waste Environmental and Social
Sustainability
Environmental impacts during operation stage
U. Ambient Air
Emission of exhaust gas from the stack may
U1. Maximum ground ECR 2005
contribute elevated ground concentration of CO, NOx, Moderate
level concentration of Medium Moderate WBG General EHS Guidelines,
PM10, PM2.5 etc. at the downwind direction. adverse
pollutants 2007
Cumulative impacts on the sensitive receptors
National GHG emission
U2. Emission of GHG Emission of GHG from the stacks and other sources
Medium Minimum Minimal standard, IFC Performance
emission during operation stages
Standard
V. Ambient Noise

173
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
Noise producing from the first, second and third units
cumulatively would have a tendency of exceeding the
noise level standard in some places. This might result
Moderate Noise Pollution Control Act,
V1. Noise Pollution in hearing complexity and loss along with increased Major Medium
adverse 2006 of Bangladesh
blood pressure, disturbances and discomfort to the
site engineers, technicians and workers and
surrounding communities.
W. Water Resources
Encroachment of internal canals (about 6.5 km) inside ECR 1997, Performance
W1. Natural Drainage the project area may cause severe drainage problem Standards on Environmental
Medium Moderate Moderate
System at the upstream of the project area specifically Londa, and Social Sustainability
Dhankhali, Nisan baria and Madhupara mauzas;
Discharge from the industrial premises may cause
decoration of the surface and ground water pollution
ECR, 1997, IFC 2008 and ECP
W2. Water Quality to the adjacent environment. Sewerage and effluent High Major Major Adverse
1
may mix up with the storm water and pollute the water
quality.
The project area under the power plant located inside
the Polder 54/A. This polder is embanked by about 59
km (29 km sea dyke and remaining portion is interior
dyke) embankment. The crest level of embankment is ECR 1997, Performance
W3. Flooding due to Standards on Environmental
not unique due to land subsistence and soil erosion. High Moderate Major
Storm Surge and Social Sustainability
Whereas existing crest level of sea dyke is 5.80 m. if
the storm surge height is overtopped the crest level of
embankment, then create storm surge flooding into
the polder and inundate the plant site.
X. Land Resources
Accidental spillage of untreated effluent on the nearby Medium Minimum Minor adverse
X1. Soil Quality ECP 5
land from the Plant, and during filling the oil tank

174
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
leakage of oil pipe may cause spillage of HSD oil to
the land either side of the pipe leading to degradation
of the soil quality.
Operation of the Power plant might cause the Moderate
X2. Land Use changes in local infrastructures though induce Moderate Medium
adverse
development activities.
Y. Agricultural Resources
Operation of the power Plant, might cause the
changes in local infrastructures. i.e. Construction of Medium Minor Minor Adverse Planned development should
Y1. Crop Production
different infrastructures would ultimately impact the be taken consideration
crop production of surrounding agricultural land.
Z. Livestock Resources
At this stage, the induce change in land use will
ultimately reduce the grazing areas as well as the Minimal
Z1. Reduce of livestock Low Moderate
fodder for the livestock. Moreover, the change in adverse
lifestyle will reduce to rearing the livestock.
AA. Fisheries Resources
Water intake from the Rabnabad Channel would
entrap fish, crustaceans and other aquatic organisms
particularly the sluggish species.
AA1. Fish species Predator-prey relationship might be affected due to
diversity and composition spread of invasive species through ballast water. High Moderate Major adverse ECP 15
Integrated impact to be caused for withdrawal of
3x1400 m3/hour of water, daily for three power plants
located at the Rabnabad channel may alter the fish
diversity due to salinity intrusion
If the fly ash is not controlled or untreated effluent
Moderate
AA2. Fish production discharge to the nearby river causes result in gradual Medium Moderate ECP 15
Adverse
decline in fish production.

175
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
AA3. Fisheries Based Vehicles movement, water pollution may narrow
Livelihoods down the fishing production which consequently Medium Minor Minor adverse ECP 15 and compensation
squeeze the fisher
BB Ecology
Impedes growth of terrestrial vegetation by reducing
BB1 Terrestrial vegetation Medium Moderate Moderate NCS, 1992
transpiration rates due to fly ashes.

Operations of the thermal power plant would impacts

negative on shorebirds natural activities due to
BB2. Shorebirds Medium Moderate Low ECP 13
lighting from plant site and human induced
disturbances.
The marine habitat within the study area may
deteriorate due to transportation of coals for the
thermal power plant. Water collection from sea for
cooling and make-up process would bring
BB3. Marine habitat Medium Moderate Low ECP 13
invertebrates and other aquatic species to the cooling
tower. It will lead killing of many biota. In addition,
discharge of hot water to marine ecosystem would
impacts negative to aquatic invertebrates, too.
Coal droppings would deposit in the bottom of
waterways which is the home to benthos. The
BB4. Benthic community toxicity of coals could harm too many sensitive High Moderate Low ECP 13
species and finally will destroy the existing benthic
community structure.
CC Socio-Economic Resources
CC 2. Contribution of the Implementation of the project may reduce the energy Major
Very high Moderate
project to the local shortfall and revive associated economy. It may beneficial

176
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
livelihood and economy of attract the new entrepreneurs to build new industry for
the nation development of the nearby areas to power plant.
Supplementary employment opportunities, in the way
CC3. Employment Major
to increased prosperity and security due to higher and High Moderate
Generation beneficial
stable incomes of employed people.
The construction of the new unit may expand the
CC4. Expansion of new Moderate
possibility of developing new small scale industry in Medium Moderate
industry beneficial
the local area.
CC5 Occupational health The labors sometimes may attacked by inhaling dust Moderate
High Minor ECP 18 and 19
and safety and different accidental issues Adverse
DD Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
ECR 1997, IFC’s Performance
DD1. Liquid Waste and Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in management of Moderate
Medium Moderate Standards on Environmental
Sewerage waste adverse
and Social Sustainability
Large amount of kitchen waste to be generated. This ECR 1997, IFC’s Performance
DD2. Kitchen Waste may cause a Aesthetic tiring due to negligence in High Moderate Major adverse Standards on Environmental
management of waste. and Social Sustainability
EE Hazardous Waste Generation
Hazardous Waste and Ship
Breaking Waste Management
Hydrazine is geno-toxic carcinogen. Exposure to Rules 2011, CER 1997, The
EE1. Use of Hydrazine in
hydrazine is hazardous to health. The boiler blow International Conference on
feed water for oxygen Very High Moderate Major adverse
down may contain residual hydrazine which may Chemicals Management in
scavenging
reach to river or canal ultimately. 2006 IFC’s Performance
Standards on Environmental
and Social Sustainability
EE2. Hazardous sludge Hazardous Waste and Ship
Contamination of surface water, ground water and
from water pre-treatment High Major Major adverse Breaking Waste Management
soil if not properly managed
and treatment plant Rules 2011, CER 1997, IFC’s

177
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Compliance to laws,
Significance regulation or accepted
IECs/Issues Potential Impacts from various Activities Sensitivity Magnitude Prior to national or international
Mitigation standards, protected status
of site or species
Performance Standards on
Environmental and Social
Sustainability
Coal Transportation
FF. Fisheries
Increase traffic load in the water course for the three
power plants might hamper the fish migration
activities.
During loading and unloading, coal might fall on
Rabnabad channel and deteriorate the water quality
ECP 15
of the habitat. Moderate
FF1. Fish habitat Medium Moderate MARPOL
Integrated spillage of oil and grease from three power adverse
IMO standard
plants along with Payra deep sea port might be
occurred either directly or through the bilge water from
the water vessels. This may create oil slick which is
detrimental for fish and other aquatic organisms along
with water fowl.
GG Ecology
Movement of water vessels may create harmful
GG1 Aquatic species and situation to aquatic species by dropping coals, oil spill Medium Moderate
Moderate
ECP 13-14
diversity and other waste produced within the vessels due to adverse
mishandling.

178
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

7.4 Environmental Impacts during Pre-Construction Stage

Water Resources

Impacts on water quality

Land development works in the project area is important to the project activity and
sustainability. The dumping soil will be imported from dredging of- Andharmanik River or
Rabnabad Channel. The potential environmental effects of maintenance dredging are
generally two-fold, firstly as a result of dredging and secondly the dredged material. At the
dredging location, water quality may deteriorate from its baseline situation. It becomes turbid
and bed poisonous materials get mixed with surface water. Moreover, at the dumping location,
there are a number of natural water bodies existing in the project area, may get mixed with
the spoil surface runoff and also may create the surface water pollution. Metal and solid wastes
from the river / channel bed may deteriorate the surface and groundwater quality in and around
the project area.
On the other hand, in considering the environmental effects of maintenance dredging and
disposal, the potential benefits of these operations should not be overlooked. These include
the removal of contaminated sediments and their relocation to safe, contained areas and the
possible improvement of water quality made by the restoration of water depth and flow in the
Rabnabad Channel and Andharmanik River.
Impacts on Natural Drainage System
The natural drainage system within the project area is a very much important environmental
component. During this phase, lots of onsite activities will be implemented during the
construction works and land filling like as vegetation clearance and site development with
minor dressing and leveling. Since the internal drainage system supports the smooth passing
of storm water during the monsoon it may create some drainage congestion if the activities
under this phase are not done properly. For the off-site, the activities will be limited to
construction of labor shed on the leased land. Unplanned disposal of waste material or
unnecessary/unused materials/waste from the worker colony may cause unhealthy
environment with-in the natural drainage system, especially during the monsoon season
creating nuisance to the local inhabitants. The significance of impact is characterized as
moderate in Table 7.4.
Impacts on Erosion and Accretions
Erosion- accretion rate in the Rabnabad channel is very much dynamics. Yearly erosion and
accretion rate in the Rabnabad channel is 20 ha, 15 ha respectively. During the construction
phase, a huge numbers of vessels will be moved for carrying the construction and equipment
materials for implementation of power plant project. The movement of vessels will create huge
wave action besides the bank line of the channel, which creates threats for the settlements
near the embankment side. During field visits, already there has been observed the erosion
besides the bank line. These wave actions will accelerate the erosion of the bank line. The
significance of impact is characterized as moderate in Table 7.4.

Impacts on Ecosystem

Impact on terrestrial vegetation

The proposed area is an agricultural land including homesteads with various terrestrial
vegetation. To prepare land to commence construction works shaving or removal of terrestrial

179
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

vegetation is a must. In addition, this vegetation would face damage in this phase due to
construction of labor shed and movement of vehicles as well as pipeline installation.
Moreover, stockpiling of construction materials requires some space and it would damage
herbs and shrubs on site and periphery of the project area. By clearing the vegetation
coverage, wildlife habitat would be destroyed and they might be displaced from their habitat.
Hence, such clearing/damage vegetation imposes high environmental impacts especially
ecological functions.
Impact on shore birds and other wildlife habitat
Pipeline installation for land development process requires labor involvement for a short period
of time across the feeding ground of waders and beyond. The movement of labors will disturb
their normal activities and they can be migrated locally. The land filling process would impacts
negative to other wildlife, too in the project vicinity.
Impact on marine habitat
The waterways are the main routes for bring heavy construction materials to the site. In this
process, the sea is anticipated as main route to transportation of the construction machineries
in this stage. Through transportation the marine habitat supposed to be impacted by oil spills
as well as greases discarded from ship/cargo engines.

Impact on fisheries

Construction work including land filling by dredging, sand lifting and physical construction of
plant setup etc, which may have impacts on open water fish habitats, fish diversity and hence
to some extent on capture fisheries production. Open water fisheries habitats like rivers
(Andharmanik, Rabnabad Channel and Tiakhali), khals, mangrove and inter-tidal area may be
affected due to dredging, traffic movements, and oil and chemical spilling. Dredging activities
may also alter the habitat of the bottom feeder fish for short period. This impact is
characterized as Moderate Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

Land Resources

Impact on Land Type

Natural landform of the proposed Project site and adjoining site is agricultural land. This land
would be affected due to excavation of trenches, construction of buildings and sheds,
movement of traffic, widening and improvement of existing muddy road, etc. The platform of
the Power plant would be raised up to higher than the maximum flood level. This impact is
characterized as Major Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.
Impact on Soil Quality
During earthworks such as leveling and compaction of soil would be done for construction of
power plant. This would degrade the top soils that are enriched with nutrients required for
afforested and naturally grown plant growth. This might be occurred in the Project site where
construction will be done. This impact is characterized as Minimal Adverse, as given in Table
7.4.

180
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Agriculture Resources

Impact on Crop Production

During earthworks, such as leveling and compaction of soil would be done for construction of
power plant. This would deteriorate the crops in the project and adjoining area. This might be
occurred in the project site as well as adjoining area where construction will be done. This
impact is characterized as Moderate Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.
Livestock Resources
Acquiring the project area will lead to obstruct the grazing land and fodder for the livestock of
the local farmers/households. This impact is characterized as Moderate Adverse, as given in
Table 7.4.

Impacts on Socio-Economic issues

Land Acquisition
Power plant (2x660 MW Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant) is going to be Constructed at
Kalapara of RPCL will be constructed on private land in Patuakhali District (Table 7.5). The
Power plant requires almost 915.65 acres of land for its implementation in three Mouzas in
the Project area. Out of 915.65acres of land, highest portion of land have to be acquired from
Londa (606.07 acres), Dhankali (184.84 acres) and Nishanbaria (100.13 acres).

Table 7.5: Amount of land to be acquired for Power plant

Percentage of
Total amount of No. of land
Upazila Union Mouza affected of land
land (in acre) parcels/plots
parcels/plots
Kalapara Dhankhali 196.68 120 23.5
Dhankhali
Londa 624.05 235 46.0
Lalua Nishanbaria 94.92 156 30.5
Total 915.65 511 100
Source: FGD and KII by Field survey, CEGIS, 2016

Project Affected Household

Land acquisition will affect some people and household negatively. Approximately 121
household will be affected due to the Project intervention, From among the affected land,
which contained 560 members. Maximum people will be affected in Londa Mouza about 427
persons almost 76% and rest of them will be affected from Dhankhali and Nishanbaria Mouza.
Table 7.6 shows distribution of the land owners by mouza and sex and details show Appendix-
XIII.
People who are involved as sharecropper, lessee and agricultural laborer will also be affected
due to the Project intervention.

Table 7.6 Number of project affected Household

Affected Affected households Percentage of
Upazila Mouza
Households (No.) member Affected HHs
Kalapara Dhankhali 11 57 10.2
Londa 94 427 76.3
Nishanbaria 16 76 13.6

181
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Cultural Issues
Impacts on other properties than land like trees and structures are highly impacted. However,
detailed design may necessitate reviewing Resettlement Plan before implementation of the
Project.
A lot of agriculture land (most of them are three crops), homestead along with trees and ponds
and two schools a High school named Dhankhali Gazi A Mannan Hafiza Girls High school
cum cyclone shelter and a primary school namely Dhankhali Gazi Sofiur Rahman Primary
school will be affected for the implementation of the Project.

7.5 Environmental Impacts during construction phase

Impact on Ambient Air

Fugitive dust particles may be generated due to site preparation, material transport, piling up
of construction materials, excavation of trenches, batch mixing plant, etc. In addition to these,
operation of construction equipment and vehicles may generate PM, CO, CO2, NOx, SOx,
etc. Prolonged inhalation of dusts by the site engineers and workers might suffer from lung
diseases with symptoms of shortness of breath, coughing, wheezing; chest pain; loss of
appetite; tiredness etc.

Impact on Ambient Noise

Noise is often defined as unwanted sound. Sound is defined as any pressure variation heard
by the human ear. Human ear is sensitive to a wide range of Sound Pressure Levels (SPL)
which is measured on a logarithmic scale with units of decibels (dBA). At present the noise
level of project area is about 46-48 dBA during day. Ambient sound is contributing the major
and main reasons for this noise level.
Noise pollution during construction phase will be caused by the equipment and process such
as operations of construction machines and equipment: trucks, bulldozer, excavator, air
compressor, Concrete mixing station, Pile drivers, Earth leveling and Generator operation etc.
Noise pollution will directly cause health hazards to construction workers on the site as well
as to the residents living nearby the construction site. The construction activities must be
regulated within the standard limit of ECR 2006 and IFC, 2008.
According to data provided by US Federal Bureau of Highway, standard limiting levels of noise
which can be caused by different construction equipment are summarized in the following
Table 7.7.

Table 7.7: Noise produced by construction equipment

No. Plants/Equipment Traffic Vehicles Noise Level (US Standard) dBA
1 Machinery Hammer 95
2 Drilling Machine 75
3 Truck 75
4 Bulldozer 75
5 Compaction Roller 75
6 Tug Plant 75
7 Leveler 75-80

182
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

No. Plants/Equipment Traffic Vehicles Noise Level (US Standard) dBA

8 Pave Machine 80
9 Concrete Mixer 75
10 Generator 75
11 Vibrator 75

The equipment and machineries will produce cumulative noise depending on source type and
number, weather condition, distances and duration of working period. If a single equipment
will produce 90 dB (A) within 1m, it would be reduced gradually to its movement. Without any
facility boundary or other barrier/obstructions, the noise level will propagate and attenuate
significantly with distance shown in Figure 7.1. However, the duration of noise pollution is also
important to account the equivalent noise level.

Figure 7.1: Sound pressure level at different distance from the source

The produced noise will traverse to the adjacent communities from the sources. Local
inhabitants may feel disturbed while receiving noise from line sources, point sources, non-
point sources, and engineering sources individually or collectively.
Vibration is one of the important pollution for the human communities as well as the other living
communities. During the construction phase, vibration may be generated by some machines
i.e. mainly hammer machines, rammers. However, these machines will be located basically in
the western part of the project site i.e. far away from the residential areas. However, potential
vibration sources are identified as such hammer machines (04 sets) operating on clay may
generate a vibration of 7.0mm/s or rammers (04 sets) with a 30kJ energy may generate a
vibration of 4.3mm/s at a distance of 10 meters etc.
Vibration may cause human health hazards such as tiredness, insomnia, mental disorder and
working ability reduction. Regarding dwelling houses and other structures, with a vibration of
minimum 5.0mm/s may cause harm to structures’ life-span

Impact on Water Resources

Water quality
Infrastructure development and other project development activities include equipment or
machineries transportation, machineries installation produce liquid wastes as byproduct.

183
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

There is a possibility to mix the liquid wastes mixed with local channels due to runoff washout
and eventually mixed with the major river system, Rabnabad in the study area. On the other
hand, the liquid waste may infiltrated to the surface soil and finally mixed with the ground water
table.
The riverbank protection works and intake and out channel construction works includes huge
volume concrete consequent of mixing cement and other toxic material with channel water,
which may impact the aquatic environment and may change the ambient status of water
quality.

Impacts on Fisheries

The ship/cargo carrying machineries and ancillaries may discharge ballast and bilge waste
water into the river. This ballast and bilge water may have oil, grease, food waste and other
contaminants which might affect the fisheries resources and their habitat quality. Having
disposed of such harmful substances into the river water, a localized and temporary
disturbance to fish breathing may lead some species to death. Dredging for accessing ship to
the jetty will also disturb the benthic habitat which may require a substantial time to recover.
Discharge of wash water from the construction site may increase the turbidity of the local fish
habitat. This would affect the food supply for fishes temporarily. The impact is characterized
as Major Adverse in Table 7 .4.

Land Resources

Impact on Land Use

During construction phase, the present agricultural land use as crop production would be
changed into a different land use as industrial set up with power plant. This change of
agricultural land use in the project site is permanent in nature. This impact is characterized as
Moderate Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.
Impact on Soil Quality
During site preparation, earthworks will impact the top soil quality that are enriched with
nutrients required for afforested and naturally grown plant growth. This impact is characterized
as Minimal Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

Agriculture Resources

Impact on Crop Production

During construction stage, office quarter, main building, power plant etc will be constructed.
So, a huge volume of work will be done. This would destroy the crops in the project and
adjoining area. This might be occurred in the project site as well as adjoining area where
construction will be done. This impact is characterized as Minor Adverse, as given in Table
7.4.
Impact on irrigation
At present, BADC have some irrigation facilities in the project area. During the construction
stage these DTWs will be out of operation. This impact is characterized as Moderate
Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

184
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Livestock Resources

Transportation of the vehicles, movement of the labors may impact on the livestock movement
in the study area. This impact is characterized as Minimal Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

Impacts on Ecosystem

Impact on terrestrial vegetation

The proposed area is an agricultural land including homesteads with various terrestrial
vegetation’s. To prepare land to commence construction works shaving or removal of
terrestrial vegetation is a must. In addition, this vegetation would face damage in this phase
due to construction of labor shed and movement of vehicles as well as pipeline installation.
Moreover, stockpiling of construction materials requires some space and it would damage
herbs and shrubs on site and periphery of the project area. By clearing the vegetation
coverage, wildlife habitat would be destroyed and they might be displaced from their habitat.
Hence, such clearing/damage vegetation imposes high environmental impacts especially
ecological functions.
Impact on shorebirds and other wildlife habitat
Pipeline installation for land development process requires labor involvement for a short period
of time across the feeding ground of waders and beyond. The movement of labors will disturb
their normal activities and they can be migrated locally. The land filling process would impacts
negative to other wildlife, too in the project vicinity.
Impact on marine habitat
The waterways are the main routes for bring heavy construction materials to the site. In this
process, the sea is anticipated as main route to transportation of the construction machineries
in this stage. Through transportation the marine habitat supposed to be impacted by oil spills
as well as greases discarded from ship/cargo engines.

Impacts on Socio-Economic issues

Labour in-migration may be increased due to the increased opportunities of employment in

the power plant. A number of local people will be engaged in project related activities and may
have employment opportunity. A segment of traditional occupation/resource user groups have
to adopt alternative occupation. The mode of livelihood will be impacted due to creation of the
facilities of new business and services sectors. Contamination of water and sanitation system.
Handling of heavy construction machineries may create health injury in the project sites.
Accidental events during construction. Unsafe and unhygienic labour shades may create a
very hazardous health problem.

Non-Hazardous Waste Generation

Solid Waste
During construction, large amount of construction waste that includes unused construction
materials, construction debris, excavated spoils, abandoned or broken machine parts, debris,
kitchen wastes from labor sheds, packaging materials, used home appliances, etc will be
produced. Moreover, food waste, plastic, papers, cock sheet, cartons, metal or plastic binders,
etc. may be produced as solid waste during this stage. If these wastes are not disposed and
maintained properly, these would have impact on surrounding environment. Space for storage

185
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

and disposal of stuffs and materials generated along with old and used equipment and
materials is limited.
Unarranged piling up and disposal of construction waste will cause unhealthy situation in the
area and become visual tiring. If not properly managed, this impact would remain during the
life span of the Project but would be extended within the plant premises only. The impact is
reversible. It is very likely to take place if proper management is not adopted which is the
requirement of national and international environmental regulations. Considering all of these,
it can be assumed that the magnitude of the impact would be moderate. Sensitivity of this
impact would be medium as the Project has will be taken the waste management plan. From
the analysis of sensitivity and magnitude, it is apprehended that the significance of the impact
would be moderate adverse.
Kitchen Waste
During construction, it is assumed that around high amount of people will be living at site.
Among them, numbers of personnel from EPC contractor, from Owner’s Engineers,
supervision consultants, environmental consultants, RPCL and rest will be day labour. The
Table 7.8 below shows the estimation of kitchen waste during pre-construction and land
development period.

Table 7.8: Estimation of Kitchen Waste during Land Development Period

Sl Project Rate of kitchen waste

Economic Classes of Employee
no employee generation (kg/day/capita)*
1 High Income Group (>20000 tk/month) - 0.513
2 Middle Income Group (tk 10000-20000tk /month) - 0.4
3 Low Income Group (< 10000 tk/month) - 0.26
*source: (JICA, Pacific Consultant Internationals, & Co, 2005)

It is estimated that significant amount of waste will be generated each day from the labor-shed
and employee’s residences. Careless disposal of this waste would create pollution, odor
problem, nuisance and aesthetic tiring. However, the impact would be for a temporary period,
limited within the plant premises, reversible and may happen only in worst-case scenario (i.e.
no management of kitchen waste). On the other hand, sensitivity of this impact to the
residence of the rehabilitation villages and adjacent places is high. Thus the significance of
the impact would be major adverse and needs to be minimized by EMP.
Liquid Waste and Sewerage
It is assumed that during construction phase around huge amount of labourers will be living at
site for construction related activities. Considering the 260L/day per-capita sewerage
generation, it is estimated that significant amount of sewerage would be generated from
temporary labour sheds and officers’ residence. A small portion of this sewerage may escape
sewerage collection and disposal system. The fecal sludge would go to the existing septic
tank and septic tanks of the temporary toilets.
This added sewerage would not have any significant impact on the existing sewerage system.
The magnitude of the impact would be moderate and sensitivity would also be medium. Thus
significant of the impact would be medium adverse and needs to be controlled by adopting
EMP.

186
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

7.6 Environmental Impacts during operation phase

Impact on Air Quality

Impact assessment of the ambient air quality is one of the key issues for the coal based power
plant Project. This study provides detail emission estimates and air quality dispersion modeling
output/result to assess the air quality in Kalapara areas. Construction activities will cause
temporary increase in pollutant emission while operation of power plant will be causing
emission of pollutants during the Project life leading to increase the ground level concentration
of air pollutants. The air pollutants considered in the air quality analysis include Sulfur dioxide
(SO2), Oxides of nitrogen (NOX), carbon monoxide (CO), and particulate matters less than 10
microns and 2.5 microns in diameter (PM10 and PM2.5).
Objective and Scope of Air Pollution Dispersion Modeling
The chemical composition of the fuel (Coal) of the proposed power plant is very important for
the emission estimation. After burning the coal, a number of pollutants release from the stacks
like Carbon dioxides (CO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX), Oxides of Sulfur (SOX), Carbon
Monoxide (CO) and Particulate Matters. The objective of the air quality modeling study is to
(i) First assess the baseline condition in the air-shed, (ii) Second, assess the impact on air
quality due to project case, which includes emissions from the 1320 MW coal based power
plant (including line sources and brick kline) and RPCL 1320 MW Power Plant emissions and
(iii) Finally, assess the cumulative impact, including future proposed developments in the
airshed. USEPA regulatory model CALPUFF is used to predict the effect on ambient air quality
for SO2, NO2, CO, PM2.5 and PM10 emissions. There are many different dispersion models
available, but CALPUFF was used because (i) it is designed for long-range analysis, more
than 50 kilometers from the source, (ii) it can accurately model both simple and complex
terrain, (iii) can model urban and rural areas, and (iv) multiple point, line, area, and volume
sources can be modeled. This assessment is done as a part of ESIA study of 1320 MW Coal
based thermal power plant to be constructed at Kalapara, Patuakhali District to meet the
compliance requirement of the Government of Bangladesh (GoB) and secure approval of the
DoE to implement the project.
Pollutants of Concern
The power plant will be run though imported coal which will be transported by covered
conveyer belt from the the Pyra port coal terminal to the project coal yeard. Emissions from
the power plant are a serious concern espacially for the coal based power plant project. In
addition, the proposed other coal-fired power plants will also be a significant source of
emissions in the air-shed. Potential pollutants of concern released from the proposed coal-
fired power plant are Sulfur Dioxide (SO2), Nitrogen oxides (NOx), Particulate Matter (PM2.5
and PM10) and Carbon Monoxide (CO). The amount of SO2 released is dependent on the
properties of the fuel, the higher the sulfur content of the fuel, higher the amount of SO2 will
be released. High levels of SO2 can lead to acid rain, which damages crops, forests, and
soils, and acidifies lakes and streams. Combustion of coal can also be a significant source of
particulate matter. Ash is the main source of particulate maters. Coal-fired power plants also
tend to release a significant amount of particulate matter in the form of soot and fly ash. The
formation of thermal NOx is dependent on 3 factors during combustion; (i) oxygen
concentration, (ii) peak temperature, and (iii) time of exposure at peak temperature. Fuel
combustion releases NOx which is composed of NO and NO2. NO2 is of particular concern
and is considered a criteria pollutant. NO2 is used as the indicator for the larger group of
nitrogen oxides (NOx). In addition to contributing to the formation of ground-level ozone, and

187
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

fine particle pollution, NO2 is linked with a number of adverse effects on the respiratory system.
Significant health risks are associated with high levels of ambient NO 2, CO and PM2.5
concentrations. Emissions from the power plant are estimated for two scenarios (i) Baseline
scenario and (ii) project case scenario.
Air quality modeling input data
Regulatory agencies rely on dispersion models as part of their approval processes. The
Department of Environment (DoE) in Bangladesh does not recommend any specific models
for the impact assessment study. Therefore, this study has considered the USEPA
recommended air dispersion model to assess the emission to the adjacent areas of the Project
site. However, USEPA does not recommend any individual models, therefore allows the
modeler to judge and select a suitable model for assessment.
The latest version of the USEPA regulatory model CALPUFF was used to predict and simulate
the effects of criteria pollutants from major emission sources in the project area and analyze
the effect on ambient air quality for SO2, NO2, CO, PM2.5 and PM10. Emissions data for point
sources such as the proposed 1320 MW power plant and other industrial sources in the air-
shed were calculated based on plant fuel consumption and emission factors from USEPA
AP42. This is considered a conservative approach to modeling. A Tier-1 and Tier-2 (Ambient
Ratio Method) modeling approach was used for NO2 prediction as per USEPA guidelines. In
the Tier-1 approach it is assumed that 100% of the NOx emissions are converted into NO2,
this approach gives the most conservative results and tends to over predict maximum ground
level concentrations. In the tier-2 (ARM) a regional NO2/NOx ratio representative of area wide
quasi-equilibrium conditions is applied to the model predicted values, this gives more realistic
results for maximum ground level NO2 concentration. NO2 is the pollutant of concern and is
used as an indicator for nitrogen oxides (NOx) in general.
Since there was very little information available on the power plant emissions, criteria pollutant
emissions were calculated based on the plant’s fuel consumption and USEPA AP 42 emission
factors. This is considered as a conservative approach to modeling. Greenhouse gas
emissions were calculated using fuel consumption and IPCC greenhouse gas emission
factors.
a) Pollution Abatement Measures
Abatement of Particulate Matter

Handling and storage facilities of coal shall be equipped with dust suppression system. The
conveyor belt shall be covered and the transfer point shall be equipped with dust suppression
system. Hence, dust generation from coal handling and storage activities shall be minimum
and within the standard limit. Nevertheless, sometime, within the close proximity of the
handling and storage facilities, SPM of the local air might rise but automatic dust sensor and
suppression system shall control the generated dust.
The options of removing particulate matter from exhaust gases using cyclones, bag houses
(fabric filters), and ESPs have been reported. Bag houses can achieve removal efficiencies of
99.95% or better for particulate matter of all sizes. ESPs are available in a broad range of
sizes for power plants and can achieve removal efficiencies of 99.7% or better for particulate
matter of all sizes. The choice between a bag house and an ESP will depend on fuel and ash
characteristics, as well as on operating and environmental factors.
As per feasibility study, the coal combustion process will produce maximum 12.77% ash
(design specification) from the total coal inflow. In order to maintain the standard limit of

188
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

particulate matter (e.g. PM10& PM2.5) controlling devices must be added before the flue gas
emission. Based on technical and economic analysis, Electrostatic Dust Precipitator (ESP)
has been selected for each of the unit.
Abatement measures for emission of SOx
The range of options and removal efficiencies for SOx controls is wide. Selection of coal on
the basis of sulfur contain is the one of the key way of reducing SOx emission. Pre-ESP
sorbent injection can remove 30–70% of sulfur oxides, at a cost of US$50–$100 per kW. Post-
ESP sorbent injection can achieve 70–90% SOx removal, at a cost of US$80–$170 per kW.
Wet and semidry FGD units consisting of dedicated SOx absorbers can remove 70–95%, at
a cost of US$80–$170 per kW. The operating costs of most FGDs are substantial because of
the power consumed (of the order of 1–2% of the electricity generated), the chemicals used,
and disposal of residues. However, approximately 85% of the flue gas desulfurization units
installed are wet scrubbers, 12% are spray dry systems and 3% are dry injection systems.
The highest SOx removal efficiencies (greater than 95%) are achieved by wet scrubbers and
the lowest (less than 80%) by dry scrubbers. However, the new designs for dry scrubbers are
capable of achieving efficiencies in the order of 90%. An integrated pollution management
approach should be adopted which will not create other form of pollution such as gypsum in
the study area.
A coal-fired power plant utilizes coal (main fuel) and oil (auxiliary fuel for startup). Since the
planned output of each of the power plants is 660 MW, the emission standard limit is needed
to comply for all the regulation for greater than 500 MW coal based power plant. However, a
single stack is confirmed with 275m height for this power plant project.
Abatement of Nitrogen Oxides
The main options for controlling NOx emissions are combustion modifications: low-NOx
burners with or without over fire air or re-burning, water/steam injection, and selective catalytic
or non-catalytic reduction (SCR/SNCR). Combustion modifications can remove 30– 70% of
nitrogen oxides, at a capital cost of less than US$20 per kW and a small increase in operating
costs. SNCR systems can remove 30–70% of nitrogen oxides, at a capital cost of US$20–$40
per kW and a moderate increase in operating cost. However, plugging of the pre-heater
because of the formation of ammonium bi-sulphate may pose some problems. SCR units can
remove 70–90% of nitrogen oxides but involve a much larger capital cost of US$40–$80 per
kW and a significant increase in operating costs, especially for coal-fired plants. Moreover,
SCR may require low sulfur fuels (less than 1.5% sulfur content) because the catalyst
elements are sensitive to the sulfur dioxide content in the flue gas. Both plants will adopt low-
NOx burner and keep the provision of SCR if the level of NOx may breach the emission
standard.
CALMET, CALPUFF and CALPOST Methodology
For the dispersion modeling from the proposed power plant, the CALPUFF model suite was
used for. CALPUFF is a suite of numerical dispersion models that is composed of CALMET
(the metrology processor), CALPUFF, and CALPOST (the post processor). The CALPUFF
suite is used to determine the impact of emissions from a source or group of sources, which
can be point, line or area. First, three-dimensional meteorological fields were produced by the
diagnostic computer model CALMET based on surface and upper air weather data, digital
land use data, terrain data, and prognostic meteorological data. The three-dimensional
CALMET meteorological fields were generated using WRF meteorological data and digital
terrain and land use data.

189
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Then the three-dimensional fields produced by CALMET were used by CALPUFF, which is a
three-dimensional, multi-species, non-steady-state Gaussian puff dispersion model that can
simulate the effects of time and space varying meteorological conditions on pollutant transport.
Lastly, CALPOST, a statistical processing program, was used to summarize and tabulate the
pollutant concentrations calculated by CALPUFF and produce contour diagrams.
Project Modeling Area
The CALPUFF dispersion model is comprised of a (i) Meteorological grid, (ii) Computational
grid, and (iii) Sampling (receptor) grid is 50 km by 50 km with the center point being at Lat:
22.027494 N and Long: 90.303467 E and is the system of grid points at which meteorological
parameters such as wind components and mixing heights are defined. The Computational
Grid is where the puffs are released and adverted, and is either identical to or a subset of the
Meteorological Grid. Around 25 km width was chosen to ensure the emissions impact
proposed power plant project to the surrounding sensitive receptors would be adequately
assessed. Choosing a computational/sampling area that is to big would significantly increase
model run-time. The sampling Grid defines the set of gridded receptors, which must be placed
within the computational grid and meteorological grid. In this case, the sampling grid has the
same dimensions as the computational grid. However, Table 7.9 shows salient point features
and Figure 7.2 shows 3 dimensional plant boundary as well as the domain selected for air
quality modeling.

Table 7.9: CALPUFF Study Area Coordinates (UTM Zone: N 46)

Model Domain Easting (m) Northing (m)

Project Boundary Stack Point 221640 2438328
East Corner 222905.63 2438281
North Corner 221381.08 2439119
West Corner 220147.99 2437648
South Corner 221353.97 2436973
Computational Grid Southwest Corner 196675.36 2413341.39
Southeast Corner 246649.08 2413266.67
Northeast Corner 246641.18 2463229.05
Northwest Corner 196649.12 2463295.97
Source: CEGIS, 2016

190
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Figure 7.2: Air despersion modelling boundary in 3D

Emissions Inventory
In order to ensure the plant flue gas diffusion, operation facility, stack of RPCL Kalapara
1320MW thermal power plant is designed as 275 m higher than ground level for coal of one
stack with two ducts.
The stack structure is as follows: reinforced concrete block inside which there are ten steel
stacks, each steel tube is for one unit. Inside diameter of the steel tube is designed basing on
flue volume, outlet flue temperature, flue velocity at the top of the stack, friction loss in the
stack. Inside the stack, there is also interior steel support system, ladder system, air ventilation
system, working floors for stack operation and maintenance and monitoring during the plant
operation period. Outside is equipped with lightning system and aerial alarm light system.
To limit sulfuric acid (H2SO4) formation, because of the reduction of flue gas temperature to
below dew-point, temperature inside the stack should be maintained as high as possible. With
such purpose, the outer side steel flue gas duct outer side is covered by one glass-wool; this
layer is protected by stainless steel. Inside shell of the steel flue gas duct is covered by one
anti-acid mortar layer. However, the emission rate of various pollutant substances has been
presented the Table 7.10as per feasibility report.

Table 7.10: Emission Inventories or the Proposed Project

Parameter Value
Source type Point
Dispersion Coefficient For Rural
Receptor Height Above ground 0m
Emission Rate (CO) 34.52 g/s
Emission Rate (SO2) 122.76 g/s
Emission Rate (NOx) 313.06 g/s
PM10 28.54 g/s
PM2.5 2.14 g/s
Number of Stack 1
Stack Height 275 m

191
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Parameter Value
Stack inside diameter 7.2 m
Velocity 22 m/s
Stack Gas Exit Temperature 1100 C
Upper Atmospheric Data MM5
Terrain Simple

Emission inventories were prepared for all major point, area, and line sources within the
airshed. The major point sources for modeling the baseline and project case are as follows:
- Brick fields
- Vehicles on the road
At present, few brickfields are found in the study area. Vehicles run on the Patuakahli –
Kuakata road, Kalapara-Barguna road and brick fields are the key sources of emission. Table
7.11 shows the major point sources along with input parameters for the baseline study.
Emission from the brick fields are determined by the USEPA guideline AP-42 and Emission
inventories for the Brickfield in Bangladesh. They are considered as point source during the
modeling study.

Table 7.11: Major Point Source Emissions in the Project Area

Stack Stack
UTM X Stack Ext. CO SOx NOx PM10 PM2.5
Type UTM Y (m) Velocity Dia.
(m) Height (m) Temp (K) (gm/S) (gm/S) (gm/S) (gm/S) (gm/S)
(m/S) (m)
Brick
217280 2432655 38.20 315.00 7.40 1.2 0.08 7.15 0.21 6.44 2.12
Field
Brick
217348 2432743 38.20 315.00 7.40 1.2 0.08 7.15 0.21 6.44 2.12
Field
Brick
216224 2430563 38.20 315.00 7.40 1.2 0.08 7.15 0.21 6.44 2.12
Field
Brick
216027 2430734 38.20 315.00 7.40 1.2 0.08 7.15 0.21 6.44 2.12
Field
Brick
215646 2430977 38.20 315.00 7.40 1.2 0.08 7.15 0.21 6.44 2.12
Field
Brick
214991 2431770 38.20 315.00 7.40 1.2 0.08 7.15 0.21 6.44 2.12
Field

Major line sources of pollution considered in the model are traffic moves to the Patuakhali-
Kuakata and Barguna road. A number of vehicles move every day on this road which causes
air pollution from their exhausts. A detail information of the line sources are given in the Table
7.12.

Table 7.12: Vehicle information (AADT)

Heavy Medium Light Large Mini Micro Utility Auto Motor

Road Distance Car
Truck Truck Truck Bus Bus Bus Vehicle Rickshaw Cycle
R880 40.65 - 79.00 20.00 80.00 17.00 54.00 25.00 17.00 1096.00 1203.00
R880 31.16 15 84.00 454.00 71.00 73.00 78.00 27.00 48.00 1585.00 1427.00
Z8810 12.71 8 78.00 169.00 13.00 47.00 37.00 14.00 23.00 561.00 481.00
Source: The RMMS Database, Department of Roads and Highways, Bangladesh.

The types and total quantity vehicles were collected from the records Roads and High way
Department. In absence of the supply of natural gas on the Barishal region, diesel is
considered the main fuel for the maximum vehicles. Emissions from marine vehicles were
calculated based on the total estimated fuel used and USEPA AP-42 emission factors. Table
7.13 shows the emission factors for the N7 Highway.

192
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Table 7.13: Major Line-area Sources in the Project Area (Highway Traffic)
Emission Rate (g/s-m2) Release
Name
NOx SO2 CO PM2.5 PM10 Height (m)
R880 4.073E-05 3.285E-07 3.169E-04 1.173E-06 8.987E-06 0.5
R880 6.268E-05 4.905E-07 3.930E-04 1.584E-06 1.086E-05 0.5
Z8810 2.398E-05 1.871E-07 1.352E-04 5.752E-07 3.704E-06 0.5
Note: *Calculated based on The RMMS Database, Department of Roads and Highways, Bangladesh.

The GoB has taken a master plan to develop the Kalapara areas as a power hub which run
though the imported coal facilitated by the Payra Port Authority. A number of Power
Companies has already process their initiatives to install their power plants in future. Emission
inventories were prepared based on the other similar types of coal based power plants in
Bangladesh. The stack emissions and stack parameters of the thermal power plants are given
in Table 7.14. The rate of pollutant (CO) emission has been calculated based on the emission
inventories of USEPA AP-42 Volume-1 (1995); Stationary sources for coal base Power Plant

Table 7.14: Major Point Source Emissions in the Project Area

Stack Inner Flue Gas Emission Rate (g/s)

Capacity
No. of Stack Height Dia. Temp.
(MW) CO SO2 NOx PM10 PM2.5
(m) (m) (K)
NWPGCL 1 2x660 275 7.2 383 34.52 394.2 368.3 25.19 1.90
APSCL 1 2x660 275 7.2 383 34.52 394.2 368.3 25.19 1.90
SKS 1 2x660 275 7.2 383 34.52 394.2 368.3 25.19 1.90
Source: Other Power Plants document and AP-42

Meteorological Data
Pre-processed hourly 3D meteorological data of the year 2013, 2014 and 2015 was procured
from the Lakes Environmental Software (CALMET-Ready MM5, location at 24.386211 N,
89.745619E). This is known as upper atmospheric or air surrounding data which is used in the
air dispersion model. The regional meteorological conditions are assessed after analysis of
meteorological data of recorded by the Kuakata, BMD station. Detail meteorological
phenomenon of the study area are presented in the baseline study of this report. Wind
direction, velocity and movement are very much important for dispersion modeling study.
Figure 7.4 shows the frequency distribution of wind passes over the project area. Figure 7.3
shows the wind rose diagram after statistical analysis of the wind data of the last three years.

193
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Figure 7.3: Wind-rose diagram of last 3 years

Figure 7.4: Frequency distribution of wind over the Project area

Receptors
Two types of receptors are defined within the Model Domain. These are: A) Nested Cartesian
Grid Points and B) Discrete Receptors. Since this study will present the spatial distribution of
pollution dispersion, the nested Cartesian Grid are not considered during the modeling study.
25x25 km was taken as the computational grid from the stack point of the Propose RPCL 1230
MW power plant.
Discrete Receptors
In addition, discrete locations corresponding to specific sites of interest are included in this
assessment. These receptors are broadly located as the places which are populated with
human being especially children and patients since their health is much vulnerable to air
pollution. Around 120 numbers of primary school, Madrasa, health complex and Madrasha are
selected as discrete receptors around the RPCL Power Project. Moreover, Kuakata Sea beach
and extended mangrove forest of Sundarbans are considered as eco-sensitive discrete
receptors during this modeling study. Four baseline monitoring points are also included as

194
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

discrete receptor for future comparison. The effects on air quality at these sensitive sites were
also assessed in more details. The list of sensitive receptors, their locations and details are
given in Table 7.15.

Table 7.15: Details of Sensitive Receptors

Distance from
SI Location (m)
Name of Sensitive Receptors the Stack
No
Latitude Longitude Km
1 Primary School 215216.55 2421973.94 20
2 Primary School 215750.24 2428207.94 20
3 Primary School 232122.64 2428301.16 20
4 Primary School 210910.09 2428654.96 20
5 Family Welfare Centre 210774.04 2429028.03 20
6 Family Welfare Centre 232433.07 2429565.68 20
7 Primary School 232184.55 2429769.27 20
8 Primary School 208260.16 2430520.14 20
9 Family Welfare Centre 208833.29 2430904.72 20
10 Primary School 233225.49 2432534.74 20
11 Primary School 205860.37 2437629.99 20
12 Primary School 203440.91 2437923.58 20
13 Primary School 236400.56 2438310.14 20
14 Primary School 234525.98 2438744.14 20
15 Family Welfare Centre 207502.93 2439069.72 20
16 Primary School 205732.38 2439330.71 20
17 Primary School 205641.75 2442195.63 20
18 Family Welfare Centre 202271.46 2442378.87 20
19 Primary School 202695.10 2442441.11 20
20 Primary School 204178.12 2444236.28 20
21 Primary School 208725.01 2444298.90 20
22 Primary School 208415.90 2445734.07 20
23 Family Welfare Centre 211763.15 2445976.75 20
24 Primary School 211819.50 2446095.04 20
25 Primary School 231331.80 2448319.29 20
26 Primary School 216465.14 2448577.83 20
27 Primary School 225877.76 2448857.64 20
28 Primary School 223842.71 2449059.92 20
29 Primary School 217618.50 2449110.42 20
30 Primary School 222586.52 2449143.75 20
31 Primary School 216802.52 2449513.24 20
32 Primary School 235358.38 2449584.77 20
33 Primary School 214578.03 2449585.89 20
34 Primary School 213607.35 2449702.96 20
35 Primary School 221626.60 2449906.05 20

195
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Distance from
SI Location (m)
Name of Sensitive Receptors the Stack
No
Latitude Longitude Km
36 Primary School 234284.21 2450100.89 20
37 Hospital 214197.20 2450102.45 20
38 Primary School 218366.35 2450148.44 20
39 Primary School 224901.57 2450349.68 20
40 Primary School 232889.22 2452539.46 20
41 Family Welfare Centre 220450.87 2452854.98 20
42 Family Welfare Centre 224983.17 2452952.74 20
43 Primary School 214258.92 2453025.58 20
44 Primary School 230669.33 2453178.54 20
45 Community Clinic 225198.38 2453463.20 20
46 Community Clinic 225077.16 2453648.97 20
47 Primary School 221995.62 2453720.10 20
48 Primary School 216714.53 2453830.07 20
49 Primary School 224863.05 2454075.17 20
50 Primary School 226776.80 2454510.09 20
51 Community Clinic 210862.52 2454674.69 20
52 Primary School 220466.54 2455713.48 20
53 Primary School 223806.38 2455742.69 20
54 Hospital 220079.76 2455745.18 20
55 Primary School 227867.61 2456113.52 20
56 Primary School 219050.47 2457337.80 20
57 Family Welfare Centre 218689.74 2429234.82 10
58 High School 218798.30 2429240.69 10
59 Primary School 229720.34 2432359.24 10
60 High School 228098.62 2433130.13 10
61 Community Clinic 213829.58 2434219.85 10
62 Primary School 216421.28 2434257.94 10
63 High School 212225.77 2434587.34 10
64 Primary School 230899.00 2434615.71 10
65 Primary School 212317.54 2434791.28 10
66 Hospital 212782.92 2434907.76 10
67 Madrasa 212389.48 2434953.38 10
68 Primary School 231031.20 2435587.45 10
69 Madrasa 231242.01 2435595.77 10
70 Primary School 212817.88 2436376.92 10
71 Primary School 215262.82 2439293.77 10
72 Family Welfare Centre 212613.54 2439421.88 10
73 Primary School 212469.28 2439720.31 10
74 Primary School 228983.92 2440006.86 10
75 Madrasa 229180.26 2440040.37 10

196
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Distance from
SI Location (m)
Name of Sensitive Receptors the Stack
No
Latitude Longitude Km
76 Primary School 212802.94 2440348.80 10
77 Primary School 216358.31 2440891.45 10
78 Primary School 214519.72 2441344.39 10
79 Primary School 218555.63 2442809.72 10
80 Primary School 214679.80 2442830.19 10
81 Primary School 225758.64 2443064.35 10
82 High School 225799.58 2443298.72 10
83 Primary School 216601.35 2443514.20 10
84 High School 221932.66 2443830.93 10
85 High School 221706.70 2444128.35 10
86 Primary School 219864.20 2444446.58 10
87 Primary School 218741.72 2444529.30 10
88 High School 218770.14 2444763.57 10
89 Primary School 217267.52 2445008.64 10
90 Primary School 226984.28 2445346.65 10
91 Madrasa 222838.28 2445560.65 10
92 Primary School 223076.68 2445584.39 10
93 Madrasa 217040.00 2445854.59 10
94 Madrasa 217061.36 2445897.81 10
95 Primary School 226223.43 2446571.76 10
96 Madrasa 222460.39 2446818.72 10
97 Family Welfare Centre 220690.76 2447021.46 10
98 Primary School 222416.75 2447035.09 10
99 Madrasa 218908.97 2447142.25 10
100 High School 221005.08 2433032.15 5
101 Primary School 221067.96 2433077.63 5
102 Primary School 221641.54 2434897.29 5
103 Primary School 218492.36 2435484.03 5
104 Primary School 218917.99 2438730.79 5
105 Primary School 218083.48 2439002.57 5
106 Madrasa 218503.45 2439834.87 5
107 Primary School 224027.87 2440162.20 5
108 High School 220205.17 2440502.93 5
109 Primary School 217912.97 2440788.85 5
110 Primary School 223642.11 2441065.07 5
111 Family Welfare Centre 223106.38 2441168.01 5
112 High School 223176.49 2441711.56 5
113 Primary School 219728.95 2438281.49 2
114 High School 223121.20 2438862.29 2
115 Londa kheya ghat, Dhankhali 218994.59 2436673.54 2

197
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Distance from
SI Location (m)
Name of Sensitive Receptors the Stack
No
Latitude Longitude Km
116 Itbaria village 217435.55 2432798.32 2
117 Dhankhali Ashraf Academy 223182.04 2438787.94 2
118 Islampur, Pujakhola 218627.72 2440238.39 2
119 Kuakata 202412.92 2414963.2 25
120 Extent of Sundarbans Mangrove 201192.7 2424308.29 23

Source: CEGIS, 2016

Air Quality Modelling

In this section, the predicted maximum ground level concentration results and contour maps
for maximum concentration levels in ambient air are presented for SO2, PM2.5, PM10, NOX, and
CO for both the baseline and project scenario.
Background Concentration
Background ambient measurements were obtained from the baseline monitoring of the air
quality for both dry and wet season. The air quality monitoring location has been selected
based on the wind direction and location sensitivity. Air quality data has been collected
continuously 8 hr though standard procedure.
The background values for SO2, PM2.5 and PM10 are measured for 8-hour averaging period
and thus have to be converted to 24-hr and annual averaging period for compatibility with
modeled results. NOX is for 8-hour measurement period and has to be converted to 1 hour
and average. Concentration of NO2 can be estimated from the ration of NO2/NOX in the
representative areas. Theoretically, equilibrium occurs when the rate of NO2 formation (from
oxidation of NO) equals the rate of dissociation of NO2 by sunlight5. An ambient equilibrium
NO2/NOX ratio of 0.65 was used, which is based on data from the Narayanganj CAMS
monitoring station of DOE. The CO has to be converted from 8 hour to 1 hour average period.
Conversions are done using the power law relationship (OMOE, 2014) given below:
Clong = Cshort(tshort/tlong)P
Where:
Clong= the concentration for the longer averaging time
Cshort= the concentration for the shorter averaging time
Tshort= the shorter averaging time
Tlong = the longer averaging time
p = the power law exponent
For ambient air assessments a p value of 0.28 is used. This methodology is deemed to give
conservative estimates and thus is deemed appropriate for this case. The converted
background concentration values are given in Table-8.16. The background ambient
concentration values were added to the modeled 1-hr, 8-hr, and 24-hr and annual
concentration values.
Modeling Output for Baseline and Project Case

5 Use of Ambient Ratios to Estimate Impact of NOx Sources on Annual NO2 Concentrations. In Proceedings of
the 84th Annual Meeting & Exhibition, Air & Waste Management Association, 1991

198
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

The modeling has been run for predicting the maximum concentration levels of ambient air
pollutants like SO2, PM2.5 and PM10 for both the baseline and project case. Only, emissions
from feasibility study data were modeled and a measured ambient background concentration
and the value have been added to the modeled results to predict concentration at the sensitive
receptors at the time of operation of the project. The results for different scenarios at the
sensitive receptors have been shown in Appendix-VIII.
Concentration of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)
Sulphur dioxide is the key concern for the coal based power plant projects. The emission of
SO2 depends on the concentration of Sulfur in coal, rate of combustion and emission control
technologies e.g. FGD. The level of SO2 concentration in the study area has been assessed
during the baseline based on the emission from the vehicles, brickfields etc. The maximum
concentration of SO2for 24-hr and annual averaging time has shown in Table 7.16 for both
baseline and project case. The spatial Distribution of SO2 concentration has been shown in
Figure 7.5 both for baseline and project case.

Table 7.16: Air Quality Modeling Data - SO2

Location at Ground Concentration
Standard Limit
Averaging Level (UTM: 46) (µg/m³)
Pollutant SO2
Time East ECR
North (m) Maximum Value IFC 2008
(m) 2005
Baseline Case 217.436 2432.798 4.7455E+001
24 Hr 365 125 (IT-1)
Project Case 217.436 2432.798 4.8104E+001
Baseline Case 217.436 2432.798 6.5068E+000
Annual 80 -
Project Case 217.436 2432.798 6.7193E+000
Source: CEGIS, 2015

Concentration of PM2.5
There is very little amount of filterable particulate matter (PM2.5) emits through the stacks of
the power plant. The maximum concentration of PM2.5 for 24-hr and annual averaging time is
accounted through the modeling process using the three years meteorological data of the
study area. The peak concentration found in the ground level depending on the worst-case
meteorological situation. This maximum concentration values have been predicted for both
Baseline and project case within the study area (Table 7.17). The Modeling data shows
insignificant differences of the maximum concentration values of PM2.5 for the baseline and
project case. The spatial Distribution of PM2.5 concentration has been shown in Figure 7.6
both for baseline and project case.

Table 7.17: Air Quality Modeling Data –PM2.5

Location at Ground Concentration
Standard Limit
Pollutant Averaging Level (UTM: 46) (µg/m³)
PM2.5 Time East ECR IFC
North (m) Maximum Value
(m) 2005 2008
Baseline
217.436 2432.798 1.4076E+001
Case 24 Hr 65 75 (IT-1)
Project Case 217.436 2432.798 1.4397E+001
Baseline
217.436 2432.798 1.9329E+000
Case Annual 15 35 (IT-1)
Project Case 217.436 2432.798 2.0016E+000

Concentration of PM10

199
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

The condensable particulate maters are generally included into PM10. The highest
concentration of PM10 for 24-hr and annual averaging time is estimated through the modeling
process with the help of three years meteorological data of the study area. The maximum
concentration of PM10 would only found in the ground level for the worst-case meteorological
situation. The peak concentration of this pollutant has been predicted for both the Baseline
project case within the study area (Table 7.18).The spatial Distribution of PM10 concentration
has been shown in Figure 7.7 both for baseline and project case.

Table 7.18: Air Quality Modeling Data –PM10

Location at Ground Level Concentration

Standard Limit
Pollutant Averaging (UTM: 46) (µg/m³)
PM10 Time Maximum ECR
East(m) North (m) IFC 2008
Value 2005
Baseline Case 217.436 2432.798 4.2784E+001 150 (IT-
24 Hr 150
Project Case 217.436 2432.798 4.3782E+001 1)
Baseline Case 217.436 2432.798 5.8897E+000
Annual 50 70 (IT-1)
Project Case 217.436 2432.798 6.0387E+000

Concentration of Sulphur Dioxide (NOX)

NOX is the key concern for the coal based power plant projects. The emission of SO2 depends
on the combustion and emission control technologies e.g. LNB (Low-NOX burner). The level
of NOX concentration in the study area has been assessed during the baseline based on the
emission from the vehicles, brickfields etc. The maximum concentration of NOX for 1-hr and
annual averaging time has shown in Table 7.19 for both baseline and project case. The spatial
Distribution of NOX concentration has been shown in Figure 7.8 both for baseline and project
case.

Table 7.19: Air Quality Modeling Data – NOX

Location at Ground Concentration Standard Limit
Averaging Level (UTM: 46) (µg/m³) (µg/m³)
Pollutant NOx
Time Maximum ECR
East(m) North (m) IFC 2008
Value 2005
Baseline Case 215.263 2439.294 1.4209E+002
1 Hr - 200
Project Case 218.918 2438.731 2.3662E+002
Baseline Case 215.263 2439.294 1.1152E+001
Annual 100 40
Project Case 215.263 2439.294 1.1357E+001

200
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Baseline - SO2 (24 Hr) Project - SO2 (24 Hr)

Baseline - SO2 (Annual) Project- SO2 (Annual)

Figure 7.5: Distribution of SO2 both for project and baseline case

201
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Baseline – PM2.5 (24 Hr) Project – PM2.5 (24 Hr)

Baseline – PM2.5 (Annual) Project – PM2.5 (Annual)

Figure 7.6: Distribution of PM2.5 both for project and baseline case

202
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Baseline – PM10 (24 Hr) Project – PM10 (24 Hr)

Baseline – PM10 (Annual) Project – PM10 (Annual)

Figure 7.7: Distribution of PM10 both for project and baseline case

203
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Baseline – NOX (1 Hr) Project – NOX (1 Hr)

Baseline – NOX (Annual) Project – NOX (Annual)

Figure 7.8: Distribution of NOX both for project and baseline case

204
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Cumulative Impacts on Air Quality

The GoB has taken a master plan to develop the Kalapara areas as a power hub which runs
through the imported coal facilitated by the Payra Port Authority. A number of Power
Companies has already process their initiatives to install their power plants in future. Emission
inventories were prepared based on the other similar types of coal based power plants in
Bangladesh. The stack emissions and stack parameters of the thermal power plants are given
in Table 7.20. The rate of pollutant (CO) emission has been calculated based on the emission
inventories of USEPA AP-42 Volume-1 (1995); Stationary sources for coal base Power Plant.

Table 7.20: Major Point Source Emissions in the Project Area

Stack Inner Emission Rate (g/s)
No. of Capacity Flue Gas
Height Dia.
Stack (MW) Temp. (K) NOx CO SO2 PM10 PM2.5
(m) (m)
NWPGCL 1 2x660 275 7.2 383 183 69 278 42 21
APSCL 1 2x660 275 7.2 383 618 69 242 28 21
SKS 1 2x660 275 7.2 383 183 69 278 42 21
Source: Other Power Plants document and AP-42

The cumulative impact of all major emission sources in the air-shed is assessed in this section,
including future developments. In addition to the sources discussed previously, the
assessment includes emissions from the power plants of RPCL, APSCL, SKS which will be
located close to the RPCL Power plant. The emissions and input parameters for the proposed
power plants are given in the above Table 7.20.
During the cumulative impact assessment all of the potential sources are taken into the
predicted maximum ground level 24-hr and annual concentrations are given in Table 7.21.
The table shows that the predicted SO2, PM2.5and PM10concentrations for cumulative case are
within the Bangladesh Ambient Air Quality Standards (ECR, 2005) but SO2 and PM10
significantly higher than the WBG Guideline Values. Note that Bangladesh Standards for 24-
hour SO2 and PM10concentration is quite higher compared to WBG Guidelines and standards
of other countries. There is a substantial increase in 24-hr and annual predicted concentrations
from the project case to cumulative case and there is also a slight increase in overall annual
concentrations. The predicted 24-hr and annual averaging value but meet the interim target
(IT) value – II of WB guideline. However, Department of Environment have a plan to conduct
the SEA study considering all of the future development works like power plants, industries,
roads, rail always industries, airport to assist the regional Master Plan with respect to the
environmental carrying capacity.

205
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Cumulative - SO2 (24 Hr) Cumulative - SO2 (Annual)

Cumulative – PM2.5 (24 Hr) Cumulative – PM2.5 (Annual)

206
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Cumulative – PM10 (24 Hr) Cumulative – PM10 (Annual)

Cumulative – NOx (1 Hr) Cumulative – NOx (Annual)

Figure 7.9: Cumulative Concentration of SO2, PM2.5, PM10 and NOx

207
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Table 7.21: Maximum GLC of SO2, PM10 and PM2.5 for cumulative case
Location at Ground Concentrati
Standard Limit
Level (UTM: 46) on (µg/m³)
Cumulative Averaging
ECR
Result Time Maximum
East(m) North (m) 200 IFC 2008
Value
5
SO2 217436 2432798 48.1 365 20
NOx (1hr) 220205 2440503 380 - 200
24 Hr
PM10 217436 2432798 43.8 150 50
PM2.5 217436 2432798 14.4 65 25
SO2 217436 2432798 7.38 80 -
NOx 215263 2439294 12.4 100 40
Annual
PM10 217436 2432798 6.08 50 20
PM2.5 217436 2432798 2.005 15 10

GHG Emission

Since the onset of the industrial age, CO2 concentrations in the Earth’s atmosphere have
increased about 1-2 ppm per year. Electricity generation using carbon based fuels is
responsible for a large fraction of carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions worldwide. Among all the
fossil fuels, coal is much more carbon intensive than oil or natural gas, resulting in greater
volumes of CO2 emissions per unit of electricity generated.
The coal fired power plants generate the majority of the electricity and produce the highest
rate of CO2 per kilowatt hour (Department of Energy and Environmental Protection Agency,
Washington DC, 2000). Table 7.22 shows the CO2 emissions and power generation from
various sources.

Table 7.22: Emissions from Various Power Generation Technologies

Technology CO2 Emissions (Kg/MWh)
PC-fired subcritical 850
PC-fired supercritical 800
IGCC 670
NGCC 370
Nuclear 0
Source: Narula et al., 2002

Abatement Measures

Potential reductions in greenhouse gas emissions, particularly CO2, are gaining significant
attention. A cost effective and readily available option to reduce CO2 emissions per unit of
electricity generated is to increase the generating plant’s efficiency, so that less coal is burned
per MWh generated. In response to this challenge a number of technologies capable of
significantly reducing emissions of criteria pollutants. A novel process for CO 2 sequestration
is proposed utilizing a supercritical oxygen-fired PC boiler. The proposed power plant has
been envisaged adopting ultra-supercritical boiler technology.

208
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Figure 7.10: CO2 emission from coal based power plants

As per the estimation shown in Figure 7.10above, the proposed power plant will run more
efficiently (e.g. > 45% ) than supercritical or convention power plant. Such power generation
process with the implementation of energy efficiency programs in power sectors and in other
infrastructures would not only make the production cost-effective but also reduces greenhouse
gas emissions. The emission of GHG has been estimated following the guideline of IPCC,
2006 for National Greenhouse Gas Inventories. Table 7.23 shows annual GHG emission from
the proposed 1320MW coal based power plant project.

Table 7.23: GHG emissions in baseline and repowering conditions

Emission Factors RPCL – 2x660 MW (million Ton
Annual GHG emission
(Kg/TJ)6 Per Year)
CO₂ 96,100 11.30
CH₄ 1 0.02
N₂ O 1.5 0.55
CO₂ - equivalent 11.9
Notes: GWP of 1, 21, and 310 used for CO₂ , CH₄ and N₂ O, respectively for 100 years global worming potential
(IPCC 2006)

Impact on Ambient Noise

Noise often is not constant and fluctuates over time because of the characteristics of the
source. For example, traffic noise will fluctuate from changes in traffic volumes, vehicles types,
and vehicles speed. This fluctuation makes it difficult to describe adequately the many aspects
of noise through a single value. Major sources of the RPCL 1320 MW coal based power plant
are generators, turbine, boiler, ID/FD fan, vehicles movement, parking lot, and equipment
movement etc. during the operation period of the power plant project.

6Default Emission factors for Stationary Combustion in the Energy Industries AP-42

209
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Simulation of noise propagation during the operation of the plant was done by using
SoundPlan Essential 3.0 software. It has combined a simplified, intuitive user interface. The
level of surface noise generated from the river/sea vessels are accounted through the
SoundPlan essential 3.0. Noise emitted by various sources propagates and disperses over a
given terrain in accordance with the laws of physics. The majority of environmental noise
simulations are small to medium projects tasked with checking the legal compliance of a
planned route or an expansion to an industrial facility. Noise modeling software suited for these
projects must be specially designed to quickly acquire the model data via an import interface
or to allow digitizing the essential data on top of an aerial map. A number of standard
processes can be calculated through this soundPlan model. ISO-9613 calculation process is
used for this modeling purpose. Different factors are considered for predicting the noise level,
such as, amount of noise generating from the source, number of vehicles passes on the road,
noise from generator, turbine haul, Boiler, parking lot area, ambient environment, etc.
For running the model, the average daytime temperature and relative humidity was
approximated as 280C and 80%. The land type of the project site was remarked as flat.
Different types of noise generating sources such as turbo generators, ID/FD fan rotating
machineries etc. would be used during the operation phase of the power plant. As per
guideline of the model, typically a power generator produces approximately 92 dBA level of
noise. Figure 7.11a and Figure 7.11b shows the sources and receptors of the Power Plant.

Figure 7.11a: Sources and Receiptors around the Power Plant

210
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Figure 7.11b: Sensetive receiptors around the Power Plant Projects

The purpose of noise impact assessment is to determine whether noise levels at any sensitive
receiver in the project area exceed applicable noise level standards e.g. ECR 2006. If so,
abatement measures will be required to reduce the impact either at the source level through
engineering design or provide PPEs to the workers if the source is a construction vehicle or
equipment. The receivers are placed in the modeling depending on the potentiality of the
noise impact form the power plant activities as well as the sensitivity of the receptors. Around
11 number of sensitive receiver are identified in and around the project site shown in Figure
7.11. The predicted noise level at those receivers are presented in Figure 7.12 and Figure
7.13 during day and night time.
The spatial distribution of noise highly depends on the protective structures or measures. This
modeling has been done considering the boundary wall, green belt development and grass
loan etc. Therefore, highest noise level would be found near the administrative buildings of
the power plant and near the road side. Proper development of the green belt, the generated
noise from different sources would have minimum effect of the sensitive receiver points like
residential areas or rehabilitation areas and the outside the boundaries of the power plant.

211
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Figure 7.12: Propagation of noise from the sources (Day time)

Figure 7.13: Propagation of noise from the sources (Night Time)

Cumulative Noise Level

The cumulative noise level (adding of background and source noise level) has been assessed
at different sensitive location at different distances from the sources. The background noise
level of day time was collected during the field visit. Following the rule of addition in logarithmic

212
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

scale, the collective of the noise level was done. It can be seen from Table 7.24 that, the
impact of generated noise from the sources in the selected location would be insignificant.
Table 7.24 shows the combined effect of the resultant sound at various points where the
baseline noise levels were measured. The resultant cumulative noise (in presence of a 2 meter
high brick wall barrier around the project boundary) complies with both the Bangladesh and
World Bank (WB) standard of noise level in residential area. The level of propagated noise
can further be reduced by creating well designed thick green belt around the project boundary.
However, as we can see from Figure 7.10, the level of noise inside the plant, especially near
the sources would be higher. Therefore, use of personal protective measures for the workers
susceptible to high level of noise should be made mandatory.

Table 7.24: Resultant noise assessment

ECR, 2006
Predicted Measured Resultant
Noise
No Receiver name Noise dB(A) Noise dB(A) Noise dB(A)
dB(A)
Day Night Day Night Day Night Day Night
Near Approach Road (Outside
1 17.8 17.8 49 38 49 38 60 50
Boundary)
2 Coal Yard (Outside Boundary) 17.0 17.0 46 - 46 - 75 70
Eastern Boundary (Community
3 16.0 16.0 50 36 50 36 55 45
outside)
Middle of Western Boundary
4 23.7 23.7 43 - 43 - 55 45
(Community)
5 Near Coal Conveyer 13.1 13.1 47 33 47 33 60 50
Near North Corner (Outside
6 19.8 19.8 46 - 46 - 55 45
Community)
7 Near The Technical Building 36.5 36.5 42 - 43 - 75 70
8 North East side (Community) 13.5 13.5 47 - 47 - 55 45
9 Project Residential Area 17.8 17.8 43 - 43 - 55 45
10 Rehabilitation Village 20.7 20.7 48 - 48 - 55 45
Southern Corner (Outside
11 17.3 17.3 45 35 45 35 70 60
Community

Impact on Water Resources

Impacts on Natural Drainage System

The present power plant project is located into the Polder 54/A. Already this area is a
converted ecosystem. All the water resources system within the polder is being maintained by
control way by the Water Management Groups. If the project implementation activities would
not informed to the WMGs by the project authority, it would create drainage problems into the
polder and surrounding areas of the power plant project. Whereas, into the project area about
6 km natural drainage system is exists. The impact is characterized as moderate in Table 7.4.
Impacts on storm surge flooding
The existing peripheral embankment effectively protects the power plant area from cyclonic
storm surge and regular tidal flooding. However, a vulnerable location of sea dyke (GPS:
0224062, 2439360) at Debpur Villages may breach in near future and will be affected by tidal
flooding and storm surge flooding. A flood frequency analysis is being done by using Log-
normal distribution method (Table 7.25) by using the BIWTA’s water level data from 1977 to
2007. During analysis, it has been observed the water level of the river would be 3.74 mPWD,

213
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

whereas the level of flood water is low from the crest level of embankment (embankment crest
level is 5.8 in sea dyke). It should be mentioned here that, during SIDR and AILA, the water
level of river is below the crest level of embankment. The level of river water from the
embankment crest level was 1.15m below during SIDR and 1.35m below during Aila.

Table 7.25: Flood frequency analysis

Return Period (yr) FL (mPWD) using Log-normal method
5 4.750
10 4.922
25 5.139
50 5.300
100 5.460
Source: CEGIS estimation, 2016

If the river water level during the storm surge overtopped the embankment crest level it would
be threat for the power plant project. The significance of this potential unmitigated impact has
been assessed as Major on the basis of impact magnitude and receptor sensitivity.

Impacts on Fisheries

Accidental spillage of untreated effluents and spillage of HSD oil from ship/ cargo into the
nearby river, Khal and open water fish habitats may cause leading to degradation of the
capture fish habitats. Continuous loading of such contaminated effluent may become harmful
for the local capture fisheries.
Coal based power plant has a tendency to emit heavy metals during production period. If the
wastes and fumes are released untreated way it will cause a serious pollution in surrounding
fisheries resources.

Abstraction of river water at the rate of 1400 m3/hr for operating power plant may cause crisis
for river water availability during dry season around the Project site. This incident may cause
the reduction of fish productivity of the capture habitats. Withdrawal of another 1400 m3/hr for
each of two power plants may further aggravate the situation. This impact is characterized as
Major Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

Land Resources

Impact on Land Use

Operation of power plant would lead to development of more industries. As a result, more
agricultural land would be acquired in Dhankhali and adjacent areas. PGCB would construct
transmission tower to evacuate this power. This will also be required lands. So, it is anticipated
that operation of the plant would create serious pressure on the existing agricultural land use
of the area. This impact is characterized as Moderate Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.
Impact on Soil Quality
Accidental spillage of untreated effluent on the nearby land from the Plant, and during filling
the oil tank leakage of oil pipe may cause spillage of HSD oil to the land either side of the pipe
leading to degradation of the soil quality. This is characterized as Minor Adverse, as given in
Table 7.4.

214
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Agriculture Resources

Impact on Crop Production

Generation of more power would lead to development of more industries around the Project
site on the agriculture land. So, operation of the plant would create serious pressure on the
existing land use of the area. For this reason, agricultural land might be converted to non-
agricultural land i.e. construction of different infrastructure which would ultimately impact the
crop production of surrounding agricultural land. However, sensitivity of this impact is
characterized as Minor adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

Livestock Resources

At this stage, the induce change in land use will ultimately reduce the grazing areas as well
as the fodder for the livestock. Moreover, the change in lifestyle will reduce to rearing the
livestock. This is characterized as Minimal Adverse, as given in Table 7.4.

Impacts on Ecosystem

Impact on terrestrial vegetation

Built-in measures for arresting fly ash that could have the adverse impact on vegetation in
photosynthesis would be bare minimum. Also measures for limiting the emission of SO x, NOx
and SPM will be within the MoEF’s standard. With such measures in effect the emissions
would exert less impact on vegetation of the study area. On the other hand, development of
greenbelt in and around the project area in rows will improve the vegetation coverage as well
as enhance the capacity of carbon sinking.
According to the estimated result, maximum possible 1-24hr average concentration of SOx
and NOx would be insignificant near to the greenbelt and remain below the ECR-1997
standards of ambient air quality. Therefore, transpiration process of the vegetation would not
be deteriorated in this phase. But vegetation growth will impede through dust particulates
generated by the vehicle and public movements in this project area.
Impact on shorebirds and other wildlife
The project area is close to Rabnabad channel of the Bay of Bengal having diversified
wintering and resident waders. The use of channel for coal transportation will hamper normal
activities of shorebirds in large. Lighting of the plant site would impacts negative to the
shorebirds activities especially the nocturnal. On the other hand, the greenbelt (to be
developed) for the project shall provide important habitat to different wildlife, local common
birds, and others.
Impact on marine habitat
The marine habitat is very resourceful and home to many tiny to large aquatic biota. Coal
transportation through this aquatic system has some risk of polluting water by capsizing ship,
dropping of coals, release of oil and greases from engines. Toxicity of such matter would harm
to minor phyla and tiny species in the long period of time.
Impact on benthic community
Due to transportation of coal for power plant it can drop coals from cargo/ships whether
protection measures are not taken before departure from loading point. Coal dropping would
lead deposit toxic elements in the bottom of waterways which is home to the benthos. The
benthos is sensitive to pollutants and pollutants can destroy the total structure of their
communities by toxicity.

215
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

Impacts on Socio-Economic issues

Implementation of the project will create new employment opportunities and ensure
employment opportunities for the communities as well as in the country as electricity is the
main need for industrial development. This Project will encourage in establishing industries
which will obviously provide employment opportunities to a large number of population. The
affected people may face a temporary unemployment situation. Newly developed industries
may appear as a strong source of livelihood. Land price of the adjacent areas of the project
will increase significantly. The sale value of land will be increased due to immigration of people
as well as technical people in this area. A variety of new industries may be developed for the
availability of electricity to meet the demand of industries. Environment especially water and
sanitation may be disturbed by the labors. Health injury may be occurred in power plant for
handling of heavy machineries.

Impact of Non Hazardous waste

Waste Water
Generally, effluents from the proposed power plant would be boiler blow down, cooling tower
blow down, back flash from ion exchanger and iron filter of water treatment plant, floor and
yard drains (cleaning), oily water from turbine hall and sub-station yard, etc. Generally this
waste water is contaminated with Chlorine, Chromium, Copper, Iron, Zinc, and heavy metals.
The detail sources and quantity of the waste water is clearly described in Water Balance
Diagram and reflected in Table 7.26. From the water balance diagram it is estimated that a
significant quantity of the effluent from the power plant (excluding effluent from domestic water
use) would be around released from different sources and discharged maintaining the concept
of zero discharge law.

Table 7.26: Effluent Sources and discharge pathway

Sl no Sources Discharge Pathway
1 Water Pre-treatment Plant: Clarifier Tank, Sand Filter and Sludge Waste Water Sump
thickening Plant >ETP > Discharge
2 Cooling Tower blow Down and boiler Blow Down Channel >Gardening or
3 Water Demineralization Plant Blow Down Irrigation
Total
Source: CEGIS, 2016

The proposed project considers an Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) will be used to treat the
industrial waste collected from different sources and the capacity will be around 34m3/hr.
Therefore, no waste water will be discharged to the river or canal without treatment and
satisfying the MoEF’s standard of effluent quality.
Kitchen Waste
During operation, it is assumed that a certain amount of people will be living at site. The Table
7.27 below shows the estimation of kitchen waste during operation.

Table 7.27: Estimation of Kitchen Waste

Rate of kitchen waste
Sl No Economic Classes of Employee
generation (kg/day/capita)*
1 High Income Group (>20000 tk/month) 0.513
2 Middle Income Group (tk 10000-20000tk / month) 0.4
3 Low Income Group (< 10000 tk/month) 0.26
*source: (JICA, Pacific Consultant Internationals, & Co, 2005)

216
 Environmental Impacts Assessment and Evaluation

The generated kitchen waste will be collected through a process from the residential area of
the proposed unit. Careless disposal of this waste would create pollution, odor problem,
nuisance and aesthetic tiring.
However, the impact would be for long term but would be limited within the plant premises,
reversible and may happen only in worst-case scenario (i.e. no management of kitchen waste).
On the other hand, sensitivity of this impact to the residents of the Project is high. Thus the
significance of the impact would be moderate adverse and needs to be minimized by EMP.
Sewerage
It is assumed that during operation phase a certain amount of employees including staffs will
be living at site. Therefore, it is estimated that significant amount (considering 260 L/day per
capita sewerage generation) of sewerage would be generated from the staff and officers’
residence. A small portion of this sewerage may escape sewerage collection and disposal
system. The fecal sludge would go to the existing septic tank.
This added sewerage would not have any significant impact on the existing sewerage system.
The magnitude of the impact would be moderate and sensitivity would also be moderate. Thus
significant of the impact would be medium adverse and needs to be controlled by adopting
EMP.

Impact of the Hazardous waste

Oil and Oily Water

Lube oil is generally used in the power plant in different equipment like bearing, turbine
hydraulic system, etc. Wash water or drained water from turbine hall, substation yard, etc may
contain oil and oily water. However, the proposed plant considers to install an Oil Water
Separation Unit integrated with a central water treatment plant. Therefore, the impact would
not be significant. On the other hand, this proposed third unit would bring a means of treating
oily water from existing unit.
Sludge from Water Treatment Plant
Concentrated sludge would be generated from water pre-treatment plant, demineralization
plants, waste water treatment plants and oily water separation unit. These sludge would go to
the sludge sump for dewatering and thickening. Disposal of the dry sludge might contaminate
ground water of surface water if it is not properly managed. The magnitude of the impact major
and sensitivity is also high. Therefore, significance of the impact is major adverse that calls
for adoption of proper EMP.

217
 8. Mitigation of Impacts

8.1 Preamble

The boiler technology for the proposed power plant is Ultra-Super Critical. To protect the
environment, a number of technologies, equipment and standard will be adopted for this power
plant project. The mitigation measures has been suggested based on the carrying capacity of
pollution load in the AOI. Considering the impacts collectively from the power plants, and
sensitivity of each of the receptors in the environment, the mitigation measures are framing
out. However, the specific mitigation measures are figured out gradually.

8.2 Change in the project layout

It is proposed to include the following items in the project layout developed by the engineering
consultant. The position of the ash disposal areas, township and Turbine hall, generators,
power evaluation bay, coal yard and oil tanker are evaluated on the basis of individual and
community risk aspects. Those issues will be reviewed at different stages consultation with
the stakeholders and feasibility team.

8.3 Engineering design

Alternative to use of Hydrazine in Feed Water

Hydrazine is generally used as an oxygen scavenger for corrosion control in thermal power
plants. Although hydrazine is very effective in this application, it is a geno toxic carcinogen.
Instead of using Hygrazine, it is recommended to use alternative oxygen scavenging chemical
e.g. Helamin, Diethylhydroxylamine, etc in feed water for corrosion protection in boiler.
However, the design of boiler and water treatment can also be changed to avoid use of any
oxygen scavenger. There are two alternatives for that:
 Combined Water Treatment (CWT) or oxygen treatment for through-flow boilers
 All Volatile Treatment (AVT) Oxidizing +High-AVT (treatment by a volatile substance
with a high pH value without using Hydrazine)
However, freedom can be given to EPC contractor to find an appropriate alternative of using
Hydrazine.

8.4 Mitigation measures for major impacts

The following sections present the mitigation measures for the major and few moderate
adverse impacts identified in Chapter 8 of the EIA report. Minor and some moderate impacts
will be managed and mitigated using environmental code of practices (Appendix-VI) and
Contractors’ good practice.

Pre-Construction Stage

C. Water Resources
C2. Drainage System
The following mitigation measures to be followed by the concerned authority:

219
 Mitigation of Impacts

 Keeping the existing channels as it is in the project area according to the RS or CS.
 Dredging may maintain at the neap tide.
 Fencing the project periphery.
 Alteration of sediment pathways.
 Imposing the night time dredging.
 Provision of proper setting time to use the surface water in the project area and at the
dredging location.

D. Land Resources
D1.Land development
Power plant construction leads to a huge area acquisition. Crop production will be stopped
from the construction stage. To compensate it, new areas should be explored. In this aspect
Chakamaiya would be a good choice. Soil quality of this area is similar to that of Dhankhali
(project area). Besides this, both of these areas are situated in polder. Only close and intensive
monitoring can improve the crop production of Chakamaiya. To facilitate this, sluice gates and
other facilities of the polder should be reconstructed. If BADC and DAE shift their existing
facilities of Dhankhali to Chakamaiya, crop production of Chakamaiya would be similar to
Dhankhali. At present, most of the lands of Chakamaiyaare single cropped, while croplands
of Dhankhali cultivated duble to triple a year.
E. Agricultural Resources
E1. Loss of crop production
After the acquisition of the land for the project, crops will be permanently lost. Any kind of land
acquisition leads to no mitigation process. So RPCL should allocate money to the affected
farmer to compensate this loss. But the compensation might be done by introducing proper
management to other specific areas (Chakamaiya). This plan is described in detail in EMP
section.
E2. Loss of grazing land and fodder
Land acquisition for the project area shorten the grazing land and fodder of that locality. So
farmers have to start domestic farming process rather than depending on open grazing land.
They could also cultivate high yielding grass varieties to solve the fodder problem of livestock.

G. Fisheries Resources
G2 Mitigation the loss of fish production
After the acquisition of the land for the project, a significant water bodies will be lost which has
been used as culture fisheries. However, the designated water bodies in the Moza map must
be protected as it is. The proponent himself or the villagers can culture appropriate fisheries
project on that khals.
H Ecology
H2 Mitigation of the impacts on shorebirds and other wildlife habitat
The land development for installation of thermal power plant in the coastal belt requires
engagement of labours and equipment. This work should follow specific guidelines before
commencing the designed tasks to avoid shorebirds habitat damage or disturbance. It is
important to select barren area for installation of pipelines and work should follow specific
season and timeframe. It is wise to avoid winter season for construction works to reduce
pressures on shorebirds.

220
 Mitigation of Impacts

I Socio-Economic
I1 Land /acquisition/development and resettlement
Land price should be considered as per current market price of land. The affected families
should be resettled in better places especially in Londa Mouza or at Pancjonia mouza as early
as possible. Resettlement and compensation plan should be governed by the Resettlement
Action Plan (RAP) study. The proposed project will need to resettle of around 120 numbers of
households (Appendix- XIII) and acquisition of around 915.7 acres (Appendix – XIV). The
Mouzas are compensation process should be easier and it would be helpful for the local
people if the activities could be done by local Union Parishad. New resettled village should
include allied facilities as roadway communication, Madrasah, school, mosque and cyclone
shelter. The project activities should be initiated after compensating properly to the affected
people. Local labor both for technical and non-technical should be recruited for the Project
related activities.
I5 Labor migration
The project proponent should trained up to the local people who will be engaged during the
land filling stages. Prioritize local labor should be recruited as workforce during by the project
authority. The remaining external labor should also be trained up regarding the cultural and
religious values in the study area. Working code of practice should be developed and
maintained properly. The contractor will put in place a referral healthcare facility to deal with
medical aspects of HIV/AIDS treatment with specialized services. The in-house medical facility
will diagnose for STD/STI and TB infection among the workers and provide treatment as
necessary. Ensure working opportunities for the local people in different sectors. Bangladesh
Labor Act, 2006 and ILO act must be followed. Child labor and Forced labor must be
abandoned. Compensation should also be provided to the persons those who are dependent
on the activities of the land for income generating activities.

J No-hazardous waste generation

J2 Kitchen Waste
A good practice of kitchen waste collection and disposal system should be adopted. Some
temporary bins with color marking indicating degradable and non degradable waste might be
installed at labor shed and work places to prevent scattered throwing of wastes. There should
be a designated site or scientific landfill area for kitchen waste disposal for controlling bad
odor and leachate having susceptibility to contaminate water.

Construction Stage

K Ambient Air quality

K1 dust and gases generation
Regular watering of the unpaved roads and open areas inside the project boundary which may
be increased during high wind and excavation/granding. Dust suppressants should be applied
or cover to soil stockpiles and disturbed areas when inactive for more than two weeks. The
vehicle speeds will be limited 10 mph during the dry seasons inside the project area. The truck
must be covered when hauling material that could be entrained during transit. The diesel
fueled equipment should be ultra-low sulfur (15 ppm sulfur) containing. Moreover, limiting
diesel heavy equipment idling to less than 5 minutes to the extent practical.

221
 Mitigation of Impacts

L Noise Level
L1 Noise level
During construction activity, noise might be generated from the moving and idling vehicles,
heavy machineries and different other construction related activities. The
machines/vehicles/equipment thus should be turned off when not in use, to minimize noise
generation. The equipment used during the construction phase should be with proper silencer
where applicable and properly maintained as proper maintenance can decrease the level of
sound level significantly. For protecting the workers from the adverse impacts of high noise
level, Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs) such as air plug/earmuffs should be provided.
The use of the PPE should be made mandatory to the site engineers, workers and other staffs
who are susceptible to high noise.
M Water Resources

M2 Mitigation measures for the water quality

The project labor must follow the ECP 1, 2 and 15 where the EPC contractor regularly
monitoring the good practices. The hazardous chemicals and oily substances will be levelized,
kept in a demarcated land and handle them carefully. Onsite effluent treatment plant can be
introduced. Sewerage from the workers colony would be treated before final disposal. The
construction raw materials should be properly stockpiled, used, handled and managed so that
the dust or any chemical or contaminant cannot reach to the surface water through rainfall
runoff. Direct disposal of liquid waste from the construction activities to the surface water
should be prohibited. The construction materials that would be brought to the site through the
river/road way, are to be properly covered and the unloading process should be carried out
with due care.
The members of the worker colonies should obey the guideline of best practices in order to
avoid or minimize the domestic waste from the workers colony. Chemical substances and
scrap should be kept on a specified covered areas so that contaminants from such substances
cannot come into the natural environment. The workers must be trained or made aware of
about their duties during abnormal or agencies situation like oil spill, chemical spill, etc. The
above mentioned steps could positively mitigate the possibility of the surface water quality
deterioration during the construction stage.
N Land Resources
N1 Land Use
After the land development in the project site, a lot of activities will be taken places as per
detail design of the project. The concurrent land use will also be changed for installation of the
mechanical and electrical equipment according taking care of the EMP of this study. Green
belt must be introduce at this stages. Good housekeeping will reduce any kind of accidental
events.
O Agricultural Resources
O1 Mitigation of the irrigation problem
To facilitate the operation of sluice gates and other facilities in the polder can improve the
irrigation facilities though LLP instead of BADC deep tube well. Even if BADC and DAE shift
their existing facilities of Dhankhali to Chakamaiya, crop production of Chakamaiya would be
increased.

222
 Mitigation of Impacts

Q Fisheries Resources
Q1. Fish habitat quality
The habitat quality for the fisheries will be protected if the ships and vehicles follow the IMO
and MARPOL convention during the construction period. They should not discharge the
ballast, bilge water and other toxic chemicals form the ships. The ships must ensure from any
of the alien invasive species. The EPC contractor should follow the site specific ESMS for not
to pollute any surface water bodies which are passing besides or inside the project areas.
R Ecology
R1 Shorebirds and other wildlife habitat
The construction activities should maintain specific guidelines to avoid disturbance to
shorebirds as well as other wildlife habitat. In relation to that, the construction area should
boundary wall and specific route to transportation and labour movement. Lights of the
construction area should install downwardly to avoid disturbance to the wildlife and shorebirds.
In addition, construction activities should not continue at night. The proposed project site is
very close to feeding ground of wintering birds and it is suggested not to select winter season
(October-February) for construction works.

S Socio-Economic Condition
S1. Extra burden on accommodation
The labor should follow the environmental code of practice (ECP 16 and ECP 18) during
construction. Recruitment of the local labor will reduce the accommodation problem in the
project. Moreover, the EPC contractor should make available standard labor sheds which
includes sanitation facilities, drinking water facilities, first aid support etc. Health and safety
trainings and motivational works should be provided regularly.
T Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
T1 Solid Waste
Solid waste from the project installation units, administrative buildings, and scrub materials
will be kept into demarcated places. Those have to store in a covered roof and bottom lined
places. A number of bins with proper signed should be applied to separate the waste during
disposal. On site solid waste treatment might be considered or store it and finally dispose it
outside the project area designed by Kalapara Local Adminstration.

Operation Stage

U Ambient Air
U1 Ground level concentration of criteria pollutants
During operation, the appropriate mitigation measures are to reduce potential air emissions
before they are emitted. This is accomplished by the careful design of the project, including
the installation of the Best Available Control Technology (BACT) to minimize air emission. Use
of ESP which reduce 99.92% of fly ash and maintain the emission standard of IFC, 2008 for
degraded airshed. Built-in Low-NOx burner or SCR will reduce the NOx emission below 510
mg/N-m3. Use of FGD will control SOx emission maintaining the IFC emission standard for
degraded air shed. CEMS technology must be installed at the stack to record pollutant
emission rate and avoid any uneven situation.

223
 Mitigation of Impacts

V Noise Level
V1 Mitigations of noise pollution
Loud noises generated from the plant operation activities can lead to hearing complexity and
loss along with increased blood pressure; disturbances and discomfort to the site engineers,
technicians, workers, staffs and surrounding communities. The machines/equipment/vehicles,
which are not in use, should be turned off to limit noise generation. The machineries should
be maintained properly according to the provided instructions as proper maintenance can
decrease the level of noise significantly. The rotating machinery, such as turbines, pumps,
fans etc. should be covered with noise proof hood to limit the spread of noise. Silencer should
be used wherever possible. A green belt consisting of trees of different heights and canopy
coverage should be developed along the boundary wall of the power plant area. The green
belt should be of at least 3.5 m width consisting two rows of plantation with the gradual
increase of height of plant from inside row to outside row.

W Water Resources
W1 Mitigation measures for impacts on Natural Drainage System
The natural drainage system in the project area should only be used to serve the purpose to
what it is built specially for the storm water release during the monsoon or rainy day. Any sort
of waste or effluent disposal from the plant, encroachment should not be allowed to pass
through the internal drainage system. All the natural drainage system in the power plant project
area should be kept as RS Mauza. No water control structures should be implemented by the
project authority into the natural drainage system.
W2 Water Quality
This project will install CETP to purify the effluent release from the plants. Oily water, DM
water, blow down from the equipment and other sources will be collected at sump and
discharge it to the ETP which include clarifier, physical treatment, chemical treatment,
biological treatment. Oil separator is used to separate the oil from industrial effluents.
This plant will also use STP for treating the sewerage discharge from the township areas and
administrative buildings. Solid waste and septic tank should be lined to protect the ground
water contamination.

W3 Mitigation of storm surge flooding

Slope protection work along with Rabnabad Channel should be constructed to protect tidal
flooding during high tide, cyclonic storm surge and natural calamities. Regular monitoring of
seepage of surface waters from external rivers of the polder area through the regulators will
be checked by the power plant project authority with existing Water Management
Organizations during pre-monsoon and monsoon seasons and necessary steps will be taken
to check seepage, if any. And Afforestation program will be taken at both side of the
embankment, which will help to protect the power plant project and livelihood of the polder.
X Land Resources
X2 Land Use
Availability of power supply will encourage new industrialization in the study area. As a result,
new land acquisition will create an induce pressure on study area land. Under this situation,
agricultural lands will face threat. So, a detail plan of the study area should prepare for the
betterment of agricultural land conservation.

224
 Mitigation of Impacts

Z Livestock Resources
Z1 Mitigation for reduction of livestock
Induce change in land use squeeze the grazing land a fodder. As a result, open grazing will
restricted. To compensate this, domestic farming should encouraged and high yield grass
should introduce in the study area.
AA Fisheries Resources
AA1. Fish species diversity and composition
Accidental spillage of untreated effluents and spillage of HSD oil from ship/ cargo into the
nearby river, Khal and open water fish habitats may cause leading to degradation of the
capture fish habitats. Continuous loading of such contaminated effluent may alter fish species
diversity and composition.

AA2. Fish production

Abstraction of river water at the rate of 1400 m3/hr for operating power plant may cause crisis
for river water availability during dry season around the Project site. This incident may cause
the reduction of fish productivity of the capture habitats.

BB Ecology
BB1 Terrestrial vegetation
To avoid low transpiration rate of plants it is suggested to use sprinkle of waters in the roads
and nearby area at 2-hour interval to reduce the rate of dust particulates which will be
generated by vehicle movements.

CC Socio-Economic
CC5 Occupational health and safety
Facilitate to recruit local people according to their skill. Awareness building, available doctors,
emergency medical treatment facilities should be ensured. Sanitation, electricity and road
facilities for the workers. Steps should be taken for supplying safe drinking water and Safe
sanitation system. Special or contingency fund must be available for health and safety
management. PPEs must be used during work. Emergency team, ambulance, contact number
and hospital should be available. Emergency response plan should be implemented during
operation periods.
DD Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
DD1. Liquid Waste and Sewerage
It is recommended to construct and commission a central sewerage treatment plant (STP) for
treating sanitary waste as a large numbers of employee will be residing inside the power plant
complex. The sewerage treatment plant might be of biological type or in combination with
physical, chemical and biological type. Generally, a STP consists of screening devices,
aeration, active sludge treatment, sedimentation, clarification and separation/recirculation of
sewage sludge. Membrane bio reaction is a good alternative. The EPC contractor should
construct a STP including the sewerage collection network. The STP should have capacity
corresponding to the numbers of employee in the first three units of the SPS. The Plant should
be designed in a way that would comply the effluent standard (sewerage) of IFC and MoEF.
The provision of reusing the treated waste should be considered in the design. The treated
water can also be supplied to the nearest agricultural lands for irrigation.

225
 Mitigation of Impacts

The sludge from STP should be disposed in compliance with the IFC standard and ECR 1997.
DD2. Kitchen Waste
Standard practice of kitchen waste collection and disposal should be implemented. Some
temporary bins with color marking indicating degradable and non-degradable waste might be
installed in the staff colony and work places to prevent scattered throwing of wastes. There
should be a designated site or scientific landfill area for kitchen waste disposal for controlling
bad odor and leachate having susceptibility to contaminate water. Moreover, it should be
protected from the scavenging by birds and animals, washing out by rain fall runoff, etc.
Furthermore, a site should be designated for biodegradable kitchen waste disposal. Above all,
for managing such wastes in a hygienic way a set of cleaners should be involved permanently.
EE Hazardous Waste Generation
EE1. Hazardous Sludge from Water Treatment Plant
The feasibility study proposes thickening and dewatering of sludge, in the form of dry cake,
generated from water treatment plant. The dry cake of sludge should be managed properly so
as to avoid leaching of heavy metals in the rainfall run off. Dry cake that would be mostly iron
sludge has market potential in steel rolling mill. However, the EPC contractor should consider
this issue and propose a sustainable management plan for sludge handling.

EE2. Hazardous sludge from water pre-treatment and treatment plant

The feasibility study proposes thickening and dewatering of sludge, in the form of dry cake,
generated from water treatment plant. The dry cake of sludge should be managed properly so
as to avoid leaching of heavy metals in the rainfall run off. Dry cake that would be mostly iron
sludge has market potential in steel rolling mill. However, the EPC contractor should consider
this issue and propose a sustainable management plan for sludge handling.

Coal Transportation

FF. Fisheries
Coal based power plant has a tendency to emit heavy metals during production period. If the
wastes and fumes are released untreated way it will cause a serious pollution in surrounding
fisheries resources.
GG1 Aquatic species and diversity
All the vessels must be followed the standard of IMO, MARPOL. They should follow the ECR,
1997 of DOE for releasing any kind of pollutant from the ships/burges. Any kind of alien
species must be quarantined before transshipments. The jetty must have a polluted water
storage tank/pit to receive the bilge water from the ships. Moreover, site specific EMP must
be developed though another EIA study of coal transportation and handling for this power
plant.

226
 9. Hazard and Risk Assessment

9.1 Introduction

Hazard is considered those that can cause harm or has the potential to cause harm; whereas,
risk is the likelihood of hazard being occurred and its severity. Thus a risk assessment is
conducted, to carefully examine the potential hazards, how they occur and the measures to
prevent such hazards. Mismanagement of one particular hazard can have consequences that
simultaneously impact to a varying degree on several risk types.
In this EIA report, detailed assessment has been carried out to identify and mitigate the
potential hazard associated with various stages of coal based power plant project, to be
constructed in Kalapara, Patuakhali so that those hazards can be avoided by incorporating
safety plans in both planning and design process.

9.2 Hazard assessment process

In the EIA stage, potential hazards are identified and discussed in detail along with risk
assessment. An inclusive safety management plan is also developed accordingly. The steps
followed in this preliminary hazard and risk assessments are mentioned below:
I. Identification of Hazards
II. Analysis of Causes
III. Assessment of Likelihood
IV. Identification of Existing Safeguards
V. Risk Ranking for Prioritization of Corrective Actions
VI. Recommended Actions and Safety Measures

9.3 Potential Hazard and Risk during different stages

The potential hazards and risk during construction, and erection are listed in Table 9.1.

227
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Table 9.1: Potential hazard and risk during construction, and erection
Location of
Project Activities Potential hazard Root Causes Consequences
hazard
Pre-construction
 Machinery  Bringing in machines,  Trips and falls  Fatigue or prior sickness  Health injury
and equipment and  Cuts and bruises  Mechanical failure  Disability
equipment vehicles for site  Lack of safety training  Life loss
clearance activities  Not abiding to general health and safety and traffic rules
Construction and Erection
 Construction  Construction of  Accidents (burns,  Fatigue or prior sickness  Physical injury
site building, steel electric shocks etc.)  Electric failure  Disability
structure and its  Injuries from falls and  Equipment failure  Life loss
foundation, cutting, slips  Lack of safety protocols (e.g. not putting up warning signs
welding, painting  Inhalation of dust or enclosing the area to prevent entry of outside people)
works, drilling work,  Cuts and bruises  Not maintaining a designated place for backfilling storage
etc  Not maintaining enough lighting during the night (for those
working overtime)
 Work at heights  Accidents  Fatigue or prior sickness  Health injury
 Injuries from falls and  Lack of safety protocols (e.g. not putting up warning signs  Disability
slips (e.g. broken or enclosing the area to prevent entry of outside people)  Life loss
bones, fractures,  Not maintaining a designated place for backfilling storage
traumas, etc.)  Not maintaining enough lighting during the night
 Fatalities
 Vehicle and vessel  Noise generation  Running engine, hydraulic horns, sirens etc.  Injuries
movement  Accident (e.g. vessel  Mechanical failure  Health problems
capsize)  Old engine or engine parts/lack of maintenance (e.g. respiratory,
 Emission from hearing and/or
vehicles cardiac problems)
 Spread of dust and  Fatalities
minute particles due to  Disabilities
vehicle movement.
 Coal stockyard and/or  Accidental release of  Lack of safety protocols  Health injuries
chemical storage area coal dust/ chemicals  Carelessness (e.g. smoking near coal stockyard/chemical (burns, anxiety,

228
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Location of
Project Activities Potential hazard Root Causes Consequences
hazard
 Handling of  Acute/chronic toxicity storage area) depression etc.)
hazardous chemical from exposures to  Not covering the coal stockyard from releasing dust  Disabilities
chemicals  No proper bounding of chemical storage area  Fatalities
 Fire/explosion  Improper chemical storage (e.g. faulty/leaky containers,  Loss of properties
improper containers, improper sealing of containers etc.)
 Occupational Hazard  Cuts, bruises and  Lack of safety awareness  Health injuries
burns  Carelessness in maintaining safety protocols (burns, anxiety,
 Falls, slips and trips  Use of faulty machineries and equipment depression etc.)
 Health injuries  Improper hygiene  Disabilities
 Sickness and illness  Prior sickness or illness  Fatalities
 Heavy workload

9.4 Potential Hazard and Risk during Operation

The potential hazards and risk during operation are listed in Table 9.2.

Table 9.2: Potential hazard and risk Operation

Location of hazard Project Activities Potential hazard Root Causes Consequences

 Turbine, generator and  Electricity generation  Mechanical hazard  Mechanical failure  Health injury
its ancillary components  Fire hazard/explosion  Lack of sound buffers  Fatalities
 Electrical hazard  Property damage
 Noise generation  Environmental damage
 Cable gallery  Transmitting electricity  Fire due to resulting arc  Short circuit in control room and  Health injury from electric
 Power transformer from generator to unit flash/arc blast switch gears shock, fires etc.
 Switchyard transformer  Other electric hazard due  Faulty cables and wires  Fatality from electrocution,
 400KV Switchyard  High voltage (400KV) to unprotected cables  No safe connection to earth fires etc.
control room power transmission  Slips and trips from  Using cables with different  Electric burns
 Open air power unorganized/lose cables voltage and current ratings
transmission lying in the floor  Unorganized cables
 Controlling and
monitoring the power
transmitting system

229
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Location of hazard Project Activities Potential hazard Root Causes Consequences

 Boiler and pressure parts  Coal combustion and  Fire (near burner)  Failure of the water pumps  Incomplete combustion
 Compressed air system steam generation  Release of high  Mechanical failure of safety  Equipment damage
and pipeline  Operate pressure valve, pressurized steam switch and valves  Health injury
 Live steam line switch and control  Explosion  Busting of furnace and  Loss of life
system pressurized pipes  Environmental
 Flows live high pressure  Presence of contaminant in fuel degradation
steam from boiler to  Accidental leakage, lack of heat
turbine sink for combustion process and
nonfunctional safety and bypass
valve.
 Coal stockpile  Fuel supply to the boiler  Fire hazard and explosion  Degradation of coal quality  Damage to equipment
 Self-combustions in coal  Lack of maintenance of storage  Health injury
stock pile system and monitoring  Fatality
 Loss of air quality
 Water treatment and  Produce clarified,  Chemical hazard  Spillage/accidental release  Health injury (chronic or
waste water treatment dematerialized water for  Mishandling and misuse acute toxicity)
plant steam generation and  Disability
treat effluent water  Loss of life,
before discharge  Degradation of air, water
and soil quality
 Chemical storage  Use for water treatment  Toxic accidental release  Chemical spillage  Health injury (chronic or
in different phases of due to multifunction of  Chemical fires acute toxicity)
dematerialized water, equipment & callousness  Mishandling and misuse  Disability
cooling water and of operator.  Loss of life
potable water.  Degradation of air, water
and soil quality
 SOx absorber  Use for maintaining rate  Accidental toxic substance  Discharge of sulfuric acid due to  Damage of air quality as
of sulfur emission as per release technical failure in sulfur well as surrounding
design standard  Air pollution absorption system ecosystem
 Blocked filter (particulate  Filter out particles  Toxic particulate release  Generation of excess coarse  Hazard to human health
filter system) during combustion  Atmospheric pollution size particles due to incomplete (particularly respiratory
combustion of coal and cardiovascular
systems) and surrounding
environment
 Non-functional ESP  Remove fine particulate  Accidental toxic particulate  Malfunction of device and  Equipment damage and
fly ash release equipment failure environmental degradation

230
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Location of hazard Project Activities Potential hazard Root Causes Consequences

 Lack of monitoring
 Air circulating system  Generating air flow both  Non-functional air  Mechanical failure  Equipment damage and
in and out of boiler circulating system risk to human health and
surrounding environment
 Non-functional lightning  Keeping the equipment  Fire hazard  Malfunction or faulty equipment  Equipment damage
arrestor safe from lightning.  Fire due to arc flash/arc
blast
 Occupational hazard  Daily plant activities  Cuts, bruises and burns  Lack of safety awareness  Health injury
 Falls, slips and trips  Carelessness in maintaining  Disability
 Health injuries safety protocols  Electric shock
 Sickness and illness  Use of faulty machineries and  Sickness
equipment  Anxiety and depression
 Prior sickness or illness
 Heavy workload
 Unsafe working environment.
 Conveyor belt  Coal transportation  Vessel capsize/sinking  Lack of safety awareness  Health injuries
 Mother vessel  Water pollution  Carelessness in following  Loss of life
 Barge  Environmental maritime protocols  Aquatic environment
 Jetty site degradation  Overloading of vessels/barges degradation
 Health hazard to humans  Miscommunication
and aquatic species  Mismanagement at jetty site
(e.g. during unloading of coal)

231
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

9.5 Hazardous Chemicals

As per feasibility study, the project will use significant quantity of HSD, HCl and NaOH during
operation period of the power plant. In most of the cases stored quantities of liquid fuel and
chemicals are considered in hazard identification. Table 9.3provides the details of storage of
the hazardous fuel and chemicals.

Table 9.3: Name of the hazardous chemicals

Material Stored Mode of Storage

HSD (Naptha) Combustible liquid -2 tank
HCl (31%) Hazardous, reactive but non-flammable
NaOH (30%) Hazardous, corrosive, oxidizer and non-flammable

9.6 Storage Scenario developments

The identification of specific scenarios is based on the assessment of likely events and
incidence of failures.Fire and chemical release may occur due to the storage of fuel and
chemicals. Those potential hazardous chemicals, in case of failure of the systems, the likely
incidents to occur are listed in Table 9.4.

Table 9.4: Incident considered for consequence analysis

Fuel/Chemicals Incident
HSD Pool Fire and Tank top fire
HCl Puddle inside the bund
NaOH Puddle inside the bund

The proposed project will use HSD as secondary fuel and start-up fuel respectively. The typical
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of the hazardous chemicals are appended in the
Appendix-IX. Among the three chemicals (i.e. HSD, HCl and NaOH) HSD is highly flammable,
HCl is highly reactive and NaOH is highly oxidizing agents. HCl and NaOH will produce puddle
after failure of the storage tank. Since, these two chemicals are not flammable and
containment within the bund, the consequence modeling would not require for consequences
modeling.

9.7 Frequency analysis

Failure frequencies need to be calculated in order to determine a probabilistic risk assessment.

Generally, a number of techniques are available to determine such frequencies. This study
does not account the frequency of failure from different sources data. This study only assessed
the potential zones under risk of chemical explosion e.g. risk zoning of the hazardous
substances.

9.8 Consequence Analysis

Consequence analysis is that part of risk analysis which considers individual failure cases and
extent of damages. To predict the hazardous outcome of accidents and their possible effects,
consequence analysis is generally employed. The analysis is carried out on a variety of
preconceived scenarios. The purpose and benefits that are likely to be derived by carrying out
consequence analysis include: BLEVE and Pool Fire.

232
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

The particular outcomes modeled depend on source terms (conditions like fluid, temperature,
pressure etc.) and release phenomenology. The current understanding of the mechanisms
occurring during and after the release is included in our consequence analysis models and
tools.

9.9 Consequence Modeling Tools

This study includes the use of ALOHA for consequence modeling. ALOHA is one of the tools
developed by EPA’s Office of Emergency Management (OEM) and the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration Office of Response and Restoration (NOAA), to assist front‐line
chemical emergency planners and responders. ALOHA is an atmospheric dispersion model
used for evaluating releases of hazardous chemical vapors. ALOHA allows the user to
estimate the downwind dispersion of a chemical cloud based on the toxicological/physical
characteristics of the released chemical, atmospheric conditions, and specific circumstances
of the release. ALOHA can estimate threat zones associated with several types of hazardous
chemical releases, including toxic gas clouds, fires, and explosions ALOHA software is used
for consequence modeling, where the consequence is displayed according to the type of
release. The ALOHA output is a graph showing the release effect at the specified standard
radiation levels or overpressure according to the type of release. The graphs from ALOHA are
then turned into a digital format in the form of a table showing the distances in all directions at
each radiation level.
HSD is a compound, flammable hydrocarbons which consist of a number of organic
hydrocarbons like N-hexane, Xylene, Toluene etc. However, the tank of storage HSD burst
and leakage are subjected to consequence analysis. The outcome of this analysis provides
information about possible hazards due to accidents or tank failures.

Assumption and considering factors

Fuel oil is a combustible liquid, which will burn if the temperature of the liquid exceeds the
flash point and the vapor generated at the liquid surface is ignited. The resultant incident is a
pool fire that radiates heat to the surrounding area resulting in potential equipment damage
and or injury/fatality.
Fuel oil is also a contaminant to the biophysical environment and its release can damage
sensitive environmental areas surrounding the storage area in the event a leak occurs and
escapes to the environment. Fuel will also float on water and be carried a significant distance
from a leak point by a water course.
The ALOHA model has been running for identifying the potential zone of threat during pool
fire. The High Speed Diesel composes of a number of chemical hydrocarbons. This study
considers only the N-hexane or Xylene which presence significantly in HSD. Pool formation
occurs through HSD storage tank release causing different levels of thermal radiation incident.
However, the pool fire will remain confined within dyke provided around storage tanks.

POOL FIRE THREAT ZONE:

SITE DATA:
Location: KALAPARA, BANGLADESH
Building Air Exchanges per Hour: 0.50 (enclosed office)
Time: July 21, 2016 1211 hours ST (using computer's clock)

233
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

CHEMICAL DATA:
Chemical Name: N-HEXANE Molecular Weight: 86.18 g/mol
AEGL-1 (60 min): N/A AEGL-2 (60 min): 2900 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 8600 ppm
IDLH: 1100 ppm LEL: 12000 ppm UEL: 72000 ppm
Ambient Boiling Point: 68.7° C
Vapor Pressure at Ambient Temperature: 0.26 atm
Ambient Saturation Concentration: 258,149 ppm or 25.8%

ATMOSPHERIC DATA: (MANUAL INPUT OF DATA)

Wind: 2.5 meters/second from WNW at 10 meters
Ground Roughness: open country Cloud Cover: 3 tenths
Air Temperature: 31° C Stability Class: B
No Inversion Height Relative Humidity: 75%

SOURCE STRENGTH:
Leak from hole in vertical cylindrical tank
Flammable chemical is burning as it escapes from tank
Tank Diameter: 16 meters Tank Length: 12 meters
Tank Volume: 2,413 cubic meters
Tank contains liquid Internal Temperature: 31° C
Chemical Mass in Tank: 1678 tons Tank is 97% full
Opening Length: 1 meters Opening Width: 0.3 meters
Opening is 0.5 meters from tank bottom
Max Flame Length: 70 meters
Burn Duration: ALOHA limited the duration to 1 hour
Max Burn Rate: 13,000 kilograms/min
Total Amount Burned: 756,285 kilograms
Note: The chemical escaped as a liquid and formed a burning puddle.
The puddle spread to a diameter of 51 meters.
THREAT ZONE:
Threat Modeled: Thermal radiation from pool fire
Red : 125 meters --- (10.0 kW/(sq m) = potentially lethal within 60 sec)
Orange: 178 meters --- (5.0 kW/(sq m) = 2nd degree burns within 60 sec)
Yellow: 276 meters --- (2.0 kW/(sq m) = pain within 60 sec)

234
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Results of HSD Tank failure

Consequence analysis was carried out for identified selected failure cases. Consequence
analysis quantifies vulnerable zones. For the selected accidental scenarios, after vulnerable
zone is defined, measures can be proposed to minimize the damages.
HSD tank at the plant site is located in the plant area. The tanks (2X2000 m3) on fire scenario
are presented on the above. The distance of occurrence of 2 kW/m2 radiation intensity,
sufficient to cause first degree burn, has been calculated at 276 m. Plant personnel or other
sensitive point should be avoided or protected within this range (Figure 9.1).

Figure 9.1: Threat zone assessment

BLEVE THREAT ZONE:

SITE DATA:
Location: KALAPARA, BANGLADESH
Building Air Exchanges Per Hour: 0.50 (enclosed office)
Time: July 21, 2016 1211 hours ST (using computer's clock)

CHEMICAL DATA:
Chemical Name: N-HEXANE Molecular Weight: 86.18 g/mol
AEGL-1 (60 min): N/A AEGL-2 (60 min): 2900 ppm AEGL-3 (60 min): 8600 ppm
IDLH: 1100 ppm LEL: 12000 ppm UEL: 72000 ppm
Ambient Boiling Point: 68.7° C
Vapor Pressure at Ambient Temperature: 0.26 atm

235
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Ambient Saturation Concentration: 258,149 ppm or 25.8%

ATMOSPHERIC DATA: (MANUAL INPUT OF DATA)

Wind: 2.5 meters/second from WNW at 10 meters
Ground Roughness: open country Cloud Cover: 3 tenths
Air Temperature: 31° C Stability Class: B
No Inversion Height Relative Humidity: 75%

SOURCE STRENGTH:
BLEVE of flammable liquid in vertical cylindrical tank
Tank Diameter: 16 meters Tank Length: 12 meters
Tank Volume: 2,413 cubic meters
Tank contains liquid
Internal Storage Temperature: 31° C
Chemical Mass in Tank: 1678 tons Tank is 97% full
Percentage of Tank Mass in Fireball: 100%
Fireball Diameter: 667 meters Burn Duration: 32 seconds

THREAT ZONE:
Threat Modeled: Thermal radiation from fireball
Red : 1.3 kilometers --- (10.0 kW/(sq m) = potentially lethal within 60 sec)
Orange: 1.9 kilometers --- (5.0 kW/(sq m) = 2nd degree burns within 60 sec)
Yellow: 2.9 kilometers --- (2.0 kW/(sq m) = pain within 60 sec)

Damage Criteria

HSD released accidentally will normally spread out and form a pool. If its pool finds ignition
source, a fire is likely to occur. Any person caught in the fire is likely to suffer severe burn
injuries. Therefore, in the consequence analysis, the distance to which Lower Flammable Limit
(LFL) value persists is taken to indicate the area which may be affected by fire. Any other
combustible materials within fire zone are also likely to catch fire and secondary fire may occur.
Hence due to HSD spillages pool fire may result if there is an immediate ignition source.
Thermal radiation due to fire may cause various degrees of burns on human bodiesif it is
considered to be BLEVE. Moreover, their effects on inanimate objects like equipment, piping
or vegetation also need to be evaluated to assess the impact. The effects due to intensity and
escape time respectively are presented in the following tables.
Finally, Table 9.5, 9.6 and 9.7 are detailed out the lists out tolerable intensities of various
objects as given in “Guidelines for Chemical Process Quantitative Risk Analysis” and “Process
Plant Layout”.

236
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Table 9.5: Damage due to incident radiation intensity

Incident Radiation
Types of Damages
Intensity (kW/m2)
62.0 Spontaneous ignition of wood
37.5 Sufficient to cause process equipment damage
Minimum energy required to ignite wood at infinitely
25
long exposure (non piloted)
Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of
12.5
wood, melting plastic tubing etc.
Sufficient to cause pain to personnel unable to
4.5 reach over within 20 sec; however blistering of skin
(Ist degree burns) is likely
1.6 Will cause no discomfort during long exposure

Table 9.6: Heat radiation and escape time

Radiation Intensity (kW/m2) Time to pain Threshold (Seconds)
1.39 60
1.74 40
2.33 30
2.9 16
4.7 9
6.93 6
9.5 5
11.66 4
19.9 2

Table 9.7: Tolerable intensities for various objects

Object Tolerable Intensity (kW/m2)
Drenched Tank 38
Special Buildings (No Windows, fire proof doors) 25
Normal Buildings 14
Vegetation 10-12
Escape Route 6 (up to 30 seconds)
Personnel in Emergencies 3 (up to 30 seconds)
Plastic cables 2
Stationary Personnel 1.5

9.10 Hazard Consequence &Frequency Scales

The potential impacts of the project have been scaled and prioritized based on the magnitude
of those potential impacts (consequence) and the likelihood of them occurring (frequency).
The consequence of the said impacts are classified and illustrated in Table 9.8.

Table 9.8: Hazard Consequence Scale

1 2 3 4 5
Parameter
(Insignificant) (Minor) (Moderate) (Major) (Catastrophic)
Duration of Temporary with Limited to Long term
Medium Term Permanent
potential no detectable construction (more than 2
(1 to 2 years) Damage
impact potential impact period years)

237
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

1 2 3 4 5
Parameter
(Insignificant) (Minor) (Moderate) (Major) (Catastrophic)
Widespread
Specific
far beyond Beyond project
location within Beyond
project boundaries
Spatial project immediate
Within boundaries extending to
extent of the component or project
project with some widespread
potential site boundaries components,
boundary community communities
impact with no site boundaries
and wildlife and wildlife
detectable or local area
habitat habitat
potential impact
coverage
Potential impact Potential
Baseline Potential impact
requires a year impact is
returns is effectively
or so for long-term,
Reversibility Baseline naturally or permanent, with
recovering with requiring
of potential remains almost with limited little to no
some considerable
impacts constant intervention chance of
interventions to intervention
and within a returning to
return to to return to
few months baseline
baseline baseline
Complies with
Complies
Complies with limits given in
Compliance Meets partially with Completely
all minimum national
to Legal minimum limits given in breaches
requirements standards but
Standards national national national
only some breaches
before standard standards but standards and
improvement international
Mitigation limits or breaches or international
opportunities to lender
Measures international international guidelines/
strengthen guidelines in
guidelines lender obligations
good practices one or more
guidelines
parameters
Health injury
requires Health injury
Health
Minor pain, hospitalization; may lead to Fatalities of
injuries can
scratch, may require permanent workers more
Extent of be cured
discomfort long term disability; few than 5 and or
health with first aid
requiring no recuperation; fatalities of community
injuries and/or some
medical may lead to workers and people more
medical
attention long term or community than 2
attention
absence from people
work
Impact may
Impact
Disturbing lead to deaths
leading to
Disturbing habitat of of 2 or more
Minimal deaths of any
habitat of wildlife causing endangered
Impact on disturbance endangered
wildlife decrease of marine
wildlife within species and
causing preys and mammals and-
compliance decrease of
discomfort forcing them to or 5 of other
their food
relocate endangered
source
species

Criteria for determining the frequency of the potential hazardbeing occurred are outlined in
Table 9.9.

238
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Table 9.9: Criteria for Determining Frequency of the Potential Hazard

Frequency Scale Determination Definition
1
Rare chance of occurrence, if not at all
(Rare)
2
Very minimal chance of occurring
(Low)
3 May occur considering if the conditions are abnormal or
(Medium) exceptional
4
Occurs more frequently and without any prior warnings
(High)
5
Occurs under typical conditions
(Almost Certain)

9.11 Developing Risk Matrix

Following the consequence and frequency scales, a risk matrix can be developed after
analyzing the potential hazards for the Project. The table below (Table 9.10) shows the risk
matrix for the potential hazards and how frequently they may occur. In Table 9.11, the risk
evaluation based on the type of activities and potential hazards are shown.

Table 9.10: Risk Matrix of Potential Hazards/Impacts

Hazard Consequence (C) →
Frequency (F) of
1 2 3 4 5
Hazards ↓
(Insignificant) (Minor) (Moderate) (Major) (Severe)
1
1 2 3 4 5
(Rare)
2
2 4 6 8 10
(Low)
3
3 6 9 12 15
(Medium)
4
4 8 12 16 20
(High)
5
5 10 15 20 25
(Almost Certain)
Color Legend:
: Action with follow-up Verification & Validation by Authority
Red (15-25)  Top Priority
needed before allowing work
: Action needed under follow-up Supervision before allowing
Orange (10-14)  High Priority
work

Yellow (5-9)  Medium Priority : Need maintaining with routine monitoring & reporting

: Only for awareness; no Intervention Action needed to start

Green (1-4)  Low Priority
work

The risk for the potential hazard/impact is evaluated based on the combination of the hazard
consequence and their frequency (NHS, 2008). In order to calculate the potential risk, the
frequency of impact is multiplied with consequences. E.g. Level 1 of frequency of an hazard
(Rare) is multiplied with Level 1 of hazard consequence (insignificant) to give a total score of
1 (1X1=1) and so on. In that regards, a score between 1 to 4 is considered low priority; a score
between 5 to 9 is considered mediumpriority and; a score between 10 to 14 is considered high
priority and; a score between 15 to 25 is considered top priority.

239
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

9.12 Risk Estimation, Evaluation and Management Plan

Based on the hazard consequence and frequency scales in Table 9.9 and Table 9.10 potential risk of a particular hazard/impact is estimated and given a score. The score is given in terms of the presence and absence
of safeguards. The final evaluation of the potential risks is determined based on combined score of hazard consequence and its frequency. The following table (Table 9.11) shows the risk evaluation (risk ranking) of
the project activities and its subsequent hazards (both before and after implementing safety measures).

Table 9.11: Risk Evaluation for the proposed coal based power plant

Hazard Consequence (Before

Hazard Consequence (After

Hazard Frequency (Before
(Evaluation)

Risk Ranking (Evaluation)

(Before Safety Measures)

Hazard Frequency (After

(After Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)

Measures)

Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)
Hazard

Ranking
Project Activities Potential hazard Root causes Suggested Safety measures (Risk Management Plan)
points

RiskSafety
Pre-construction Phase
Machinery  Bringing in  Trips and falls  Fatigue or prior sickness  Arranging toolbox meeting before going out for work
and machines,  Cuts and bruises  Mechanical failure  Regular inspection and maintenance of equipment
equipment equipments and  Lack of safety training  A thorough lorry driver selection process via interviews, checking whether they have
vehicles for site  Not abiding to general health the proper licenses and from past experiences
clearance and safety and traffic rules 3 3 9  Training of traffic rules and regulation, including maintaining vehicle speed limit for 2 1 2
activities different categories of road after the selection process is complete
 Limiting movement of vehicles after sunset and before sunrise
 Regular health and safety training to all construction workers and lorry drivers, including
the proper use of PPEs.
Construction and Erection Phase
Construction  Construction of  Accidents (burns,  Fatigue or prior sickness  Arranging toolbox meeting before going out for work (during each construction
site building, steel electric shocks etc.)  Electric failure activities.). Provide each worker with a safety checklist and safety permit (based on
structure and its  Injuries from falls  Equipment failure their work) before starting work.
foundation, and slips  Lack of safety protocols (e.g.  Regular inspection and maintenance of equipment, machineries and especially, safety
cutting, welding,  Inhalation of dust not putting up warning signs harness. Maintain a registry for any faulty equipment found; inform site contractors and
painting works,  Cuts and bruises or enclosing the area to have they replace those immediately. No work should be done until the faulty
drilling work, etc prevent entry of outside machineries are replaced and tested.
people)  Regular health and safety training and firefighting drills to all construction workers,
 Not maintaining a designated including the proper use of PPEs during work.
place for backfilling storage  Enclosing the area with yellow barricade tape and restricting outside access to local
3 2 6 2 2 4
 Not maintaining enough people during the whole construction process.
lighting during the night (for  Spraying water on dust to minimize its spread via wind; put stockpile at a designated
those working overtime) place and cover them with GI sheet; put up GI sheet fencing around the construction
site.
 Equipment, machineries and electric wires should be checked for current and voltage
ratings. When using an extension cable, its wire rating should match with the
equipment wire rating.
 Recording of any unusual activities and issuance of fines or suspensions if any rules
are broken
 Maintenance of an accident registry book
 Work at heights  Accidents  Fatigue or prior sickness  Regular inspection and maintenance of equipment, machineries and especially, safety
 Injuries from falls  Lack of safety protocols (e.g. harness. Maintain a registry for any faulty equipment found; inform site contractors and
and slips (e.g. not putting up warning signs 4 3 12 have they replace those immediately. No work should be done until the faulty 3 2 6
broken bones, or enclosing the area to machineries are replaced and tested.
fractures, traumas, prevent entry of outside  Recording of any unusual activities and issuance of fines or suspensions if any rules

240
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Hazard Consequence (Before

Hazard Consequence (After

Hazard Frequency (Before
(Evaluation)

Risk Ranking (Evaluation)

(Before Safety Measures)

Hazard Frequency (After

(After Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)

Measures)

Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)
Hazard

Ranking
Project Activities Potential hazard Root causes Suggested Safety measures (Risk Management Plan)
points

RiskSafety
etc.) people) are broken
 Fatalities  Not maintaining a designated  Maintenance of an accident registry book.
place for backfilling storage
 Not maintaining enough
lighting during the night
Vehicle and vessel  Noise generation  Running engine, hydraulic  Regular inspection and maintenance of equipment, machineries and vehicles.
movement  Accident (e.g. horns, sirens etc.  Training of traffic rules and maritime regulations, including maintaining vehicle/vessel
vessel capsize)  Mechanical failure speed limit for different categories of road and rivers.
 Emission from  Old engine or engine  Spraying water on dust at plant site to minimize its spread via wind or vehicle
vehicles parts/lack of maintenance 3 3 9 movement. 2 1 2
 Spread of dust and  Regulate the use of hydraulic horns/sirens during construction. Set a limit on the
minute particles due amount of noise generated as stipulated in schedule III of ECR, 1997.
to vehicle  Switch off engines/generators/equipment when not in use.
movement.  Monthly health checkup of workers for any illness. Provide treatment accordingly
 Coal stockyard  Accidental release  Lack of safety protocols  Coveting of coal stockyard with GI sheet to minimize dust release
and/or chemical of coal dust/  Carelessness (e.g. smoking  Putting up “fire hazard” and “chemical hazard” warning sign near coal stockyard and
storage area chemicals near coal stockyard/chemical chemical storage areas respectively. Set up awareness programs on how to handle/store
 Handling of  Acute/chronic storage area) coals and chemicals
hazardous toxicity from  Not covering the coal  Check containers for leaks, faults and cracks. Change them immediately if found.
chemical exposures to stockyard from releasing dust  Labeling chemical storage containers for easy recognition. Put up MSDS in chemical
chemicals  No proper bounding of containers along with appropriate warning labels (e.g. corrosive, toxic, flammable etc.)
 Fire/explosion chemical storage area  Storing different types of chemical separately. All flammable or corrosive chemicals
 Improper chemical storage 4 3 12 should be stored separately and should have proper bounding 3 2 6
(e.g. faulty/leaky containers,  A fire extinguisher/ fire hydrant should be installed nearby in case of any fire breakout.
improper containers, improper Emergency contact details for fire fighters and ambulance service should also be placed
sealing of containers etc.) there.
 In case of a spillage, keep flammable substance away from the spillage area and inform
on site EPC contractor immediately.
 Recording of any unusual activities and issuance of fines or suspensions if any rules
are broken.
 Occupational  Cuts, bruises and  Lack of safety awareness  Regular inspection and maintenance of equipment, machineries and vehicles.
Hazard burns  Carelessness in maintaining  Raising awareness on occupational hazards. Arrange monthly health and safety training,
 Falls, slips and trips safety protocols electrical safety training and firefighting drills to all construction workers, including the
 Health injuries  Use of faulty machineries and proper use of PPEs during work.
 Sickness and illness equipment  Training of traffic rules and regulation, including maintaining vehicle speed limit for
 Improper hygiene different categories of road.
 Prior sickness or illness  Maintenance of hygiene at construction site and providing appropriate training to workers
 Heavy workload 3 3 9 in hygiene maintenance 2 1 2
 Supplying workers with safe drinking water
 Monthly health checkup of workers for any sickness or illness. Provide
treatment/consultation accordingly. In serious cases of injuries or sickness, an
ambulance should be on standby for transporting them to nearby hospital.
 Work load should be managed effectively. Workers working every 2 hours should be
given a mandatory 30 minutes break as stipulated in chapter 9 of Bangladesh Labour

241
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Hazard Consequence (Before

Hazard Consequence (After

Hazard Frequency (Before
(Evaluation)

Risk Ranking (Evaluation)

(Before Safety Measures)

Hazard Frequency (After

(After Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)

Measures)

Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)
Hazard

Ranking
Project Activities Potential hazard Root causes Suggested Safety measures (Risk Management Plan)
points

RiskSafety
Rules, 20157.
 Employment of child labour (children below the age of 18), pregnant women and elder
citizens in hard labour and dangerous activities must be prohibited.
 All other facilities (toilet, canteen, overtime hours, leaves etc.) should be followed as
stipulated in Labour Rules, 2015.
Operation Phase
 Turbine,  Electricity  Mechanical hazard  Mechanical failure  Installing machines with computerized control and monitoring system for detecting any
generator generation  Fire  Lack of sound buffers faults in the machines
and its hazard/explosion  Installing machines with environment friendly and safe design (e.g. with noise buffers,
ancillary  Electrical hazard 4 3 12 energy efficiency, manual override, automated kill switch etc.) 3 2 6
component  Noise generation  Test running the machines and its safety systems before going into final operation. Do a
s monthly inspection and maintenance.
 Install automated fire alarms and fire hydrant system in turbine and generator room.
 Cable  Transmitting  Fire due to resulting  Short circuit in control room  Monitoring. Installation of fire defense and fighting systems.
gallery electricity from arc flash/arc blast and switch gears  Checking the insulation of the wire, along with the wire’s voltage and electric ratings.
 Power generator to unit  Other electric  Faulty cables and wires Change wires if ratings do not match with the power supply or if the insulation is damaged
transformer transformer hazard due to  No safe connection to earth  Proper earthing should be made to avoid electric shocks.
 Switchyard  High voltage unprotected cables  Using cables with different  Open wires should be passed through a plastic pipe to avoid exposing them with outside
 400KV (400KV) power  Slips and trips from voltage and current ratings contact.
Switchyard transmission unorganized/lose  Unorganized cables  Switch off power before doing any electrical work. Inform supervisor and respected
control  Open air power cables lying in the machine operator before starting any electrical work. Inform them again after the
room transmission floor electrical works are done.
 Controlling and  All power transformers and transmission should be fitted with lightning arrester to protect
monitoring the from lightning strikes.
power transmitting 4 3 12  Switchyards should be fitted with circuit breaker in case of short circuit or during an 3 2 6
system unusual surge of electrical current.
 When working with exposed live wire/machines, the maintenance worker should maintain
distance of 6 meters from the live exposed part 8.
 Maintain a safe distance from the rights-of-way (RoW). Don’t raise any construction
under the RoW.
 Any cranes or vehicles passing through a high voltage overhead transmission line should
have a minimum 1 meter distance from the overhead transmission line.
 Place “electrical hazard” or “high voltage” signs on all switchboards and power
transformers.
 Restrict access to power transmission area, switchyards and control to power plant
officials and maintenance workers only.
 Boiler and  Coal combustion  Fire (near burner)  Failure of the water pumps  Control system to monitor and regulate temperature, intake air and furnace system.
pressure and steam  Release of high  Mechanical failure of safety  Monitoring fuel quality & safety system. Provision of fire fighting and safety
parts generation pressurized steam switch and valves 4 3 12  Check pipelines for leaks and cracks. Conduct quarterly inspection of pipelines 3 2 6
 Compresse  Operate pressure  Explosion  Busting of furnace and  Inspection and maintenance of safety valve, pipelines and steam line
d air system valve, switch and pressurized pipes  Restrict entry except authorized personnel

7
Bangladesh Labour Rules (2015). Ministry of Labour and Employment. Retrieved from http://www.dpp.gov.bd/upload_file/gazettes/14079_83432.pdf.
8http://electrical-engineering-portal.com/electrical-safety-standards-for-lvmvhv-part-2#16

242
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Hazard Consequence (Before

Hazard Consequence (After

Hazard Frequency (Before
(Evaluation)

Risk Ranking (Evaluation)

(Before Safety Measures)

Hazard Frequency (After

(After Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)

Measures)

Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)
Hazard

Ranking
Project Activities Potential hazard Root causes Suggested Safety measures (Risk Management Plan)
points

RiskSafety
and pipeline control system  Presence of contaminant in  Install control system to monitor required pressure at different points.
 Live steam  Flows live high fuel  Installation of fire defense and fighting systems.
line pressure steam  Accidental leakage, lack of
from boiler to heat sink for combustion
turbine process and nonfunctional
safety and bypass valve.
 Coal  Fuel supply to the  Fire hazard and  Degradation of coal quality  Availability of appropriate fire hydrant with auto water sprinkler and Regular monitoring
stockpile boiler explosion  Lack of maintenance of
 Self-combustions in storage system and 4 3 12 3 2 6
coal stock pile monitoring
 Water  Produce clarified,  Chemical hazard  Spillage/accidental release  Safe use of chemical. Using appropriate MSDS to aware people of chemical properties,
treatment dematerialized  Mishandling and misuse storage and handling procedures.
and waste water for steam  Limited entry except authorized personnel
water generation and 3 3 9  Training and use of appropriate PPE 2 2 4
treatment treat effluent  Make spill kits available in case of accident.
plant water before  Install safety shower, eye wash and first aid facilities
discharge
 Chemical  Use for water  Toxic accidental  Chemical spillage  Putting up “chemical hazard” warning sign in the entry of chemical storage areas. Set up
storage treatment in release due to  Chemical fires awareness programs on how to handle/store chemicals
different phases of multifunction of  Mishandling and misuse  Check containers for leaks, faults and cracks. Change them immediately if found.
dematerialized equipment &  Labeling chemical storage containers for easy recognition. Put up MSDS in chemical
water, cooling callousness of containers along with appropriate warning labels (e.g. corrosive, toxic, flammable etc.)
water and potable operator.  Storing different types of chemical separately. All flammable or corrosive chemicals
water. should be stored separately and should have proper bounding
3 3 9  A fire extinguisher/ fire hydrant should be installed nearby in case of any fire breakout. 2 1 2
Emergency contact details for fire fighters and ambulance service should also be placed
there.
 In case of a spillage, keep flammable substance away from the spillage area and inform
on site EPC contractor immediately.
 Recording of any unusual activities and issuance of fines or suspensions if any rules are
broken.
 SOx  Use for  Accidental toxic  Discharge of sulfuric acid due  Regular monitoring of absorption system
absorber maintaining rate of substance release to technical failure in sulfur  Sourcing of energy efficient yet low sulfur content coal (e.g. super critical/ultra super
sulfur emission as  Air pollution absorption system 4 3 12 critical) 2 2 4
per design
standard
 Blockedfilte  Filter out particles  Toxic particulate  Generation of excess coarse  Regular maintenance of filters; change filters when necessary
r during combustion release size particles due to  Install alarm system to alert temperature, oxygen and CO changes.
(particulate  Atmospheric incomplete combustion of
filter pollution coal 4 3 12 2 2 4
system)

 Non-  Remove fine  Accidental toxic  Malfunction of device and  Proper monitoring of combustion process and functioning of boiler.
functional particulate fly ash particulate release equipment failure 3 3 9 2 1 2
ESP  Lack of monitoring
 Air  Generating air flow  Non-functional air  Mechanical failure  Regular maintenance and monitoring control system
3 3 9 2 1 2

243
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Hazard Consequence (Before

Hazard Consequence (After

Hazard Frequency (Before
(Evaluation)

Risk Ranking (Evaluation)

(Before Safety Measures)

Hazard Frequency (After

(After Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)

Measures)

Safety Measures)

Safety Measures)
Hazard

Ranking
Project Activities Potential hazard Root causes Suggested Safety measures (Risk Management Plan)
points

RiskSafety
circulating both in and out of circulating system  Inspecting the functioning of FD, ID fans and vacuum systems.
system boiler
 Non-  keeping the  Fire hazard  Malfunction or faulty  Regular testing and maintenance following the specification provided by the
functional equipment safe equipment manufacturer
lightning from it. 4 2 8 2 1 2
arrestor
 Occupation  Daily plant  Cuts, bruises and  Lack of safety awareness  Regular inspection and maintenance of equipment, machineries and vehicles.
al hazard activities burns  Carelessness in maintaining  Raising awareness on occupational hazards. Arrange monthly health and safety training,
 Falls, slips and trips safety protocols electrical safety training and fire fighting drills to all officers and plant workers, including
 Health injuries  Use of faulty machineries and the proper use of PPEs during work
 Sickness and illness equipment 3 3 9  Monthly health check up of officers and workers for any sickness or illness. Provide 2 2 4
 Prior sickness or illness treatment/consultation accordingly. In serious cases of injuries or sickness, an
 Heavy workload ambulance should be on standby for transporting them to nearby hospital
 Unsafe working environment.  Keeping all safety & precaution measure in order such as, maintaining first aid & well
equipped primary health center on plant site.
 Conveyor  Coal  Vessel  Lack of safety awareness  Awareness of maritime regulations; maintaining vessel speed limit and barge type based
belt transportation capsize/sinking  Carelessness in following on river route and depth.
 Mother  Water pollution maritime protocols  Ship captain should maintain communication with Payra Port Authority and plant jetty
vessel  Environmental  Overloading of officials before sailing.
 Barge degradation vessels/barges 4 4 16  Limiting vessel movement to daytime only. 3 3 9
 Jetty site  Health hazard to  Miscommunication  Ensuring the right type of barge is commissioned. Avoid overloading.
humans and aquatic  Mismanagement at jetty site
species (e.g. during unloading of coal)

244
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

9.13 Occupational Health and Safety Plan

Occupational health and safety in Bangladesh is still in developmental stage. Here, the term
“occupational health and safety” mainly refers to the needs of workers of industries or some
manufacturing processes but does not completely cover all occupations of the country.
Although the government has some kind of occupational health care services for the workers
and labors, the responsibility for ensuring health and safety at work is generally placed on the
employer. However, it is also the responsibility of the workers/employees to follow the health
and safety guidelines set out by the employer diligently to ensure no harm befalls them. Every
workplace is different, so it is important to develop an OHS program that addresses the
specific needs of the operation. This OHS Program Template serves as a starting point to help
employers develop an OHS program for all the personnel involved in the pre-construction,
construction and operation of the 2x660MW Coal based Thermal Power Plant.
The proposed construction will be implemented by an Engineering, Procurement and
Construction (EPC) contractor supervised by a RPCL appointed Owner’s Engineer (OE). The
EPC contractor is to be involved in erection of new equipment including civil works and
expected to sub-contract the civil, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and control
components to local Bangladeshi contractors. Prior to the construction, the EPC contractor
will develop an Occupational Health, Safety and Environment (OHSE) Plan that will address
OHSE aspects associated with the each phases of the project.
During the operational phase, RPCL will develop, rollout and implement a formal OHSE
management system for the operation of the power plant. The EPC contractor will need to
ensure that their OHSE plan also complies with stipulated laws and regulations.
The OHSE activities should not be strictly limited to the aforementioned plan. The plan, once
developed, needs to be reviewed and updated as seen fit to identify the strengths and
weaknesses of the program. In some cases, reliance on basic common sense could be the
difference between averting a major disaster or death.

OHS Policies in Bangladesh

Bangladesh does not have its own specific OHS policy. There are a number of laws and
regulations that are have some provisions related to occupational health and safety. Some of
these laws have provisions on occupational hygiene, occupational diseases, industrial
accidents, protection of women and young persons in dangerous occupations and also cover
conditions of work, working hours, welfare facilities, holidays, leave etc. However, most of the
laws lack in standard values and are rather general in nature. The laws and regulations that
falls into OHS aspects include:
 The Fatal Accidents Act,1855
 The Explosives Act, 1884
 The Explosive Substances Act, 1908
 The Poisons Act, 1919
 The Dangerous Cargoes Act,1953
 The Fire Prevention and Protection Act, 2003
 The Labour Act, 2006
 The RailwayAct,1890

245
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

 The Motor Vehicles Ordinance, 1983

 The Highways Act, 1925
 The Building Construction Act, 1952
 National Energy Policy
 Any other Act/Rules applicable to particular situation/activity/operation.

Who is Accountable?

All OHS activities related to pre-construction, construction and operation will be governed by
the (OHSE Manager). He will be tasked with delineating OHS responsibilities to his
subordinates. He will also be the responsible person in ensuring that OHS processes are being
incorporated to his staff members. He will also provide appropriate OHS training to other
officers, plant foreman, supervisors and workers.

OHS Training

The on-site OHSE Manager in conjunction with the (health and safety officer, environmental
officer and relevant stakeholders/organization heads) will be responsible for the development
of the OHS training plan. The (OHSE Manager) will be responsible for ensuring that the
appropriate employees receive training required under the plan. The company’s human
resources representative will be responsible for ensuring that all employees receive
introductory training on the OHS Management System.

Training Procedure

Task-Specific Training
 A training program will need to be developed to ensure that employees are capable of
accomplishing the tasks required to meet OHSE objectives and targets. The program
will identify training topics, who should receive the training, when training should be
given, and the training method. The program will also distinguish between training
conducted to comply with OHS regulations and other training.
 A training needs assessment for the employees needs to be made. The OHSE Manager
will review past training and the nature of the employee’s work. Based on this review,
specific training requirements for each employee or type of employee will need to be
documented.
 The OHSE Manager shall document the OHSE Training Program.
 The training plan shall be implemented by the OHSE Manager. Upon completion of
training by employees, the OHSE Manager shall make the (Superintendent Engineer
and Chief Engineer) aware of the training completed.
 The (OHSE Manager) shall document the training completed form and Training Log.
 Specific documentation pertaining to training received shall need to be maintained by
the operational work areas for a minimum of two years, or as required by regulation.
 Training effectiveness will need to be evaluated to ensure that the OHS Management
System is being implemented effectively when changes are made to significant risks,
objectives, targets or operational controls. Improvements to the training plan will need to
be made accordingly.

246
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

General EMS Training

 All employees shall receive introductory training to make them aware of the OHS
Management System.
 The human resources representative shall be responsible for coordinating the effort to
assure that all new and existing employees have received suitable training.

Frequency of training

The training plan shall be updated whenever changes are made to the significant risks,
objectives, targets, or operational controls. General OHS training shall be made available on
a continual basis to ensure that new employees are made aware of the OHS MS. A draft
training plan has shown in Table 9.12.

Table 9.12: Draft OHSE Training Plan

Training Subject Target Personnel
OHS Management System awareness All staffs members (including contractors)
Emergency response and management IRT, ERG and IMT team
Handling, use & disposal of hazardous material Workers with authorized access to hazardous
material storage areas and required to use
hazardous material during their works
Waste Management All staffs members
Defensive and Evasive training- Efficient & safe Drivers & mobile plant operators
driving practices, including road & vehicle
restrictions
Actions to be taken in the event of major or minor All staff
pollution event at river/plant site
Use of flexible booms and surface skimmers in All crew members stationed at the Pollution
event of pollution event in water Control Vessel
Pollution prevention: Best practice All staffs
Health & Safety: Safe way to work & hazard All staff members
awareness
Health & Safety: Safe use of cranes and equipment Operators of cranes& equipment
Front line leadership and project management Senior management of RPCL
training
Health & Safety: Working at height Crane operator
Health & Safety: Working near/on water All staffs working on jetty strengthening and
unloading coal from ship
Health & Safety: Use of PPE All staff members
Emergency procedures and evacuation All staffs
Fire fighting All staffs
Health & Safety: Confined space entry Designated workers
Health & Safety: Lifting and rigging Crane operator and all riggers
Awareness raising on risks, prevention and All staffs
available treatment of vector-borne diseases
Cultural sensitivities of the local population On induction of all non-local staff

9.14 Emergency Response Plan

Emergency Response Plans are developed to address a range of plausible hazard scenarios
that are unplanned and emphasize the tasks required to respond to a physical event. The
Emergency Response Plan for the proposed power plant has been developed listing various

247
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

actions to be performed in a very short period of time in a predetermined sequence if it is to

deal major and minor accidents effectively and efficiently. The primary objective of the plan is:
 Providing clear lines of authority and communication during incident and crisis events
 Providing means by which trained people and resources are available to those
managing the incident or crisis event
 Keeping the workplace safe and to achieve minimal incidents for health hazard; as well
as keeping the impacts on the environment, materials, machineries and equipment
from these unplanned events to a minimum.

Possible emergency events include:

 Fire and explosion;

 Immediate medical emergency due to injuries;
 Leakage of hazardous materials;
 Natural disaster and;
 Civil disturbance/terrorist activities
A detailed emergency response plan for the abovementioned emergency events is illustrated
in a separate report.
Emergency events are broken down to three level tiers; tier 1, 2 and 3. Tier 1 having the lowest
threat level and Tier 3 having the highest threat level
In the case of an emergency event, the Incident Response Team (IRT) at plant site would be
mobilized with the Emergency Response Group (ERG) (chaired by the Chief Engineer of
RPCL located at RPCL head office in Uttara) coordinating and overseeing arrangements to
ensure that the IRT meets its emergency management obligations. In the case of Tier 1
emergencies, the cases are escalated primarily to site specific IRTs only. Tier 2 involves ERG
providing tactical response, support, assistance and advice to all incident and emergency
situations at site/location and for providing operational response to any emergency situation
which may occur in the affected(such as, fire, explosion, coal spillage and various social
crisis). The Incident Management Team (IMT) (also located at RPCL head office in Uttara) is
activated in the case of Tier 3 incidents and responsible to define and control strategy for those
incidents. The following table (Table 9.13) shows the emergency response escalation protocol
for different levels of emergencies.

248
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Table 9.13: Emergency Response Escalation Protocol

Reputation Escalation
Impact/ Country
Health & Natural Government Civil Unrest Site specific
Financial $ Definition Threat Level
Consequence Safety Environment Community Hartals IRT Members
Media
Negligible impact on
Situation Incidents that are Plant Manager
fauna/flora, habitat,
generally containable by other IRT
Minor injury – aquatic ecosystem Financial
Minimal impact stable with the Operations' Insignificant Operation Plant members
Tier 1 First Aid or water resources. loss IRT ERG Leader
to reputation. some protests / Site Incident Low Sites Manager
treatment. Incident reporting <$50,000
Hartals against Response Team ERG - as
according to routine
government (IRT) required
protocols.
Security unrest
ERG Leader –
Impact on fauna, appears to
Chief Engineer
Moderate flora and/or habitat escalate to Incidents that
other ERG
injury- but no negative Moderate to regular require Dhaka
Financial Chief Engineer Inform members
Medical effects on small impact outburst - but based ERG, Medium
Tier 2 loss ERG ERG Leader RPCLactivates Executive
Treatment , ecosystem, may on business authorities governmental High
>$50,000 Dhaka ERG Director ERG -
Lost Time require immediate reputation. appear to be and regulatory
activated for
injury regulator capable of support
EHS / Security
notification. maintaining
issues
control
Confirmed
direct threat to
Injury foreign Incidents when
requiring business there are multiple
Long term impact of Significant
ISOS interest or injuries or IMT Leader IMT
regional significance impact on
activation. Financial against fatalities requiring Executive Managing
on sensitive business
Permanent loss greater expatriates IMT support and High Director Director other IMT
Tier 3 environmental reputation/ or IMT
disabling than Situation also international Extreme members
features, likely to international IMT
injury and or $100,000. certain to support, activates
result in regulatory media
long term off escalate regulatory and IMT IMT - activated
intervention/action exposure.
work and further public relations
fatality. beyond assistance.
Government
control

249
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

250
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

The Incident Response Team (IRT)

The Incident Response Team (IRT), based at plant location, is trained and responsible for
dealing with all envisaged incidents and emergency situations which may occur at the location.
Where additional support in the way of resources and advice may be required by the IRT at a
remote location this will be requested through and provided by the Emergency Response
Group (ERG) of Dhaka Office. On all occasions when an IRT is mobilized due to an incident
or emergency situation, the ERG Manager must be notified immediately.
The IRT will be headed by the Plant OHSE Manager and will include senior staff from the
Human Resources (HR), Health Safety Environment (HSE) and Logistics department within
the plant.

The Emergency Response Group (ERG)

The Emergency Response Group (ERG) is based in the RPCL Head Office in Uttara, Dhaka
and will be chaired by the (Chief Engineer (Operation and Maintenance)). He will also
nominate an Emergency Response Coordinator to coordinate with representatives from
various agencies and also senior staff from HR, Finance, HSE, Logistic, Security, IT, and
public affairs department within RPCL. ERG will be responsible for providing tactical response,
support, assistance and advice to all incident and emergency situations at site/location and
will provide operational response to any emergency situation that may occur. The function of
the ERG is to coordinate and oversee arrangements to ensure that the IRT meets its
emergency management obligations. ERG should develop a plan, in consultation with the
appointed OHSE Manager where it should describe how to handle both the "technical" crises
e.g. fire, explosion, oil spill, and "social" crises e.g. illness, injury, kidnap, civil unrest. On all
occasions that the ERG is mobilized due to an incident or emergency situation the Managing
Director must be notified immediately.

The Incident Management Team (IMT)

The Incident Management Team (IMT) is the corporate body located in the RPCL
headquarters in Uttara, Dhaka, with the responsibility to define and control strategy for major
incidents. A strategic response is defined as a situation arising from a single or multiple
incidents or emergencies that escalate to a point beyond which significant damage to the
Company’s business could result, including commercial and reputation damage, significant
financial loss, shareholders’ loss of confidence and damages resulting from litigation. When a
potential strategic situation appears the IMT will be mobilized to manage issues pertaining to
the reputation and the continued commercial wellbeing of the Company. The IMT may
however also be called upon to address some of the tactical roles that would normally be the
responsibility of the ERG, for example, if the Dhaka Office were out of action or in the event
of an evacuation from a country, which may equally limit the ERG’s capability.
The IMT is chaired by the Managing Director of RPCL and includes high level representation
from the Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral Resources, Army, Police Department, Fire
Department, District Commissioner’s Office and the Disaster Management Bureau (DMB) of
the Bangladesh Government.
The detailed Emergency Response Plan is prepared in a separate report titled “Emergency
Response Plan of 2x660MW Thermal Power Plant at Kalapara, Patuakhali.”

251
 Hazard and Risk Assessment

Safety Training

In order to reduce the risks associated with accidents, internal and external threats, and
natural disaster a safety training program is essential for workers in plant operation. There
should be regular training programs on safety for the workers to increase their awareness and
also to reduce the risks. Provision of yearly professional training for health and safety, would
enhance the effectiveness of safety. Safety training should be planned for the local people
living around the project area so that they can be aware about the risk possessed by the Power
Plant and can take appropriate preparedness (Table 9.14).

Table 9.14: Training schedule that should be adopted for safety

Target trainee Training schedule
Worker Four trainings per year
Professional Two trainings per year
Local people Two trainings per year
Drivers Four trainings per year
Safety professional Two trainings per year

In addition, there must be a discussion and awareness session for increasing awareness on
safety in each and every kind of meeting. Tool box meeting and job safety analysis should be
regularly practiced by the employee. Further details on the type of trainings to be provided will
be discussed in the separate Emergency Response report.

Documenting and Reporting

Implementation status of the safety plans should be monitored and documented regularly.
Monthly monitoring report should be prepared based on regular inspection and should be
submitted to the Superintending Engineer of the Power Plant. Any kind of incidents or even
near misses should be documented and reported to the Superintending Engineer.

Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Team

There should be provision of Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Team with
responsibility of implementation, inspection, documentation, and reporting of the safety plans.
The team will also be responsible for implementing emergency plans under the Directorate of
Environment, Health and Safety. The team should be a combination of multi-disciplinary
professionals. The team composition could be as:
 Occupational Health, Safety and Environment Manager (Team Leader)
 Health and Safety Officer
 Environmental Officer
 Fire Safety Manager
 Chief Security Officer
 Security Officer
 Chief Medical Officer
 Medical Officer
 Rescue Officer

252
 10. Environmental Management Plan

10.1 Introduction

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) includes several plans for implementing
mitigation and enhancement measures including Emergency Response Plan (ERP),
Occupational Health and Safety Plan (OHSP), and Environmental Code of Practices (ECPs).
Generally, the impacts, which are minor or moderate, are to be mitigated by adopting
Environmental Code of Practices (ECP) (Appendix-VI) and Contractor’s best practices
during project implementation. On the other hand, impacts and risks which are critical or
major will be mitigated or prevented by adopting mitigation measures are discussed earlier
chapter where specific plans are discussed in this Chapter.

10.2 Objectives of EMP

The basic objective of the EMP is to manage adverse impacts of the Project interventions in
a way, which minimizes the impacts on the environment and people of the study area. The
specific objectives of the EMP are to:
 Facilitate the implementation of the mitigation measures identified in the EIA and
comply with regulatory requirements
 Maximize potential project benefits and control negative impacts.
 Draw responsibilities for project proponent, contractors, consultants, and other
members of the Project team
 Maintain essential ecological process, preserving biodiversity, and where possible
restoring degraded natural resources.
The EMP will be managed through a number of tasks and activities. One purpose of the EMP
is to record the procedure and methodology for management of mitigation and enhancement
measures identified for each negative and positive impacts of the Project respectively. The
management will clearly delineate the responsibility of various participants and stakeholders
involved in planning, implementation, and operation of the Project.

10.3 Various Categories of Mitigation Measures

The EMP includes various categories of mitigation measures and plans: (i) general and non-
site-specific measures in the form of Environmental Codes of Practices (ECPs) presented in
Appendix-VI to address general construction and operation matters identified as moderate
and minor insignificance prior to mitigation in Table 8-4 of Chapter 8 (Environmental
Impacts); (ii) project specific and to the extent possible, site-specific mitigation measures
discussed in Chapter 8 and (iv) Construction Environmental Action Plan (CEAP) with site-
specific and construction-specific management plans to be prepared by the contractor, which
include pollution prevention, occupational health, safety and environment, and emergency
response.

253
 Environmental Management Plan

10.4 Development of Environmental and Social Management System

The EMP of the EIA report will guide the environmental and social aspects of the project during
pre-construction and operation stage of the project. During the approval process of EIA, DoE
will also make certain condition for better performance of the project. The proponent will also
develop of its own EHS policy. The EPC contractor has its own policy during construction
phases. Combining those policies, detail design, DoE conditions and EMP of the EIA study, a
site specific environmental and social management system (ESMS) will be developed before
initiation of the construction works. This ESMS will regularly check and updated through the
findings from the environmental and social monitoring reports and stakeholder consultation
findings and suggestion from the regulatory authorities.

10.5 Inclusion of EMP in Contract Documents

In order to make the Contractor fully aware of the implications of the EMP and responsible for
ensuring compliance, technical specifications in the tender documents will include compliance
with mitigation measures proposed in the EIA as well as financer’s General Environmental
Health and Safety Guidelines. The Contractor must be made responsible through contract
records for the commitments with respect to the environmental and social components of the
Project.

10.6 Environmental Code of Practices

A set of Environmental Code of Practices (ECPs) has been prepared for various environmental
and social management aspects: ECP 1: Waste Management; ECP 2: Fuels and Hazardous
Goods Management; ECP 3: Water Resources Management; ECP 4: Drainage Management;
ECP 5: Soil Quality Management; ECP 6: Erosion and Sediment Control; ECP 7: Top Soil
Management; ECP 8: Topography and Landscaping; ECP 9: Quarry Areas Development and
Operation; ECP 10: Air Quality Management; ECP 11: Noise Management; ECP 12:
Protection of Flora; ECP 13: Protection of Fauna; ECP 14: Protection of Fisheries; ECP 15:
Road Transport and Road Traffic Management; ECP 16: Construction Camp Management;
ECP 17: Cultural and Religious Issues; ECP 18: Workers Health and Safety, and ECP 19:
Construction and Operation Phase Security. The Contractors will be contractually obligated to
comply with these ECPs, presented in Appendix-VI.
The Contractor will prepare one Construction Environmental Action Plan to address pollution
prevention, occupational health, safety and environment, and emergency response including
the requirements of ECPs and EMP. These will be reviewed and approved by Owner’s
Engineer (OE), EHSU Circle, and PIU before implementation of construction works.

10.7 Environmental Management Plans during Pre-Construction

Land and resettlement action plan

Land acquisition is the prime issue for successful implementation of this project. RPCL has
processed to acquire the land for the 1320 MW power plant project. The land acquisition
process was completed according to the Land acquisition and antiquity act, 1982 of GoB. The
project authority has demarcated an area for the resettlement of the people from their project
cost but not yet been ready. Therefore, the people of Dhankhali Union is very much worried
about the existing one as well as to the upcoming projects also. Considering these issues, the
proponent should exercise land acquisition and resettlement action plan in more realistic and

254
 Environmental Management Plan

pragmatic away. They should prepare a resettlement action plan as per IFC guideline which
have already practiced in WB financed project in Bangladesh. The proponent may negotiate
with the PAPs in association with the DC office Patuakhali for shaping a sustainable
compensation package for the PAPs. The updated land acquisition status has been figured
out in Appendix –XV. The project authority has already demarcated an area for the
resettlement village near the project site. A tentative layout has been shown in Figure 10.1a
and Figure 10.1b for the resettlement village.

Figure 10.1a: 2D Layout of the resettlement village

Figure 10.1b: 3D Layout of the resettlement village

Stakeholder engagement plan

The stakeholders must be engaged for smooth continuation of the Project in all the initiation,
construction and operation stages. The project authority will identify the range of stakeholders
who are directly and indirectly impacted and relevant with the project related activities. The
authority will develop a stakeholder engagement plan in detail before implementation of the
project construction works. The proponent will disclose the relevant project information and
securing their opinions to overcome the adverse situation for project implementation. The
project authority will prepare the grievance redress mechanism to resolve the social problems
related to the project implementation. In this regard they may prepare formal grievance redress
cell to address the issues and resolve them on early basis. The stakeholders will be engaged
at every steps of the project development in integrated way.

255
 Environmental Management Plan

Site Development Plan

Site developments activities will be continued through dredging from the approach channel.
So far, any part of site development, it is required to encompass the site development
demarcated and well-compacted earthen ring dyke initially. So that, no loose earthen materials
can fall to the charra, khals by rainfall runoff. Before dumping of dredging materials, base
stripping of top soil has to be made for proper bonding and stripped materials has to be kept
in safe place for reuse after completion of site development. Protect the pre-designed channel
or khals and maintain the available depth for runoff of rainfall properly. Backfilling has to be
made layer by layer ensuring proper compaction and water spraying, so that no dust can be
emitted in air causing air pollution as well as the safety of the projects.

Water Resources Management Plan

Water quality and drainage system might be affected during land development stages.
Regional water modeling and morphological study should be carried for Dhankhali Union
before the massive development activities. The local administration and local government and
WMC of BWDB should include as important stakeholder before the side development
activities. Regular monitoring of the important water quality parameters like pH, DO, BOD, EC,
Salinity and COD must be conducted as per recommendation of EIA and DoE.

Drinking Water Supply and Sanitation Plan

A separate water supply and sanitation provisions might be needed for the temporary facilities,
labor camp and workshops, in order not to cause shortages and/or contamination of water. A
Plan will be prepared by the Contractor on basis of ECP 3. The Plan will be submitted to the
OE for review and approval before contractor mobilization.

Soil and Agriculture Management Plan

Soil or land compensation process may be carried out by RPCL to the affected farmers and
associated peoples of the locality. New lands should be taken under cultivation to compensate
the lost crops of the proposed area. In this aspect, Chakamaiya could be a better choice. The
detailed plan is described in section-10.8.7.

Site Preparation Plan

The site preparation would require base stripping, felling of timber trees and clearance of
vegetation. The contractor will prepare a site preparation plan on the basis of ECP 4, ECP 5,
ECP 7, ECP 8, ECP 12, and ECP 13 to ensure safeguarding of environment. This plan must
be submitted to OE for review and approval.

Fisheries Resources Management Plan

A massive dredging might be required for land development of the power plant area. The
dredging operation would affect the aquatic habitats, particularly the benthic organisms of the
river channel to be dredged nearby the plant. The EMP includes the followings:
 Suggest to carry out dredging activities avoiding fish breeding season
 Ensure appropriate benthic survey prior to the dredging activities
 Enforcement of ECR 1997, IMO Conventions to avoid or little disturbance to aquatic
habitats

256
 Environmental Management Plan

Kitchen Waste Disposal Plan

A good practice of kitchen waste collection and disposal system should be adopted during
pre- construction stage. They should follow the good housekeeping as per ECP. Degradable
waste, glasses, recyclable and reusable waste, papers, plastic, etc should be collected by
nature of the materials and managed separately. Some temporary bins with different colors
indicating disposal of degradable and non-degradable wastes might be installed at labor shed.
There should be a designated site for kitchen waste disposal. Scattered throwing and burning
of waste should be prohibited.

Labour recruitment plan

The labor recruitment policy should be formulated in such a way that the local laborers can
get preference in employment of the project. As these labourers have no previous experience
on such type of technical jobs, it is suggested that, the authority can recruit them in non-
technical posts of the project or the authority can facilitate technical trainings for them.

Employment generation plan

Scope of employment opportunity in project related activities such as land filling, earthwork,
construction, preparation of materials etc. will be created for the local people. Furthermore,
increasing supply of electricity directly or indirectly promotes the economic productivity,
industrialization and changing local economy may create additional and alternative
employment for a number of populations. During project implementation period the affected
people and local people shall have to be given priority in hiring and employing construction
workers, labors, and professionals. Besides, local businessmen should be given priority in
hiring supplying agent for food, construction materials, vehicles and other daily supplies.

Grievance Redress Plan

Complication may arise regarding land purchase such as some owners may not receive their
actual price, payment of some owners may be delayed, complicacy on land ownerships
(multiple owners), interference of local interest groups and so on. It is anticipated that it in
turn, may lead to social unrest situation in the locality. Therefore, a Grievance Redress
Committee (GRC) comprising of project authority, stakeholders and local government
representatives should be formed so that the victim can submit their allegation to it for taking
further necessary action.

10.8 Environmental Management Plans during Construction

The followings are some of the plans proposed in this EMP to guide the Contractor to prepare
a Construction Environmental Action Plan (CEAP). The Contractor will expand the plan to
address site specific measures.

Air quality management plan

Construction activities generate large volume of particulate matter and sometime significant
volume of greenhouse gases. However, with these project activities, a large amount of
particulate matter might be generated. Hence, an efficient air quality management plan has to
be adopted. The mitigation plan includes limiting PM generating activities, adopting dust
suppression system, limiting vegetation clearance activities, avoiding earthen road for traffic
movement, covering of stockpiles, traffic management etc.

257
 Environmental Management Plan

Acoustic management plan

Noise to be generated from different mechanical equipments and vehicles to be used in

construction activities shall have to be managed to ensure ECR, 2006 and IFC, 2007 defined
standard. Adopting the necessary mitigation measures might reduce the generation of noise.

Construction waste management plan

The waste to be generated from construction work should be managed properly. Rate of waste
generation should be minimized through prior take up efficient technique and limiting waste
generating activities. The essential possible measures for controlling construction waste may
include limiting site clearance activities, planned stocking and gathering of construction
materials and equipment with covering, fencing around the construction yard, maintaining
existing right of way to carry construction materials, adopting proper sanitation system for
employees, banning of waste burning and quality housekeeping. A waste dumping place
should be pre allocated and provided with efficient waste collection and disposal techniques.
No waste should be dumped to the nearby river or to the surface water body around the site.
Appropriate measures provided with run-on and run-off system might be constructed from
controlling run off from construction yard and liquid waste. Initiatives must be taken to reuse
and recycle of waste materials and they should not be dumped anywhere of the plant site.
Hazardous material from construction site including fuel and other combustible materials shall
have to be stored with highest care and caution. Spillage, accidental release must be
controlled adopting hazardous material handling guideline. Liquid waste management is again
in important issue. No liquid waste during the construction activities should be discharged or
released straight to the open environment or internal drainage system. There must remain
separate and isolated drainage procedure to release and manage the liquid waste outside the
project premises.

Kitchen Waste Management Plan

A large number of labours will work during construction phase of the power plant. They should
follow a good practice of kitchen waste management for well disposal. There will be specific
locations for taking processing food and taking meal both for the local and project labour.
Numbers of bins and disposal point should be assigned to put the degradable waste, glasses,
recyclable and reusable waste, papers, plastic, etc separately. EPC contractor should
employee sweepers to collect the kitchen waste or other solid waste for collection and
transportation regularly. Finally, a temporary on site dumping place should be selected for
safe disposal or make a communication with the Kalapara Upazila Parishad for offside kitch
waste disposal.

Good Handling and Operation of Construction Equipment

The equipment and machinery for construction activities should be handled and operated in a
way that would ensure low noise, low emission of SOx, NOx, smoke, no oil leaks, no accidental
event, etc. A detail plan of handling and operation of construction equipment will be prepared
by each Contractor on the basis of ECP 2, 10 and 11. The Plan will be submitted to the OE
for review and approval before contractor mobilization.

Fuel and Hazardous Substances Management Plan

The plan will be prepared by each Contractor on the basis of ECP 2 as well as the mitigation
plans given in this EIA and in accordance with the standard operating procedures, relevant

258
 Environmental Management Plan

guidelines, and where applicable, material safety data sheets. The Plan will include the
procedures for handling oils and chemical spills. The Plan will be submitted to the OE for
review and approval before contractor mobilization.

Communication Plan

A communication plan has been prepared and presented in Table 10.1 while carrying out the
communication plan modifications of process and planning may be done as per the Project’s
requirement.

Table 10.1: Communication Plan Adopted for the Project

Stakeholder Information/Message Communication Timing/Frequency Responsibility

Means
PAPs Project awareness Consultations Scoping session in EIA
(general project with the PAPs the preparation of Consultant,
information, etc.) Draft EIA supervised by
Project
Implementation
Unit (PIU)-
RPCL
Project findings Disclosures: Immediately after EIA
(environmental and Though preparation of Draft Consultant,
social concerns) Presentation; EIA Financer,
Meeting, RPCL RPCL,
website and supervised by
formal & informal PIU
consultations
Employment Set procedure 4 weeks before PIU, RPCL
opportunities followed by the recruitment / job
Proponent for opening
this project, Job
circular publish
through print
media, digital
media and other
formal process of
RPCL
Complain against the Consultations, During construction PIU- RPCL
project construction Complain and operation of
process and other register or other the plant
formal procedure
Operation of the Consultations, At the Independent
proposed Plant Complain commissioning of monitor,
(grievance redress) register and the Plant supervised by
other formal PIU- RPCL
procedure
General Skilled and unskilled Poster, local 3 to 4 weeks PIU- RPCL
population labour employment daily newspaper, before recruitment
(Local) opportunities or On-spot
interview
Local Incidents, safety and Telephone, cell Inform an any PIU- RPCL
Administration security issues, Public Phone, Letter anticipated worst
mob situation
Fire Service Incidents of disasters Telephone, cell Immediately when Shift Engineer
phone any incident is (PIU)
detected

259
 Environmental Management Plan

Stakeholder Information/Message Communication Timing/Frequency Responsibility

Means
Police Station Incidents of disasters Telephone, cell Immediately when Shift Engineer
and security issues phone any incident is (PIU)
detected
DoE, Barishal Renew of ECC, Letter, Yearly, before PIU- RPCL
Regular checking, Telephone, contradicts the
Any changes in layout, Website conditions imposed
coal quality and by DoE
pollution control
technologies

Labour recruitment plan

The labor recruitment policy should be formulated in such a way so that the local laborers
especially the PAPs in the Dhankhali Union can get preference in employment in the project
activities. If these laborers are found to have no previous experience on such type of technical
jobs, it is suggested that, the authority can recruit them for non-technical activities of the
project or the authority can facilitate technical trainings for them.

Soil and Agriculture Resources Management Plan

Power plant construction leads to a huge area acquisition. Crop production will be stopped
from the construction stage. To compensate it, new areas should be explored. In this aspect
Chakamaiya would be a good choice. Soil quality of this area is similar to that of Dhankhali
(project area). Besides this, both of these areas are situated in polder. Only close and intensive
monitoring can improve the crop production of Chakamaiya. To facilitate this, sluice gates and
other facilities of the polder should be reconstructed. If BADC and DAE shift their existing
facilities of Dhankhali to Chakamaiya, crop production of Chakamaiya would be similar to
Dhankhali. At present, most of the lands of Chakamaiya is single cropped, while croplands of
Dhankhali cultivated twice to thrice a year.

Fisheries Resources Management Plan

Fisheries management plan has been developed with the aim of avoiding pollution causing
activities and to protect fisheries of the Andharmanik and Tiakhali River and Rabnabad
channel. The EMP includes the followings:
 Enforcement of ECR 1997, IMO Conventions to avoid or little disturbance to aquatic
habitats
 Ensure non dumping of ballast water, non-spillage of oil, non-discharge of waste water
and non-dumping of wastes
 Enforcement of fishing ban in the Andharmanik river during breeding/nursing period

Ecosystem management plan

Ecosystem management plan is an integral part of the EMP. Implementation of this

management plan is essential for safeguarding the ecosystem. The following measures
should be undertaken during different stages of the power plant:

260
 Environmental Management Plan

Green belt development program

About 32% of the total project area will be covered with greenbelt. The tree plantation will be
done considering maximum yearly average wind direction and tree height. The landscape
pattern showing the green belt area has been shown in layout plan (Appendix V). The green
belt will be developed following the guideline of the Department of Forest and Department of
Environment. Along with following guidelines during green belt development will be
considered.
 Limiting vegetation clearance and base stripping within project boundary
 Local and indigenous species should be chosen for green belt development
 In green belt plant composition should be made considering plant of different height
and different canopy size to facilitate deposition of ash
 Protect existing Mangrove along the Jalkader Khal and enhance mangrove patches at
foreshore area of the project site
 Along the project area, local species e.g. Rain tree (Albiza saman), Pabon Jhau
(Casuarina equisetifolia). Sil Koroi (Albizia procera) Narikel(Cocos
nucifera),Aam(Mangifera indica), etc. should be planted
 Plantation should be made following the guideline of the Department of Forest

Community Liaison

During construction, a close liaison with community and local government institution should
be maintained. The local community and local government institution should be made aware
of all the construction activities and possible environmental and socio-economic disturbances.
A community liaison officer or Health and Safety Manager should be given responsibility for
maintaining close communication with community groups, local government institutions and
concerned government departments.

Occupational health and safety

Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs) should be made mandatory for each project
personnel, worker and even the visitor. Necessary training should be provided to project
employees. Awareness program should be arranged regularly. Safety talk, safety meeting,
safety motto, etc. are good techniques of raising awareness.

Labour recruitment plan

The labor recruitment policy should be formulated in such a way that the local laborers can
get preference in employment of the project. As these labourers have no previous experience
on such type of technical jobs, it is suggested that, the authority can recruit them in non-
technical posts of the project or the authority can facilitate technical trainings for them.

10.9 EMP during operation phase

With reference to the possible significant environmental impacts during operation stage
identified in Chapter 8, impact specific EMP have been prepared to address those impacts.
The plans are prepared on the basis of mitigation measures proposed in Chapter 8. In the
following sections these plans are discussed.

261
 Environmental Management Plan

Air pollution management plan

Air pollution management plan includes operation and maintenance of boiler, ESP; stack has
to be carried out regularly as per instruction mentioned in the manufacturer’s maintenance
manual. At the same time, the quality of the coal has to be maintained as per design of the
boiler. The ash handling system must be regularly inspected and tested to evaluate its
performance as per the standard. Regular inspection of boiler, FD and ID fans, separation and
handling system and other ancillaries shall also be inspected and tested regularly whether this
level remains lower than the allowable limit. Safety measures shall have to be ensured for all
components and accessories throughout the entire life period of the project. During operation
phase, the air quality will be measured via Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS)
which shall be situated on the chimney flue duct (not wind shield). PM2.5, PM10, SO2 and NOx
from stack emissions will be monitored by CEMS. Usually, air quality has to measure at the
points where the flue gas flow is laminar. This will be at a minimum distance of 2D from the
entry point where it becomes laminar and 8D from top. The D is diameter of flue can.
There will be additionally two more continuous Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) stations will be used
to monitor the criteria pollutants at the sensitive location inside the plant depending on the
wind speed and wind direction. The ambient environment outside the plant will be monitored
through discrete monitoring system. The location of air quality monitoring will be selected as
per the recommended monitoring location in EIA. The location, pollutants type and frequency
of monitoring can be updated according to the project activities or environmental sensitivity in
future.
Emission level of SO2, NOx and PM shall also have to be monitored regularly. The
Environment Manager shall be responsible for regular monitoring of emission level, inspection
and testing of mitigation measures, environmental efficiency of the plant and regular reporting
of the inspection. The monitoring and inspection report shall have to be submitted to DoE for
renewal of Environmental Clearance Certificate.

Dust suppression system (DSS)

The major source of dust is stockyard. The entire stockyard should be covered with water
sprinkler provided with moisture sensor. Sprinkler system provided with electrically operated
valves and pumps are standard. Entire system i.e. sensor, valves, pumps should be connected
with computerized monitoring and control system.
An automated system must be adopted to suppress the dust maintaining moisture level of coal
surface not below 7%– 8%. Dust suppression systems have to be installed at coal receiving
terminal and plant site. The system functions (dust suppression) replenishing the evaporated
moisture. An integrated system has to be installed to control dust at ship’s hold, ship un-loader,
loaders, stackers, re-claimers, conveyor system (including each transfer point) and stock yard.
Sprinklers have to be set up in a way that will spray maximum water in the form of mist so that
no surplus water will be generated. However, water collecting and recycling system also needs
to be installed in line with dust suppression system. Furthermore, the conveyor system might
be covered typed so that coal dust from wind action can be controlled. At transfer points, water
sprinkler should be installed.
In case of ship’s holds, water sprinkler jets should be provided at the bottom of the boom of
the un-loaders so that the operator will be able to operate the sprinkler as and when required.
In such cases, no need to install automated sensor.

262
 Environmental Management Plan

Acoustic management plan

All equipment and mechanical machineries shall have to be maintained in good working order.
Noise level should be monitored at different selected location within power plant and nearest
community. The greenbelt shall be planted with the aim of lowering the noise level. The
boundary wall will also dampen the noise level further. If possible, mechanical parts with high
noise potential shall be provided with acoustic hood. Noise generated from other sources like
vehicle, vessel etc must be controlled adopting mitigation measures. An Environment
Manager shall be given responsibility of monitoring the efficiency of the management plan and
regular monitoring of noise level.

Sewerage Treatment Plan

The EPC contractor should develop a detail management plan for sewerage management and
treatment.
The STP might be consisting of screening devices, aeration, active sludge treatment,
sedimentation, clarification and separation/recirculation of sewage sludge. Membrane bio
reaction is a good alternative. There should be an efficient network of sewerage collection and
draining system. The treatment plant should be designed in a way that would satisfy the
effluent standard of ECR 1997 and IFC.
The treated water might be reused in gardening, or supplied to nearest community for
irrigation. The sludge from STP should be disposed in compliance with the ECR 1997 and IFC
standard.

Waste Water Management Plan

Presently rejected water, sludge and slurry from different water treatment plants (e.g.
coagulation, clarification, demineralization, etc.) of the first unit are directly drained to
respective drainage system for disposal. A Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) is proposed to treat
raw and effluent water generated from the Plant complex. The ETP will include a central
Effluent Treatment Plant, Sludge and Slurry Treatment Plant, Sludge and Slurry disposal
system, Treatment facilities for feed water using environment friendly oxygen scavenger (e.g.,
Helamin, Diethylhydroxylamine) and demineralization water using reverse osmosis process,
domestic waste water treatment facilities, etc. The Contractor will design the Plant according
to the type, characteristics, quantity, and regulatory guideline of DoE and financer EHS
Guidelines on Water and Sanitation. All waste water generated from various processes of third
unit and liquid wastes will be treated in the CETP before discharging or disposing to the natural
environment.
RPCL may consider increasing the capacity of the CETP to treat raw and effluent water of
other units of RPCL by charging a fee to others. RPCL may take this matter to the policy level
with the support of DoE.s

Hazardous Sludge from Water Treatment Plant

The sludge from water treatment plant should be disposed properly considering its
hazardousness and usability. Iron rich sludge from water pre-treatment and demineralization
plant might be utilized in the industries which use iron as raw materials. The EPC contractor
should explore the market of the iron sludge. Generally, there is a good demand of iron sludge
in steel re-rolling mills. The sludge from oily water separation unit should be managed properly
with due treatment and disposing in scientific pit. It should be disposed in accordance with the
Hazardous Waste and Ship Waste Rules 2011.

263
 Environmental Management Plan

Kitchen Waste Management Plan

A chain of practice should be developed for kitchen waste disposal system. The employee
should obey the good practice of kitchen waste management. The aim should be reduction of
the waste generation. Degradable waste, glasses, recyclable and reusable waste, papers,
plastic, etc should be collected by nature of the materials and managed separately. Proper
number of waste bins with different colors indicating disposal of degradable and non-
degradable wastes might be installed at the staff colonies/residential areas, work places and
walkways to prevent scattered throwing of solid wastes. Project authority may talked to the
local administration for safe disposal of the solid biodegradable waste during operation period.

Solid Waste Management

PROJECT AUTHORITY shall develop a waste prevention strategy, which will significantly
reduce the total amount of waste. The strategy will focus on recycling and the facility wise
implementation of recycling plans, considering the following items (as per Financer/IFC
Guidelines):
 Evaluation of waste production processes and identification of potentially recyclable
materials
 Identification and recycling of products that can be reintroduced into the operation of
the plant
 Investigation of external markets for recycling by other power plant operations located
in the neighborhood or region of the facility (e.g., waste exchange)
 Establishing recycling objectives and formal tracking of waste generation and recycling
rates
 Providing training and incentives to employees in order to meet these objectives.

Coal yard management

Coal stocking, handling and other activities generate considerable amount of coal dust. Proper
aeration system and water spraying system must be installed to control coal dust and self-
heating of coal in stock pile. The dimension and height of the stockpile should be designed
considering self-heating, aeration, wind effect etc. There should be continuous monitoring of
the inside temperature of coal stockpile.
Coal is a self-combustible material. The surface moisture of the coal should be maintained in
such a way that would limit propensity to combust and produce dust spontaneously. Generally,
with surface moisture of at least 7%, coal shows low propensity to self-combustion and
producing dust. Water must be sprayed on the stockpile if surface moisture goes below 8%.
There should be an automated monitoring and water spraying system. In addition, water must
be applied on coal:
 As it moves through the conveyor belt
 At transfer points
 At stockpile
Care should be taken to control aerosol formation after water spraying. The runoff and wash
off from the stockpile and coal unloading system should be treated properly before discharging
it to open environment. However, wash off and runoff from stock pile should be limited. The
water spraying approach should be, to moisten the coal not to wet the coal. The recommended

264
 Environmental Management Plan

practice is to fog spray or mist the stockpile surface as frequently as necessary to maintain
the surface of the coal in moist condition, not in wet condition. This will minimize propensity of
self-combustion and dust generation and accordingly no runoff water will be produced.
Provision of regular monitoring has to be kept for inspection in proper pathway with entry and
exit should be provided in stockpile area and conveyor belt.

House Keeping

PROJECT AUTHORITY should implement a good house-keeping practice, such as the sorting
and placing loose materials generated from different repairing activities in the established
areas away from common workspace, cleaning up excessive waste debris and liquid spills
regularly, locating electrical cords and ropes in common areas and marked corridors.

Occupational Health Safety and Environment

A detail Occupational Health, Safety and Environment (OHSE) Plan has been prepared and
presented in the relevant section. The Plan includes the following:
 Occupational Hazard Identification and Control Plan
 Inspection and Auditing Plan
 Leadership and Administration Plan
 OHSE Communication Plan
 Required PPEs
 Site Security Plan
 HSE Program for the Contractors/Sub-Contractors
 Preventative Maintenance Plan
 Incident Investigation Mechanism
 Safe Work Practices and Procedures.
The plan has been prepared in a way, which will be applicable for entire life cycle of the Project.
Application of the OHSE plan is responsibility of all including management, employee,
contractors, sub-contractors, vendors in their daily activities. The plan also proposes a
management and administration system (Organogram) for OHSE Plan application. It is
suggested that RPCL develops an OHSE Management System program activities and
commitment and ensure the programs are implemented during each phases of the third unit
construction Project. Table 10-2 presents OHSE management systems and key
responsibilities, for detailed information specific Section number in the detailed report are
referenced.

Community exposure to diseases

The project authority will evaluate the risks and impacts to the health and safety of the affected
communities during the project life cycles. They will design, construct and decommission the
structural elements or components of the project considering the safety risk to the
communities. An emergency preparedness and response mechanism should be developed
accompanying with the affected community people so that immediate initiative can be taken.

Grievance Redress Mechanism

A grievance redress mechanism should be developed by the project authority in combination

with the local people. All sorts of encountered problems during operation period will be placed

265
 Environmental Management Plan

to the grievance redress cell. The authority, therefore, will take necessary immediate action to
mitigate the problems.
The implementation and monitoring of EMP shall have to be ensured. Therefore, a team of
Environmental Specialist and Environmental Auditor has to be engaged with responsibility of
strong monitoring during implementation of EMP and their environmental and social
consequences.

Soil and Agriculture Management Plan

With reference to the possible significant environmental impacts on land and agriculture
resources during operation stage identified in Chapter 8, impact specific Environmental
Management Plans have been prepared to address those impacts. The plans are prepared
on the basis of mitigation measures proposed in Chapter 9. In the following sections these
plans are discussed.
Agricultural crop land might reduce for the infrastructural and industrial development in the
study area. So food security should be assured by increasing crop production and cropping
intensity. It should be done through the use of modern technology in the crop production and
the fallow lands should be under cultivation. There should be concerned to avoid agricultural
land for infrastructural development. Infertile lands should be brought under infrastructural
development. Moreover; insect infestation might increase in the surrounding agricultural land
due to lighting of the plant site. So, farmers should be properly trained about the system and
management of Good Agricultural Practices (GAP) Integrated Crop Management (ICM).

Fisheries Resources Management Plan

Fisheries management plan has been developed with the aim of avoiding pollution causing
activities and to protect fisheries of the Andharmanik and Tiakhali River and Rabnabad
channel. The EMP includes the followings:
Measures for navigational activities
 Enforcement of ECR 1997, IMO Conventions, etc
 Ensure non dumping of ballast water, non-spillage of oil, non-discharge of waste water
and non-dumping of wastes
 Awareness growing for fisher and facilitate the fisher to use nets/boats provided with
signals and marking
 Reduce speed if net is seen across the navigational route
 Ensure implementation of other EMP for coal transportation
Measures for plant operation
 Should follow the EMP for effluent discharge
 On-site wastewater should be treated to achieve maximum reuse and recycling.
Measures for Water Intake Structure
 The water supply pipeline intake point from the feeder canal should be provided with
sufficient screening to filter out larger aquatic organisms (e.g., fish, frogs, and toads)
and foreign matter, preventing this material from being drawn into the pumps
 Drum screens need to be adopted in order to limit the entrainment of fish in the cooling
water system and intake velocities should be as low as possible.
 The water velocity in the intake channel should be below 0.5 m/s during normal
conditions.

266
 Environmental Management Plan

 Temporary water reservoir can be built for water storage rather than direct abstraction
from river.
 Monitoring should continue to ensure that the deterrents are working effectively.
 Fish Conservation Program
 Enforcement of fishing ban in the Andharmanik river during breeding/nursing period

Coal transportation and handling plan

The vessel to be used for coal transportation shall have to satisfy all national laws and IMO
conventions signed by GOB. Bangladesh is a signatory 25 of IMO Conventions and Maritime
Protocols to protect marine and terrestrial environment of the country. All of these conventions
and protocols have been discussed in Chapter 2. Therefore, all activities related to shipment
of coal through the Port shall have to be done strictly in compliance with the standards set by
the IMO, particularly following the conventions, protocols and agreements. Shipping, barging
and transferring should be regularly monitored by the relevant authorities. The BIWTA is to
ensure enforcement of these conventions and protocols. Coast guard might be given
responsibility for inspecting whether the vessels are adopting mitigation measures, complying
with national and international rules of safety and environmental conservation. Besides, an
Environment Manager shall be given the responsibility of monitoring the transportation
activities and auditing environmental efficiency of the transportation system.
Proper dust suppression and self-combustion mitigation system must be adopted. Practice to
moisten the coal but not wet them should be followed. However, water filtering plant should
be planned and constructed for management of runoff and wash off water from coal stockpile
and unloading system. The unloading system and conveyor system should be enclosed type
that would reduce generation of fugitive dust particles from coal. The plan should also include
the specific measures which are pointed out below:
 Establish check post for monitoring activities of Foreign ships during coal
transportation
 Enforce the relevant law of restricting ballast water dumping in project territory
 Enforce existing law of controlling oil spillage
 Limit coal Spillage and escape during unloading to feeder/lighter vessel
 Follow standard practice for shipping and barging operation
 Restrict blowing of whistle within Kutubdia Island
 Introduce speed limitation for vessel in Kutubdia Island
 Anchorage should be allowed at particular location within the project area
 Enforce Forest Protection Acts
 Restrict blowing of whistle near bird colony
 Restrict trapping, killing of migratory birds and local birds
 No trapping and killing of Dolphin and Turtle
 Plan measures for accidental oil spillage, refueling
 Anchorage of water vessel only in designated sites
 Restrict outside lighting of the water vessel during navigation across/near the Kutubdia,
Maheshkhali and Sonadia Island
 Restrict the beaming of searchlight on Forest area
 Use low beam of searchlight during navigation across the Kutubdia channel.
 Restrict night lights at places where necessary
 Outdoor lights with shade directed downwards
 Cut-off time to switch off unnecessary lights at night

267
 Environmental Management Plan

Ash management plan

Ash is the prime coal combustion products that release as fly ash during the operation of
power plant. In order to avoid airborne dust about 99.7% fly ash has to be captured in the ESP
and temporary storage at ash silo. Ash carries out to the ash pond mixing with water. Closed
cycle water system should be implemented during ash transfer process. The following
measures should be taken for proper management of ash.
 Engineering control measures should be considered to maintain the ash dust
concentration as low as is reasonably practicable
 The capacity of ash pond should be higher
 Additional ash disposal facilities should be planned as for contingencies
 Proper planning is necessary for local and national marketing of the ash
 Regular monitoring of the ash disposal facilities
 Avoid prolonged skin contact especially where the product is dampened
 Wear protective clothing; good working practices as well as high standards of
housekeeping and personal hygiene should be maintained

Rural Electrification Plan

Locality of the power plant area may be benefited by allocating certain loads from the national
grid if possible. Relevant authority may formulate necessary rural electrification plan in order
to satisfy both affected and unaffected people of that region.

10.10 Mitigation Plan

The mitigation plan presented in Table 10.2 is organized around various project activities and
includes various actions identified under the mitigation measures discussed in previous
Chapter-8, define responsibilities for implementation as well as supervision of each action,
and also indicate the timing of these actions. After this assessment stage, if there are any
changes to the Project design or methods of construction and operation, the impacts and
mitigation measures discussed may need to be revised. To address the changes, the
environmental and social implications will require re-addressing.

268
 Environmental Management Plan

Table 10.2: Mitigation Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
Pre-Construction Phase
A Ambient Air
A1. Dust  Dust will be generated  Dust suppression system like water sprinkler should Contractor OE/ESHSU
generated for from site development, be adopted control dust emssion from the site
land Transpiration of land development areas
development filling materials and  Unpaved land should be water sprinkled two times in
activities and vehicular movement a day except the rainny days
vehicles  EMP of dredging activites must be maintained incase
movement of dredging the adjacent rivers
B Noise level
 Noise will be generated Contractor OE/EHSU
B1. Noise level from the moving and
 The machines/equipments/vehicles should be turned
idling vehicles and
off when not in use.
machineries used for
 Dredgers near to the community must be limited to
land development.
9.00 am to 5.00 pm.
 Noise from the dredger
 Use of damper to the equipments for reduing the
causes high annoyance
noise level
to the adjacent
communities
C Water bodies
C1. Surface  Improper storage and  Oils, lubricants and other hazardous materials should Contractor OE/EHSU
Water Quality handling of fuels, be bunded and stored separately so as to limit the
lubricants, chemicals, spillage.
hazardous  Workers should be trained on safety precautions on
goods/materials on- using/handling such hazardous materials.
site, wash down of  The workers should be encouraged to use PPEs
plant and equipment, everytime when handling oils, lubricants, chemicals
and potential spills and other hazardous materials.

269
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
may contaminate the
water bodies and harm
the environment and
health of construction
workers.
C2. Internal  Some drainage NWPGCL and EHS EHSU
Drainage congestion caused by officers
 The liquid waste disposal system should not be linked
System irregular dumping of
with the existing internal drainage system.
construction waste,
 Separate drainage channel should be there to disposed
waste water
the construction liquid waste.
near/inside the
 No waste materials should be dumped in a unplanned
drainage channel and
manner and blocking the drainage facilities.
domestic activities
from labor colony
Erosion and  impacts on erosion  The right bank of Rabnabad Channel besides the Project BWDB
accretions and accretions power plant should be protected by the revetment proponent
works.
D Land Resources
D1 Land Type  Land area is Ministry of DC Office, RPCL
 Lands should be raised in such a way that
developed in this Land(MoL), Local
surrounding lands are not affected.
stage. As a result land Government
type changed. Institute(LGI) DAE
E Agriculture Resources
E1. Impact on  The local farmers will Contractor/PA PA/Local Goverment
crop production loss a significant  Timeliy and sufficient compensation should be given
amount of crop not only the owner of the land but also the farmers
production linked to depends on the land propsed for the project area.
livelihoods. It may  Include to direct or indirect PAPs as labors or other
cause local food activites of the proposed project
security for the marinal

270
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
farmers depending on
this land.
F Livestock Resources
F1. Loss of  Acquiring the project Government DC Office, RPCL
grazzing land area will lead to Institute(LGI) DAE,
 High yielding grass varieties could be introduced in
and loss of obstruct the grazing DLR
the study area to compensate this problem
fodder land and fodder for the
livestock of the local
farmers/households
G Fisheries Resources
 Increased temporary
and localized turbidity
and destroying of
benthos community of
 Installation of bamboo/hessian barrier to arrest
river bed during
suspended sediments within the dredging perimeter
dredging period inhibit
 Sand filling should be done by making chamber/or by Contractor in
the normal growth of
fencing. collaboration
G1 Fish habitat the primary producers
 Dredging activities must be restricted during Hilsha with Upazila RPCL and Upazila
condition and and retard the fish
(September - October) and Pangus (June - July) Fisheries Office Fisheries Office
quantity growth as well.
spawning period and peak shrimp PL (February – March) and local
 Ramnabad Channel is
collection periods. fishers.
one the suitable
 Spatial spoil management plan must be developed
spawning ground for
through suitability analysis before dredging.
Hilsa, Pangus and
shrimp which might be
affected because of
dredging activities.
 With the consequence
Upazila
G2 Fish of aforesaid reasons,  Watery sand would not be allowed to flow to the nearby RPCL and Upazila
Fisheries Office
production estimated net loss to khals, ponds and rivers Fisheries Office
in collaboration
fish production would

271
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
be 9Mt and 125Mt per with local
year from the project fishers.
area and study area
respectively.
H Ecology
H1. Terrestrial Removal of terrestrial
vegetation vegetation to initiate land
development process
would impacts on existing
terrettrial vegetation Follow specific guidelines to initiate clearing/site
negatively. In addition, preparation for land development ;
labor shed development Demarck and prepare of dyke is a must before Contractor/R
DoE
and bring construction commencing land filling process; and PCL
heavy machineries to Do not install pipeline across the mangrove vegetation to
project site would impacts minimize vegetation loss.
negtative to terrestrial
vegetation in the
roadsides and/close to
project location.
H2 Shorebirds Pipeline installation for
land development process
requires labor involvement
Follow specific guidelines before commencing the
for a short period of time
designated tasks to avoid shorebirds’ habitat damage or
across the feeding ground
disturbance;
of waders. The movement Contractor/RPCL DoE
Select barren area to install pipelines; and
of labors will disturb their
Avoid winter season to reduce disturbance on shorebirds
normal activities and they
feeding habitat.
can be migrated locally.
The land filling process
would impacts negative to

272
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
other wildlife, too in the
project vicinity.
H3. Marine The waterways are the
hanitat main source of
communication especailly
during carrying heavy
construction materials to
the site. In this process,
the sea is the main route to Prohibit release of oil or greases during transportation
getting transportation of period to the destination;
the construction Engines should check prior to initiate shipment; and Contractor/RPCL DoE
machineries in the pre- Crews and other staffs of the cargo/ship should well
construction phase. aware of the consequence of oil spills.
Through this activities the
marine habitat supposed
to be impacted by oil spills
as well as greases
discarded from ship/cargo
engines.
I Socio-economic resources
I1 Land About 1000 acre of land is
acquisition required for the
implementation of this
The affected people should be compensated properly DC office, Patuakhali DC office, RPCL
project. Land acquisition is
an important issue for this
project
I4 Employment Many people may
opportunity workless as they will lose
Engagement of local people in the project activities or
their agricultural land. The Contractor/RPCL RPCL
alternative occupation should be ensured
local people may engage
in the land development

273
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
and non- technical
activities
Health safety Occupational health safety
may disturbed and
sexually transmitted There should have facility to deal with medical aspects
Contractor PA/ RPCL
diseases may arises in the of HIV/AIDS treatment with specialized services
locality due to the flow of
outsiders
Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
 Poor aesthetic view Contractor Health and Safety
 Fencing the proposed project and demarketed the
due to the dumping of Officer
layout for land development
J1. Solid backfilling materials
 The dredger pipeline should be transferred under
Waste and storage of the
the soil especially crossing point of road.
equipment, materials
 All solid wastes, should be stored in designated
and pipeline of the
sites prior to final disposal
dredger etc.
Waste from the labor Contractor Health and Safety
J2. Kitchen sheds may create Onsite waste disposal system must be adopted Officer
Waste annoyance to the local Sanitation system must be developed substantially
residence
Construction Phase
L Ambient Air
L1. Dust and  Emissions of dust and  DSS must be applied regularly EPC OE/ESHSU
gases gases will be  Protect the project boundary wall.
generated from generated from  Low air pollution emitting vechiles should be applied
excavation, excavation of trenches  Monitoring must be continued continously on the
construction for infrastructure sensitive receiptors
equipments, development;  Minimize the area that is disturbed
and vehicles costruciton works,  Minimize cutting trees and vegetation
material transport may  Truck hauling materials should be equipped with
cover to cntrol dust

274
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
cause local ambient air  Restricting excavation activities such as top soil
pollution. removal during the periods of high wind.
 Nuisance and health  Establishing and enforcing vehicle speed limmit to
hazard for local people minimize the dust generation.
and workers reduce  Bare earth should be graded and seeded as soon as
visual quality of sites after completion as possible.
 Restricting the burning of waste
L Ambient noise

Noise will be EPC OE/EHSU
L1. Noise level generated from the  The machines/equipments/vehicles should be turned
moving and idling off when not in use.
vehicles, welding  Using PPEs during construction work.
operation, and heavy  Use of noise mufler or barrier to obstruct the
machineries may propagation of noise
cause annoyance to  Limit the noise emission during the night period
the labours as well as  Ensuring all equipment is ion good repair and
to the adjacent operated in the correct manner.
communities
M Water Ressources
M1. Drainage  Without or improper  The construction work should be done after
system inside drainage system may construction of the drainage system for the project
WMGs of
the project cause washout of the  Construction debris should not be discharged into the EPC
boundary
Polder
boundary wall, drainage channel.
WMGs of 54/A. PA
backfilling materials,  Monitoring the drainage system regularly
roads or other  WMGs under BWDB will be authorized to monitor the Polder The local
infrastructure and may natural drainage system in the polder area; and 54/A. government
affect drainage system  Storm water runoff from all fuel and oil storage areas, (Union
of the adjacent areas workshops and vehicle parking areas is to be Parishad)
directed into an oil and water separator before being
discharged into any water resources

275
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
 All construction fill and material storage areasshall
have diversion drains installed above the work areas
to intercept storm runoff.
 Install temporary sedimentation basin in suitable
locations to trap silt /sediment from runoff and slow
the flow of water reducing erosion and pollution.
 If stored on site, bulk diesel fuel will be dispensed
from the elevated tanks surrounded by impermeable
bunds. The height of the will be sufficient to contain
110% of the fuel stored on-site.
 All fuel storage areas and refueling vehicles are to be
provided with spill containment kits.
 An emergency spill contingency plan shall be
prepared by the contractor as part of the SEMP
 Peoperly planned and designed ETP/STP/septic
systems are required
 Adequate capacity of septic tank and hygenic sludge
management plant may be adopted in the
corresponding stage of the power plant.
M2 Water  Discharge of liquid
quality waste like oil and
 Temporary effluent treatment plan may be adopted
grease, chemical
on the working site to treat the leachate, industrial
materials and swearge
liquid waste etc
from the construction EPC EHSU
 Onsite sewerage treatment plant may be adopted
site may cause water
 Monitoring the water quality as per recommendation
pollution to the
of the EIA
adjacent surface water
system
N Land Resources
N1 Land Type  Land type and land  Lands should be raised in such a way that Ministry of
DC Office, RPCL
use change to surrounding lands are not affected. Land(MoL), Local

276
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
accumulate the power  Khals or irrigation canals should open during Government
plant and ensure its construction stage. Institute(LGI) DAE
safety.
O Agriculture Resources
O1. Impact on  Crop production of  Chakamaiya would be a good choice for shifting
crop production that area totally wiped crops from Dhankhali (project area).
out. Agricultural lands  BADC and DAE shift their existing operatioons of
O2. Impact on might be converted to Dhankhali to Chakamaiya, if this possible, crop
irrigation non-agricultural land production of Chakamaiya would be similar to
due to Power plant Dhankhali.
induced infrastructure  A regional/local development plan should be
developed. Ministry of
prepared by the concerned Government Authority to
Land(MoL), Local
guide the induced development in a planned way and DC Office, RPCL
Government
to conserve agricultural land from the invasion.
Institute(LGI) DAE
 Khas/fallow land should be brought under cultivation.
 Infertile land should be under future infrastructure
development.
 Capacity building and awareness rising of the
farmers should be carried out to practice Integrated
Crop Management (ICM) and Good Agricultural
Practices (GAP).
Q Fisheries Resources
 Rabnabad channel is rich  Vessel movement should be limited during Hilsa
in Hilsa, Pangus and (September - October) and Pangus (June - July)
Upazila
Shrimp PL which would be spawning period and peak shrimp PL (February – March)
Fisheries Office
Q1 Fish habitat affected due to disposal of collection periods. RPCL and Upazila
in collaboration
quality waste water like ballast  Ballast water and oil spillage must be controlled from the Fisheries Office
with local
and bilge water from the ships, vessels and construction site.
fishers.
ship/cargo 
carrying Foreign ships must be checked for protecting the
machinery and ancillaries migration of invasive species

277
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
having oil and grease
contaminants.
 Impact on fish habitats
Q2 Fish due to spillage of oil,  Fish breeding and fish spawning seasons should be Upazila
species grease and bilge water avoided for transporting construction materials and Fisheries Office
RPCL and Upazila
diversity and from the increased traffic machinery as well as ancillaries through waterways. in collaboration
Fisheries Office
composition 
load in the channel. This Oil spillage from vehicle/water vessel should be with local
may result a declining in controlled efficiently fishers.
fish species diversity
R Ecology
R1 Shorebirds The movement of labors
and other
will disturb to shorebirds
wildlife habitat
normal activities. The
construction activities Develop specific guidelines in avoiding disturbance to
would impacts negative to shorebirds as well as other wildlife habitat;
other wildlife at the vicinity Construction area should boundary wall and specific
of project site by putting route for transportation of goods and labour movement;
light, high frequent sound, The construction machineries should low sound emission
stockpilling of construction or emission free; Contractor/RPCL DoE
to wildlife passages, labor Light of construction area should install downwardly to
and vehicle movements. avoid disturbance to the wildlife and shorebirds;
In addition, jetty Construction activities should not continue at night; and
construction for coal Winter season (October-February) should avoidas
transportation will impacts construction period.
negative to wildlife both
terrestrial wildlife and
shorebirds.
S Socio-economic resources
S1. Healthy  During construction  Special attention should be provided for supplying
EPC
and safety to and installation stage safe drinking water, safe sanitation system for the OE/EHSU
of the power plant may

278
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
the worker and threats for human labor sheds. Registered doctor and assistants should
residence safety to the technical be employed during construction phase
and non-technical  All arc welding and cutting operations shall be
labor shielded by non-combustible or flameproof screens
 which will protect welders and other persons working
 Welding operations in the vicinity from the direct rays of the arc.
during laying of In addition, the welders should use (i) hand shields to
pipeline may cause fire protect against flashes and radiant energy, (ii) see his
accidents if proper skin is covered completely to prevent burns and other
care is not taken damage by ultraviolet rays, (iii) Welding helmets shall be
free of leaks and openings, and free of highly reflective
surface, and (iv) welding trucks shall be equipped with
approved fire extinguishers and first aid.
S4 The local people may
Employment engage in the land
opportunity development and non- Engagement of local people in the project activities or
Contractor/RPCL PA
technical activities and it alternative occupation should be ensured
will create in migration in
the project area
T Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
T1. Solid Waste  Poor aesthetic view Contractor Health and Safety
Storage space due to the storage and Officer
 Rubbles generated from the construciton site should
and visual disposal of old and
be stored in approriate bins/skips, well-covered and
effect used equipment and
later buried in an approved landfill site.
materials. Moreover,
 All solid wastes, hazardous and non-hazardous,
spillage and leakage
should be stored in designated sites prior to final
from improper storage
disposal
can result in
contamination in soil.
Operation Stage
U Ambiant Air

279
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
U1 Ambient  Emission of exhaust  Use of 275 m stack, FGD, ESP, Low-NOx burner etc Power plant operation EHSU
Air gas from the stack may will reduce the GLC of the pollutants Unit
G1. Maximum contribute elevated  Similarly, emission level of PM2.5 will also be within
ground level ground level the standard but PM10 has the exceedance in respect
concentration concentration of SOx, of World Bank guideline but compliant with the
of air pollutants CO, NOx, PM10, Bangladesh standard.
PM2.5etc. at the  Monitoring the rate at stack and ambient GLC of the
sensitive receiptors criteria pollutants at the sensitve receiptors
V Noise level
V1. Noise level  Hearing complexity  Install 3 m high brick boundary walls and thick
inside the and loss along with plantation to attenuate noise in the sensitive
control room, increase blood receptors.
turbine hall pressure, disturbances  Replace the sealing of doors and windows of the
and discomfort to the control room and office building for making noise
technicians and proof the workspace.
workers and  The machines/equipments/vehicles should be turned
surrounding off when not in use.
Power plant operation
communities due to  The turbines, pumps, fans etc. should be covered EHSU
Unit
noise generated from with soundproof dampeners to limit the spread of
rotator machineries at noise.
exceedance level.  Greenbelts should be developed around the power
plant area to limit the spread of noise to the nearby
community.
 Workers should use appropriate PPEs (soundproof
earpiece, earmuffs etc.) while working close to noise
equipment.
W Water Resources

280
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
W1 Natural  Impacts on Natural
drainage  All the natural drainage system in the power plant
Drainage System
system project area should be kept as RS mauza.
BWDB and Union
 No water control structures should be implemented Project proponent
Parishad
by the project authority into the natural drainage
system.

W2. Water  Disposal and dumping

Quality of hazardous material
and garbages on the
 Provision of solid waste management system.
surface water may
 Purification of hazardous material before disposal RPCL EHSU
deteriorate the water
according to the ECR.
quality of Rabnabad
Channel and other
local channels.
W3 Storm  Impacts on storm  Slope protection work along with power plant site of
surge flooding surge flooding Rabnabad Channel BWDB and Department
Project proponent
 Afforestation program will be taken at both side of the of Forest
embankment
X Land Resources
X1. Soil Quality  Soil quality can be
deteriorating due to oil Ministry of Land(MoL),
 All kinds of safety measures should be maintained to
spill and heavy metal Local Government DC Office, RPCL
avoid accidental events.
contamination from Institute(LGI) DAE
power plant operation.
X2. Land Use  Proposed power plant
would trigger new  Fallow lands should be selected to avoid this
Ministry of
industries in that problem in future.
Land(MoL), Local
locality. As a result,  If there is no option to avoid this scenario, proper DC Office, RPCL
Government
more agricultural compensation and mitigation measures should be
Institute(LGI) DAE
lands would be introduced here.
acquired.

281
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
Y Agriculture Resources
Y1. Crop  Agricultural lands
Production might be converted to
Ministry of Land(MoL),
non-agricultural land
 Similar to construction stage Local Government DC Office, RPCL
due to Power plant
Institute(LGI) DAE
induced infrastructure
developed.
Livestock Resources
Z1. Reduce of  Reduction of the PA/ DAE/LG/ Local Adminstraion/ PA
livestocks livestocks may affect Agriculture and livestock
Introduce farming though training and incentives to the
on the livelihoods of training center
farmers
few farmers.
Faclitate the BDS for the livestocks management in the
Ultimately, it reduce
study area
the local livestocks
gradually
AA Fisheries Resources
 Water intake from the
Rabnabad Channel
would entrap fish,
crustaceans and other  Water intake velocity will not be more than 0.5ft/s at the
aquatic organisms screen of the intake channel.
AA1 Fish particularly 
the Intake point of the feed water pipeline should be provided Upazila
species sluggish species. with sufficient screen i.e. fish deterrence machine to filter Fisheries Office
RPCL and Upazila
diversity and  Predator-prey out aquatic organisms like fish, frogs, and toads. in collaboration
Fisheries Office
composition relationship might be  Foreign ships must be checked for protecting the with local
affected due to spread migration of invasive species. fishers.
of invasive species  To use bio-indicator for monitoring the health of the
through ballast water. aquatic ecosystem.
 Integrated impact to be
caused for withdrawal of
3x4250 m3 of water, daily

282
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
for three power plants
located at the Rabnabad
channel may alter the fish
diversity due to salinity
intrusion
If the fly ash is not
controlled, the nearby fish Highly efficient electrostatic precipitator should be used Upazila
habitat as well as their to control the emerging fly ash. Fisheries Office
AA2 Fish RPCL and Upazila
quality may be Continuous monitoring of emerging fly ash should be in collaboration
production Fisheries Office
cumulatively damaged. ensured and necessary measures are to be taken as well with local
This may result in gradual if the electrostatic precipitator is found to be defunct. fishers.
decline in fish production.
BB Ecology
BB1 Terrestrial Vegetation growth
vegetation impedes by blocking
transpiration pores Use sprinkle of waters in the roads and nearby areas at
through dust particulates 2-hour interval to reduce the rate of dust particulates RPCL DoE
generated by the vehicles generated by vehicle movements.
and public movements in
this project area.
BB2 Shorebirds The project area is close
to Rabnambad channel of
the Bay of Bengal having
diversified wintering and
resident waders. The use Lights in the south side of plant area should installed
of channel for coal downwardly to avoid disturbance to the shorebirds and RPCL DoE
transportation will hamper other wildlife especially the nocturnal.
the normal activities of the
shorebirds in a large.
Lighting of the plant site
would impacts negative to

283
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
the shorebirds activities
especially the nocturnal.
On the other hand,
greenbelt (to be
developed) for the project
shall provide important
habitat to different wildlife,
local common birds, and
other aquatic birds.
BB3 Marine The marine habitat is
habitat very resourceful and
home to many tiny to
large aquatic biota. Coal
transportation through
this aquatic system has Dropping of coals from cargo/ship should be protected
some risk of pollution by to avoid marine pollution;
RPCL DoE
capsizing ship, dropping The shippers should well aware about release of other
of coal, oil and grease pollutants like oil, grease, etc.
release from engines.
Toxicity of such matter
would harm to minor
phyla and tiny species in
the long run.
BB4 Benthic Contamination of Use cover over the loaded coals to protect coals from
community river/seabed through coal dropping down;
RPCL DoE
droppings during Shippers should well aware of coal contamination by
shipment. handling the shipment with good management.
CC Socio-economic resources
CC3 Diversity Different occupational Let the local people be engaged in the project related
of occupation facilities may be created activities as well as in the other industrial activities Contractor/RPCL RPCL
after the implementation of

284
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
this project in the study
area
CC5 Human Accidental issues may
safety occurs during the
operation period. It may Emergency team, ambulance, contact number and
create a problem in hospital should be available. Emergency response plan
Contractor/RPCL RPCL
housing facility, treatment should be implemented during operation periods.
facility, sanitation and
drinking water facility
issues
DD Non-Hazardous Waste Generation
Waste will be minimize though reuse, recycle and Project Proponent EHSU
recovery
Untreated liquid waste will The project must use ETP and Cooling Tower to treat the
DD1. Liquid
damage the surface and water within ECR 1997 and IFC 2008 standard.
Waste and
ground water quality in the The project will run through zero discharge concept
Sewerage
study area where the discharge form the ETP will be used for
gardening or irrigation
Monitoring the water quality as per the design of EIA
The project must maintain the sewerage line and STP Project Proponent EHSU
Waste generated from the properly.
DD2. Kitchen kitchen may cause bad Monitoring the water quality at the recommended place
Waste smell and damage the and frequency in the EIA study
local environment On site and off site Solid waste management system
should be run properly
EE Hazardous Waste Generation
EE1. Use of Hydrazine and clorine are Use of halamine in stead of Hydrazine and clorine may Project Proponent EHSU
Hydrazine and highly toxic for aquatic life. be substituted by other environmental friendly chemicals.
Clorine for Oil from the transformer, SF6 might be use for transformer for insulation.
water treatment chemical from the water Monitoring the water quality at the recommended place
and Oil in treatment plant, hydrazine and frequency in the EIA study

285
 Environmental Management Plan

Institutional Responsibilities
VECs/Issues Environmental Impacts Mitigation Measures
Implementation Supervision
Transformer as and chlorine discharge
insulation may damage the surface
and ground water quality.
EE2. Sludge from the STP, All of the treatment plant must run properly and maintain Project Proponent EHSU
Hazardous ETP, WTP and solid waste them regularly.
sludge from dumping places may Generated sludge must be dispose scientifically at a
water pre- affect the ambient designated places
treatment and environment in the project Monitoring the soil and water quality at the recommended
treatment plant site place and frequency in the EIA study
Coal Transportation
 Increase traffic load in the
water course for the three
power plants might
hamper the fish migration
activities.
 Coal during loading and
unloading might fall on
 The crew should be advocated to maintain a certain path Upazila
Rabnabad channel and
and abstain from dumping solid and liquid wastes Fisheries Office
FF1 Fish deteriorate the water RPCL and Upazila
particularly during fish breeding season. in collaboration
habitat quality of the habitat. Fisheries Office
 Coal handling should be made efficiently so that with local
 Integrated spillage of oil
negligible amount of coal can fall in the water. fishers.
and grease from three
power plants activities
along with Payra deep sea
port is detrimental for fish
and other aquatic
organisms along with
water flow.

286
 Environmental Management Plan

10.11 Administrative Setup and Organogram

RPCL is an owned subsidiary of the Rural Electrification Board (REB). This company was
created in order to meet the prevailing demand of electricity. The proposed organogram of the
RPCL is presented in Figure 11.1.

Project Implementation Unit (PIU)

For the operation of proposed1320 MW Coal based Power Plant, RPCL has created a project
implementation unit (PIU) as in Figure 10.2, under the office of the Chief Engineer, Operation
and Maintenance. The PIU is lead by a Project Director (PD) followed by one Executive
Engineer, acting as a Deputy Project Director.

Proposed Organogram for Project Implementation Unit (PIU) of

1320 MW Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant at Kalapara, Patuakhali

Superintending Engineer
(Project Director)

Executive Engineer
(Deputy Project Director)

Sub-Divisional Engineer-1 Assisstant Manager (F/A)-1 Office Assistant/Computer Opeartor-2

Assistant Manager (Admin.)-1 Messenger-1
Assisstant Engineer (Civil)-1 Driver-1
Sub-Assistant Engineer (Civil)-2 Office Attendant-2

Figure 10.2: Proposed RPCL Organogram for PIU

To strengthen the PIU, additional resources are needed as illustrated in Figure 10.3. Detailed
qualification, required number of people in each post and responsibility of each position is
depicted in Table 10.3..

287
 Environmental Management Plan

Figure 10.3: EIA Study proposal for PIU

External Monitor
Besides internal monitoring and evaluation by the PIU for environmental management and
monitoring, independent external monitors will be retained by RPCL, to undertake monitoring
of all compliance. These external monitors will carry out monitoring implementation of the
different components and submit an independent monitoring and appraisal report to the PIU,
and to RPCL.
Contractor
Each Contractor procured under this Project (especially EPC Contractor) will be
recommended to be a compliant of ISO 14001, Environmental Management System (EMS)
certification. Further conditions of compliancy for OHSAH 18000 (2007) related Occupational
Health and Safety (OHS) and SA 8000 (Social Accountability) could also be imposed on the
Contractors. Each contractor will be recommended to have one Environmental Specialist and
one Occupational, Health and Safety Specialist, who will be working in close coordination with
the environmental staff of Owner’s Engineer and PIU.
Other Relevant Organizations
Other relevant organizations involved in the implementation of EMP are: (a) Department of
Environment (DOE), who will oversee the implementation of all development projects in the
country verifying that the environmental requirements are fulfilled, government guidelines and
procedures are followed and environmental quality standards are maintained properly. DOE
will be consulted in case of complicated issues and if it requires any further environmental
clearance certificates (ECC), (b) Department of Fisheries (DoF) is responsible for fisheries

288
 Environmental Management Plan

resources, (c) Department of Public Health Engineering (DPHE) is responsible for maintaining
the quality of drinking water and addressing sanitation issues, and (d) District administration
and municipality are responsible for traffic management, law and order and resolving the social
disputes that may arise during construction activities.

Human Resources Plan for EHS Cell

Institutional Strengthening of EHS Cell

Presently, the proposed power plant has four (4) circles which are Programme Planning and
EHS, Design and Development, Procurement and Contract and Operation and Maintenance.
A proposal for a separate Environmental Health and Safety department has been made by
the EIA consultant to create an EHS Cell headed by a manager, a deputy manager supporting
the manger and two assistant managers; one for environment and another one for health and
safety. Two technical assistants (one chemist and one socio-economist), two firemen, and a
medical officer and a nurse are also proposed. Currently the PIU of the proposed plant has no
staff with previous experience in implementing environmental management and monitoring
plan. In order to implement the environmental management plan (EMP) as proposed in this
EIA, an effective PIU with dedicated staff will be of crucial significance. Without qualified full
time staff it would be nearly impossible to minimize and/or eliminate the effects of
environmental hazards and risks and ensuring a safe working environment for the workers,
staffs and staff family members, who are residing in the project compound. The detail of the
revised organogram from the EIA consultant is shown in Figure 10.4.
PIU Dedicated EHS Staff Requirements
Under the proposed Organogram there has been no provisions made for dedicated staff to
ensure compliance to EHS issues. For effective and meaningful implementation of the EMP,
it is recommended that one Manager (EHS) and one Deputy Manager (EHS) – with requisite
training and practical experiences in implementing and/or monitoring environmental, health
and safety issues pertaining to power sector – are recruited. This team of two would be
supported by two Assistant Managers (one experienced in environmental management and
other in Health and Safety).

289
 Environmental Management Plan

Figure 10.4: Organogram of the proposed Power Plant proposed by the consultant

The following table (Table 10.3) shows the revised number of staffs to be required for the
proposed Power Plant

Table 10.3: Proposed positions for the Power Plant by EIA Consultant

Designation Allocation
Office of the MD 9
Engineering Department 35
EHS Cell 9
Finance Department 19
Company Secretariat 5
HR & Admin Department 34
Total 111

290
 Environmental Management Plan

Responsibility Matrix

The job descriptions of the PIU staff with preferred responsibilities and qualifications are
presented in Table 10.4.

Table 10.4: Qualification and Responsibilities of the PIU Staffs

Sl
Name of the post Quantity Qualification Responsibility
no.
1 Project Director 1 B.Sc. Engineering or Responsible to implement the project on
(Superintending as per RPCL’s time and furnishing both financial and
Engineer) Service Rule physical progress report of the project for
deliberation on the progress in the
monthly Pre-steering and Steering
meetings.
Deputy Project 1 B.Sc. Engineering or To assist the Project Director in all
Director (Executive as per RPCL’s respect. In the absence of the PD,
Engineer) Service Rule responsible for implementing the project.
Co-ordinate Environmental Health and
Safety (EHS) issues to Superintending
Engineer.
Supervision of contractor’s work during
the construction of the proposed power
plant as per the design and scope of
works outlined in the contract document.
Report on work progress from time to time
to the PD.
2 Sub-Divisional 2 B.Sc. Engineering or Providing all support to the Deputy Project
Engineer as per RPCL’s Director (DPD) and PD in the supervision
Service Rule of file works of proposed power plant
project. Monitor all issues related to
(EHS). One of the two SDEs should be
fully assigned to cover EHS issues.
Work with AM (Environment and EHS) in
finding solutions to issues related to
environment and worker’s health and
safety.
3 Assistant 1 B.Sc. Civil Providing all support to the DPD in the
Engineers (Civil) Engineering or as per supervision of file works of proposed
RPCL’s Service Rule power plant project.
In-charge of preserving and maintaining
the blueprints and design maps of boilers
and machineries.
Construct maps and blue prints regarding
setting up structures (boilers, HRSG etc.)
for the proposed development.
Look for any mechanical/design flaws of
any structures and mobilizing workers in
rectifying them.

291
 Environmental Management Plan

Sl
Name of the post Quantity Qualification Responsibility
no.

Working with other AEs, AMs and SAEs

in smooth operation of the plant.
Reporting to DPD/PD of any issues
related to power plant structure.
4 Assistant 1 B.Sc. Electrical Providing all support to the DPD in the
Engineers Engineering or as per supervision of file works of proposed
(Electrical/Mechani RPCL’s Service Rule power plant project.
cal)
In-charge of electrical works inside the
power plant vicinity.
Ensuring smooth operation of boilers and
other machineries.
Working with other AEs, AMs and SAEs
in smooth operation of the plant.
5 Sub-Assistant 4 Diploma Engineering Assisting AEs/PD/DPD in plant operation
Engineers (Civil + related activities
Mechanical/Electri
cal)
6 Assistant Manager 1 Minimum B.Sc. and Co-ordinate and monitor environmental
M.Sc. in issues. Assisting EPC contractor,
(Environment)
Environmental Construction Supervision Consultant
Sciences or any (CSC) and Independent Environmental
related background Monitoring Consultant in monitoring and
reporting any environmental issues
related to the project and in conducting
regular audits.
Maintaining close relationship with DoE
and Ministry of Finance related to Health.
Reporting to DPD/PD of any electrical
issues related to power plant operation.
7 Assistant Manager 1 Minimum B.Sc. and Co-ordinate and monitor worker’s health
(Health and M.Sc. in and safety related issues.
Safety) Environmental
Assist EPC contractors and other
Sciences/
independent monitoring agencies in
Engineering or any
conducting regular audits on worker’s
related background
physical and mental health, work
with trainings on
environment and instruments, PPEs and
Occupational Health
machineries.
and Safety and
Hazard and Risk Reporting to Deputy Project Director on
Assessment is also issues related to worker’s health and
preferred safety.
Maintaining close relationship with DoE
and Ministry of Finance related to Health.
8 Assistant Manager 1 Bachelors and Maintaining general ledger book,
(Accounting & Masters in processing of contractor’s bill for
Finance) Accounting/Finance payment, preparation of monthly

292
 Environmental Management Plan

Sl
Name of the post Quantity Qualification Responsibility
no.
Engineering or as per accounts statement for the project related
RPCL’s Service Rule financial transaction. Also responsible for
all personnel and administrative matters
as per delegation of authority.
9 Assistant Manager 1 Bachelors and The Assistant Manager is responsible for
(Admin) Masters in Human the general administration of office
Resource and operations of the power plant.
Development or as Responsibilities include, but are not
per RPCL’s Service limited to, reception, administrative and
Rule clerical support; dealing with plant’s
workers and attendants (e.g Drivers,
Gardeners, Security Guards, MLSS etc.);
supporting PD and DPD, Managing
transport, important documents and
blueprints, worker’s salaries, purchase
receipt. etc.
10 Accounts Assistant 1 Masters/Graduate or Assisting AM (A&F) in maintaining
as per RPCL’s accounting related activities.
Service Rule
Source: CEGIS, 2016

The job descriptions of the key EHS staffs of EHSU Circle with preferred responsibilities and
qualifications are presented in Table 10.5.

Table 10.5: Job descriptions and responsibility with qualifications

No. of
Positions Job Responsibilities Qualifications
positions
Manager EHS 1  Supervise environmental  At least a Master’s
management plan during Degree in
construction and operation stages Environmental
including compliance and effects Engineering or
monitoring Environmental Science
 Ensure the occupational health and with experience in
safety and security of all employees Occupational Health
and supervise contractors’ and Safety or related
compliance of EMP obligations. field.
 Maintain the EHS management  At least 15 years of
system and ensure all electricity experience in power
generation related work in sector and a minimum
compliance with all the requirements of 5 years working
of health and safety programs. experience in
Maintenance of all documentation. development Bank
financed Projects
 Initiate actions for improvement of all
preferably in power
environmental and health & safety
sector.
programs based on periodical audits
of the EHS management system.  Must have adept
knowledge of national
 Working closely with deputy
policies, such as the
managers of EHS and Chief Chemist
Labour Act, 2006, The
to ensure all works are done in

293
 Environmental Management Plan

No. of
Positions Job Responsibilities Qualifications
positions
compliance with ISO 14000 and ISO Factories Act, 1965,
31000 standards. Environmental
 Monitor the progress of boiler Conservation Rules,
decommissioning and safe disposal 1997 as well as
of Hazardous Wastes. International OHSA
standards such as ISO
 Ensure compliance with all RPCL
14001, ISO 31000 and
policies and administrative rules,
other related OHSA
including the Health and Safety
guidelines.
policy and other environmental
requirements.
 Practice safe work habits in
accordance with Occupational Safety
& Health Administration (OSHA)
guidelines, Factories Act, 1965 and
Environmental Conservation Rules,
1997.
Deputy 1  Manage and supervise  Master’s degree from a
Manager environmental management and reputed institution on
(EHS) monitoring activities of the plant. Environmental
 Monitor environmental mitigation and Engineering or Science
compensation measures carried out or any related field
by the contractors along with the  Must have good
consultants as outlined in the knowledge on various
project’s EMP. environmental and
 Conduct periodic consultations with occupational health
various stakeholders, focus group and safety policies and
discussions, and community standards, both
consultation to monitor the progress national and
of the EMP implementation. international.
 Participate in grievance redress  Minimum 10 years of
committee and resolve issues related working experience on
to environmental concerns raised by power sector projects
the communities. or any environmental
related projects that
 Assists in the preparation,
are funded by
implementation, monitoring and
development Banks
controlling of annual budget for the
and a diploma in OHS
Circle.
from a reputed
 Review quarterly and annual institution (e.g.
environmental monitoring reports and NEBOSH or anything
submit them to SPS, RPCL and similar)
development partners.
 Play a lead role in acquiring
environmental permits, licenses, and
approvals from regulatory agencies
(e.g., DoE) in support of boiler
decommissioning and new boiler
erection projects.
 Perform any other relevant and lawful
duties as assigned by the Manager of
EHSU from time to time.

294
 Environmental Management Plan

No. of
Positions Job Responsibilities Qualifications
positions
 The Environmental Specialist should
adhere to the rules and regulations of
Bangladesh and of development
partners such as World Bank, ADB,
etc.
 Ensure a safe and healthy working
environment and systems of work
through sensitizing employees on
occupation health and safety.
 Advise SPS management of areas
not in compliance with Environmental
Conservation Rules, 1997; Factory
Act, 1965; Bangladesh Labour Act,
2006 and OSHA guidelines.
 Train workers on how to recognize
hazards; environmental and OSHA
regulations; how to properly use
personal protective equipment
(PPEs); fire safety drills etc.
 Evaluate the probability and severity
of accidents. Supervise the
preparation of accident reports and
continually update these reports and
inform them to the EHSU Manager.
Assistant 1  Conduct environmental screening  Bachelor of Science
Manger and scoping and assist in degree in
(Environment) environmental impact assessments Environmental Science
of all SPS and donor funded projects. from a reputed
 Monitor environmental mitigation and institution
compensation measures carried out  Must have good
by the contractors along with the knowledge on various
consultants as outlined in the environmental policies
project’s EMP. and standards, both
 Conduct periodic consultations with national and
various stakeholders, focus group international.
discussions, and community  Working experience in
consultation to monitor the progress power sector projects
of the EMP implementation. or any environmental
 Participate in grievance redress related projects are
committee and resolve issues related preferred.
to environmental concerns raised by
the communities.
 Prepare the implementation of a
range of environmental compliance
documents required for project
approval and implementation, such
as IEE, EIA, EMPs, etc..
 Perform any other relevant and lawful
duties as assigned by the Manager of
EHSU from time to time.

295
 Environmental Management Plan

No. of
Positions Job Responsibilities Qualifications
positions
Assistant 1  Monitor all health and safety activities  Bachelor of Science
Manger carried out by the contractors along degree in occupational
(Health and with the consultants as outlined in the Health and safety or
safety) project’s EMP. public health or related
 Conduct, arrange and report periodic field from an
inspections of all installations/ international accredited
laboratories/ workshops to identify institution and a
risks and safeguard of all persons minimum 2 years of
from death or injury. working experience or
a diploma in OHS from
 Provide personal protective
a reputed institution.
equipment (PPE) to operation
sections where necessary and  Must have adept
monitor the adequacy of contractor’s knowledge of national
PPE at construction site. policies, such the
Labour Act, 2006, The
 Conduct fire safety audits on all SPS
Factories Act, 1965,
buildings to ensure that facilities are
Environmental
compliant with safety rules and
Conservation Rules,
ensure that appropriate procedures
1997 as well as
to minimize risks are in place.
International OSHA
 Prepare monthly and quarterly standards such as ISO
reports on occupational health and 14001, ISO 31000 and
safety and providing updates on other related OSHA
health and safety issues. guidelines.
 Perform any other relevant and lawful
duties as may be reasonably
assigned.
Source: CEGIS, 2016

10.12 Record keeping and reporting

Record keeping and reporting is one of the requirements of any QA/QC system and essentially
of a good management tool. Properly maintained records of construction, training, equipment
maintenance, operation, fault detection and remedy can help in reducing risks of accidents,
legal costs and thereby overall cost of operation of a plant. Records also help in identifying
causes of any accident and elimination of the same accident in future. Records may be
maintained for the proposed plant as follows.
Implementation status of the safety plans should be monitored and documented regularly.
Monthly monitoring report should be prepared based on regular inspection and should be
submitted to the Managing Director of the Power Plant. Any kind of incidents or even near
misses should be documented and reported to the Managing Director.

10.13 Coal Washery

Coal continues to play a major role for power generation over the world. Coal is highly variable
with respect to the physical and chemical properties that affect its use. Plants or industries
that use coal specify a range of properties that are required for their intended process. The
quality and quantity of coal for Banshkhali Power Plants are specified which to be carried by
mother vessels through distant countries like Indonesia or South Africa.

296
 Environmental Management Plan

Coal suppliers try to find coals that most closely match those requirements. For effective
utilization, it is necessary to beneficiate them. Therefore, earlier coal mines of South Africa
and presently Indonesia has adapted to coal washery accompanied with other systems for
processing the coal after mining. Coal is treated in a process called “beneficiation” to prepare
a material that meets the customers’ need and is as homogenous as possible. Therefore, coal
washery will not be affecting the surroundings of the power plant.

10.14 CDM Intent

The proposed project will harness the benefits of CDM as use of supercritical boilers for coal
and combined cycle for gas turbine power plant. However several green building concepts will
be used in the project. Production of electricity will simultaneously accelerate CO2 emission to
the environment. Therefore, implementing energy efficiency programs in power sectors and
other electricity consumers not only makes the production cost-effective but also reduces
greenhouse gas emissions. The recommendations for reducing green house gas emission are
given below:
The township should be designed with ‘Green Buildings’ concept. Guidelines issued by the
Building Code, 2006 should be followed. Compact Fluorescent Lamps (lighting system),
energy efficient refrigerators and air-conditioners, water-cooled screw type HVAC system,
CFC and HCFC free refrigerants and chillers, solar water heaters on major buildings are some
recommended energy saving devices that should be considered in this project.
Energy efficient building materials should be considered for construction of structures. For
external walls and boundary wall fly ash bricks and blocks may be considered. Fly ash, which
is a waste of power plant should be mixed with cement to make concrete. Rat trap cavity
brickwork using fly ash bricks / blocks should be considered. Natural ventilation system
comprising screen walls, low emissive double glazed glass with U value of less than 2.8
W/m2k, shading coefficient of 0.5 should be considered for the buildings. Moreover, green belt
and spot green should be developed maximum allowable areas.
Energy efficient process and building structures should achieve 20% reductions in energy
consumption. It is recommended that the project authorities should undertake yearly energy
audit for their entire manufacturing process and ancillary facilities. Green banking should be
promoted.

10.15 Budget for EMP

The cost of implementing the EMP including monitoring is about USD 12.5 million. Details of
EMP and associated costs are given in Table 10.6.

Table 10.6: Estimated cost of EMP

Amount
Items Unit Quantity Unit Rate
(USD)
EPC Contractor (Investment Cost)
Continuous Stack Emission
No 1 65,000 65,000
Monitoring System
Central Water Effluent Treatment Included in Project
Plant Cost
Included in Project
Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP)
Cost
Flue Gas Desulphurization Plant Included in Project
(FGD) Cost

297
 Environmental Management Plan

Amount
Items Unit Quantity Unit Rate
(USD)
Continuous Ambient Air Quality
No 2 75,000 150,000
Monitoring Station
Low Noise generating equipment Included in Project
and protecting door, room etc Cost
Noise Protecting Equipment and
LS 1 250000 250,000
damper
Environmental Laboratory No 1 1,900,000 1,900,000
Include in the
Revetment and Slope protection
Project
works
Development Cost
Emergency Response Equipment LS 1 600000 600,000
Occupational health, safety, and
Once 1 15000 15,000
sanitation
EHS Staffs of Contractor (2) LS 1 100000 100,000
Plantation Program and Green Belt
LS 1 800000 800,000
Development
Sub Total 3,880,000
Studies and Services
Ecological survey and analysis
(Diversity Index, Richness,
Per Month 18 30000 810,000
Productivity, Prawn and Shrimp PL
availability, etc. Habitat suitability)
Social Survey and analysis (Census
of the PAPs, FGD, Stakeholder Per Year 18 20000 360,000
consultation, awareness)
Ecosystem Improvement Services Per Year 3 100000 300,000
Social Improvement Services Per Year 9 25000 225,000
Sub-Total 2,495,000
Environmental Monitoring Plan (As per the framing of chapter-11)
Pre-construction, Construction (3
1 217500 217,500
yrs) & Commissioning (3 yrs)
Independent Monitoring
1 150000 150,000
(Construction and Commissioning)
Environmental Monitoring Plan (5 Yrs) Once 80 15,000 1,200,000
Occupational Health, Safety and
Security
Per Year 3 10000 30,000
Community Health Safety and Security Per Year 3 10000 30,000
Discharge from ship/cargo on
Rabnabad Channel
Per Year 9 10000 90,000
Effluent discharge points Per Year 9 10000 90,000
Sub Total 1,807,500
Institutional Arrangements
EHS Consultant of Owner's
1 1200000 1,200,000
Engineer
EHS Staffs of EHSU Circle (3
3 700000 2,100,000
Years)
Capacity Building and Training 1 500000 500,000
Independent Monitor (Fees),
1 900000 900,000
Operation
Environmental Compliance Audit 30 years 30 5000 150,000
Sub Total 4,850,000
Grand Total= 13,032,500

298
 11. Environmental Monitoring Plan

11.1 Monitoring Plan

A three-tier monitoring program has been proposed comprising of compliance monitoring,

impact monitoring, and external or independent monitoring, as one of the key suggestion of
the EIA study. The main purpose of this monitoring program is to ensure that the various tasks
those detailed out in the environmental management plan, particularly the mitigation measures
which are to be implemented efficiently and effectively, and also to evaluate project’s impacts
on the key environment and social parameters. Various types of monitoring are presented in
the following sections and the locations of monitoring are mostly to the places where the
baseline data are collected.

Compliance Monitoring

Compliance monitoring is a very important tool/aspect of environmental management to

safeguard the environment. The compliance monitoring plan is presented in Table 11.1 and
Table 11.2. The monitoring will comprise surveillance to check whether the contractor is
meeting the compliance provisions of the contract during construction and operation of the
Project including the responsible agencies for implementation and supervision.
For monitoring of physico-chemical parameters, locations near the baseline sampling points
are suggested. Actual monitoring time and location will be decided by the Owner’s Engineer
(OE) and RPCL. The Contractor will be responsible for carrying monitoring all the parameters
as required with frequency is shown in the following table. This monitoring will be carried out
by its own cost during the construction phase. The measurement values are to be compared
with the IFC’s General EHS Guidelines, where relevant standards are specified, or the national
standards (Environmental Conservation Rules, 1997 and amended in 2005)..

Impacts Monitoring during Construction

The purpose of the impact monitoring is to ensure that the contractor implements the mitigation
measures given in the EMP efficiently, effectively and timely. This monitoring will generally
be carried out by the Owner’s Engineer (OE) with the help of checklists prepared on the basis
of the impact monitoring Plan (Table 11.3).

Independent/External Monitoring

RPCL will engage an independent organization for monitoring the implementation of EMP.
The main purpose of the Independent monitoring is to ensure that all key entities including
EHSU, Owner’s Engineer (OE), and contractors are effectively and adequately fulfilling their
designated role for EMP implementation. All the EMP requirements are being implemented
efficiently, effectively and timely.

299
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Table 11.1: Environmental Compliance Monitoring up to construction stage

Implemented By
Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration
SL Locations Frequency
Monitoring Indicators of Sampling
Monitoring Supervision
1 Environmental Monitoring during Pre-construction and Construction Phase
Near Resettlement
Village
SPM, PM10, Plant site especially at Continuous during EPC
1.1 Ambient Air Quality Continuous OE, RPCL
PM2.5 the workers colony civil construction Contractor
Dhankhali College
Premises
Three Samples
Near resettlement
during day time
village
Day time (6:00 – and one sample
Near the residential area
21:00) and Night during night, for
of Londa Bazar Daily during
time (21:00 – noise, 15 min EPC
1.2 Ambient Noise 4 points along the construction work in OE, RPCL
6:00) Leq, L10, sampling each Contractor
boundary wall as progress
L90 (dBA) time.
mentioned in the
by using: ANSI
monitoring location Map
Type II Noise
12-1
Meter
8 Points in and around
pH, DO, BOD, EPC
1.3 Water Quality the project site and 2 Quarterly Monitoring Composite OE, RPCL
Temp. EC, TDS Contractor
Ground water sampling
Project
Pre-monsoon, proponent
Embankment Protection Rain cut and Full embankment of the
1.4 Monsoon and Post- Observation with existing BWDB
and Revetment works breeching polder
monsoon WMGs of the
Polder
Two locations: Daily during
Same as sl. no. EPC
1.5 Occupational Noise Leq (dBA) Construction site, Labor construction work in OE, RPCL
1.2 Contractor
shed progress
Availability of Inspection and
Workers Health, Safety EPC
1.6 Potable Water, Power Plant Complex Six-Monthly interview of labor, OE, RPCL
and Security Contractor
Drinking water project personnel

300
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Implemented By
Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration
SL Locations Frequency
Monitoring Indicators of Sampling
Monitoring Supervision
quality,
Availability of
Hygienic Toilet
Inspection and
interview of labor,
Implementation EPC
As specified in the ECP Quarterly Project personnel OE, RPCL
of ECP 18 Contractor
followed by a
checklist
Capture
Fisheries
Fish Catch
Diversity Index, Rabnadad Channel and
Assessment
Fish Diversity and Richness, Andharmanik river EPC DoF
1.7 Six monthly Survey, Fishing
Composition Productivity, around 1-5 km away Contractor and PRCL
Survey and
Prawn and from the Project site
Fishers’ interview
Shrimp PL
availability, etc.
Rabnadad Channel and
Habitat
Habitat Suitability Andharmanik river EPC DoF
1.8 Fish habitat 4 times in a year observation and
Index around 1-5 km away Contractor and PRCL
water quality
from the Project site
Plant Growth,
Green belt area within
Canopy EPC
the project site Six-monthly Plot Survey OE, RPCL
Coverage, Contractor
Disease, etc.
Ecosystem and
1.9 Species
Biodiversity Two sites (one nearby
composition and
the jetty) and one within Plankton and EPC
population of Six-monthly OE, RPCL
1km reach of Rabnabad Benthos Survey Contractor
planktons and
Channel
Benthos
Three locations: in the EPC
Crop Production Six monthly following Agricultural
1.10 Agricultural Production study area within 0.5-3 OE, RPCL
Loss cropping patterns Survey Contractor
km from the project site

301
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Table 11.2: Environmental Compliance Monitoring Plan during Operation

SL Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration of Implemented by
Locations Frequency
No Monitoring Indicators Sampling Monitoring Supervision
2 Environmental Monitoring During Operation
SOx, NOx, CO, Independent
2.1 Stack Emission Stack Continuous Continuous EHSU
PM10, PM2.5 Monitor/ RPCL
Within the Project
Moveable analyzer, 24 Independent
Boundary Continuous EHSU/
hour Monitor/ RPCL
NOx, SOx, SPM, Dhankhali Bazar
2.2 Ambient Air Quality PM10, PM2.5, Nishanbaria
CO, O3 Londa Bazar Independent
Quarterly 24 hour EHSU/
Londa-NW corner of Monitor/ RPCL
the project area
outdoor Noise:
Resettlement villages
Dhankhali College
premises
Eight points
Three Sample during
Day time (6:00 – surrounding the
day time and one
21:00) and Night boundary wall (four
sample during night, Independent
2.3 Ambient Noise time (21:00 – corner points, one Monthly EHSU/
15 min sampling each Monitor/ RPCL
6:00) LAeq, L10, point between two
time.
L90 corners at each side)
One at Jetty Point
Indoor Noise:
Administrative building
Health care unit
Residential buildings
Temperature,
Rainfall,
Microclimatic station Independent
2.4 Meteorology Humidity, wind One in Plant Area Continuous EHSU
24 hrs Monitor/ RPCL
speed, wind
direction
pH, EC, TDS, Effluent Discharge Independent
2.5 Effluent (Waste Water) Continuous Continuous EHSU
Temperature Channel Monitor/ RPCL

302
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

SL Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration of Implemented by

Locations Frequency
No Monitoring Indicators Sampling Monitoring Supervision
Oil and grease, Effluent Discharge
Independent
Total Residual Cl, Channel Weekly Grab Sampling EHSU
Monitor/ RPCL
TSS, COD, BOD
Weekly
Oil and grease,
Combined Discharge during Independent
2.6 Storm Water Total Residual Cl, Grab Sampling EHSU
Channel monsoon Monitor/ RPCL
TSS, COD, BOD
season
Jetty Point of the
project at Rabnabad
pH, TSS, TDS, Oil channel
and Grease, Total 500 m u/s of the jetty at
Residual Cl, Total Rabnabad Chanel
Cr, Fe, Ca, Zn, 500m d/s from the the
Pb, Cd, Hg, As, Jetty at Rabnabad
total alkalinity, channel
Water Quality: Surface Independent
2.7 Ammonium Confluence point of Quarterly Grab Sampling EHSU
Water Monitor/ RPCL
Nitrogen, Free Andharmanik river and
Ammonia, BOD5, Rabnabad channel
COD, EC , Londaghat of Tiakhali
Temperature Khal
outside the mixing 750 m u/s from
zone, etc. Londaghat in Taikhali
khal

pH, Total
Water Quality: Ground Hardness, Cl, F, Groundwater Independent
2.8 Quarterly Grab Sampling EHSU
Water Fe, Mn, As, PO4, tank/pump at plant site Monitor/ RPCL
SO4, etc.
Generation of Non Collection
Hazardous Solid Waste system, Proper Visual Inspection,
2.9 Designated Site 15 days IM RPCL
(Domestic waste, Office disposal, waste waste classification
Waste,) sprawling
Types and
Waste Disposal Point,
Generation of Hazardous Quantity, Visual Inspection and
2.10 Waste Generation Monthly IM RPCL
Solid Waste Materials grab sampling
Sources
screening,

303
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

SL Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration of Implemented by

Locations Frequency
No Monitoring Indicators Sampling Monitoring Supervision
Associated
hazards,
disposing method
Generation of Hazardous
Liquid Waste, Sludge
Types, quantity,
(return from Water Visual Inspection,
2.11 materials Output of ETP Monthly IM RPCL
Treatment Plant, Sludge grab sampling
screening
from clarifier, neutralization
pond)
One at greenbelt area
Plant Growth, in plant Complex and
Canopy two at the 3 plots (25m x 25m) in
2.12 Plant Health Yearly IM RPCL
Coverage, rehabilitation village the study area
Disease, etc. and the study area

Two meeting in the Yearly

Wildlife behavior
2.13 Disturbance to Wildlife Stakeholder 2 hrs meeting/ FGD IM RPCL
to noise study area
Consultation
Land use and Land Cover Land cover and 5km radius area of the Once in three Stakeholder
2.14 IM RPCL
change Land use Plant years Consultation
Agricultural land Farmers’ Interview,
Crop Production
2.15 Agricultural Production around the RPCL Yearly Secondary Data from IM RPCL
Loss
complex DAE
Capture
Fisheries:
Diversity Index,
Rabnadad Channel Fish Catch
Richness, Yearly
Fish Diversity and and Andharmanik river Assessment Survey, DoF
2.16 Composition, Stakeholder IM
Composition around 1-5 km away Fishing Survey and and PRCL
Habitat Suitability Consultation
from the Project site Fishers’ interview
Index, hatchling
availability, etc.

Catch Yearly
Rabnadad Channel Production estimation DoF
2.17 Fish production Assessment Stakeholder IM
and Andharmanik river using catch data and and PRCL
Survey (CAS) Consultation

304
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

SL Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration of Implemented by

Locations Frequency
No Monitoring Indicators Sampling Monitoring Supervision
within the study around 1-5 km away fishermen’s
area from the Project site perception
General Health
Workers involved in
Condition, Project
the Plant operation and Quarterly Health Check up RPCL
Hearing health, Authority
maintenance
skin disease, etc.
Availability of Visual Inspection and
Power Plant Complex Six Monthly IM RPCL
Potable Water Record Checking
Drinking water
quality (pH, TS,
2.18 Health and Sanitation
EC, F, Cl, As, Mn, Three samples from
Fe, Total Water Supply System Monthly Drinking water supply IM RPCL
Hardness, Total system
Coliform, PO4,
SO4)
Office Building,
Availability of
Township Area, Monthly Visual Inspection IM RPCL
Hygienic Toilet
Common Places, etc.
Status of
Inspection of Disease
Communicable
Plant area, Residential Profile/Records in
2.19 Community Health Diseases IM RPCL
area Health unit, nearby
Status of Vector
Hospital
Borne Diseases
Emergency
Preparedness Visual Inspection and
N/A IM RPCL
and Response of Yearly Record Checking
SPS
Community
2.20 Safety and Security
Relation
Program/ Visual Inspection and
N/A IM RPCL
Community Record Checking
Awareness
Program, Training
Number of
Social Development Stakeholder RPCL/Local
2.21 benefited N/A Yearly IM
Program Consultation Administration
person/family

305
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

SL Components of EHS Monitoring Type/Duration of Implemented by

Locations Frequency
No Monitoring Indicators Sampling Monitoring Supervision
Number of
Stakeholder RPCL/ Local
2.22 Water supply system additional hectare N/A Yearly IM
Consultation Administration
of farmland
Number of
HealthCare/Development Stakeholder RPCL/ Local
2.23 benefited N/A Yearly IM
Program Consultation Administration
person/family
Number of
Stakeholder RPCL/ Local
2.24 Other Aid to Community benefited N/A Yearly IM
Consultation Administration
person/family
Note: These monitoring parameters will be revised after monitoring the effluent water quality from the discharge channel. Some parameters might become redundant if the
effluent water does not contain in the effluents.

Table 11.3: Impact Monitoring Plan

Responsible Agency
Parameter / Activity Location Means of Monitoring Frequency
Implemented By Supervised By
During Construction
Hydrocarbon and Visual Inspection of storage OE/ Independent
Construction area Monthly EPC Contractor
chemical storage facilities Monitor
Approach Roads to the Visual inspection to ensure
construction sites and local roads are not damaged OE/ Independent
Damage to local roads Monthly EPC Contractor
Crossing point of Monitor
Dhankhali college road
Visual inspection to see
approach Roads and whether proper traffic signs
OE/ Independent
Traffic Safety vessels in the are placed and flag-men for Monthly EPC Contractor
Monitor
Rabnabad channel traffic management are
engaged
Visual inspection to ensure
good standard equipment is in
Air Quality (dust, - OE/ Independent
Construction sites use and dust suppression Daily EPC Contractor
smoke) Monitor
measures (e.g., spraying of
waters) are in place.

306
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Responsible Agency
Parameter / Activity Location Means of Monitoring Frequency
Implemented By Supervised By
Visual inspection to ensure
OE/ Independent
Batch mixing Plant batch plant is located >500 m Monthly EPC Contractor
Monitor
from residential areas
Visual inspection to ensure
proper maintenance i.e. OE/ Independent
Material storage sites Monthly EPC Contractor
covering, dust suppression Monitor
etc. as per ECP
Physical inspection to ensure
good standard equipment are OE/ Independent
Construction sites in use Daily EPC Contractor
Monitor

Noise Visual inspection to ensure

OE/ Independent
ear plugs/earmuffs are in use Daily EPC Contractor
Monitor
Construction sites by the construction workers
Ensure work restriction OE/ Independent
Daily EPC Contractor
between 20:00-06:00 Monitor
Visual inspection to observe
growth of saplings as per
OE/ Independent
Plantation Designated sites provided green belt Monthly EPC Contractor
Monitor
design(subjected to the
initiation of plantation)
Visual inspection that solid
waste is disposed at
designated site and are OE/ Independent
Waste Management Construction area Weekly EPC Contractor
managed in efficient way Monitor

Hazardous Material Visual Inspection of safe

Hazardous Waste Storage Area handling and storage of OE/ Independent
Fort-nightly EPC Contractor
Handling Hazardous Waste hazardous waste and Monitor
Disposal Area hazardous materials
Ensure the construction
Drinking water and workers are provided with OE/ Independent
Labor shed, offices Fort-nightly EPC Contractor
sanitation potable water and sanitation Monitor
facilities in the site

307
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Responsible Agency
Parameter / Activity Location Means of Monitoring Frequency
Implemented By Supervised By
Restoration of Work Visual Inspection
All Work Sites After completion of OE/ Independent
Sites EPC Contractor
all works Monitor

Visual inspection of usage of

Safety of workers Personal Protective
OE/ Independent
Monitoring and reporting At work sites equipment, Safety Sign, Daily EPC Contractor
Monitor
accidents Safety Documentation, safety
training, etc.
Inspection of Emergency
Emergency Response OE/ Independent
At project sites Preparedness and Response Monthly EPC Contractor
Facilities Monitor
mechanism and facilities
Inspection of the complain OE/ Independent
Grievance Mechanism At project site Monthly EPC Contractor
register Monitor
Discharge from
Fisheries ship/cargo on Interviewing local fishermen Six monthly IM RPCL and DoF
Rabnabad Channel
During Operation and Maintenance
Monitoring of
Inspection and Record
Environmental Quality
As specified in checking of Monitoring Independent Monitor/
(Ambient Air, Noise, Quarterly RPCL
Table12-1 and 12-2 activities carried out by EHSU PIU
Water, effluent, Soil,
circle of
etc.)
Inspection of laboratory
Environmental Independent
Complex Condition, accreditation and Six-monthly PIU
Laboratory Monitor, RPCL
certification (from GoB) status
Temperature, Rainfall, Checking and compiling
Humidity, Wind climatic data collected and Independent
Meteorological Condition Quarterly RPCL
direction and flow recorded by micro weather Monitor/PIU
station installed in
Residential area, Noise nuisance/ disturbance
Administrative area and perceived by power plant Yearly during
Ambient Noise Level nearby community personnel and nearby stakeholder Independent Monitor RPCL
community to be surveyed by consultation
interview and FGD

308
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

Responsible Agency
Parameter / Activity Location Means of Monitoring Frequency
Implemented By Supervised By
Effluent discharge Yearly during
Fisheries points and Water intake Interviewing local fishermen stakeholder Independent Monitor RPCL
point consultation
Green belt area and
Plant Health Visual inspection Yearly Independent Monitor RPCL
influence zone
5km radius area the
Land use and land cover Stakeholder consultation Yearly Independent Monitor RPCL
Power Plant
Hazardous Material
Storage Area and Use Visual Inspection of safe
Hazardous Waste and
Area handling and storage Independent
Hazardous Material Quarterly EHSU Circle
hazardous waste and Monitor, RPCL
Handling Hazardous Waste hazardous materials
Disposal Area
Inspection of the complaint
Independent
Grievance Mechanism At project site register/grievance form and Six-monthly EHSU Circle
Monitor, RPCL
interviewing local people
Inspection of Emergency
Emergency Response Independent
Project site Preparedness and Response Quarterly EHSU Circle
Plan Monitor, RPCL
mechanism
Inspection of training list,
Health and Safety Independent
SPS Complex safety meetings records, Quarterly EHSU Circle
Preparedness Monitor, RPCL
means of awareness growing
Inspection of community
relation maintaining
SPS Complex, Nearby Independent
Community Relation procedures, relation building Quarterly EHSU Circle
Community Monitor, RPCL
activities, FGD with
community
CSR Program Inspection of record
completed and planned CSR Six-monthly Independent Monitor RPCL
(if any) programs and activities
Yearly during
Effluent discharge
Fisheries Interviewing local fishermen stakeholder IM RPCL and DoF
points
consultation

309
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

11.2 Implementation of Environmental Monitoring Plan

Responsible Agency

The Chief Engineer of the Kala Para 1320 MW coal based power plant is the responsible
authority for administering and implementing the Project and implement environmental
monitoring program during construction where the Plant Manager will implement monitoring
plan during operation stage. During construction stage, the Environmental Compliance
Monitoring will be conducted by the Contractor(s) supervised by the Owner’s Engineer (OE)
and Environmental Impact Monitoring will be carried out by the Owner’s Engineer (OE) with
the support of the Contractor(s). In addition, an independent Monitor will also be retained by
PIU during three years of construction and by during three years of post-construction
(operation stage). The EHSU Circle of will implement the monitoring program during operation
stage.

11.3 Action during Emergent Operation

The Plant can have an Emergent operation if there is a major failure of control system, plant
component, grid failure, etc. Normally the modern distributed control system (DCS) is good
enough to handle all such emergencies. Otherwise, the plant operator/shift in-charge can
change the plant control to manual mode and adjust the process variables and finally change
the plant back to auto mode. The proposed project will have DCS control system with modern
sensors and a proper interface with the existing old sensors/system.
The plant will be operated ensuring all pollution control devices are in order. In case of any
event of malfunction of a pollution control device, immediate action of resolving the problem
will be taken. If any emergent situation arises during operation, the shift in-charge will be
immediately notified to take corrective measures and action.

11.4 Performance Indicators

For evaluating the performance of the environmental management and monitoring plan,
performance indicators are identified for efficient and timely implementation of
measures/actions proposed in EMP. The indicators are defined both for construction and
operation phases. OE will be responsible for compiling the information on these indicators and
report to RPCL.
Separate performance indicators for each environmental issue have been specified in Table
12-1, 12-2 and Table 12-3. To measure the overall environmental performance of the project,
an additional list of performance indicators is provided below:
Number of inspections carried out by OE per month
 Number of non-compliances observed by OE or EHSU.
 Continuous period of non-compliance
 Number of grievances received.
 Number of grievances resolved.
 Number of construction and occupational related accidents.
 Timely reporting of documents (as defined in EMP and monitoring plan)
 Availability of environmental and H&S specialists in EHSU.

310
 Environmental Monitoring Plan

 Availability of environmental and H&S specialists in OE.

 Availability of environmental specialists and H&S with contractors.
 Number of trainings imparted to stakeholders/other capacity building initiatives

11.5 Reporting and Feedback Mechanism

The monitoring activities will require proper documentation. In case of independent monitor,
the monitoring results and relevant document should be properly reported to the project
implementation authority. The project authority would submit the report to the Department of
Environment and to the Financer.
During construction stage, the environmental specialist of OE will be engaged in monthly
discussion meeting with the project implementation unit and the Contractor(s) for giving
necessary feedback. The project implementation unit may arrange a discussion meeting
quarterly with the financer regarding environmental compliance.
During the operation phase, the EHSU Circle will carry out the monitoring activities and keep
all the records and results of monitoring with proper documentation and will produce quarterly
reports on Environmental Monitoring. Besides, the third party Independent Monitor would
prepare and submit environmental compliance monitoring report annually to the power plant
authority. All the reports should be submitted to DoE which is a condition of renewing the
Environmental Clearance Certificate from DoE and to the financer for post-completion
monitoring and evaluation of the Project.
During operation, the EHSU Circle will give necessary feedback instantly to the person in
concern. The EHSU Circle will arrange a monthly meeting to disclose the results of
environmental monitoring to the personnel.

311
 12. Project Work Plan Schedule

ATTACHMENT - 9
PATUAKHALI 2 x 660 MW COAL BASED ULTRA-SUPERCRITICAL THERMAL POWER PROJECT

IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE Rural Power Company Limited

SL. Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
DESCRIPTION
NO.
M-3 M-2 M-1 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 M44 M45 M46 M47 M48 M49 M50 M51 M52 M53 M54
1 TOTAL PROJECT DURATION c c

2 NOTICE TO PROCEED TO EPC CONTRACTOR c

3 DESIGN & ENGINEERING - MAIN PLANT

4 MANUFACTURE & SUPPLY - MAIN PLANT

5 ERECTION & COMMISSIONING - MAIN PLANT

6 COAL HANDLING SYSTEM - (D,E & S)

7 COAL HANDLING SYSTEM - (EC)

8 ASH HANDLING SYSTEM - (D,E & S)

9 ASH HANDLING SYSTEM - (EC)

10 CIRCULATING WATER SYSTEM INCL. COOLING TOWER (D,E &S)

11 CIRCULATING WATER SYSTEM INCL. COOLING TOWER (EC)

12 DM WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM (D,E &S)

13 DM WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM (EC)

14 RCC CHIMNEY (D,E &S)

15 RCC CHIMNEY (EC)

16 400 Kv SWITCHYARD (D,E & S)

17 400 Kv SWITCHYARD (EC)

18 EMERGENCY DG SET (D,E & S)

19 EMERGENCY DG SET (EC)

20 POWER TRANSFORMERS (D,E & S)

21 POWER TRANSFORMERS (EC)

22 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

23 ENABLING WORKS

24 CIVIL WORKS - MAIN PLANT

25 CIVIL WORKS - BOP & NON PLANT

26 ROADS AND DRAINS

27 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

28 INTERPLANT PIPING

29 AREA ILLUMINATION

30 INTERPLANT CABLING

31 HYDROTEST OF BOILER # 1 c

32 BOILER # 1 LIGHT-UP c

33 FIRST SYNCHRONISATION OF UNIT # 1 c

34 TRIAL OPERATION AND PG TEST UNIT # 1

35 HYDROTEST OF BOILER # 2 c

36 BOILER # 2 LIGHT-UP c

37 FIRST SYNCHRONISATION OF UNIT # 2 c

38 TRIAL OPERATION AND PG TEST UNIT # 2

313
 13. Benefit-Cost Analysis

13.1 Introduction

The feasibility is a process of checking technical feasibility, economic viability, social

accountability and environmental sustainability of a project. The cost-benefit analysis (CBA)
is usually carried out to examine the project feasibility and is widely used for financial and
economic appraisal tool of a project. It is particularly useful when a choice has to be made out
of several alternatives and when the project involves a stream of benefits and costs over time.
Other issues like achieving national goal, reducing regional imbalance, national strategic
planning, environmental externalities etc. are also significantly important for the project
feasibility studies.
In the power sector, CBA is used as an essential tool for the policy formulation and decision
making in multiple aspects like site selection, construction, operation, decommissioning, fuel
quality and selling prices. The basic idea here is to evaluate whether the investment in
construction, operational and maintenance costs of the power plant is justified in terms of a
higher electricity production with lower external cost. Cost- Benefit is a standardized tool, but
can take several forms, and is usually complemented with a number of processes. The
process of cost- benefit assessment is estimated on the following process.
Financial and Economic analysis
Benefit Cost Ratio (BCR) – Ratio of the present value (PV) of total incremental benefits over
the PV of total incremental costs
Net Present Value (NPV) – the difference between the PV of total incremental benefits and
the present value of the total incremental costs
Internal Rate of Return (IRR) – The discount rate at which the PV of benefits equals the PV of
costs
The financial analysis has been carried out through using of the financial model.
Environmental and social protection and improvement cost are also integrated in this feasibility
to assess the ultimate BCA ensuring environmental and social protection for making it
acceptable. However, the environmental and social cost and benefit assessment are
attempted to estimate in tangible and intangible forms as presented below.
 Externalities – Potentially to affect the third parties
 Categorize for valuation of the potential affected resources
 Environment, social protection and enhancement cost estimation
 Opportunity cost - Include the value of forgone opportunities
 Benefits of the projects – both for tangible and intangible benefits

13.2 Financial analysis

The client carried out financial analysis for 2x660 MW Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant project
at Kalapara, Patuakhali. The main objective of financial analysis is to determine the
requirements of funds/timing and the expected returns on investment from the points of view
of the various parties involved in the financing the project. The project financial estimation has
been done based on two options in the feasibility study.On the basis of certain assumptions;

315
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

the estimated cost of the project is around USD 2450 Million – USD 2775 Million. Depending
on the source of funding and repayment schedules etc., the annual tariff will be computed in
line with the provisions of the standard PPA terms of BPDB. The summaries of levelised tariff
over 25 years are given in Table-13.1.

Table 13.1: Summary of the tariff

Levelised Tariff (25
Case Coal Coal Total Tariff Entry Tariff
Years)
No. Jetty Quality
Fixed Variable Labelised 1st Year Cents/Unit
1 No Design 2.641 2.337 4.978 6.48 8.1
2 Yes Design 2.867 2.337 5.204 6.96 8.7
3 No Best 2.641 2.312 4.952 6.46 8.0
4 No Worst 2.642 2.379 5.021 6.53 8.2
Note: all tariffs are in Taka per kWh unless otherwise mentioned (FR, 2016)

13.3 Environmental and social cost – benefit assessment

Environmental and social cost – benefit is related to the externalities of the project. Carrying
out this Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is mandatory for any power plant project in
order to impede the negative externalities9 and promote the benefit of the project. Therefore,
attempts have been made to identify externalities. The importance of externalities are required
for the following aspects
Specification of power stations and related facilities
 Setting of regulations in terms of technology or emissions standards and regulations
based on fiscal incentives (e.g. emissions charges or laws, emissions caps etc.)

 Planning and development of power systems at the state and regional level, taking
account of the environmental costs

13.4 Assessment of the externalities

The approach followed for assuming external costs is illustrated through the ‘impact pathway’
(Table 13.2). The impacts are assessed not just for generation stage but also for the full life
cycle of the implementation process (e.g. Pre, during and post construction), including the
extraction of the fuel, its transportation, transformation into electric energy, disposal of the
waste, and the transport of the electricity. Emissions from a source are traced when they
disperse in the environment, following which the impacts of the dispersed pollutants was
estimated. The dispersion modeling takes account of the distance dispersion of the pollutants
especially SOx, NOx and SPM from the power plant that causes noticeable health impacts,
ecosystem impacts and aesthetic impacts. Finally, these impacts are valued both in tangible
and intangible forms. All the primary, secondary and tertiary impacts are evaluated at the
respective phases of the power plant projects.

9
External costs arise when the actions of one party have impacts on another and the first party does not account for these
impacts. These are normally considered to include the direct and indirect effects of air and water pollution as well as some
consequences of waste disposal, land degradation, forest loss, loss of biodiversity etc.

316
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

Table 13.2: Impacts pathways of the electricity generation

Impact Category Pollutant/Burden Effects
Human health PM10, PM2.5, SOx, NOx, O3 Increasing of health coast, Reduction in life
mortality expectancy
PM10, PM2.5, SOx, NOx, Respiratory problem, heart failure,
Morbidity for the O3, CO hypertension, asthma attacks
living beings Accidental risk Risk of injuries from traffic and work place
accidents
Acid rain deposition, Ageing galvanized steel, limestone, paint,
Detrimental to
combustion particles ,shoot, corrosion, soiling of the building and
building materials
accidents accidental damage
Loss of land, SOx, NOx, Acid Reducing production , Change in yield of
Crops and fisheries deposition wheat, tobacco, rye, sunflower seed
production
Increased expenditure on liming
Noise, visibility, artificial Changing the natural habitats, ecosystems,
Amenity losses
structure tourisms
Land loss, water and air Decreasing the natural resources, Pressure
Ecosystem damage pollution, anthropogenic on other resources, reduces eco-protection,
activities, accidents reducing the services of ecosystem
Emission of CO2 Sea level rise, increasing the intensity and
Global warming magnitude of natural hazards, shifting
regime, salinity intrusion
Land procurement,
employment process, benefit
Migration, production failure, explosion,
Social unrest sharing among the whole
crime or terrorisms, political agitation etc
society, accidents, livelihood
security

13.5 Categorize for valuation of the potentially affected resources

The potential impacts can be categorized depending on different valuation process. The
valuation process is important to determine the cost includes harnessing the potential benefits,
are expressed bellow.
Direct values: These are related to the production and consumption of goods and services
(e.g. primary, secondary) that could be easily traded (so that the value becomes visible)
Example: Land, crops, fish, wage labor, dredging, electricity etc.
Indirect values: These are derived more from the ecological functions of the forest, which
support and protect other economic activities Example: watershed protection, cyclone and
storm surge protection, health, carbon sequestration, dredging spoil management, tourism,
social improvement etc.
Option values: This describes the potential values that can be accrued from both direct and
indirect use of the potential affected areas. Example: Coastal protection of the forests, ground
water resources, benthos communities, soil microbes etc.

317
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

Non-use values: The value derived from the conserving things from for existing satisfaction
and future generations. People may place an implicit value on this without any direct or indirect
use. Example: Heritage, archeological site, spiritual or sacred places etc.
Intrinsic value: The value of living resources in its own right, unrelated to human utilization.
Example: Asiatic elephant, Irrawaddy dolphin etc.
Monetary valuation is generally difficult for ecosystems. A number of effects including neonatal
mortality, morbidity, behavioral effects, neurological disorders, allergies, innovations, life loss
and intra-generational views are the major limitations of the valuation process. Not any single
valuation process could count the total values of the cumulative impacts and benefit from a
power plant. Moreover, valuation of environmental externalities is very difficult considering its
multidimensional aspects like determination of statistical life loss, willingness to pay for
developing countries etc. Therefore, this report has the limitation in valuation of the intangible
variables into monetary terms.

13.6 Measures to control pollution and enhance the benefits

The use of technology and measures are clearly very important as technologies differ in the
emissions generated from the power plant and finally the location of the plant remains a key
factor. Air and water pollutants disperse quite widely and over long period of time, resulting
the risk of damages occurring outside the normally considered range. To avoid any kind of
damages and keep the environment clean as present, a number of modern technologies have
been strictly adopted and multiple measures have been taken care of. This Plant will consist
of ultra-supercritical boiler, ESP,FGD, Advanced LNB, Cooling Tower, provision of SCR, Ash
impoundments, high stack, multi cylinder design condensing type steam turbine directly
coupled with hydrogen cooled generator suitable for indoor installation will be the major
pollution abatement /benefit enhancement measures of this project. Those have been
elaborated in the respective sections of the project description and environment management
plan appended in earlier chapters.

13.7 Cost of the environmental measures

The project covers 915.7 acres of land that is mainly occupied with agricultural land and
smaller homesteads. The process of land procurement has been completed maintaining a
good compensation package. The PAPs have taken it an opportunity to resettle them in
condition which is the main mandate as per WB rehabilitation and resettlement plan.
Advanced technical measures have been adopted to control the pollution from the power plant
and regular monitoring of the ambient environment will be carried out for ensuring a health
environment for the living bodies. A number of management plans will be implemented for
sustainable operation of the project in association with ecosystem and social sustainability.
However, the estimated costs for environmental protection, monitoring, and management
plans will have be included in the project cost for project financing.

The Project Authority should have to decide spending a significant fund for CSER (Corporate
Social and Environmental Responsibility) in order guide social protection as well as regional
social development activities.

318
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

13.8 Opportunity cost

The opportunity cost is the "cost" (as a lost benefit) of a forgone product after making a choice.
It is the sacrifice of benefit related to the second best choice through the use of resources.
Existing use 915.7 acres of land resources for agriculture, fisheries and households and other
purposes are the main alternatives instead of the power plant project. Thus, opportunity costs
are not restricted to monetary or financial costs: the real cost of output forgone, lost time,
pleasure or any other benefit that provides utility should also be considered opportunity costs.
However, the benefit from this land (according to feasibility report) will cover the entire
opportunity cost satisfactorily.

13.9 Benefit of the projects

The benefit of the project has been estimated into tangible and intangible terms. The prime
objective of this power plant project is to ensure reliable supply of electricity and enhance the
energy scenario of the country. This project will add 320 MW electricity to the national grid.
Coal has been selected as fuel in consideration to reduce pressure on the national natural
gases reserve and lowering the production cost of electricity. The project site has been
selected through considering the techno-economic feasibility and all environmental relevant
concern.
In order to capture all relevant benefits associated with electricity generation, the externalities
will be categorized in life cycle subcategories, including construction; fuel acquisition and
transportation; operations and maintenance; and waste and decommissioning. Benefits have
also been organized into three broad categories e.g. environmental, socioeconomic and
national energy security.
Proper monitoring and proposed control measures will ensure a healthy environment around
the project site. Other associated activities, control measures and programs will ensure the
sustainability of the ecosystem and regional social development. The positive externalities or
benefits are pointed out bellow.

National energy security

Each power plant will generate around 98289 GW electricity per year at 85% PLF. The
levelized tariff is USD 4.9-5.2 Tk/kWhr. National energy security externalities include the
potential benefits associated with increasing energy independence in contrast to import direct
electricity or virtual electricity. National economy will be based on human capital and natural
capital which simultaneously will be influenced by the regional economies. Ensuring the supply
of electricity may trigger the regional development directly or indirectly.
Industrial development: Reliable supply of electricity will accelerate the development of
Patuakhali industrial zone as well as associated areas.
Development of irrigation system: At present, the irrigation facility is not well developed in
Bangladesh because of electricity shortage. Supply of sustainable electricity to the national
grid will facilitate increasing irrigation coverage, cropping intensity, more crop production and
agro-based industries significantly.
Quality of life improvement: Availability of power supply will promote accessibility of the mass
population to standard quality of life. Generation of electricity will increase the domestic
household coverage as well as per capita rate of energy consumption. Other accessories

319
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

facilities, cultural values and recreation activities are likely to be enhanced after reliable
electricity supply.

Socio-economic benefits

Socioeconomic externalities associated with the electricity generation include a wide range of
social, cultural, and direct economic impacts. During one or more phases of an electricity
generation life cycle there can be impacts related to view sheds, infrastructural development,
regional tourism, recreational activities, and cultural resources etc. In general, well-established
methodologies exist to measure or estimate the magnitude of these impacts.
Aesthetic resources: The Net impacts are considered since intangible benefits may be derived
from perceived visual improvements (e.g. planned industrial area, green belt development
etc.).
Social development program: The project authority will spend significant amount of money
against CSER (Corporate Social and Environmental Responsibility) fund for regional social
and environmental development activities on the following major headings -
 Construction of roads
 Improvement of water supply and sanitation
 Regional electricity supply
 Establishment and development of educational institutions
 Initiation of educational scholarships
 Improvement of health and Medicare facilities
 Development of cultural and sports facilities
 Skill or capacity build up training program
 Livelihood development
 Improvement of the quality of life style
Infrastructure development: High investment projects like power plant projects generates a
number of secondary benefits. It will be tempting to include as many of them as possible.
Enough secondary benefits calculation will support to accept this project remarkably. In
regional macro-economic investment, a certain development will result in such sectors as
roads, railways and waterways, hotels, health complexes, institutions, industries,
communication and service sector improvement etc. A large project has linkages to the rest
of the economy, buying materials and inputs, paying workers etc. Therefore, national product
continues to increase through this multiplier effect.
Employment opportunity: It is evident that the increasing supply of electricity directly or
indirectly promote the economic productivity. It will be not only for the power plant related
services but also for other industries. Factories, farms, organizations, business house will
create opportunity which will reduce regional unemployment as well as disguised employment.
Health improvement: Development of employment opportunities, quality of life and ambient
environmental monitoring will ultimately improve the health facilities of the project area
remarkably.
Urbanization: Development of new townships, industrial zone, infrastructures, institutions etc.
will promote the project area towards urbanization and improve the facilities of existing urban
areas.

320
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

Institutional development: High investment for a particular development projects will influence
multiple sectors to share the benefit. A number of institutions will be created related to the
project activities over the year. Creation of service sectors will assist the population in
achieving standard quality of life. However, this project will indirectly assist to achieve the
important national goal especially Education for all and quality of health facilities.
Improve communication facilities: Development of existing roads will facilitate the regional
communication systems. Moreover, dredging for coal import will play a crucial role in the
communication system.

Environmental benefits

The proposed project may have sensitivity to environment and thus some measures have
been taken beyond regulatory requirements that are introduced in the EIA and EMP. Those
measures include: corporate social responsibility, green belting around the proposed project
site, social service related facilities etc.
Positive and negative externalities associated with the environment fall into two general
categories. A second category of environmental impact involves benefits and costs associated
with the generation of atmospheric emissions and waste streams released to the natural
environment, particularly during operation of a generation facility. Utilization of pollution
abatement measures and monitoring the ambient environment (e.g. air, water, acoustic) will
keep a pollutant free environment. In order to compensate the negative impacts, some of the
offsetting initiatives will have to be adopted which are describe bellow-
 Ecosystem improvement facilities: The afforestation program, fisheries management
program, dolphin and turtle conservation program etc will mitigate the negative impact
of the project and ensure enhancement of the ecosystem.
 Disaster management program: Structural development and creating awareness
program will enrich the disaster management system in that region.
 Ambient environmental quality: Regular monitoring of air, water and acoustic
environment at specific locations will ensure the quality of the environment.
 Green development: Afforestation, community forestry, buffer zone creation are aimed
at developing a green belt around the projects. Moreover, coastal protection works and
regular monitoring will indirectly reduce the risk of tidal surge inundation.
 Market development: Development of any project invariably increases market facilities,
communities, infrastructure etc. Therefore, enhanced facilities of value chain for the
products, reduction of transportation costs and regional industries and business
development will be significant.
However, this power plant project will generate a productive surge to the industrial, agriculture,
domestic and service sectors. Sufficient supply of energy will assist to fulfill our domestic
demand as well as stir each of the productive sectors to compete in international markets in
order to improve the national growth rate. Otherwise, import of electricity will increase pressure
to the national economy as well as dependency on the imported countries.

13.10 Measures under corporate social and environmental responsibility (CSER)

Corporate Social and Environmental Responsibility (CSER) has become an important part of
corporate obligations reflecting non-financial aspects of an organization’s performance such
as RPCL. These CSER activities have significant implications for a company’s internal and
external stakeholders, including nearby communities, civil society organizations, regulators,

321
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

international financial organizations, NGOs and news media. Local people have the concern
about corporate accountability and the impact of corporate strategies and operations on the
physical, economic, and socio-political environments. Financial analysts often view adverse
public opinion on corporate social performance as a measure of long-term reputational risk to
a company’s market value. Thus, CSER have become a competitive tool in promoting an
organization’s practices and values when compared with those of its peers and competitors.
In connection of the CSR activities as described above, the proposed RPCL-Pyra power plant
project has outlined the following proposals:
 The health facility presently available in the project study area is not adequately
supportive to the present human resources and particularly during implementation of
the proposed project. It needs to expand its extent considering the human resources
for this proposed project. This facility can also be available for the poor people around
the project site and appropriate security measures may be taken for all these facilities
as well;
 Providing sanitation facilities, such as setting up of public toilets at different hot spots
around the Project site particularly most sensitive areas. Management of those toilets
may be based on lease system, so that it remains usable over a long period to a large
number of people;
 Training of local youth to be conducted so that they can, in turn, be employed during
project construction and operation period. Bangladesh is one of the major manpower
supplying countries of the world. But it supplies non-skilled to semi-skilled manpower
particularly in the Middle East and South East Asian countries and earns low foreign
currency compared to the countries which provide skilled manpower. There is a huge
demand of technicians in the power sector. So, there is a scope of developing
manpower in regard to technicians capable to work in power sector which help to earn
more foreign currency. Therefore, this Project can facilitate capacity development of
the local youths through relevant training programs.
 Develop socio-cultural facilities such as mosques, playgrounds and community centers
for the community.
 Capture fisheries conservation plan and promoting culture fisheries in the study area
though training and building up cooperatives
 The irrigation cost per hectare of land is about Taka 10,500.00, if the water is directly
withdrawn from the ground water aquifer. But the use of treated waste water and
cooling water discharge for irrigation purpose will reduce cost significantly.

13.11 Greenbelt Development

To avoid dust particulates and other environmental pollutants i.e. noise from project site a
plantation plan has been developed to implement. The five tier protection system is designed
towards the control of environmental pollution to ensure healthy environment in and around
the project area. The greenbelt will minimize the ambient noise generated from the power
plant as well as help attenuate dusts. In this sense broadleaved, rough barked and tall trees
are in plan to execute the plantation program. Of the five rows, the first row will be with some
medicinal and ornamental plants, and the rest are mixed of medicine, timber and fruiting
species (Figure 13.1)

322
 Benefit – Cost Analysis

20

10

5
Row 1

Tree Height*
Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 5
(m.)
*Scale not in used

Figure 13.1: A typical greenbelt around the proposed Thermal Power Plant (TPP)

323
 14. Public Consultation and Disclosure

14.1 Introduction

Stakeholder consultation is the way to involve the stakeholders (both direct/indirect and/or
primary/secondary) in the project cycle. In preparation and execution of the Environmental
Impact Assessment (EIA) and Resettlement Plan (RP) of a development Project, the Public
and stakeholder consultation and their participation is mandatory.
Public and stakeholder consultation is a part of EIA and RP aimed at involving the Project
stakeholders into the Project development and implementation process. During the
consultation process of the proposed “Power plant”, the Project interventions and their likely
impacts were shared with the Project stakeholders in the formal/informal meetings/discussion
sessions.
In the consultation process, the stakeholders got involved with the Consultants and Project
Proponent, and share their problems, needs and aspirations in a participatory way. In this
process RPCL as the Project Proponent would obtain stakeholders’ views and feedbacks on
the proposed interventions and perceptions on the probable changes likely to be happened in
future within the Project area.

14.2 Approach

Participatory approach was followed for identifying the participants as well as conducting the
consultation meetings/discussion sessions. Initially, the study team consulted with the Project
Proponent for understanding the Project interventions and the potential stakeholders. The key
stakeholders including occupational groups were identified through consultation with local
knowledgeable people and representatives of the local government institutions (LGIs). The
meeting ensured common and equal platform of the participants so that stakeholders can
express their opinion in an enabling environment. The Consultants unfolded the issues and in
return, the participants gave feedback on these issues and in some cases opened two-ways
discussions in the meeting. The consultation process was intended to generate an enabling
participatory environment between the Project Proponent and the potential stakeholders
through the intermediaries of the Consultant.

14.3 Methodology

Identification of stakeholders

Stakeholders include all those who are being affected by policies, decisions or actions within
a particular system. Stakeholders can be groups of people, organizations, institutions and
sometimes even individuals. Stakeholders can be divided into primary and secondary
stakeholder categories.

Primary stakeholders

Primary stakeholders are those people who would be directly benefited or impacted by a
certain project intervention. In the context of the proposed Project, the primary stakeholders
include the people living within the vicinity of the Project area. The primary stakeholders of the

325
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Project include the farmers, fishermen, local business community who would lose their land,
crop and trees.

Secondary stakeholders

This category of stakeholders pertains to those who may not be directly affected but have
interests that could contribute in preparing the project; play a role in implementation of RP at
some stage; or affect decision making on Project aspects. NGOs, government departments
concerned, and line agencies fall under this category.
Secondary stakeholders for this Project include RPCL, LGIs, NGOs, local
knowledgeable/influential persons and general stakeholders.

14.4 Venue, date and time of consultation

Venue, date and time of meeting/discussion was selected in consultation with the
representatives/officials of LGIs, local knowledgeable people, and the Project Proponent. The
venue was selected considering the closeness to the proposed interventions, easy
accessibility to the venue and which is likely to be neutral. Date and time was also finalized in
this way considering availability of the participants, ensuring the maximum participation,
weather and compliance with other arrangement.

Enlisting and Invitation

A comprehensive list of potential stakeholders was prepared through the consultation with
local knowledgeable people. This list was intended to cover all sorts of interest groups,
occupational groups, socially acceptable and knowledgeable people. Using the LGIs channel
and local influential people, necessary invitation was made to the participants and also
communicated by the study team over telephone for ensuring their presence in the meeting.

Consultation Instrument

Checklist: A comprehensive checklist covering all possible issues was prepared through
consultation with the study team. This checklist was used in the meeting/discussion to unveil
peoples’ perception and opinion along with suggestions.
Attendance list: An inventory of the participants was maintained in attendance sheet
containing name and contact number. List of participants is presented in the Appendix -XIV.
Camera: For visualizing the participants, photographs were taken using camera. These
photos are presented in this chapter.

Consultation Process

The EIA study team conducted the meeting/discussion. During consultation meeting, the
following process was followed.
Greetings: At the outset of consultation meeting, the team exchanged greetings with all
participants, welcomed them for attending the meeting and explained the entire design of the
meeting/discussion.
Introduction: The team members introduced themselves to the participants and gave detail
description of the Project, spelled out about the objectives and anticipated outcome of the
meeting/discussion.

326
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Respect to the participants: The study team showed respect to all participants. They
respected not only to the individuals but also to their values, cultural practices and social
structures.
Ensuring peoples’ voice: generally, not all participants can participate equally. In fact, a large
number of participants tend to remain silent in any meeting. However, the study team
encouraged all to participate willingly through explaining the ethics of the study.
Note taking: Study team discussed issues and wrote opinions in notebook carefully giving
equal importance to all issues.
Recapitulation and closing the session: At the end, the study team recapitulated the
session and responded to the quarries. Finally, the facilitator closed the session thanking the
participants.

14.5 Objectives of the Consultation

The main objective of the stakeholder consultation is to involve the stakeholders in the project
cycle and explore stakeholders’ perception and attitude regarding the proposed Project. The
specific objectives were to:
 Ensure peoples’ participation in the proposed Project;
 Share experiences of the participants regarding such project over the years;
 Explore problems of the Project area;
 Understand probable solution of the problems;
 Unfold stakeholder’s attitudes towards the project;
 Unveil the potential negative or positive impacts of the proposed project;
 Outline potential mitigation measures for negative impacts and enhancement
measures for the positive impacts;
 Obtain the demand and aspirations of the stakeholders; and
 Create highest possible advancement from the project.

14.6 Locations of Stakeholder Consultation Meetings

A number of formal and informal consultation meetings/discussions were conducted at

different locations in and around the proposed Project area. The meetings/discussions
locations are presented in Table 14.1.

Table 14.1: Different locations of consultation meetings

District (s) Upazila (s) Unions Meeting Place Date

Patuakhali Kalapara Dhankhali South Dhankhali 26/06/2016
Patuakhali Kalapara Dhankhali Londa 28/06/2016

14.7 People’s perceptions on Project problems and suggested measures

The Consultants have discussed with the participants about the proposed Project
interventions and the process of peoples’ participation in preparing the EIA and RP. The
people of the Project area have already learned about the proposed Project from the officials

327
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

of RPCL and Consultants who frequently visited the Project area. The people of the Project
area are aware of probable impacts of the Project.
Local people identified some problems in the consultation meeting. Major problems likely to
be happened are:
 Number of farmers will lose agricultural production land;
 The Power plant may damage the agricultural lands permanently;
 A number of people will be venerable due to land acquisition;
 Some peoples occupation may be change; and
 Number of households will be disturbed during Project implementation.
The local people also expressed concern that it may be difficult to cultivate crop close to the
power plant area. It also may create problems for cattle rearing throughout the year.

14.8 Feedbacks on consultations

The stakeholders identified the prediction as well as problems of the Project and
recommended solutions as per their perceptions. The recommendations were duly recorded
in the meeting, and documented in the EIA and RP. The concerns, issues, and
recommendations are presented in various tables (Table 7.2 to Table 7.4) below.
During the consultations, the stakeholders perceived the overall benefit and adverse impacts
of the Project. Table 14.2 presents the perceived outcomes of the proposed Project as
discussed in the meetings/discussions.

Table 14.2: Perceived outcomes of the Project

Issues Observations by the participants

Benefits of  Generating electricity and added to national grid
the Project  Ensure continual electricity supply with full voltage;
 Setting up new industrial area along with heavy and medium industry using the
generated power;
 Creating probability to grow up commercial;
 Deep sea port will be promoted more efficiently
 Communication (roadway and waterway) facility may be developed
Adverse  Local people will lose their lands;
impacts of the  The number of jobless families (land based) will increase due to the land
Project acquisition;
 Affected people will lose their work, wages and employment which will have an
impact on income and livelihood;
 Sound and air pollution will increase during construction of the Power Plant;
 Cropped land, crops and perennials will be lost due to the establishment of
Power Plant.

The general issues and concerns that were discussed in the consultation meetings are
presented in Table 14.3. The stakeholders opined that, the selection of area for the Project
interventions should be done properly through intensive surveys in the field along with
necessary consultation with the local community. The effect of the land acquisition on asset
and income of the communities as perceived by the community are given below in the table.

328
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Table 14.3: Impacts of land acquisition as perceived by the stakeholders

Issues Observations made at the stakeholders meetings/discussions

Project area  The Project implementers should consider avoidance of settlement, local
(Power plant) establishments, crops and other assets as much as possible;
 Consider barren agriculture field/fallow land for Power Plant;
Effect of the  Some affected person (AP) will lose their land , crops
land  Project affected people will lose their livelihood
acquisition on
 As a result of land acquisition, agriculture/fish production/income will be
asset
reduced to some extent.
Effect of the  Acquisition of agricultural land will reduce the current scope of employment;
land  The APs would lose their jobs, income and wages to some extent;
acquisition
 Temporary loss of jobs/work will hamper income sources to some extent from
on work
agricultural crop/labor wage;
/source of
income  Disturbance of income sources will cause insecurity of food, accommodation,
education facilities etc. for some of the APs.
 Day laborers/landless people will lose work; therefore, livelihoods

The opinion on compensation issues e.g. type and form of compensation; mechanism and
modalities of compensation payment including suggestions offered by the people are given in
Table 14.4.

Table 14.4: Issues and concerns regarding compensation

Issues Concerns regarding compensation and suggestions

Compensation  Real land owners and sharecroppers should be identified through proper
against loss survey;
 APs should be provided replacement value of land and other assets according
to the current market price considering the land value of the external area of
the project;
 Loss of standing crop, trees, ponds etc. should be compensated at market
price;
 Transparent and hassle-free compensation payment mechanism is expected
by the APs;
 At a time the compensation for land has to be paid in full to the poor APs;
 The payment of compensation should be accomplished without any
harassment.
Compensation  The needs of women and vulnerable groups (VGs) should be identified
for vulnerable properly and special attention should be given to them;
population  Employment and income of subsistence to improve VGs’ status/livelihoods;
 Potential VG members should be engaged as unskilled laborers during the
construction period;
 Provision should be kept for social and economic development support,
 Alternative assistance should be given to affected small/marginal/tenant
farmers so that they can become resilient.
 Creating income generating opportunities for the vulnerable population;
Mechanism of  A neutral monitoring agency should be engaged for monitoring the
compensation compensation activities;
 Compensation money should be given to the APs in the presence of LGIs;

329
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Issues Concerns regarding compensation and suggestions

 External monitoring agency should be engaged for monitoring the
compensation activities to be conducted by INGOs;
 Payment of compensation by bank check or by deposit into the bank account
may be introduced to reduce immediate opportunities of extortion;
 The grievance redress committee should play a proper role in determining the
ownership of land.

14.9 Summary of Consultation Output

Based on the discussions at the consultation meetings, the Project stakeholders have
identified probable losses, potential impacts and mode of compensation payment for the
affected households (AHs). It was explained clearly at the meetings that land for land as an
alternative was not an option in this Project; however, adequate compensation will be paid
against the losses. The following summary (Table 14.5) findings of the consultation
meetings/discussions would help the Project Proponent in carrying out the RP properly:

Table 14.5: Summary findings from the consultation meeting/discussion

Issues Problems Suggested measures

Impact on  Agricultural land will be reduced;  Avoid agricultural land for
agriculture  Cropped land will be lost; acquisition;
 Barren/fallow land should be
selected for power plant;
Impact on  According to the opinion of the participants, the
Fisheries
river Andharmanik has declared as Hilsa
sanctuary by government and plays an important
role in national capture fisheries. The Rabnabad
channel is one of the significant spawning of  Effluent should be released
Deshi Pangus, Prawn and Shrimp. These Prawn in the open environment
and Shrimp PL are harvested from the Rabnabad through proper drainage
channel during February to July by fine mesh system with due treatment
nets and sell out to the prawn and shrimp farmers complying with national and
of Khulna, Jeshore, and Satkhira. international standards, so
 Today, there were lots of fishermen including that habitat quality remain
boat dwelling fishermen fishing in the river and congenial for the
linked water bodies. However, their numbers are inhabitants.
gradually reduced.  Rain water can be
 Release of untreated effluent may hamper the harvested during rainy
local aquatic habitat quality and the Pangus season and would be used
fingerling, Prawn and Shrimp PL availability as in the dry season based on
well. Overfishing, by fine mesh nets the project situations and
(unconventional), also lead to the death of many other dependent issues.
fingerlings and fish species.
 In the coming years when more power plants
shall come under operation, the amount of
effluent will be increased manifold. As such there
would be a huge possibility of deterioration of
water quality and thus the habitat quality as well.
 Extraction of river water may decrease the river
Water Availability in the dry season and thus
capture fish production may be declined.

330
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Issues Problems Suggested measures

Ecological  Terrestrial vegetation will be demolished due to  Limit vegetation loss during
impact site clearing, stockpiling of construction material clearing sites for land
and labor shed development; development, stockpiling of
 Waders both resident and migratory will impacts construction materials and
negatively during construction and operation labor shed development;
phases;  Avoid waders’ feeding
 The benthos of water ways where dredging is ground during construction
designated will be destroyed totally. and operation period;
 Implement construction
works segment-wise to
minimize negative impacts
to benthic community.
Socio-  Farmer can’t buy agricultural land;  Distribute Khas land to the
economic  Lack of employment opportunity due to impact on APs of small/marginal
impact agriculture sector farmers;
 Give proper compensation
to the land losers;
 Avoid the homestead areas;
 Local people should be
engaged in the construction
activities, thus employing
them;
 Compensating the affected
people who would be losing
their lands

14.10 Disclosure of the EIA study

The Center for Environmental and Geographic Information Services (CEGIS) organized a
public disclosure meeting for exposure of the proposed “Kalapara 1320 MW coal based power
plant Project” at the Kalapara Upazila Parishad conference room on August 18, 2016.

Approaches of the Public Disclosure Meeting

The main purpose of the PDM was to disclose the findings of EIA study to the key stakeholders
and take suggestions from them. To serve that purpose it was mandatory to gather key
stakeholders at a certain venue (Upazila Parishad conference room). To make the meeting
successful and to ensure maximum participation, an advertisement was published in the local
daily newspaper, invitation card was distributed to the stakeholders, postering at the public
places. During the disclosure meeting, leaflets were distributed among the participants for
awaring to the PAPs about the power plant. Moreover, the program has been recorded for
future reference. The list of the participants and few photos of the disclosure meeting are
presented in Table – 14.7 and Photo – 14.3.

331
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Note: Advertisement to the local news paper

332
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Note: Invitation cards were distributed to the stakeholders including the local PAPs

333
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

334
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Note: Leaflet to the PAPs at a glace of the Proposed Power Plant

335
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Discussion of the meeting

The Chief Guest of the Public Disclosure Meeting was Abdul Motaleb Talukder, Chairman,
and Kalapara Upazlia Parishad. The program was presided over by A.B.M Sadikur Rahman.
Upazila Nirbahi Officer (UNO) of Kalapara Upazila. Different government officials, Union
Parishad (UP) Chairmen of different unions, NGO representatives, Journalists, political leader,
freedom fighter, UP members, farmers and fishermen from the study area were present in the
meeting. Mr. Faisal Ahmed, Junior Specialist, CEGIS, started the meeting with an introductory
speech. Mr. Pronab Kumar Halder, Junior Specialist, CEGIS, made a power point presentation
of the key report of the project.
Following the presentation, all the participants took part in an open discussion. They made
various types of comments after the presentation of Mr. Pronab Kumar Halder. A glimse ofthe
people’s opinions and queries shared in the open discussion are given below:
Mr. Abdul Motaleb Talukder, Chairman, Kalapara Upazlia Parishad
 It is good to hear that the power plant will be established in Patuakhali. The proposed
power plant can accelerate the development of the area and benefit the local people.
 There is a disagreement about who be affected by the construction of the power plant
at Dhankhali union.
 It is not apparent whether the matter has been discussed with local people and how
will the existing homesteads and agricultural lands be affected during project
implementation?
 There should be a written agreement about compensation method among land owner,
implementing authority and Deputy Commissioner.
 Alternative location can be chosen for the establishment of proposed power plant.
A.B.M Sadikur Rahman. Upazila Nirbahi Officer (UNO) of Kalapara Upazila
 Implementation of the project will be supportive to improve the overall socio economic
condition of the study area.
 A Land Acquisition section has been activated at the Dhankhali Union parishad due to
reduce the sufferings of the land owners and make the compensation process easier.
Abdul Motaleb Talukder, Chairman, Kalapara Upazlia Parishad
 NWPGCL authority has not compensated and rehabilited to the affected people yet
 Is it possible to purchase land for resettlement with the amount of money given as
compensation?
 Let us know about the negative environmental impacts of a coal based power plant
 The power plant may be relocated to the Char areas like Char Rangabali and
Gongarchar
 What will be the price of proposed land? Will it be possible to purchase land at the
current price?
 Although the local people welcome the idea of power plant, it must be ensured that
poor affected families are compensated for land acquisition.
Md. Mustafa Kamal, Vice Chairman, Upazila Parishad, Kalapara, Patuakhali
Implementing authority should consider the other unions for this project but what measures
have been taken for resettlement of the people of the project area?

Concluding Remarks

The answers to all questions were given by Mr. Mr. Selim Bhuiya, Executive Director, RPCL
following the open discussion session. Then the chief guest Abdul Motaleb Talukder,
Chairman, Kalapara Upazlia Parishad expressed his opinion and showed his positive attitude

336
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

towards the project. Then the president of this assembly A.B.M Sadikur Rahman. Upazila
Nirbahi Officer (UNO) of Kalapara Upazila concluded the PDM by thanking all the participants.
Including the local PAPs (Project Affected Peoples) invitation cards were also distributed to
the above key stakeholders

14.11 Grievance Redress

Grievance is an issue, concern, problem, or claim that an individual or community group wants
to be addressed and resolved by the Project Authority. The fundamental objectives of the
Grievance Redress Mechanism (GRM), implemented through the Grievance Redress
Committees (GRC) serving as a para-legal body, are to resolve any resettlement-related
grievances locally in consultation with the aggrieved party to facilitate smooth implementation
of the social and environmental action plans.

Guideline to Redress Grievances

The Project Proponent would establish a procedure to deal with and resolve any queries as
well as address complaints and grievances about any irregularities. In this regard, a policy
and/or guideline and grievance redress mechanism (GRM)will be prepared. Grievance
Redress Committees (GRC) will be formed to receive and resolve complaints as well as
grievances from aggrieved persons from the local stakeholders including the Project-affected
persons.

Composition of Local GRC

The Grievance Redress Committee (GRC) will be established locally at Project sites and
centrally at the Project level to receive as well as settle grievances from the affected persons
and other local stakeholders. Two type of GRC will be established such as union/municipal
level (LGRC), the first tier, and Project GRC at the central level (PGRC), the second-tier.The
local level GRC will be constituted with representation of the local UP Chairman and affected
people ensuring women’s representation. The Project-level GRC will be constituted with
representation from the Project Management Unit (PMU) and one independent person from
the civil society having knowledge about land acquisition law of Bangladesh and involuntary
resettlement.

Grievance Resolution Process

The implementing agency will keep a close liaison with the affected people and discuss any
type of issues, observation, complaints at focus group meetings on a weekly or fortnightly
basis. Most of the issues will hopefully be settled in the focus group meeting but some issues
requiring formal hearing and resolution will be brought to the Grievance Redress Committee
(GRC) for resolution in form of a formal complaint. All complaints will have to be received at
the local (Union) level GRC (LGRC) and resolved within a certain period as per circular of the
MPEMR (gazette notification). The GRC will request the aggrieved person to apply to the
Deputy Commissioner (DC) for resolution or the GRC may refer such issues to the DC office
for consideration. All cases will be heard at LGRC within four weeks from the date of receiving
the complaints.
If the resolution attempt at the local level fails, the LGRC will refer the complaint with the
minutes of the hearings to the ProjectGrievance Redress Committee (PGRC). In case of
failure at PGRC, the complaint with the minutes of the hearings of PGRC will be sent to the

337
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Project Director at PMU for further review. The Project Director will assign the Environment
and Social Development Unit (ESDU) under the PMU to review the grievance cases and to
assist the Project Director in making decision. The cases are to be resolved at PGRC within
five weeks from the date of receiving the file from the LGRC. If a decision at this level is found
unacceptable by the aggrieved person(s), he/she may go to court for verdict. Aggrieved
persons are always allowed to go to court of law for settlement of any unresolved issues.

14.12 Participant List

The total numbers of meeting/discussion participants were 41 (Forty-one). The name of the
participants of different meetings, and address including cell phone number are provided in
the Table -14.6 below. Deatial name and address of the participants are presented in
Appendix-XIV.

Table 14.6: Participants list of the public consultation meetings and FGDs

Source: PCM and KII at field, CEGIS, 2016

338
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Photo 14.1: Stakeholders Consultation Meeting

Photo 14.2: Consultation Meeting at SourthDhansagor and Londa

339
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Table 14.7: Participants list of the public disclosure meeting

340
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

341
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

342
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

343
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

344
 Public Consultation and Disclosure

Photo 14.3: Public Disclosure Meeting at Kalapara Upazila Parishad

345
 15. Conclusion and Recommendation

Following conclusions are being made after the comprehensive study with detail investigation.
Based on the recommendation of PSMP 2010 for diversification of fuel for power generation
and to achieve the target of 40,000 MW by 2010, the Rural Power Company Limited (RPCL)
has planned to construct a 2x660 MW coal based ultra-supercritical power plant at Nishanbaria,
Londa and Dhankhali Mouza, Dhankhali Union, Kalapara Upazila, Patuakhali district.
With the purpose of obtaining Environmental Clearance Certificate from Department of
Environment under Environment Conservation Act, 1995, RPCL entrusted CEGIS the
responsibility of Environmental Impact Assessment study.
The scope of this report is to present the Environmental Impact Assessment study. The study
has been carried out following the Environmental Impact Assessment Guideline of DoE and
other international bodies that includes multidisciplinary tools and techniques of Physical, Water
resources, Agriculture, Land and soil, Fisheries, Ecology and Socio-economic surveys and
investigation. Participation of local people was ensured through PCM and discloser approach.
Therefore, it is a complete participatory study.
RPCL has selected the construction site through a comparative study of four pre-selected sites
of proponent. They are in Upazila Banskhali, in Magnama, Upazila –Pekua, in Upazila Zajira, in
Kalapara Upazila, The project area has been reconciled optimizing the minimum land
requirement ensuring minimum displacement of local people. The selected area is 915.7acres
that shall displace 121 households.
The proposed coal based thermal power plant will have two units (2x660 MW) of ultra-
supercritical pulverized coal fired boilers. Besides, it also includes residential and social facilities,
water treatment plant, sub-station, coal handling system and coal silo, ash handling and
disposal facilities, and switchyard including substation. The project design and technology to be
used will be reconciled with the DoE standard. In order to fulfill objectives, the existing
environmental and socio-economic condition, detail assessment was made to prepare
environmental and socioeconomic baseline condition.
Attempts were made to assess all the predicted environmental and social impacts with
evaluating the nature, temporal and spatial extent, reversibility and livelihood of the predicted
impacts. Finally, the predicted impacts were summarized in a qualitative scale of consequence.
The assessment includes impacts on physical setting, impacts on air quality, impacts on water
resources, impacts on land and agricultural resources, impacts on fisheries, impacts on
ecosystem resources, and impacts on socio-economic environment. Displacement of 121
number of household for land acquisition, acquisition of agricultural land, emission of gaseous
pollutants within the standard limit are the key predicted impacts.
Acquisition of agricultural land and some homestead settlements are the key impacts during
pre-construction phase that requires proper compensation, resettlement and rehabilitation.
Negative impact during construction phase includes air and noise pollution and disturbance to
society due to increase of noise level. On the contrary, the construction works will create
employment opportunity and better livelihood to local people.
The proposed project has been planned with compliance to ECR, 1997. The stack height shall
be 275 m as per the rule. The emission rate for Particulate Matter (PM2.5 2gm/Sec, PM10
28.3gm/sec), SO2 (242.16g/s) and NOX (618 g/s) shall satisfy the emission standards. The

347
 Conclusion and Recommendation

dispersion model (CALFFUF) estimates that the annual average ground level concentration
cumulatively for SO2, PM2.5 and PM10 would be 4.66 µg/m3 , 4.34 µg/m3 and 32.8 µg/m3
respectively. The resultant concentration in the air satisfy MoEF’s standard and it would not be
significant to cause air pollution.
It is not very likely that the long term ground level concentration of the SOx, NOx, SPM will
increase during operational phase of the thermal power plant as the pollutant concentration in
emission is very low and depression and cyclone is very regular phenomenon in this region.
Unstable atmosphere will dilute the possibility of acid rain.
The plant adopts closed cycle cooling system. It has been accounted that power plants will
intake about 5117 m3/hr in total and discharge about 2573 m3/hr after treatment. Hence, no
thermal plume shall be discharged to the river. The project has been planned to provided with
an integrated water management including central effluent treatment plant, recycling and reuse
of water, sludge and slurry disposal system, etc. No waste water shall be discharged to river
without satisfying MoEF’s Standard (ECR 1997). Hence, there may not be any major impact on
surface water quality. The required water can easily be taken from Rabnabad channel. This will
not causes any significant impact on aquatic flora and fauna. There is no anticipated significant
impact on ground water resources during plant operation as the domestic and other activities
will be fulfilled from the supply of Rabnabad channel water after treatment.
Impact on ecosystem will also be minimum due to adoption of different pollution abatement
measures. No thermal plume shall be discharged to the river which is the major issue in case
of any thermal power plant. Ash collection and management system comprise of Electrostatic
Precipitator (ESP) that have 99.99% efficiency to arrest fly ash. Hence, ash deposition on the
surrounding ecosystem habitat and components may be minor. Nevertheless, there may be risk
of accidental release of ash particles, chemical and fire explosion for which the safety measure
and hazard management plan have been prescribed in the hazard and risk assessment sections.
With the purpose of identifying environmental concern needed to consider during planning and
designing of the plant, hazard and risk assessment has also been carried out in the scope of
EIA. The risk of potential hazards includes mechanical, electrical, chemical, fire and explosion,
and risk of failure mode. The assessment has been made with identifications of specific safety
measures. Besides, occupational health and safety assessment has been carried out with
extensive safety plan. At the end a hazard management plan including Fire safety, Explosion
safety, Electrocution safety, Health safety, Hazardous material management plan with
emergency preparedness have been established. The study also recommends setting up of a
team for safety monitoring and emergency preparedness.
The proposed coal based power generation will reduce the dependency of power generation on
our limiting natural gas reserve. The proposed project will create enormous potentiality of
economic and social development of the region. The present electricity crisis and rising
electricity demand urge installation of new power plant. It will offer large number of job
opportunity during its life time where the local people will get priority. The potential benefits of
the project will compensate the negative impact if the prescribed EMP were implemented and
compensation were paid to the affected person.
Recommendations
Finally, the following recommendations are made on the basis of IEE and EIA study that should
be considered for achieving the goal of optimum minimum environmental impact and optimum
benefits:

348
 Conclusion and Recommendation

 Proper Resettlement and Rehabilitation plan is necessary for proper compensation to

Project Affected People
 People (not owner) dependent on the land to be acquired should also be compensated
and created scope for alternative livelihoods
 Findings and suggestion of EIA study in project planning, design and operation should
be considered and implement with strong monitoring
 All activities (pre-construction, construction and post-construction stage) should be
implemented according to EMP
 Environmental Management Plan and, Hazard and Safety Management Plan should be
implement at every suggested steps of plant construction and operation
 Establishing Institutional arrangement with proper logistic and training for Environment,
Health and Safety in Project Management Unit during pre-construction, construction and
operation phases of the project
 Strong environmental compliance monitoring activities to be ensured during pre-
construction, construction and operation phases of the project
 The Plant should be operated ensuring all pollution abatement measures e.g. ESP,
FGD, SCR, De-NOx burner, Effluent Treatment Plant, etc all are in order.
 The project will follow the ISO-14001 and OHAS-18001 standers
The plant should be operated ensuring all pollution abatement measures e.g. ESP, FGD, SCR
(if required), De-NOx burner, effluent treatment plant, etc are in order and regular monitoring
has to be done to evaluate.

349
 References

Alam et. Al.1990. Geological Map of Bangladesh, Geological Survey of Bangladesh, Dhaka,
Bangladesh
Alam, M., 2003. Bangladesh Country Case Study, National Adaptation Programme of Action
(NAPA) Workshop, 9-11 September 2003, Bhutan
BARC (Bangladesh Agricultural Research Council). 2012. Fertilizer Recommendation Guide,
Bangladesh Agricultural Research Council, Farmgate, Dhaka.
BARI (Bangladesh Agriculture Research Institute), 2011-12. Hand Book of Agricultural
Technologies, Joydevpur, Gazipur, Gazipur.
Brammer, 2012.The Physical Geography of Bangladesh, The University Press Ltd., Dhaka,
Bangladesh
BRRI (Bangladesh Rice Research Institute), 2011, AdhunikDhanerChash, Joydevpur, Gazipur,
Gazipur.
CEIP, 2012, Feasibility Report, Coastal Embankment and Improvement Project (CEIP),
Bangladesh Water Development Board (BWDB), Dhaka, Bangladesh
Energy & Power 2017, “REB Eyes Straight on Finilsh Line” Editorial, News & Commercial Room
509, Eastern Trade Center 56 Inner Circular Road (VIP Road) Naya Paltan. GPO
Box : 677 Dhaka-1000, Bangladesh
FAO/UNDP,1988. Land Resources Appraisal of Bangladesh for Agricultural Development
(Report-2), “Agro-ecological Regions of Bangladesh”, Prepared by Food and
Agricultural Organization ( FAO), United Nations.
Feasibility Study (Preliminary), 2014, SS 2x660MW Power Plant Bangladesh, SEPCOIII Electric
Power Construction Corporation
Fork Tail Oriental Bird Club 2011, Seasonal occurrence and site use by shorebirds at Sonadia
Island, Cox’s Bazar, Bangladesh, UK, http://www.orientalbirdclub.org/ [Accessed
7.7.2012]
FRSS, 2011-12. Fisheries Resources Survey System, Department of Fisheries (DoF), 2011-12.
Hebara S., and Hasan M. E., 2008. “Developing a functional zoning system for Sonadia Island
ECA” Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project BGD/99/G31,
UNDP & DoE
Hussain and Abdullah 2001, Geological Setting of The Areas of Arsenic Safe Aquifers, Interim
Report No-1, MLGRDC, Local Government Division Ground Water Task Force
IOSEA Marine Turtle MoU 2007. “MarineLife Alliance's Sea Turtle Campaign in
Bangladesh“Bangkok, Thailand,
http://www.ioseaturtles.org/pom_detail.php?id=62 [Accessed 7.7.2012]
Islam, M.S. and Hoque, A., 1999. Application of remote sensing technique to study the land
use changes of Maheshkhali Island in Bangladesh, Journal of Remote Sensing
and Environment
IUCN-Bangladesh, 2015. Red List of Bangladesh: A brief on Assessment Result 2015, IUCN-
International Union for Conservation of Nature , Bangladesh Country Office,
Dhaka. Bangladesh. Pp. 24.
JICA Study Report, 2013; EIA Report on Construction of Matarbari 600X2 MW Coal Fired Power
Plant and Associated Facilities (Volume 1st)

351
 References

KOVAÈEVIÆ T., et al. (undated), “Environmental Impacts Of Coal Thermal Power Plants,
Faculty of Electrical Engineering and Computing”, Zagreb, Croatia
http://faculty.mu.edu.sa/public/uploads/1338801954.8882croatiac.pdf
\[Accessed 7.7.2012]
Mannan A., 2006. “Plant Biodiversity Management at Sonadia Island ECA” Coastal & Wetland
Biodiversity Management Project Cox’s Bazar Site Office, BGD/99/G-31,
UNDP/ZEF/DOE
MoEF 2017, “Draft Environmental Conservation Rule” MoEF, GoB
MoEF 1997, “Environmental Conservation Rule” MoEF, GoBMoEF 2004. National Biodiversity
Strategy and Action Plan for Bangladesh, MoEF, GoB
Nishat, A., Huq, S. M. I., Barua, S. P., Khan, A. H. M. and Moniruzzaman, A. S. eds. 2002. Bio-
ecological Zones of Bangladesh. Dhaka: IUCN Bangladesh Country Office,
Bangladesh, Dhaka. 141 pp
NPI (National Pollution Inventory) 1999, Emission Estimation Technique Manual for Fossil Fuel
Electric Power Generation, Environment of Australia
Pacific Consultant International 2009, Techno-economic feasibility study of a deep sea port in
Bangladesh, Final Report, June 2009.
Port Proposal Report 2014, SS 2x660MW Power Plant Bangladesh Feasibility Study, CCCC
SECOND HARBOR CONSULTANTS CO. LTD.
Poush and Prattaya 2006, “Participatory Action Plan Development Sonadia Island ECA”,
Coastal and Wetland Biodiversity Management Project: Community Mobilization
at Cox’s Bazar Component- BGD/99/G31, DoE, MOEF
PSMP 2010, Power Division, Ministry of Power, Energy and Mineral Resources Bangladesh
Rashid H. 1991, Geography of Bangladesh, University Press Ltd, Bangladesh; 2nd edition
ISBN: 9840511599, Dhaka, Bangladesh
SADKN 2012, AARC Disaster Management Centre, IIPA Campus, I.P. Estate, Mahatma Gandhi
Road, Delhi, http://www.saarc-sadkn.org/contact.aspx [Accesed 8-6-12]
Sarraz A., Ali M. K., Das D. C., 2015; Seismic Vulnerability Assessment of Existing Building
Shahadat H. M., Chowdhury S.R., and Chowdhury M. A. T., 2007; Integration of Remote
Sensing, GIS and Participatory Approach for Coastal Island Resource Use
Zoning in Bangladesh, Songklanakarin Journal of Social Science and
Humanities 13(3) P: 413-433
Shamsuddoha, M., and Chowdhury, R. K., 2007. Climate Change Impact and Disaster
Vulnerabilities in the Coastal Areas of Bangladesh
SOLARIS (Soil and Land Resources Information System), 2006. SOLARIS Model developed
by Center for Environmental and Geographic Information Services (CEGIS) for
Soil Resource and Development Institute (SRDI)
SRDI (Soil Resource and Development Institute). 1988. Guideline for land and soil resources
use. Soil Resource and Development Institute, Thana Nirdashika, Farmgate,
Dhaka.
Stocks at Chandgaon in Chittagong city, Bangladesh, American Journal of Civil Engineering
Zebec, 2014, “Technical Feasibility of Proposed Jetty for Unloading Coal 1320 MW Coal Fired
Project of S.Alam Group at Gandamara(Chittagong), Bangladesh

352